Cadillac | ESCALADE EXT 2005 | Specifications | Cadillac ESCALADE EXT 2005 Specifications

2005 Cadillac Escalade EXT Owner Manual
Seats and Restraint Systems ........................... 1-1
Front Seats ............................................... 1-2
Rear Seats
............................................... 1-6
Safety Belts
.............................................. 1-8
Child Restraints
....................................... 1-25
Airbag System
......................................... 1-46
Restraint System Check
............................ 1-59
Features and Controls ..................................... 2-1
Keys
........................................................ 2-3
Doors and Locks
....................................... 2-8
Windows ................................................. 2-23
Theft-Deterrent Systems ............................ 2-25
Starting and Operating Your Vehicle
........... 2-27
Mirrors .................................................... 2-39
OnStar® System
...................................... 2-44
HomeLink® Transmitter
............................. 2-46
Storage Areas
......................................... 2-50
Sunroof
.................................................. 2-68
Vehicle Personalization
............................. 2-69
Instrument Panel ............................................. 3-1
Instrument Panel Overview .......................... 3-4
Climate Controls
...................................... 3-23
Warning Lights, Gages, and Indicators
........ 3-29
Driver Information Center (DIC)
.................. 3-46
Audio System(s) ....................................... 3-66
M
Driving Your Vehicle ....................................... 4-1
Your Driving, the Road, and Your Vehicle
..... 4-2
Towing
................................................... 4-50
Service and Appearance Care .......................... 5-1
Service ..................................................... 5-3
Fuel ......................................................... 5-5
Checking Things Under the Hood
............... 5-10
All-Wheel Drive
........................................ 5-45
Rear Axle
............................................... 5-46
Front Axle
............................................... 5-47
Headlamp Aiming ..................................... 5-48
Bulb Replacement
.................................... 5-52
Windshield Wiper Blade Replacement
......... 5-59
Tires
...................................................... 5-60
Appearance Care
..................................... 5-95
Vehicle Identification
............................... 5-104
Electrical System
.................................... 5-105
Capacities and Specifications
................... 5-115
Maintenance Schedule ..................................... 6-1
Maintenance Schedule ................................ 6-2
Customer Assistance and Information .............. 7-1
Customer Assistance and Information
........... 7-2
Reporting Safety Defects ........................... 7-11
Index ................................................................ 1
Canadian Owners
A French language copy of this manual can be obtained
from your dealer or from:
GENERAL MOTORS, GM, the GM Emblem, CADILLAC,
the CADILLAC Crest & Wreath, and the names
ESCALADE and EXT are registered trademarks of
General Motors Corporation.
Helm, Incorporated
P.O. Box 07130
Detroit, MI 48207
How to Use This Manual
This manual includes the latest information at the time
it was printed. We reserve the right to make changes
after that time without notice. For vehicles first sold
in Canada, substitute the name “General Motors
of Canada Limited” for Cadillac Motor Car Division
whenever it appears in this manual.
Many people read the owner manual from beginning
to end when they first receive their new vehicle.
If this is done, it can help you learn about the features
and controls for the vehicle. Pictures and words
work together in the owner manual to explain things.
Keep this manual in the vehicle, so it will be there if
it is ever needed while you are on the road. If the
vehicle is sold, leave this manual in the vehicle.
Index
Litho in U.S.A.
Part No. 05ESCEXT A First Edition
ii
A good place to quickly locate information about
he vehicle is the Index in the back of the manual.
It is an alphabetical list of what is in the manual and
the page number where it can be found.
©
2004 General Motors Corporation. All Rights Reserved.
Safety Warnings and Symbols
There are a number of safety cautions in this book. We
use a box and the word CAUTION to tell about things
that could hurt you if you were to ignore the warning.
You will also find a circle
with a slash through it in
this book. This safety
symbol means “Do Not,”
“Do Not do this” or
“Do Not let this happen.”
{CAUTION:
These mean there is something that could hurt
you or other people.
In the caution area, we tell you what the hazard is.
Then we tell you what to do to help avoid or reduce the
hazard. Please read these cautions. If you do not,
you or others could be hurt.
iii
Vehicle Damage Warnings
Vehicle Symbols
Also, in this manual you will find these notices:
The vehicle has components and labels that use
symbols instead of text. Symbols are shown along with
the text describing the operation or information
relating to a specific component, control, message,
gage, or indicator.
Notice: These mean there is something that could
damage your vehicle.
A notice tells about something that can damage the
vehicle. Many times, this damage would not be covered
by your vehicle’s warranty, and it could be costly. But
the notice will tell what to do to help avoid the damage.
When you read other manuals, you might see CAUTION
and NOTICE warnings in different colors or in different
words.
There are also warning labels on the vehicle. They use
the same words, CAUTION or NOTICE.
iv
If you need help figuring out a specific name of a
component, gage, or indicator, reference the following
topics:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Seats and Restraint Systems in Section 1
Features and Controls in Section 2
Instrument Panel Overview in Section 3
Climate Controls in Section 3
Warning Lights, Gages, and Indicators in Section 3
Audio System(s) in Section 3
Engine Compartment Overview in Section 5
These are some examples of symbols that may be found on the vehicle:
v
✍ NOTES
vi
Section 1
Seats and Restraint Systems
Front Seats ......................................................1-2
Power Seats ..................................................1-2
Power Lumbar ...............................................1-3
Heated Seats .................................................1-3
Reclining Seatbacks ........................................1-4
Head Restraints .............................................1-5
Rear Seats .......................................................1-6
Rear Seat Operation .......................................1-6
Safety Belts .....................................................1-8
Safety Belts: They Are for Everyone .................1-8
Questions and Answers About Safety Belts ......1-12
How to Wear Safety Belts Properly .................1-13
Driver Position ..............................................1-13
Safety Belt Use During Pregnancy ..................1-20
Right Front Passenger Position .......................1-20
Rear Seat Passengers ..................................1-20
Rear Safety Belt Comfort Guides for
Children and Small Adults ..........................1-23
Safety Belt Extender .....................................1-24
Child Restraints .............................................1-25
Older Children ..............................................1-25
Infants and Young Children ............................1-28
Child Restraint Systems .................................1-31
Where to Put the Restraint .............................1-34
Top Strap ....................................................1-35
Top Strap Anchor Location .............................1-37
Lower Anchorages and Top Tethers for
Children (LATCH System) ...........................1-38
Securing a Child Restraint Designed for
the LATCH System ....................................1-40
Securing a Child Restraint in a
Rear Seat Position ....................................1-40
Securing a Child Restraint in the
Right Front Seat Position ............................1-42
Airbag System ...............................................1-46
Where Are the Airbags? ................................1-48
When Should an Airbag Inflate? .....................1-51
What Makes an Airbag Inflate? .......................1-52
How Does an Airbag Restrain? .......................1-52
What Will You See After an
Airbag Inflates? .........................................1-53
Passenger Sensing System ............................1-54
Servicing Your Airbag-Equipped Vehicle ...........1-58
Adding Equipment to Your Airbag-Equipped
Vehicle ....................................................1-58
Restraint System Check ..................................1-59
Checking Your Restraint Systems ...................1-59
Replacing Restraint System Parts
After a Crash ............................................1-60
1-1
Front Seats
Power Seats
Horizontal Control: This control adjusts the seat
cushion.
• Raise or lower the front of the seat by raising or
lowering the forward edge of the control. Raise
or lower the rear of the seat by raising or lowering
the rear edge of the control.
• Move the seat forward or rearward by moving the
whole control toward the front or toward the rear
of the vehicle.
• Lower or raise the entire seat cushion by moving
the whole control up or down.
Vertical Control: This control adjusts the seatback.
Move the reclining front seatback rearward or forward by
moving the control toward the rear or toward the front
of the vehicle. This adjusts the angle of the seatback.
For more information on the reclining seatbacks,
see Reclining Seatbacks on page 1-4.
The power seat controls are located on the outboard
edge of the front seats.
1-2
Your vehicle may have a memory function which allows
seat settings to be saved and recalled. See Memory
Seat on page 2-69 for more information.
Power Lumbar
Your vehicle’s seats may be equipped with power
lumbar.
You can increase or
decrease lumbar support
in an area of the lower
seatback with this control,
located on the outboard
sides of the front seat(s).
To increase support, press and hold the front of the
control. To decrease support, press and hold the rear
of the control. Let go of the control when the lower
seatback reaches the desired level of support.
You can also reshape the side wing area of the lower
seatback for more lateral support.
To increase support, press and hold the top of the
control. To decrease support, press and hold the bottom
of the control. Let go of the control when the lower
seatback reaches the desired level of support.
Your vehicle may have a memory function which allows
seat settings to be saved and recalled. See Memory
Seat on page 2-69 for more information.
Heated Seats
The buttons used to
control this feature are
located on the front doors.
The engine must be
running for the heated seat
feature to work.
To heat the entire seat, press the horizontal button with
the heated seat symbol. Press the button to cycle
through the temperature settings of high, medium and
low and to turn the heated seat off. Indicator lights
will glow to designate the level of heat selected,
three for high, two for medium, and one for low.
1-3
The low setting warms the seatback and cushion until
the seat temperature is near body temperature. The
medium and high settings heat the seatback and seat
cushion to a slightly higher temperature. You will be able
to feel heat in about two minutes.
Reclining Seatbacks
Your vehicle’s front seatbacks have a recline feature
which is described earlier. See Power Seats on
page 1-2.
To heat only the seatback, press the vertical button with
the heated seatback symbol. An indicator light on the
seatback button will glow to designate that only the
seatback is being heated. Additional presses of
the seatback button will cycle through the heat levels for
the seatback only. Press the horizontal button again
to heat the whole seat.
The heated front seats will shut off automatically when
the ignition is turned off.
But don’t have a seatback reclined if your vehicle is
moving.
1-4
Head Restraints
{CAUTION:
Sitting in a reclined position when your vehicle
is in motion can be dangerous. Even if you
buckle up, your safety belts can not do their
job when you are reclined like this.
The shoulder belt can not do its job. In a
crash, you could go into it, receiving neck or
other injuries.
The lap belt can not do its job either. In a
crash the belt could go up over your abdomen.
The belt forces would be there, not at your
pelvic bones. This could cause serious internal
injuries.
For proper protection when the vehicle is in
motion, have the seatback upright. Then sit
well back in the seat and wear your safety belt
properly.
Adjust your head restraint so that the top of the restraint
is closest to the top of your head. This position
reduces the chance of a neck injury in a crash.
Pull straight up on the head restraint to raise it and
push it down to lower it.
1-5
The front head restraints can also be tilted forward in
addition to being slid up or down. To tilt either of
the front head restraints do the following:
Pull the head restraint toward you until you hear a click.
Then let go. The head restraint will stay in this position
unless you pull it forward more until another click is
heard. There are four positions available: initial position,
first click, second click, and third click. After the third
position (three clicks) is reached, pulling the head
restraint farther will release it back to the normal upright
position.
The rear head restraints can be slid up or down just as
the front head restraints, but they do not tilt.
1-6
Rear Seats
Rear Seat Operation
The rear seat is a 60/40 split rear seat that can be
folded to give you more cargo space and access to the
folding midgate. See Midgate on page 2-13 for more
information on operation of the folding midgate.
To fold either side of the seat do the following:
1. Push the rear head restraints all the way down.
2. Pull the seat loop
located where the
seatback and
seat cushion meet.
The seat cushion will
release and allow
you to tilt it toward the
front of the vehicle.
{CAUTION:
If the seatback is not locked, it could move
forward in a sudden stop or crash. That could
cause injury to the person sitting there. Always
press rearward on the seatback to be sure it
is locked.
{CAUTION:
3. Grasp the seatback and pull it toward the front of
the vehicle. Push it down until it is flat. You may
have to move the front seats forward slightly to
do this.
4. Repeat the procedure for the other side.
To return the seats to the normal position, pull the
seatback up and fold the seat cushion down.
A safety belt that is improperly routed, not
properly attached, or twisted will not provide
the protection needed in a crash. The person
wearing the belt could be seriously injured.
After raising the rear seatback, always check
to be sure that the safety belts are properly
routed and attached, and are not twisted.
1-7
Safety Belts
{CAUTION:
Safety Belts: They Are for Everyone
This part of the manual tells you how to use safety
belts properly. It also tells you some things you should
not do with safety belts.
{CAUTION:
Do not let anyone ride where he or she can not
wear a safety belt properly. If you are in a
crash and you are not wearing a safety belt,
your injuries can be much worse. You can hit
things inside the vehicle or be ejected from it.
You can be seriously injured or killed. In the
same crash, you might not be, if you are
buckled up. Always fasten your safety belt,
and check that your passengers’ belts are
fastened properly too.
It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo
area, inside or outside of a vehicle. In a
collision, people riding in these areas are more
likely to be seriously injured or killed. Do not
allow people to ride in any area of your vehicle
that is not equipped with seats and safety
belts. Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a
seat and using a safety belt properly.
Your vehicle has a light
that comes on as a
reminder to buckle up.
See Safety Belt Reminder
Light on page 3-31.
In most states and in all Canadian provinces, the law
says to wear safety belts. Here is why: They work.
1-8
You never know if you will be in a crash. If you do
have a crash, you do not know if it will be a bad one.
A few crashes are mild, and some crashes can be
so serious that even buckled up, a person would not
survive. But most crashes are in between. In many
of them, people who buckle up can survive and
sometimes walk away. Without belts they could have
been badly hurt or killed.
Why Safety Belts Work
When you ride in or on anything, you go as fast as
it goes.
After more than 30 years of safety belts in vehicles,
the facts are clear. In most crashes buckling up
does matter...a lot!
Take the simplest vehicle. Suppose it is just a seat
on wheels.
1-9
Put someone on it.
1-10
Get it up to speed. Then stop the vehicle. The rider
does not stop.
The person keeps going until stopped by something.
In a real vehicle, it could be the windshield...
or the instrument panel...
1-11
Questions and Answers About
Safety Belts
Q: Will I be trapped in the vehicle after an accident
if I am wearing a safety belt?
A: You could be — whether you are wearing a safety
belt or not. But you can unbuckle a safety belt,
even if you are upside down. And your chance of
being conscious during and after an accident,
so you can unbuckle and get out, is much greater if
you are belted.
Q: If my vehicle has airbags, why should I have to
wear safety belts?
or the safety belts!
With safety belts, you slow down as the vehicle does.
You get more time to stop. You stop over more distance,
and your strongest bones take the forces. That is why
safety belts make such good sense.
1-12
A: Airbags are in many vehicles today and will be in
most of them in the future. But they are
supplemental systems only; so they work with
safety belts — not instead of them. Every airbag
system ever offered for sale has required the use of
safety belts. Even if you are in a vehicle that has
airbags, you still have to buckle up to get the most
protection. That is true not only in frontal collisions,
but especially in side and other collisions.
Q: If I am a good driver, and I never drive far from
Driver Position
home, why should I wear safety belts?
A: You may be an excellent driver, but if you are in an
accident — even one that is not your fault — you
and your passengers can be hurt. Being a good
driver does not protect you from things beyond
your control, such as bad drivers.
Most accidents occur within 25 miles (40 km)
of home. And the greatest number of serious
injuries and deaths occur at speeds of less
than 40 mph (65 km/h).
Lap-Shoulder Belt
The driver has a lap-shoulder belt. Here is how to wear
it properly.
1. Close and lock the door.
2. Adjust the seat so you can sit up straight. To see
how, see “Seats” in the Index.
Safety belts are for everyone.
How to Wear Safety Belts Properly
This part is only for people of adult size.
Be aware that there are special things to know about
safety belts and children. And there are different
rules for smaller children and babies. If a child will be
riding in your vehicle, see Older Children on page 1-25
or Infants and Young Children on page 1-28. Follow
those rules for everyone’s protection.
First, you will want to know which restraint systems your
vehicle has.
3. Pick up the latch plate and pull the belt across you.
Do not let it get twisted.
We will start with the driver position.
4. Push the latch plate into the buckle until it clicks.
1-13
Pull up on the latch plate to make sure it is secure.
If the belt is not long enough, see Safety Belt
Extender on page 1-24.
Make sure the release button on the buckle is
positioned so you would be able to unbuckle the
safety belt quickly if you ever had to.
5. To make the lap part tight, pull down on the buckle
end of the belt as you pull up on the shoulder belt.
The lap part of the belt should be worn low and snug on
the hips, just touching the thighs. In a crash, this applies
force to the strong pelvic bones. And you would be less
likely to slide under the lap belt. If you slid under it, the
belt would apply force at your abdomen. This could cause
serious or even fatal injuries. The shoulder belt should go
over the shoulder and across the chest. These parts of
the body are best able to take belt restraining forces.
The safety belt locks if there is a sudden stop or a crash.
1-14
Q: What is wrong with this?
{CAUTION:
You can be seriously hurt if your shoulder
belt is too loose. In a crash, you would move
forward too much, which could increase injury.
The shoulder belt should fit against your body.
A: The shoulder belt is too loose. It will not give nearly
as much protection this way.
1-15
Q: What is wrong with this?
{CAUTION:
You can be seriously injured if your belt is
buckled in the wrong place like this. In a crash,
the belt would go up over your abdomen.
The belt forces would be there, not at the
pelvic bones. This could cause serious internal
injuries. Always buckle your belt into the
buckle nearest you.
A: The belt is buckled in the wrong place.
1-16
Q: What is wrong with this?
{CAUTION:
You can be seriously injured if your belt goes
over an armrest like this. The belt would be
much too high. In a crash, you can slide under
the belt. The belt force would then be applied
at the abdomen, not at the pelvic bones,
and that could cause serious or fatal injuries.
Be sure the belt goes under the armrests.
A: The belt is over an armrest.
1-17
Q: What is wrong with this?
{CAUTION:
You can be seriously injured if you wear the
shoulder belt under your arm. In a crash, your
body would move too far forward, which would
increase the chance of head and neck injury.
Also, the belt would apply too much force to
the ribs, which are not as strong as shoulder
bones. You could also severely injure internal
organs like your liver or spleen.
A: The shoulder belt is worn under the arm. It should
be worn over the shoulder at all times.
1-18
Q: What is wrong with this?
{CAUTION:
You can be seriously injured by a twisted belt.
In a crash, you would not have the full width
of the belt to spread impact forces. If a belt
is twisted, make it straight so it can work
properly, or ask your dealer to fix it.
A: The belt is twisted across the body.
To unlatch the belt, just push the button on the buckle.
The belt should go back out of the way.
1-19
Before you close the door, be sure the belt is out of
the way. If you slam the door on it, you can damage
both the belt and your vehicle.
Safety Belt Use During Pregnancy
Safety belts work for everyone, including pregnant
women. Like all occupants, they are more likely to be
seriously injured if they do not wear safety belts.
The best way to protect the fetus is to protect the
mother. When a safety belt is worn properly, it is more
likely that the fetus will not be hurt in a crash. For
pregnant women, as for anyone, the key to making
safety belts effective is wearing them properly.
Right Front Passenger Position
To learn how to wear the right front passenger’s safety
belt properly, see Driver Position on page 1-13.
The right front passenger’s safety belt works the same
way as the driver’s safety belt — except for one
thing. If you ever pull the shoulder portion of the belt out
all the way, you will engage the child restraint locking
feature which may turn off the passenger’s frontal
airbag. If this happens unintentionally, just let the belt
go back all the way and start again.
Rear Seat Passengers
It is very important for rear seat passengers to buckle
up! Accident statistics show that unbelted people in
the rear seat are hurt more often in crashes than those
who are wearing safety belts.
A pregnant woman should wear a lap-shoulder belt,
and the lap portion should be worn as low as possible,
below the rounding, throughout the pregnancy.
1-20
Rear passengers who are not safety belted can be
thrown out of the vehicle in a crash. And they can strike
others in the vehicle who are wearing safety belts.
Lap-Shoulder Belt
All rear seat positions have lap-shoulder belts. Here is
how to wear a lap-shoulder belt properly.
1. Pick up the latch plate and pull the belt across you.
Do not let it get twisted.
2. Push the latch plate into the buckle until it clicks.
Pull up on the latch plate to make sure it is secure.
When the shoulder belt is pulled out all the way,
it will lock. If it does, let it go back all the way and
start again.
If the belt is not long enough, see Safety Belt
Extender on page 1-24.
Make sure the release button on the buckle is
positioned so you would be able to unbuckle the
safety belt quickly if you ever had to.
3. To make the lap part tight, pull down on the buckle
end of the belt as you pull up on the shoulder part.
1-21
{CAUTION:
You can be seriously hurt if your shoulder
belt is too loose. In a crash, you would move
forward too much, which could increase injury.
The shoulder belt should fit against your body.
The lap part of the belt should be worn low and snug on
the hips, just touching the thighs. In a crash, this applies
force to the strong pelvic bones. And you would be less
likely to slide under the lap belt. If you slid under it, the
belt would apply force at your abdomen. This could cause
serious or even fatal injuries. The shoulder belt should go
over the shoulder and across the chest. These parts of
the body are best able to take belt restraining forces.
The safety belt locks if there is a sudden stop or a crash.
1-22
To unlatch the belt, just push the button on the buckle.
Rear Safety Belt Comfort Guides
for Children and Small Adults
2. Place the guide over the belt and insert the
two edges of the belt into the slots of the guide.
Rear shoulder belt comfort guides will provide added
safety belt comfort for older children who have outgrown
booster seats and for small adults. When installed on
a shoulder belt, the comfort guide better positions
the belt away from the neck and head.
There is one guide for each passenger in the rear seat.
Here is how to install a comfort guide and use the
safety belt:
1. Remove the guide from the storage clip on the
side of the rear seatback.
3. Be sure that the belt is not twisted and it lies flat.
The guide must be on top of the belt.
1-23
Safety Belt Extender
If the vehicle’s safety belt will fasten around you, you
should use it.
But if a safety belt is not long enough, your dealer will
order you an extender. It is free. When you go in to
order it, take the heaviest coat you will wear, so
the extender will be long enough for you. To help avoid
personal injury, do not let someone else use it, and
use it only for the seat it is made to fit. The extender has
been designed for adults. Never use it for securing
child seats. To wear it, just attach it to the regular safety
belt. For more information, see the instruction sheet
that comes with the extender.
4. Buckle, position and release the safety belt as
described in Rear Seat Passengers on page 1-20.
Make sure that the shoulder belt crosses the
shoulder.
To remove and store the comfort guides, squeeze the
belt edges together so that you can take them out of the
guides. Slide the guide onto the storage clip. Be sure
to remove the comfort guide from the belt before folding
the seat.
1-24
Child Restraints
Older Children
Q: What is the proper way to wear safety belts?
A: If possible, an older child should wear a
lap-shoulder belt and get the additional restraint a
shoulder belt can provide. The shoulder belt
should not cross the face or neck. The lap belt
should fit snugly below the hips, just touching the
top of the thighs. It should never be worn over
the abdomen, which could cause severe or even
fatal internal injuries in a crash.
Accident statistics show that children are safer if
they are restrained in the rear seat.
In a crash, children who are not buckled up can
strike other people who are buckled up, or can be
thrown out of the vehicle. Older children need
to use safety belts properly.
Older children who have outgrown booster seats should
wear the vehicle’s safety belts.
If you have the choice, a child should sit in a seat that
has a lap-shoulder belt to get the additional restraint
a shoulder belt can provide.
1-25
Q: What if a child is wearing a lap-shoulder belt,
but the child is so small that the shoulder belt
is very close to the child’s face or neck?
A: If the child is sitting in a rear seat outside position,
{CAUTION:
Never do this.
Here two children are wearing the same belt.
The belt can not properly spread the impact
forces. In a crash, the two children can be
crushed together and seriously injured. A belt
must be used by only one person at a time.
1-26
move the child toward the center of the vehicle. If
the child is sitting in the center position, move
the child toward the safety belt buckle. In either
case, be sure that the shoulder belt still is on
the child’s shoulder, so that in a crash the child’s
upper body would have the restraint that belts
provide. See Rear Safety Belt Comfort Guides for
Children and Small Adults on page 1-23. If the child
is so small that the shoulder belt is still very
close to the child’s face or neck, you might want to
place the child in a seat that has a lap belt, if
your vehicle has one.
{CAUTION:
Never do this.
Here a child is sitting in a seat that has a
lap-shoulder belt, but the shoulder part is
behind the child. If the child wears the belt in
this way, in a crash the child might slide under
the belt. The belt’s force would then be applied
right on the child’s abdomen. That could cause
serious or fatal injuries.
Wherever the child sits, the lap portion of the belt
should be worn low and snug on the hips, just touching
the child’s thighs. This applies belt force to the child’s
pelvic bones in a crash.
1-27
Infants and Young Children
Everyone in a vehicle needs protection! This includes
infants and all other children. Neither the distance
traveled nor the age and size of the traveler changes
the need, for everyone, to use safety restraints. In fact,
the law in every state in the United States and in
every Canadian province says children up to some age
must be restrained while in a vehicle.
Every time infants and young children ride in vehicles,
they should have the protection provided by appropriate
restraints. Young children should not use the vehicle’s
adult safety belts alone, unless there is no other choice.
Instead, they need to use a child restraint.
1-28
{CAUTION:
People should never hold a baby in their arms
while riding in a vehicle. A baby does not
weigh much — until a crash. During a crash a
baby will become so heavy it is not possible
to hold it. For example, in a crash at only
25 mph (40 km/h), a 12 lb (5.5 kg) baby will
suddenly become a 240 lb (110 kg) force on a
person’s arms. A baby should be secured in
an appropriate restraint.
{CAUTION:
Children who are up against, or very close to,
any airbag when it inflates can be seriously
injured or killed. Airbags plus lap-shoulder
belts offer protection for adults and older
children, but not for young children and
infants. Neither the vehicle’s safety belt system
nor its airbag system is designed for them.
Young children and infants need the protection
that a child restraint system can provide.
Q: What are the different types of add-on child
restraints?
A: Add-on child restraints, which are purchased by the
vehicle’s owner, are available in four basic types.
Selection of a particular restraint should take
into consideration not only the child’s weight, height,
and age but also whether or not the restraint will
be compatible with the motor vehicle in which it will
be used.
1-29
For most basic types of child restraints, there are
many different models available. When purchasing
a child restraint, be sure it is designed to be
used in a motor vehicle. If it is, the restraint will
have a label saying that it meets federal motor
vehicle safety standards.
The restraint manufacturer’s instructions that come
with the restraint state the weight and height
limitations for a particular child restraint. In addition,
there are many kinds of restraints available for
children with special needs.
{CAUTION:
Newborn infants need complete support,
including support for the head and neck.
This is necessary because a newborn infant’s
neck is weak and its head weighs so much
compared with the rest of its body. In a crash,
an infant in a rear-facing seat settles into
the restraint, so the crash forces can be
distributed across the strongest part of an
infant’s body, the back and shoulders. Infants
always should be secured in appropriate
infant restraints.
1-30
{CAUTION:
The body structure of a young child is quite
unlike that of an adult or older child, for whom
the safety belts are designed. A young child’s
hip bones are still so small that the vehicle’s
regular safety belt may not remain low on the
hip bones, as it should. Instead, it may settle
up around the child’s abdomen. In a crash, the
belt would apply force on a body area that is
unprotected by any bony structure. This alone
could cause serious or fatal injuries. Young
children always should be secured in
appropriate child restraints.
Child Restraint Systems
An infant car bed (A), a special bed made for use in a
motor vehicle, is an infant restraint system designed
to restrain or position a child on a continuous flat
surface. Make sure that the infant’s head rests toward
the center of the vehicle.
A rear-facing infant seat (B) provides restraint with the
seating surface against the back of the infant. The
harness system holds the infant in place and, in a crash,
acts to keep the infant positioned in the restraint.
1-31
A forward-facing child seat (C-E) provides restraint for
the child’s body with the harness and also sometimes
with surfaces such as T-shaped or shelf-like shields.
1-32
A booster seat (F-G) is a child restraint designed to
improve the fit of the vehicle’s safety belt system. Some
booster seats have a shoulder belt positioner, and
some high-back booster seats have a five-point harness.
A booster seat can also help a child to see out the
window.
Q: How do child restraints work?
A: A child restraint system is any device designed for
use in a motor vehicle to restrain, seat, or position
children. A built-in child restraint system is a
permanent part of the motor vehicle. An add-on
child restraint system is a portable one, which
is purchased by the vehicle’s owner.
For many years, add-on child restraints have used
the adult belt system in the vehicle. To help
reduce the chance of injury, the child also has to be
secured within the restraint. The vehicle’s belt
system secures the add-on child restraint in the
vehicle, and the add-on child restraint’s harness
system holds the child in place within the restraint.
One system, the three-point harness, has straps
that come down over each of the infant’s shoulders
and buckle together at the crotch. The five-point
harness system has two shoulder straps,
two hip straps and a crotch strap. A shield may
take the place of hip straps. A T-shaped shield
has shoulder straps that are attached to a flat
pad which rests low against the child’s body.
A shelf- or armrest-type shield has straps that are
attached to a wide, shelf-like shield that swings
up or to the side.
When choosing a child restraint, be sure the child
restraint is designed to be used in a vehicle. If it is, it
will have a label saying that it meets federal motor
vehicle safety standards.
Then follow the instructions for the restraint. You may
find these instructions on the restraint itself or in a
booklet, or both. These restraints use the belt system or
the LATCH system in your vehicle, but the child also
has to be secured within the restraint to help reduce the
chance of personal injury. When securing an add-on
child restraint, refer to the instructions that come with the
restraint which may be on the restraint itself or in a
booklet, or both, and to this manual. The child restraint
instructions are important, so if they are not available,
obtain a replacement copy from the manufacturer.
1-33
Where to Put the Restraint
Accident statistics show that children are safer if they
are restrained in the rear rather than the front seat.
General Motors recommends that child restraints
be secured in a rear seat, including an infant riding in a
rear-facing infant seat, a child riding in a forward-facing
child seat and an older child riding in a booster seat.
Your vehicle has a rear seat that will accommodate
a rear-facing child restraint. A label on your sun visor
says, “Never put a rear-facing child seat in the
front.” This is because the risk to the rear-facing child
is so great, if the air bag deploys.
{CAUTION:
A child in a rear-facing child restraint can be
seriously injured or killed if the right front
passenger’s airbag inflates. This is because the
back of the rear-facing child restraint would be
very close to the inflating airbag.
Even though the passenger sensing system is
designed to turn off the passenger’s frontal
airbag if the system detects a rear-facing child
restraint, no system is fail-safe, and no one can
guarantee that an airbag will not deploy under
some unusual circumstance, even though it is
turned off. General Motors recommends that
rear-facing child restraints be secured in the
rear seat, even if the airbag is off.
If you need to secure a forward-facing child
restraint in the right front seat, always move the
front passenger seat as far back as it will go.
It is better to secure the child restraint in a
rear seat
1-34
Wherever you install it, be sure to secure the child
restraint properly.
Top Strap
Keep in mind that an unsecured child restraint can
move around in a collision or sudden stop and injure
people in the vehicle. Be sure to properly secure
any child restraint in your vehicle — even when no
child is in it.
Some child restraints have a top strap, or “top tether.”
It can help restrain the child restraint during a collision.
For it to work, a top strap must be properly anchored
to the vehicle. Some top strap-equipped child restraints
are designed for use with or without the top strap
being anchored. Others require the top strap always
to be anchored. Be sure to read and follow the
instructions for your child restraint. If yours requires that
the top strap be anchored, do not use the restraint
unless it is anchored properly.
If the child restraint does not have a top strap, one
can be obtained, in kit form, for many child restraints.
Ask the child restraint manufacturer whether or not
a kit is available.
1-35
{CAUTION:
Each top tether bracket is designed to anchor
only one child restraint. Attaching more than
one child restraint to a single bracket could
cause the anchor to come loose or even break
during a crash. A child or others could be
injured if this happens. To help prevent injury
to people and damage to your vehicle, attach
only one child restraint per bracket.
In Canada, the law requires that forward-facing child
restraints have a top strap, and that the strap be
anchored. In the United States, some child restraints
also have a top strap. If your child restraint has a
top strap, it should be anchored.
Anchor the top strap to one of the following anchor
points. Be sure to use an anchor point located on the
same side of the vehicle as the seating position
where the child restraint will be placed.
Raise the head restraint and route the top strap under
it. See Head Restraints on page 1-5.
Once you have the top strap anchored, you will be
ready to secure the child restraint itself. Tighten the top
strap when and as the child restraint manufacturer’s
instructions say.
1-36
Top Strap Anchor Location
An anchor loop bracket for a top strap is located on the
back of the rear seat frame above the floor for each
rear seating position. In order to get to the brackets, you
will have to fold the rear seatback(s). See Rear Seat
Operation on page 1-6 for information on folding the rear
seatbacks.
Do not secure a child restraint in the right front
passenger’s position if a national or local law requires
that the top strap be anchored, or if the instructions that
come with the child restraint say that the top strap
must be anchored. There is no place to anchor the top
strap in this position.
60/40 Split Rear Seat Folded
1-37
Lower Anchorages and Top Tethers
for Children (LATCH System)
Your vehicle has the LATCH system. You will find
anchors in the center and right side passenger second
row seating positions.
This system, designed to make installation of child
restraints easier, does not use the vehicle’s safety belts.
Instead, it uses vehicle anchors and child restraint
attachments to secure the restraints. Some restraints
also use another vehicle anchor to secure a top
tether strap.
A. Lower Anchorage
B. Lower Anchorage
C. Top Tether
1-38
{CAUTION:
If a LATCH-type child restraint is not attached
to its anchorage points, the restraint will not
be able to protect the child correctly. In a
crash, the child could be seriously injured or
killed. Make sure that a LATCH-type child
restraint is properly installed using the
anchorage points, or use the vehicle’s safety
belts to secure the restraint, following the
instructions that came with that restraint, and
also the instructions in this manual.
A. Lower Anchorage
B. Lower Anchorage
In order to use the LATCH system in your vehicle,
you need a child restraint designed for that system.
To assist you in locating the lower anchors for this
child restraint system, each seating position with the
LATCH system has a visible metal anchorage point in
the seat where the seatback meets the seat cushion.
1-39
Securing a Child Restraint Designed
for the LATCH System
1. Find the LATCH anchorages for the seating
position you want to use, where the bottom of
the seatback meets the back of the seat cushion.
See Lower Anchorages and Top Tethers for
Children (LATCH System) on page 1-38.
2. Put the child restraint on the seat.
3. Attach and tighten the LATCH attachments on the
child restraint to the LATCH anchorages in the
vehicle. The child restraint instructions will show
you how.
4. If the child restraint is forward-facing, attach and
tighten the top tether to the top tether anchorage.
The child restraint instructions will show you
how. Also see Top Strap on page 1-35.
5. Push and pull the child restraint in different
directions to be sure it is secure.
To remove the child restraint, simply unhook the
top tether from the top tether anchorage and then
disconnect the LATCH attachments from the
LATCH anchorages.
1-40
Securing a Child Restraint in a
Rear Seat Position
If your child restraint is equipped with the LATCH
system see Lower Anchorages and Top Tethers for
Children (LATCH System) on page 1-38. See Top Strap
on page 1-35 if the child restraint has one.
If your child restraint does not have the LATCH system,
you will be using the lap-shoulder belt to secure the
child restraint in this position. Be sure to follow the
instructions that came with the child restraint. Secure
the child in the child restraint when and as the
instructions say.
1. Put the child restraint on the seat.
2. Pick up the latch plate, and run the lap and shoulder
portions of the vehicle’s safety belt through or
around the restraint. The child restraint instructions
will show you how.
3. Buckle the belt. Make sure the release button is
positioned so you would be able to unbuckle the
safety belt quickly if you ever had to.
4. Pull the rest of the shoulder belt all the way out of
the retractor to set the lock.
1-41
Securing a Child Restraint in the
Right Front Seat Position
Your vehicle has a right front passenger air bag. A rear
seat is a safer place to secure a forward-facing child
restraint. See Where to Put the Restraint on page 1-34.
5. To tighten the belt, push down on the child restraint,
pull the shoulder portion of the belt to tighten the
lap portion of the belt and feed the shoulder
belt back into the retractor. If you are using a
forward-facing child restraint, you may find it helpful
to use your knee to push down on the child
restraint as you tighten the belt.
6. Push and pull the child restraint in different
directions to be sure it is secure.
To remove the child restraint, just unbuckle the vehicle’s
safety belt and let it go back all the way. The safety
belt will move freely again and be ready to work for an
adult or larger child passenger.
1-42
In addition, your vehicle may have the passenger
sensing system. The passenger sensing system is
designed to turn off the right front passenger’s frontal air
bag when an infant in a rear-facing infant seat or a
small child in a forward-facing child restraint or booster
seat is detected. See Passenger Sensing System
on page 1-54 and Passenger Airbag Status Indicator on
page 3-33 for more information on this including
important safety information.
A label on your sun visor says, “Never put a rear-facing
child seat in the front.” This is because the risk to the
rear-facing child is so great, if the air bag deploys.
{CAUTION:
A child in a rear-facing child restraint can be
seriously injured or killed if the right front
passenger’s airbag inflates. This is because the
back of the rear-facing child restraint would be
very close to the inflating airbag.
Even though the passenger sensing system is
designed to turn off the passenger’s frontal
airbag if the system detects a rear-facing child
restraint, no system is fail-safe, and no one can
guarantee that an airbag will not deploy under
some unusual circumstance, even though it is
turned off. General Motors recommends that
rear-facing child restraints be secured in the
rear seat, even if the airbag is off.
If you need to secure a forward-facing child restraint in
the right front seat position, move the seat as far
back as it will go before securing the forward-facing
child restraint. See Power Seats on page 1-2.
If your child restraint is equipped with the LATCH
system, see Lower Anchorages and Top Tethers for
Children (LATCH System) on page 1-38.
There is no top strap anchor in the right front
passenger’s position. Do not secure a child seat in
this position if a national or local law requires that
the top strap be anchored, or if the instructions that
come with the child restraint say that the top strap
must be anchored. See Top Strap on page 1-35 if
your child restraint has one.
You will be using the lap-shoulder belt to secure the
child restraint in this position. Be sure to follow the
instructions that came with the child restraint. Secure
the child in the child restraint when and as the
instructions say.
1. Your vehicle has a right front passenger’s frontal
air bag. See Passenger Sensing System on
page 1-54. General Motors recommends that
rear-facing child restraints be secured in a rear seat,
even if the air bag is off. If your child restraint is
forward-facing, move the seat as far back as it will
go before securing the child restraint in this
seat. See Power Seats on page 1-2.
When the passenger sensing system has turned off
the right front passenger’s frontal air bag, the off
indicator in the passenger air bag status indicator
should light and stay lit when you turn the ignition
to RUN or START. See Passenger Airbag
Status Indicator on page 3-33.
2. Put the child restraint on the seat.
1-43
3. Pick up the latch plate, and run the lap and shoulder
portions of the vehicle’s safety belt through or
around the restraint. The child restraint instructions
will show you how.
5. Pull the rest of the shoulder belt all the way out of
the retractor to set the lock.
4. Buckle the belt. Make sure the release button is
positioned so you would be able to unbuckle the
safety belt quickly if you ever had to.
1-44
8. If your vehicle has the passenger sensing system
and the air bag is off, the off indicator will be lit and
stay lit in the inside rearview mirror when the key
is turned to RUN or START.
If a child restraint has been installed and the on
indicator is lit, turn the vehicle off. Remove the child
restraint from the vehicle and reinstall the child restraint.
6. To tighten the belt, push down on the child restraint,
pull the shoulder portion of the belt to tighten the
lap portion of the belt and feed the shoulder
belt back into the retractor. If you are using a
forward-facing child restraint, you may find it helpful
to use your knee to push down on the child
restraint as you tighten the belt. You should not be
able to pull more of the belt from the retractor
once the lock has been set.
If after reinstalling the child restraint and restarting
the vehicle, the on indicator is still lit, check to make
sure that the vehicle’s seatback is not pressing the child
restraint into the seat cushion. If this happens, slightly
recline the vehicle’s seatback and adjust the seat
cushion if possible. Also make sure the child restraint is
not trapped under the vehicle head restraint. If this
happens, adjust the head restraint.
If the on indicator is still lit, secure the child in the child
restraint in a rear seat position in the vehicle and
check with your dealer.
To remove the child restraint, just unbuckle the vehicle’s
safety belt and let it go back all the way. The safety
belt will move freely again and be ready to work for an
adult or larger child passenger.
7. Push and pull the child restraint in different
directions to be sure it is secure.
1-45
Airbag System
CAUTION:
Your vehicle has four airbags — a frontal airbag for the
driver, another frontal airbag for the right front
passenger, a side impact airbag for the driver, and
another side impact airbag for the right front passenger.
Frontal airbags are designed to help reduce the risk
of injury from the force of an inflating frontal airbag.
But these airbags must inflate very quickly to do their
job and comply with federal regulations.
Here are the most important things to know about the
airbag system:
{CAUTION:
You can be severely injured or killed in a crash
if you are not wearing your safety belt — even if
you have airbags. Wearing your safety belt
during a crash helps reduce your chance of
hitting things inside the vehicle or being ejected
from it. Airbags are designed to work with
safety belts but do not replace them.
CAUTION:
1-46
(Continued)
(Continued)
Frontal airbags for the driver and right front
passenger are designed to deploy only in
moderate to severe frontal and near frontal
crashes. They are not designed to inflate in
rollover, rear or low-speed frontal crashes, or in
many side crashes. And, for some unrestrained
occupants, frontal airbags may provide less
protection in frontal crashes than more forceful
airbags have provided in the past.
Side impact airbags for the driver and right front
passenger are designed to inflate only in
moderate to severe crashes where something
hits the side of your vehicle. They are not
designed to inflate in frontal, in rollover or in
rear crashes.
Everyone in your vehicle should wear a safety
belt properly — whether or not there is an
airbag for that person.
CAUTION:
{CAUTION:
Both frontal and side impact airbags inflate
with great force, faster than the blink of an eye.
If you are too close to an inflating airbag, as you
would be if you were leaning forward, it could
seriously injure you. Safety belts help keep you
in position for airbag inflation before and during
a crash. Always wear your safety belt, even with
frontal airbags. The driver should sit as far back
as possible while still maintaining control of the
vehicle. Front occupants should not lean on or
sleep against the door.
(Continued)
children and infants. Neither the vehicle’s safety
belt system nor its airbag system is designed
for them. Young children and infants need the
protection that a child restraint system can
provide. Always secure children properly in
your vehicle. To read how, see Older Children
on page 1-25 or Infants and Young Children on
page 1-28.
There is an airbag
readiness light on
the instrument panel
cluster, which shows
the airbag symbol.
{CAUTION:
Anyone who is up against, or very close to, any
airbag when it inflates can be seriously injured
or killed. Airbags plus lap-shoulder belts offer
the best protection for adults, but not for young
CAUTION:
The system checks the airbag electrical system for
malfunctions. The light tells you if there is an electrical
problem. See Airbag Readiness Light on page 3-32
for more information.
(Continued)
1-47
Where Are the Airbags?
The right front passenger’s frontal airbag is in the
instrument panel on the passenger’s side.
The driver’s frontal airbag is in the middle of the
steering wheel.
1-48
The driver’s side impact airbag is in the side of the
driver’s seatback closest to the door.
1-49
{CAUTION:
If something is between an occupant and an
airbag, the airbag might not inflate properly
or it might force the object into that person
causing severe injury or even death. The path
of an inflating airbag must be kept clear.
Do not put anything between an occupant and
an airbag, and do not attach or put anything
on the steering wheel hub or on or near any
other airbag covering. Do not let seat covers
block the inflation path of a side impact airbag.
The right front passenger’s side impact airbag is in the
side of the passenger’s seatback closest to the door.
1-50
When Should an Airbag Inflate?
The driver’s and right front passenger’s frontal airbags
are designed to inflate in moderate to severe frontal
or near-frontal crashes. But they are designed to inflate
only if the impact exceeds a predetermined deployment
threshold. Deployment thresholds take into account
a variety of desired deployment and non-deployment
events and are used to predict how severe a crash
is likely to be in time for the airbags to inflate and help
restrain the occupants. Whether your frontal airbags
will or should deploy is not based on how fast your
vehicle is traveling. It depends largely on what you hit,
the direction of the impact and how quickly your
vehicle slows down.
In addition, your vehicle has “dual stage” frontal
airbags, which adjust the restraint according to crash
severity. Your vehicle is equipped with electronic frontal
sensors which help the sensing system distinguish
between a moderate and a more severe frontal
impact. For moderate frontal impacts, these airbags
inflate at a level less than full deployment. For
more severe frontal impacts, full deployment occurs.
If the front of your vehicle goes straight into a wall
that does not move or deform, the threshold level
for the reduced deployment is about 10 to 16 mph
(16 to 25 km/h), and the threshold level for a full
deployment is about 20 to 30 mph (32 to 48 km/h).
(The threshold level can vary, however, with specific
vehicle design, so that it can be somewhat above
or below this range.)
Airbags may inflate at different crash speeds. For
example:
• If the vehicle hits a stationary object, the airbag
could inflate at a different crash speed than if
the object were moving.
• If the object deforms, the airbag could inflate
at a different crash speed than if the object does
not deform.
• If the vehicle hits a narrow object (like a pole) the
airbag could inflate at a different crash speed
than if the vehicle hits a wide object (like a wall).
• If the vehicle goes into an object at an angle the
airbag could inflate at a different crash speed
than if the vehicle goes straight into the object.
The frontal airbags (driver and right front passenger)
are not intended to inflate during vehicle rollovers, rear
impacts, or in many side impacts because inflation
would not likely help the occupants.
1-51
Side impact airbags are designed to inflate in moderate to
severe side crashes. A side impact airbag will inflate if the
crash severity is above the system’s designed “threshold
level.” The threshold level can vary with specific vehicle
design. Side impact airbags are not designed to inflate in
frontal or near-frontal impacts, rollovers or rear impacts,
because inflation would not likely help the occupant.
A side impact airbag will only deploy on the side of the
vehicle that is struck.
Vehicle’s with dual stage airbags are also equipped with
special sensors which enable the sensing system to
monitor the position of both the driver and passenger
front seats. The seat position sensor provides information
which is used to determine if the airbags should deploy
at a reduced level or at full deployment.
In any particular crash, no one can say whether an
airbag should have inflated simply because of the
damage to a vehicle or because of what the repair costs
were. For frontal airbags, inflation is determined by the
angle of the impact and how quickly the vehicle slows
down in frontal and near-frontal impacts. For side impact
airbags, inflation is determined by the location and
severity of the impact.
The airbag system is designed to work properly under a
wide range of conditions, including off-road usage.
Observe safe driving speeds, especially on rough terrain.
As always, wear your safety belt. See Operating Your
All-Wheel-Drive Vehicle Off Paved Roads on page 4-16
for tips on off-road driving.
1-52
What Makes an Airbag Inflate?
In an impact of sufficient severity, the airbag sensing
system detects that the vehicle is in a crash. For both
frontal and side impact airbags, the sensing system
triggers a release of gas from the inflator, which inflates
the airbag. The inflator, the airbag and related hardware
are all part of the airbag modules. Frontal airbag modules
are located inside the steering wheel and instrument
panel. For side impact airbags, the airbag modules are
located in the seatback closest to the driver’s and/or right
front passenger’s door.
How Does an Airbag Restrain?
In moderate to severe frontal or near frontal collisions,
even belted occupants can contact the steering wheel
or the instrument panel. In moderate to severe side
collisions, even belted occupants can contact the inside
of the vehicle. The airbag supplements the protection
provided by safety belts. Airbags distribute the force of
the impact more evenly over the occupant’s upper body,
stopping the occupant more gradually. But the frontal
airbags would not help you in many types of collisions,
including rollovers, rear impacts, and many side impacts,
primarily because an occupant’s motion is not toward the
airbag. Side impact airbags would not help you in many
types of collisions, including frontal or near frontal
collisions, rollovers, and rear impacts, primarily because
an occupant’s motion is not toward those airbags.
Airbags should never be regarded as anything more than
a supplement to safety belts, and then only in moderate
to severe frontal or near-frontal collisions for the driver’s
and right front passenger’s frontal airbags, and only in
moderate to severe side collisions for vehicles with a
driver’s and right front passenger’s side impact airbag.
What Will You See After an
Airbag Inflates?
After the airbag inflates, it quickly deflates, so quickly that
some people may not even realize the airbag inflated.
Some components of the airbag module will be hot for a
short time. These components include the steering wheel
hub for the driver’s frontal airbag and the instrument
panel for the right front passenger’s frontal airbag. For
side impact airbags, the side of the seatback closest to
the driver’s and/or right front passenger’s door will be hot.
The parts of the bag that come into contact with you may
be warm, but not too hot to touch. There will be some
smoke and dust coming from the vents in the deflated
airbags. Airbag inflation does not prevent the driver from
seeing or being able to steer the vehicle, nor does it
stop people from leaving the vehicle.
{CAUTION:
When an airbag inflates, there is dust in the
air. This dust could cause breathing problems
for people with a history of asthma or other
breathing trouble. To avoid this, everyone in
the vehicle should get out as soon as it is safe
to do so. If you have breathing problems but
can not get out of the vehicle after an airbag
inflates, then get fresh air by opening a
window or a door. If you experience breathing
problems following an airbag deployment,
you should seek medical attention.
In many crashes severe enough to inflate an airbag,
windshields are broken by vehicle deformation. Additional
windshield breakage may also occur from the right front
passenger airbag.
• Airbags are designed to inflate only once. After an
airbag inflates, you will need some new parts for your
airbag system. If you do not get them, the airbag
system will not be there to help protect you in another
crash. A new system will include airbag modules and
possibly other parts. The service manual for your
vehicle covers the need to replace other parts.
1-53
• Your vehicle is equipped with a crash sensing and
diagnostic module which records information after a
crash. See Vehicle Data Collection and Event Data
Recorders on page 7-10.
• Let only qualified technicians work on your airbag
system. Improper service can mean that an airbag
system will not work properly. See your dealer for
service.
Notice: If you damage the covering for the driver’s
or the right front passenger’s airbag, or the airbag
covering on the driver’s and right front passenger’s
seatback, the airbag may not work properly.
You may have to replace the airbag module in the
steering wheel, both the airbag module and the
instrument panel for the right front passenger’s
airbag, or both the airbag module and seatback
for the driver’s and right front passenger’s
side impact airbag. Do not open or break the
airbag coverings.
Passenger Sensing System
If your rearview mirror has one of the indicators pictured
in the following illustrations, your vehicle has a passenger
sensing system. The indicator will be visible when you
turn your ignition key to START or RUN. The words
ON and OFF or the symbol for on and off, will be visible
on the rearview mirror during the system check. When
the system check is complete, either the word ON or the
word OFF, or the symbol for on or the symbol for off will
be visible. See Passenger Airbag Status Indicator on
page 3-33. If your rearview mirror does not have either of
the indicators pictured, then your vehicle does not have
the passenger sensing system.
Passenger Airbag Status Indicator – United States
Passenger Airbag Status Indicator – Canada
1-54
The passenger sensing system will turn off the right
front passenger’s frontal airbag under certain conditions.
The driver’s airbag and the side airbags are not part
of the passenger sensing system.
{CAUTION:
A child in a rear-facing child restraint can be
seriously injured or killed if the right front
passenger’s airbag inflates. This is because
the back of the rear-facing child restraint
would be very close to the inflating airbag.
The passenger sensing system works with sensors that
are part of the right front passenger’s seat and safety
belt. The sensors are designed to detect the presence
of a properly-seated occupant and determine if the
passenger’s frontal airbag should be enabled (may
inflate) or not.
Even though the passenger sensing system is
designed to turn off the passenger’s frontal
airbag if the system detects a rear-facing child
restraint, no system is fail-safe, and no one can
guarantee that an airbag will not deploy under
some unusual circumstance, even though it is
turned off. General Motors recommends that
rear-facing child restraints be secured in the
rear seat, even if the airbag is off.
Accident statistics show that children are safer if they
are restrained in the rear rather than the front seat.
General Motors recommends that child restraints
be secured in a rear seat, including an infant riding in a
rear-facing infant seat, a child riding in a forward-facing
child seat and an older child riding in a booster seat.
Your vehicle has a rear seat that will accommodate
a rear-facing child restraint. A label on your sun visor
says, “Never put a rear-facing child seat in the
front.” This is because the risk to the rear-facing child
is so great, if the airbag deploys.
The passenger sensing system is designed to turn off
the right front passenger’s frontal airbag if:
• the right front passenger seat is unoccupied
• the system determines that an infant is present in a
•
rear-facing infant seat
the system determines that a small child is present
in a forward-facing child restraint
1-55
• the system determines that a small child is present
in a booster seat
• a right front passenger takes his/her weight off of
the seat for a period of time
• the right front passenger seat is occupied by a
smaller person, such as a child who has outgrown
child restraints
• or if there is a critical problem with the airbag
system or the passenger sensing system.
When the passenger sensing system has turned off the
passenger’s frontal air bag, the off indicator will light
and stay lit to remind you that the airbag is off.
If a child restraint has been installed and the on indicator
is lit, turn the vehicle off. Remove the child restraint
from the vehicle and reinstall the child restraint following
the child restraint manufacturer’s directions and refer
to Securing a Child Restraint in the Right Front
Seat Position on page 1-42.
If after reinstalling the child restraint and restarting the
vehicle, the on indicator is still lit, check to make
sure that the vehicle’s seatback is not pressing the child
restraint into the seat cushion. If this happens, slightly
recline the vehicle’s seatback and adjust the seat
cushion if possible. Also make sure the child restraint is
not trapped under the vehicle head restraint. If this
happens, adjust the head restraint.
1-56
If the on indicator is still lit, secure the child in the child
restraint in a rear seat position in the vehicle and
check with your dealer.
The passenger sensing system is designed to enable
(may inflate) the right front passenger’s frontal
airbag anytime the system senses that a person of adult
size is sitting properly in the right front passenger’s
seat. When the passenger sensing system has allowed
the airbag to be enabled, the on indicator will light
and stay lit to remind you that the airbag is active.
For some children who have outgrown child restraints
and for very small adults, the passenger sensing system
may or may not turn off the right front passenger’s
frontal airbag, depending upon the person’s seating
posture and body build. Everyone in your vehicle who
has outgrown child restraints should wear a safety
belt properly — whether or not there is an airbag for
that person.
If a person of adult-size is sitting in the right front
passenger’s seat, but the off indicator is lit, it could be
because that person is not sitting properly in the seat.
If this happens, turn the vehicle off and ask the person
to place the seatback in the fully upright position,
then sit upright in the seat, centered on the seat cushion,
with the person’s legs comfortably extended. Restart
the vehicle and have the person remain in this position
for about two minutes. This will allow the system to
detect that person and then enable the passenger’s
airbag.
CAUTION:
(Continued)
the vehicle serviced promptly, because an
adult-size person sitting in the right front
passenger’s seat may not have the protection
of the frontal airbag. See Airbag Readiness
Light on page 3-32 for more on this, including
important safety information.
Aftermarket equipment, such as seat covers, can affect
how well the passenger sensing system operates.
You may want to consider not using seat covers or
other aftermarket equipment if your vehicle has
the passenger sensing system. See Adding Equipment
to Your Airbag-Equipped Vehicle on page 1-58 for
more information about modifications that can affect
how the system operates.
{CAUTION:
If the airbag readiness light in the instrument
panel cluster ever comes on and stays on,
it means that something may be wrong with
the airbag system. If this ever happens, have
CAUTION:
(Continued)
{CAUTION:
Stowing of articles under the passenger’s
seat or between the passenger’s seat cushion
and seatback may interfere with the proper
operation of the passenger sensing system.
1-57
Servicing Your Airbag-Equipped
Vehicle
Airbags affect how your vehicle should be serviced.
There are airbag system parts in several places
around your vehicle. You do not want the system to
inflate while someone is working on your vehicle.
Your dealer and the service manual have information
about servicing your vehicle and the airbag system.
To purchase a service manual, see Service Publications
Ordering Information on page 7-12.
{CAUTION:
For up to 10 seconds after the ignition key
is turned off and the battery is disconnected,
an airbag can still inflate during improper
service. You can be injured if you are close
to an airbag when it inflates. Avoid yellow
connectors. They are probably part of the
airbag system. Be sure to follow proper
service procedures, and make sure the person
performing work for you is qualified to do so.
The airbag system does not need regular maintenance.
1-58
Adding Equipment to Your
Airbag-Equipped Vehicle
Q: Is there anything I might add to the front or
sides of the vehicle that could keep the
airbags from working properly?
A: Yes. If you add things that change your vehicle’s
frame, bumper system, front end or side sheet
metal or height, they may keep the airbag system
from working properly. Also, the airbag system may
not work properly if you relocate any of the airbag
sensors. If you have any questions about this,
you should contact Customer Assistance before you
modify your vehicle. The phone numbers and
addresses for Customer Assistance are in Step Two
of the Customer Satisfaction Procedure in this
manual. See Customer Satisfaction Procedure
on page 7-2.
Q: Because I have a disability, I have to get my
vehicle modified. How can I find out whether
this will affect my advanced airbag system?
A: Changing or moving any parts of the front seats,
safety belts, the airbag sensing and diagnostic
module (located under the driver’s seat), or
the inside rearview mirror can affect the operation
of the advanced airbag system. If you have
questions, call Customer Assistance. The phone
numbers and addresses for Customer Assistance
are in Step Two of the Customer Satisfaction
Procedure in this manual. See Customer
Satisfaction Procedure on page 7-2.
Restraint System Check
Checking Your Restraint Systems
Now and then, make sure the safety belt reminder light
and all your belts, buckles, latch plates, retractors
and anchorages are working properly. Look for any other
loose or damaged safety belt system parts. If you see
anything that might keep a safety belt system from doing
its job, have it repaired.
Torn or frayed safety belts may not protect you in a
crash. They can rip apart under impact forces. If a belt
is torn or frayed, get a new one right away.
Also look for any opened or broken airbag covers, and
have them repaired or replaced. (The airbag system
does not need regular maintenance.)
1-59
Replacing Restraint System Parts
After a Crash
{CAUTION:
A crash can damage the restraint systems in
your vehicle. A damaged restraint system
may not properly protect the person using it,
resulting in serious injury or even death in a
crash. To help make sure your restraint
systems are working properly after a crash,
have them inspected and any necessary
replacements made as soon as possible.
1-60
If you have had a crash, do you need new belts or
LATCH system parts?
After a very minor collision, nothing may be necessary.
But if the belts were stretched, as they would be if
worn during a more severe crash, then you need
new parts.
If the LATCH system was being used during a more
severe crash, you may need new LATCH system parts.
If belts are cut or damaged, replace them. Collision
damage also may mean you will need to have LATCH
system, safety belt or seat parts repaired or replaced.
New parts and repairs may be necessary even if the belt
or LATCH system was not being used at the time of
the collision.
If an airbag inflates, you will need to replace airbag
system parts. See the part on the airbag system earlier
in this section.
Section 2
Features and Controls
Keys ...............................................................2-3
Remote Keyless Entry System .........................2-4
Remote Keyless Entry System Operation ...........2-5
Doors and Locks .............................................2-8
Door Locks ....................................................2-8
Power Door Locks ..........................................2-9
Delayed Locking .............................................2-9
Programmable Automatic Door Locks ..............2-10
Rear Door Security Locks ..............................2-12
Lockout Protection ........................................2-12
Midgate .......................................................2-13
Tailgate .......................................................2-21
Windows ........................................................2-23
Power Windows ............................................2-24
Sun Visors ...................................................2-24
Theft-Deterrent Systems ..................................2-25
Content Theft-Deterrent .................................2-25
Passlock® ....................................................2-26
Starting and Operating Your Vehicle ................2-27
New Vehicle Break-In ....................................2-27
Ignition Positions ..........................................2-27
Retained Accessory Power (RAP) ...................2-28
Starting Your Engine .....................................2-28
Adjustable Throttle and Brake Pedal ................2-29
Engine Coolant Heater ..................................2-30
Automatic Transmission Operation ...................2-31
Tow/Haul Mode ............................................2-33
All-Wheel Drive ............................................2-34
Parking Brake ..............................................2-34
Shifting Into Park (P) .....................................2-35
Shifting Out of Park (P) .................................2-36
Parking Over Things That Burn .......................2-37
Engine Exhaust ............................................2-37
Running Your Engine While
You Are Parked ........................................2-38
2-1
Section 2
Features and Controls
Mirrors ...........................................................2-39
Automatic Dimming Rearview
Mirror with OnStar®, Compass and
Temperature Display ..................................2-39
Outside Power Mirrors ...................................2-41
Outside Convex Mirror ...................................2-42
Outside Heated Mirrors ..................................2-43
Outside Automatic Dimming Mirror with
Curb View Assist .......................................2-43
OnStar® System .............................................2-44
HomeLink® Transmitter ...................................2-46
Programming the HomeLink®
Transmitter ...............................................2-46
2-2
Storage Areas ................................................2-50
Glove Box ...................................................2-50
Cupholder(s) ................................................2-50
Instrument Panel Storage Area .......................2-50
Center Console Storage Area .........................2-50
Luggage Carrier ...........................................2-51
Rear Seat Armrest ........................................2-52
Cargo Cover Panels ......................................2-52
All-Weather Cargo Area .................................2-63
Top-Box Storage ..........................................2-68
Sunroof .........................................................2-68
Vehicle Personalization ...................................2-69
Memory Seat ...............................................2-69
Keys
{CAUTION:
Leaving children in a vehicle with the ignition
key is dangerous for many reasons. They
could operate the power windows or other
controls or even make the vehicle move. The
children or others could be badly injured or
even killed. Do not leave the keys in a vehicle
with children.
2-3
Your vehicle has one
double-sided key for the
ignition, door locks, tailgate
and side storage boxes.
Remote Keyless Entry System
Your keyless entry system operates on a radio
frequency subject to Federal Communications
Commission (FCC) Rules and with Industry Canada.
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause interference, and
2. This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired
operation of the device.
If you ever lose your keys, your dealer will be able to
assist you with obtaining replacements.
®
In an emergency contact Cadillac Roadside Service .
See Roadside Service on page 7-6 for more information.
If you ever lock your keys in your vehicle, you may be
able to have your doors unlocked automatically with
the OnStar® system if you have an active OnStar®
subscription. For more information see OnStar® System
on page 2-44.
2-4
This device complies with RSS-210 of Industry Canada.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause interference, and
2. This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired
operation of the device.
Changes or modifications to this system by other than
an authorized service facility could void authorization to
use this equipment.
At times you may notice a decrease in range. This is
normal for any remote keyless entry system. If the
transmitter does not work or if you have to stand closer
to your vehicle for the transmitter to work, try this:
• Check the distance. You may be too far from your
vehicle. You may need to stand closer during
rainy or snowy weather.
• Check the location. Other vehicles or objects may
be blocking the signal. Take a few steps to the
left or right, hold the transmitter higher, and
try again.
• Check to determine if battery replacement is
necessary. See “Battery Replacement” under
Remote Keyless Entry System Operation on
page 2-5.
• If you are still having trouble, see your dealer or
Remote Keyless Entry System
Operation
You can lock and unlock your doors from about
3 feet (1 m) up to 100 feet (30 m) away using the
remote keyless entry transmitter supplied with
your vehicle.
K (Unlock): Press this
button once to unlock
the driver’s door.
The interior lamps will
come on. Pressing
unlock again within
three seconds will
cause the remaining
doors to unlock.
a qualified technician for service.
You can choose different feedback options for each
press of the unlock button. See “Lock Feedback” and
“Unlock Feedback” under DIC Vehicle Customization
on page 3-60 for more information.
2-5
Q (Lock):
Press this button once to lock all of the
doors. Pressing lock again within three seconds
may cause the horn to chirp for lock confirmation. You
can choose different feedback options for each press
of the lock button. See “Lock Feedback” and “Unlock
Feedback” under DIC Vehicle Customization on
page 3-60 for more information.
L (Panic): Press this button to sound the horn and
flash the headlamps and taillamps for up to 30 seconds.
Panic can be turned off by pressing the button again,
by waiting for 30 seconds, or by starting the vehicle.
Matching Transmitter(s) to Your
Vehicle
Each remote keyless entry transmitter is coded to
prevent another transmitter from unlocking your vehicle.
If a transmitter is lost or stolen, a replacement can
be purchased through your dealer. Remember to bring
any remaining transmitters with you when you go to
your dealer. When the dealer matches the replacement
transmitter to your vehicle, any remaining transmitters
must also be matched. Once your dealer has coded the
new transmitter, the lost transmitter will not unlock
your vehicle. Each vehicle can have a maximum of
four transmitters matched to it.
2-6
Battery Replacement
Under normal use, the battery in your remote keyless
entry transmitter should last about two years.
You can tell the battery is weak if the transmitter will not
work at the normal range in any location. If you have
to get close to your vehicle before the transmitter works,
it is probably time to change the battery.
Notice: When replacing the battery, use care not
to touch any of the circuitry. Static from your body
transferred to these surfaces may damage the
transmitter.
To replace the battery in the keyless entry transmitter,
do the following:
3. Align the covers and snap them together.
4. Resynchronize the transmitter. See
“Resynchronization” following this information.
5. Check the operation of the transmitter.
Resynchronization
Resynchronization may be necessary due to the
security method used by this system. The transmitter
does not send the same signal twice to the receiver.
The receiver will not respond to a signal that has been
sent previously. This prevents anyone from recording
and playing back the signal from the transmitter.
1. Insert a thin object, such as a coin, in the slot
between the covers of the transmitter housing
near the key ring hole. Remove the bottom
by twisting the coin.
To resynchronize your transmitter, stand close to your
vehicle and press and hold the lock and unlock
buttons on the transmitter at the same time for
15 seconds. The door locks should cycle to confirm
synchronization. If the locks do not cycle, see your
dealer for service.
2. Remove and replace the battery with a
three-volt CR2032 or equivalent battery,
positive (+) side up.
2-7
Doors and Locks
Door Locks
{CAUTION:
Unlocked doors can be dangerous.
• Passengers — especially children — can
easily open the doors and fall out of a
moving vehicle. When a door is locked, the
handle will not open it. You increase the
chance of being thrown out of the vehicle
in a crash if the doors are not locked. So,
wear safety belts properly and lock the
doors whenever you drive.
• Young children who get into unlocked
vehicles may be unable to get out. A child
can be overcome by extreme heat and can
suffer permanent injuries or even death
from heat stroke. Always lock your vehicle
whenever you leave it.
• Outsiders can easily enter through an
unlocked door when you slow down or
stop your vehicle. Locking your doors can
help prevent this from happening.
2-8
There are several ways to lock and unlock your vehicle.
To unlock the door from the outside, use the keyless
entry system or the key.
To unlock or lock the
door from the inside, slide
the manual lever forward
or rearward.
Power Door Locks
Delayed Locking
The power door lock
switches are located on
the driver’s and front
passenger’s armrests.
When locking the doors with the power lock switch or
the keyless entry transmitter and a door or the liftgate
(if equipped) is open, the delayed locking feature
will delay locking the doors until five seconds after the
last door is closed. You will hear three chimes to
signal that the delayed locking feature is in use.
Pressing the power lock switch or the lock button
on the keyless entry transmitter twice will override the
delayed locking feature and immediately lock all
the doors.
You can turn the delayed locking feature off or back on
again by doing the following:
Q (Lock):
Remove the ignition key and press the lock
symbol to lock all of the doors.
1. Press and hold the power door lock switch in the
lock position.
If the delayed locking feature is on, the doors will not
lock until five seconds after the last door is closed. Press
the lock symbol twice to override this feature and lock
all of the doors immediately. See Delayed Locking
on page 2-9 for more information.
2. Press unlock twice on the remote keyless entry
transmitter.
K (Unlock): To unlock the doors, press the unlock
symbol.
This feature will not operate if the key is in the ignition.
You can also program this feature using the Driver
Information Center (DIC). See “Door Lock Delay” under
DIC Vehicle Customization on page 3-60.
2-9
Programmable Automatic
Door Locks
Your vehicle is equipped with an automatic lock/unlock
feature which enables you to program your vehicle’s
power door locks. You can program this feature through
the Driver Information Center (DIC), or by the following
method. See DIC Vehicle Customization on page 3-60
for more information on DIC programming.
Programmable Locking Feature
The following two modes are available programming
options:
Mode 1: All doors lock when the transmission is shifted
out of PARK (P).
Mode 2: All doors lock when the vehicle speed is
greater than 8 mph (13 km/h).
The following instructions tell you how to change the
automatic door lock mode. Choose one of the two
programming options listed above before entering the
program mode. To enter the program mode, do the
following:
1. Begin with the ignition off. Then pull the turn
signal/multifunction lever toward you and hold
it there while you perform the next step.
2-10
2. Turn the key to RUN then back to LOCK twice.
Then, with the key in LOCK, release the turn
signal/multifunction lever. Once you do this, the
doors will lock and unlock, the horn will chirp twice,
and a 30-second timer will begin. You are now
ready to program the automatic door lock feature.
3. Press the lock side of the power lock switch once.
You will hear either one or two chimes. The number
of chimes tells you which lock mode is currently
selected. Continue to press the door lock switch
until the number of chimes that you hear matches
the number of the mode that you want. If you
take longer than 30 seconds, the locks will
automatically lock and unlock and the horn will
chirp twice to indicate that you have left the
program mode. If this occurs, you can repeat the
procedure beginning with Step 1 to re-enter
the programming mode.
You can exit the program mode any time by turning the
ignition to RUN. The doors will automatically lock
and unlock and the horn will chirp twice to indicate that
you are leaving the program mode. If the lock/unlock
switches are not pressed while in the programming
mode, the current automatic settings will not be
modified.
Programmable Unlocking Feature
The following is the list of available programming
options:
Mode 1: Driver’s door unlocks when the transmission
is shifted into PARK (P).
Mode 2: All doors unlock when the transmission is
shifted into PARK (P).
Mode 3: All doors unlock when the key is removed
from the ignition.
Mode 4: No automatic door unlock.
The following instructions tell you how to change the
automatic door unlock mode. Choose one of the
four programming options listed above before entering
the program mode. To enter the program mode, do
the following:
3. Press the unlock side of the power lock switch
once. You will hear one, two, three, or four
chimes. The number of chimes tells you which
unlock mode is currently selected. Continue to press
the door unlock switch until the number of chimes
that you hear matches the number of the mode that
you want. If you take longer than 30 seconds, the
locks will automatically lock and unlock and the horn
will chirp twice to indicate that you have left the
program mode. If this occurs, you can repeat
the procedure beginning with Step 1 to re-enter the
programming mode.
You can exit the program mode any time by turning
the ignition to RUN. The doors will automatically
lock and unlock and the horn will chirp twice to indicate
that you are leaving the program mode. If the
lock/unlock switches are not pressed while in the
programming mode, the current automatic settings
will not be modified.
1. Begin with the ignition off. Then pull the turn
signal/multifunction lever toward you and hold
it there while you perform the next step.
2. Turn the key to RUN and LOCK twice. Then, with the
key in LOCK, release the turn signal/multifunction
lever. Once you do this, the doors will lock and
unlock, the horn will chirp twice, and a 30-second
timer will begin. You are now ready to program the
automatic door unlock feature.
2-11
Rear Door Security Locks
With this feature, you can lock the rear doors so they
can’t be opened from the inside by passengers.
This feature is located
on the inside edge of
the rear doors.
The rear doors cannot be opened from the inside when
this feature is in use. If you want to open the rear
door while the security lock is engaged, unlock the door
and open the door from the outside. Move the lever
rearward to disengage the child security lock feature.
Lockout Protection
This feature protects you from locking your key in the
vehicle when the key is in the ignition and a door
is open.
If the power lock switch is pressed when a door is open
and the key is in the ignition, all of the doors will lock
and then the driver’s door will unlock.
To use the locks, do the following:
1. Open one of the rear doors.
2. Move the lever forward to engage the rear door
security lock.
3. Close the door.
4. Do the same thing to the other rear door.
2-12
Midgate
{CAUTION:
It can be dangerous to drive with the cargo
area covered and the tailgate and the midgate
open because carbon monoxide (CO) gas can
come into your vehicle. You can not see or
smell CO. It can cause unconsciousness and
even death. If you must drive with the cargo
covers on and the tailgate and midgate open
or if electrical wiring or other cable
connections must pass through the seal
between the body and the midgate:
• Make sure all windows are shut.
• Turn the fan on your heating or cooling
system to its highest speed on the setting
that brings in outside air. This will force
outside air into your vehicle. See Dual
Automatic Climate Control System on
page 3-23.
• If you have air outlets on or under the
instrument panel, open them all the way.
See Engine Exhaust on page 2-37.
Midgate Operation
Your vehicle is equipped with a midgate and a
removable rear glass panel. The midgate allows you
to extend the length of your vehicle’s cargo area.
The following are the main components of the midgate
system:
A. Latch Levers
B. Grab Handles
C. Glass-Catch
Release Button
D.
E.
F.
G.
Glass Lock Knobs
Window Retaining Tabs
Midgate Release Handle
Window Alignment Arrows
2-13
Rear Glass Removal and Storage
{CAUTION:
If the removable rear glass is not stored
properly, it could be thrown about the vehicle
in a crash or sudden maneuver. People in the
vehicle could be injured. Whenever you store
the rear glass in the vehicle, always be sure
that it is stored securely in the midgate
storage pocket.
Do not remove the rear glass when the rear defroster is
on. If you remove the rear glass with the rear defroster
on, you may see a discharge spark coming from
the latch area.
To remove the rear glass do the following:
1. Fold the rear seats. See Rear Seat Operation on
page 1-6 for more information. The front seats
may have to be moved forward slightly to allow the
rear seats to fold completely.
Although the rear glass can be removed without
folding the rear seats, you will not be able to access
the rear glass storage pocket. Be sure to fold the
seats before removing the rear glass.
2-14
2. Squeeze and pull down the latch levers (A), located
near the upper corners of the rear glass, to unlatch.
Once unlatched, the glass-catch release button (C)
will catch the rear glass and prevent it from
falling forward.
3. While holding the rear glass in place, press the
glass-catch release button (C) and pull the top of
the rear glass toward you using the grab
handle(s) (B) located at the top of the rear glass.
4. With the rear glass tilted toward you, lift it out from
the lower window frame channel. Use the grab
handles to assist you in removing the rear glass.
2-15
5. Load the rear glass into the storage pocket in the
midgate, guiding the lower edge of the rear glass
behind the three rear glass retaining tabs (E).
Hold the rear glass flat against the storage pocket,
with grab handles facing you, until the next step.
2-16
6. Turn both glass lock knobs (D), located at both top
corners of the storage pocket, to the locked
position. Push in on the corner of the rear glass to
allow the lock knob to engage more easily.
Reinstalling the Rear Glass
To reinstall the rear glass, do the following:
1. Squeeze and pull down the latch levers (A), located
near the upper corners of the rear glass, to unlatch.
Once both glass lock knobs are in the locked
position, the rear glass is securely stored.
7. Push both latch levers up to the locked position.
You should hear a click when each latch lever
locks correctly.
The rear seats can be returned to the normal
position when the rear glass is out and stored
properly in the storage pocket.
2. Hold the rear glass in place with one hand and turn
the glass lock knobs, located at both top corners of
the glass storage pocket, to the unlocked position.
3. Pull the rear glass out from the storage pocket using
the grab handles.
2-17
Be sure to align the rear
glass side-to-side using
the alignment arrows (G).
4. With the rear glass tilted at an angle, place
the bottom edge in the lower channel of the
window frame.
2-18
5. Apply a firm downward pressure and then push
the rear glass flat against the window frame. Use
the grab handles at the top of the rear glass to
assist you.
To lower the midgate, do the following:
1. Fold the rear seats. The front seats might have to
be moved forward slightly to allow the rear seats to
fold. See Rear Seat Operation on page 1-6 for
more information.
6. Push the rear glass flat against the window frame
and push each latch lever up until it locks. You
should hear a click when each latch lever locks
correctly.
Lowering the Midgate with the Rear Glass
in Place
The midgate can be lowered to allow the cargo area of
your vehicle to extend into the cab. The rear glass
can be either installed in its normal position, or it can be
removed and stored in the rear glass storage pocket.
Rear Glass in Normal Position
2. Standing outside of the vehicle, hold the midgate
securely so it does not fall forward. Turn the
midgate handle clockwise and pull the midgate
toward you.
2-19
Lowering the Midgate with the Rear Glass
in the Storage Pocket
3. Lower the midgate until it is flat.
Rear Glass Stored in Glass Storage Pocket
2-20
Raising the Midgate
To return the midgate to its normal position, raise the
midgate up with a firm swinging motion until it latches
into place securely. This will help to ensure that the
midgate closes with enough force to engage the latches.
If the rear glass is removed and you would like to put
it back, do so using the instructions given previously.
Tailgate
Use the ignition/door key to unlock/lock the tailgate.
Open the tailgate by lifting up on its handle while pulling
the tailgate toward you.
Midgate Lowered with Crossbar Attached
This procedure works the same as the procedure
described previously, but when you lower the midgate
with the rear glass in the stored position, you will notice
that the entire crossbar will lower with the midgate.
This is completely normal; however, since the crossbar
lowers with the midgate, it will be heavier. As you
lower the midgate be ready for the extra weight and do
not let the midgate fall as you lower it.
To shut the tailgate, firmly push it upward until it
latches. Push and pull on the tailgate to be sure it is
latched securely.
2-21
Tailgate Removal
The tailgate can be removed to allow for different
loading situations. Although the tailgate can be removed
without assistance, you may want someone to assist
you with the removal to avoid possible damage to
the vehicle.
To remove the tailgate, do the following:
1. Hold the tailgate up, slightly raised.
2. Release the retaining
cable clip by lifting the
cable so it is level
with the ground and
then push the cable clip
toward the vehicle.
3. Raise the tailgate at a slight upward angle, pull
back on the tailgate at the right edge so it
releases from the block hinge and then move the
tailgate to the right to release the left edge.
Reverse the above procedure to reinstall. Make sure the
tailgate is secure.
2-22
Windows
{CAUTION:
Leaving children, helpless adults, or pets in a
vehicle with the windows closed is dangerous.
They can be overcome by the extreme heat
and suffer permanent injuries or even death
from heat stroke. Never leave a child, a
helpless adult, or a pet alone in a vehicle,
especially with the windows closed in warm
or hot weather.
2-23
Power Windows
Express-Down Windows
The driver and front passenger windows also have an
express-down feature that allows the windows to
be lowered without holding the switch. Press down fully
on the window switch, then release, to activate the
express-down mode. This mode can be canceled at any
time by pulling up on the switch. To open the window
partway, press the switch to the first position until
the window is at the desired position.
Window Lockout
Press the lockout switch to prevent passengers from
operating the power windows from their switches. A light
in the lockout switch will come on to show that the
switch has been activated. Press the lockout switch
again to return to normal operation.
The controls for the power windows are located on the
armrest on each of the side doors. The switches
operate the windows when the ignition is in RUN,
ACCESSORY or while Retained Accessory Power
(RAP) is active. See Retained Accessory Power (RAP)
on page 2-28.
Sun Visors
To block out glare, you can swing down the visors.
You can also swing them out to help block glare at the
front and side windows.
The driver’s door also has a switch for each of the
passenger’s windows.
Illuminated Visor Vanity Mirrors
Press the top of the switch to lower the window.
Pull up the top of the switch to raise the window.
Pull the sunvisor down and lift the mirror cover to turn
on the lamps.
2-24
Theft-Deterrent Systems
Vehicle theft is big business, especially in some cities.
Although your vehicle has a number of theft-deterrent
features, we know that nothing we put on it can make
it impossible to steal.
Content Theft-Deterrent
Your vehicle is equipped with a content theft-deterrent
alarm system.
With this system, the
security light in the
instrument panel cluster
will flash as you open
the door if your ignition
is off.
3. Close all doors. The security light should go off
after about 30 seconds. The alarm is not armed
until the security light goes off.
If a locked door is opened without the key or the remote
keyless entry transmitter, the alarm will go off. The
headlamps and parking lamps will flash for two minutes,
and the horn will sound for 30 seconds, then will turn
off to save the battery power. You can choose different
feedback options for the alarm. See Driver Information
Center (DIC) on page 3-46.
Remember, the theft-deterrent system won’t activate
if you lock the doors with a key or use the manual door
lock. It activates only if you use a power door lock
switch with the door open, or with the remote keyless
entry transmitter. You should also remember that
you can start your vehicle with the correct ignition key if
the alarm has been set off.
Here’s how to avoid setting off the alarm by accident:
• If you don’t want to activate the theft-deterrent
This light reminds you to activate the theft-deterrent
system. Here’s how to do it:
1. Open the door.
2. Lock the door with the power door lock switch or
the remote keyless entry transmitter. The security
light should come on and stay on.
system, the vehicle should be locked with the door
key after the doors are closed.
• Always unlock a door with a key, or use the remote
keyless entry transmitter. Unlocking a door any
other way will set off the alarm.
2-25
If you set off the alarm by accident, unlock any door with
the key. You can also turn off the alarm by pressing
unlock on the remote keyless entry transmitter. The alarm
won’t stop if you try to unlock a door any other way.
Testing the Alarm
The alarm can be tested by following these steps:
1. From inside the vehicle, lower the driver’s window
and open the driver’s door.
2. Activate the system by locking the doors with the
power door lock switch while the door is open,
or with the remote keyless entry transmitter.
3. Get out of the vehicle, close the door and wait
for the security light to go out.
4. Then reach in through the window, unlock the
door with the manual door lock and open the
door. This should set off the alarm.
While the alarm is set, the power door unlock switch is
not operational.
If the alarm does not sound when it should but the
headlamps flash, check to see if the horn works. The
horn fuse may be blown. To replace the fuse, see
Fuses and Circuit Breakers on page 5-105.
If the alarm does not sound or the headlamps do not
flash, the vehicle should be serviced by your dealer.
2-26
Passlock®
Your vehicle is equipped with the Passlock®
theft-deterrent system.
Passlock® is a passive theft-deterrent system. Passlock®
enables fuel if the ignition lock cylinder is turned with
a valid key. If a correct key is not used or the ignition
lock cylinder is tampered with, the fuel system is
disabled and the vehicle will not start.
During normal operation, the security light will turn off
approximately five seconds after the key is turned
to RUN.
If the engine stalls and the security light flashes, wait
about 10 minutes until the light stops flashing before
trying to restart the engine. Remember to release
the key from START as soon as the engine starts.
If the engine does not start after three tries, the vehicle
needs service.
If the engine is running and the security light comes on,
you will be able to restart the engine if you turn the
engine off. However, your Passlock® system is
not working properly and must be serviced by your
dealer. Your vehicle is not protected by Passlock® at
this time. You may also want to check the fuse.
See Fuses and Circuit Breakers on page 5-105.
See your dealer for service.
In an emergency, call the Roadside Assistance Center.
See Roadside Service on page 7-6.
Starting and Operating
Your Vehicle
Ignition Positions
New Vehicle Break-In
Notice: Your vehicle does not need an elaborate
break-in. But it will perform better in the long run
if you follow these guidelines:
• Keep your speed at 55 mph (88 km/h) or less
for the first 500 miles (805 km).
• Do not drive at any one speed — fast or
slow — for the first 500 miles (805 km).
Do not make full-throttle starts.
• Avoid making hard stops for the first
200 miles (322 km) or so. During this time
your new brake linings are not yet broken in.
Hard stops with new linings can mean
premature wear and earlier replacement.
Follow this breaking-in guideline every time
you get new brake linings.
• Do not tow a trailer during break-in. See Towing
Use the key to turn the ignition switch to four different
positions.
A (Lock): This position locks the ignition and
transmission. It is a theft-deterrent feature. You will only
be able to remove the key when the ignition is turned
to LOCK.
a Trailer on page 4-51 for more information.
2-27
Notice: Using a tool to force the key from the
ignition switch could cause damage or break the
key. Use the correct key and turn the key only with
your hand. Make sure the key is in all the way. If
none of this works, then your vehicle needs service.
B (Accessory): This position lets you use things
like the radio and the windshield wipers when the
engine is off.
Notice: Lengthy operation of features such as
the radio in the accessory ignition position
may drain the battery and prevent your vehicle
from starting. Do not operate your vehicle in
the accessory ignition position for a long period
of time.
C (Run): This is the position for driving.
D (Start): This position starts the engine.
Retained Accessory Power (RAP)
The Retained Accessory Power (RAP) feature will allow
certain features on your vehicle to continue to work
for up to 10 minutes after the ignition key is turned to
LOCK or until one of the doors is opened.
2-28
Starting Your Engine
Your vehicle is equipped with Starter Motor Control.
This feature assists in starting the engine and protects
the electrical system. This feature may cause the
engine to crank even after the ignition key is not
in START.
Move your shift lever to PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N).
Your engine will not start in any other position — that is
a safety feature. To restart when you are already
moving, use NEUTRAL (N) only.
Notice: Do not try to shift to PARK (P) if your
vehicle is moving. If you do, you could damage the
transmission. Shift to PARK (P) only when your
vehicle is stopped.
1. With your foot off the accelerator pedal, turn the
ignition key to START. When the engine starts,
let go of the key. The idle speed will go down as
your engine gets warm.
Notice: Holding your key in START for longer
than 15 seconds at a time will disengage the starter
motor, cause your battery to be drained much
sooner, and add excessive heat that can damage
your starter motor. Try not to hold the key in
START for longer than 15 seconds and wait about
15 seconds between each try to help avoid draining
your battery or damaging your starter.
2. If it does not start within 10 seconds, push the
accelerator pedal all the way to the floor, while
you hold the ignition key in START. When
the engine starts, let go of the key and let up
on the accelerator pedal. Wait about 15 seconds
between each try.
When starting your engine in very cold weather
(below 0°F or −18°C), do this:
1. With your foot off the accelerator pedal, turn the
ignition key to START and hold it there up to
15 seconds. When the engine starts, let go
of the key.
2. If your engine still will not start, or starts but then
stops, it could be flooded with too much gasoline.
Try pushing your accelerator pedal all the way to the
floor and holding it there as you hold the key in
START for about three seconds. When the engine
starts, let go of the key and accelerator. If the
vehicle starts briefly but then stops again, do the
same thing, but this time keep the pedal down
for five or six seconds. This clears the extra
gasoline from the engine.
Notice: Your engine is designed to work with the
electronics in your vehicle. If you add electrical
parts or accessories, you could change the way the
engine operates. Before adding electrical equipment,
check with your dealer. If you do not, your engine
might not perform properly.
Adjustable Throttle and Brake Pedal
If your vehicle has this feature, you can change the
position of the throttle and brake pedals. This feature is
designed for shorter drivers, since the pedals cannot
move farther away from the standard position, but
can move closer to you for better pedal reach. This
feature can be programmed to work with the memory
function (if equipped) on your vehicle. See Memory
Seat on page 2-69.
The vehicle must be in PARK (P) for this feature
to operate.
The buttons used to
adjust the pedals are
located on the driver’s
side door panel.
Press the button closest to you to move the pedals
closer to you. Press the button farthest from you to
move the pedals away from you.
2-29
Engine Coolant Heater
Your vehicle may be equipped with an engine coolant
heater.
In very cold weather, 0°F (−18°C) or colder, the engine
coolant heater can help. You will get easier starting
and better fuel economy during engine warm-up.
Usually, the coolant heater should be plugged in a
minimum of four hours prior to starting your vehicle.
At temperatures above 32°F (0°C), use of the coolant
heater is not required. Your vehicle may also have
an internal thermostat in the plug end of the cord. This
will prevent operation of the engine coolant heater
when the temperature is at or above 0°F (−18°C) as
noted on the cord.
To Use the Engine Coolant Heater
1. Turn off the engine.
2. Open the hood and unwrap the electrical cord.
The cord is located on the driver’s side of the
engine compartment, near the power steering
fluid reservoir.
3. Plug it into a normal, grounded 110-volt AC outlet.
2-30
{CAUTION:
Plugging the cord into an ungrounded outlet
could cause an electrical shock. Also, the
wrong kind of extension cord could overheat
and cause a fire. You could be seriously
injured. Plug the cord into a properly grounded
three-prong 110-volt AC outlet. If the cord will
not reach, use a heavy-duty three-prong
extension cord rated for at least 15 amps.
4. Before starting the engine, be sure to unplug and
store the cord as it was before to keep it away
from moving engine parts. If you do not, it could be
damaged.
How long should you keep the coolant heater plugged
in? The answer depends on the outside temperature, the
kind of oil you have, and some other things. Instead
of trying to list everything here, we ask that you contact
your dealer in the area where you will be parking
your vehicle. The dealer can give you the best advice
for that particular area.
Automatic Transmission Operation
Your vehicle is equipped with an automatic transmission
and features an electronic shift position indicator
located within the instrument panel cluster.
There are several different positions for your shift lever.
PARK (P): This position locks your drive wheels. It
is the best position to use when you start your engine
because your vehicle cannot move easily.
{CAUTION:
CAUTION:
(Continued)
You or others could be injured. To be sure your
vehicle will not move, even when you are on
fairly level ground, always set your parking
brake and move the shift lever to PARK (P).
See Shifting Into Park (P) on page 2-35. If you
are pulling a trailer, see Towing a Trailer on
page 4-51.
REVERSE (R): Use this gear to back up.
It is dangerous to get out of your vehicle if
the shift lever is not fully in PARK (P) with the
parking brake firmly set. Your vehicle can roll.
Do not leave your vehicle when the engine is
running unless you have to. If you have left the
engine running, the vehicle can move suddenly.
CAUTION:
(Continued)
Notice: Shifting to REVERSE (R) while your vehicle
is moving forward could damage the transmission.
The repairs would not be covered by your warranty.
Shift to REVERSE (R) only after your vehicle is
stopped.
To rock your vehicle back and forth to get out of snow,
ice or sand without damaging your transmission,
see If You Are Stuck: In Sand, Mud, Ice or Snow on
page 4-42.
2-31
NEUTRAL (N): In this position, your engine does
not connect with the wheels. To restart when you are
already moving, use NEUTRAL (N) only.
DRIVE (D): This position is for normal driving. If you
need more power for passing, and you are:
• Going less than about 35 mph (55 km/h), push your
accelerator pedal about halfway down.
{CAUTION:
Shifting into a drive gear while your engine is
running at high speed is dangerous. Unless
your foot is firmly on the brake pedal, your
vehicle could move very rapidly. You could
lose control and hit people or objects. Do not
shift into a drive gear while your engine is
running at high speed.
Notice: Shifting out of PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N)
with the engine running at high speed may
damage the transmission. The repairs would not
be covered by your warranty. Be sure the engine
is not running at high speed when shifting your
vehicle.
2-32
• Going about 35 mph (55 km/h) or more, push the
accelerator all the way down.
You will shift down to the next gear and have more
power.
DRIVE (D) can be used when towing a trailer, carrying
a heavy load, driving on steep hills or for off-road
driving. You may want to shift the transmission to
THIRD (3) or, if necessary, a lower gear selection if the
transmission shifts too often.
THIRD (3): This position is also used for normal driving,
however it offers more power and lower fuel economy
than DRIVE (D).
SECOND (2): This position gives you more power but
lower fuel economy. You can use SECOND (2) on
hills. It can help control your speed as you go down
steep mountain roads, but then you would also want to
use your brakes off and on.
If you manually select SECOND (2), the transmission
will drive in second gear. You may use this feature
for reducing the speed of the rear wheels when you are
trying to start your vehicle from a stop on slippery
road surfaces. Once the vehicle is moving, shift into
DRIVE (D).
Tow/Haul Mode
FIRST (1): This position gives you even more power,
but lower fuel economy than SECOND (2). You can use
it on very steep hills, or in deep snow or mud. If the
shift lever is put in FIRST (1) while the vehicle is moving
forward, the vehicle will not shift into first gear until
the vehicle is going slowly enough.
Notice: Spinning the tires or holding the vehicle in
one place on a hill using only the accelerator
pedal may damage the transmission. If you are
stuck, do not spin the tires. When stopping on a hill,
use the brakes to hold the vehicle in place.
On cold days, approximately 32°F (0°C) or colder, your
transmission is designed to shift differently until the
engine reaches normal operating temperature. This is
intended to improve heater performance.
Your vehicle is equipped with a tow/haul mode. The
button for this feature is located on the end of the
column shift lever. You can use this feature to assist
when towing or hauling a heavy load. See “Tow/Haul
Mode” under Towing a Trailer on page 4-51 for
more information.
The tow/haul mode also interacts with the Road
Sensing Suspension (RSS) feature to enhance the ride
when trailering or with a loaded vehicle. See Road
Sensing Suspension on page 4-8.
2-33
All-Wheel Drive
With this feature, engine power is sent to all four wheels
when extra traction is needed.
This is like four-wheel drive, but there is no separate
lever or switch to engage or disengage the front axle.
It is fully automatic, and adjusts itself as needed for
road conditions.
Parking Brake
To set the parking brake, hold the regular brake pedal
down with your right foot. Push down the parking
brake pedal with your left foot.
A chime will activate and the warning light will
flash when the parking brake is applied and the
vehicle is moving at least 3 mph (5 km/h) for at least
three seconds.
To release the parking brake, hold the regular brake
pedal down. Pull the bottom edge of the lever, located
above the parking brake pedal, with the parking
brake symbol, to release the parking brake.
If the ignition is on when the parking brake is released,
the brake system warning light will go off.
Notice: Driving with the parking brake on can
overheat the brake system and cause premature
wear or damage to brake system parts. Verify that
the parking brake is fully released and the brake
warning light is off before driving.
If you are towing a trailer and are parking on any hill,
see Towing a Trailer on page 4-51.
2-34
Shifting Into Park (P)
{CAUTION:
It can be dangerous to get out of your vehicle
if the shift lever is not fully in PARK (P) with
the parking brake firmly set. Your vehicle can
roll. If you have left the engine running, the
vehicle can move suddenly. You or others
could be injured. To be sure your vehicle will
not move, even when you are on fairly level
ground, use the steps that follow. If you are
pulling a trailer, see Towing a Trailer on
page 4-51.
1. Hold the brake pedal down with your right foot and
set the parking brake with your left foot.
2. Move the shift lever into PARK (P) by pulling the
shift lever toward you and moving it up as far as it
will go.
3. Turn the ignition key to LOCK.
Leaving Your Vehicle With the Engine
Running
{CAUTION:
It can be dangerous to leave your vehicle
with the engine running. Your vehicle could
move suddenly if the shift lever is not fully in
PARK (P) with the parking brake firmly set.
And, if you leave the vehicle with the engine
running, it could overheat and even catch fire.
You or others could be injured. Do not leave
your vehicle with the engine running.
If you have to leave your vehicle with the engine
running, be sure your vehicle is in PARK (P) and the
parking brake is firmly set before you leave it. After you
move the shift lever into PARK (P), hold the regular
brake pedal down. Then, see if you can move the
shift lever away from PARK (P) without first pulling it
toward you. If you can, it means that the shift lever was
not fully locked into PARK (P).
4. Remove the key and take it with you. If you can
leave your vehicle with the ignition key in your
hand, your vehicle is in PARK (P).
2-35
Torque Lock
Shifting Out of Park (P)
If you are parking on a hill and you do not shift your
vehicle into PARK (P) properly, the weight of the vehicle
may put too much force on the parking pawl in the
transmission. You may find it difficult to pull the shift
lever out of PARK (P). This is called torque lock.
To prevent torque lock, set the parking brake and then
shift into PARK (P) properly before you leave the
driver’s seat. To find out how, see Shifting Into Park (P)
on page 2-35.
Your vehicle has an automatic transmission shift lock
control system. You have to fully apply your regular
brakes before you can shift from PARK (P) when the
ignition is in RUN. See Automatic Transmission
Operation on page 2-31.
When you are ready to drive, move the shift lever out of
PARK (P) before you release the parking brake.
If torque lock does occur, you may need to have another
vehicle push yours a little uphill to take some of the
pressure from the parking pawl in the transmission, so
you can pull the shift lever out of PARK (P).
If you cannot shift out of PARK (P), ease pressure on
the shift lever and push the shift lever all the way up into
PARK (P) as you maintain brake application. Then,
move the shift lever into the gear you want.
If you ever hold the brake pedal down but still cannot
shift out of PARK (P), try this:
1. Turn the key to ACCESSORY. There is no shift
interlock in this key position.
2. Apply and hold the brake until the end of Step 4.
3. Shift the vehicle to NEUTRAL (N).
4. Start the vehicle and then shift to the drive gear
you want.
5. Have the system fixed as soon as possible.
2-36
Parking Over Things That Burn
Engine Exhaust
{CAUTION:
Engine exhaust can kill. It contains the gas
carbon monoxide (CO), which you cannot see or
smell. It can cause unconsciousness and death.
{CAUTION:
Things that can burn could touch hot exhaust
parts under your vehicle and ignite. Do not
park over papers, leaves, dry grass or other
things that can burn.
You might have exhaust coming in if:
• Your exhaust system sounds strange or
different.
• Your vehicle gets rusty underneath.
• Your vehicle was damaged in a collision.
• Your vehicle was damaged when driving
over high points on the road or over road
debris.
• Repairs were not done correctly.
• Your vehicle or exhaust system had been
modified improperly.
If you ever suspect exhaust is coming into your
vehicle:
• Drive it only with all the windows down to
blow out any CO; and
• Have your vehicle fixed immediately.
2-37
Running Your Engine While
You Are Parked
It is better not to park with the engine running. But if
you ever have to, here are some things to know.
{CAUTION:
Idling the engine with the climate control
system off could allow dangerous exhaust into
your vehicle. See the earlier caution under
Engine Exhaust on page 2-37.
Also, idling in a closed-in place can let deadly
carbon monoxide (CO) into your vehicle even if
the climate control fan is at the highest setting.
One place this can happen is a garage.
Exhaust — with CO — can come in easily.
NEVER park in a garage with the engine
running.
Another closed-in place can be a blizzard.
See Winter Driving on page 4-38.
2-38
{CAUTION:
It can be dangerous to get out of your vehicle
if the shift lever is not fully in PARK (P) with
the parking brake firmly set. Your vehicle can
roll. Do not leave your vehicle when the engine
is running unless you have to. If you have
left the engine running, the vehicle can move
suddenly. You or others could be injured.
To be sure your vehicle will not move, even
when you are on fairly level ground, always
set your parking brake and move the shift
lever to PARK (P).
Follow the proper steps to be sure your vehicle will not
move. See Shifting Into Park (P) on page 2-35.
If you are pulling a trailer, see Towing a Trailer on
page 4-51.
Mirrors
To adjust between Fahrenheit and Celsius, do the
following:
Automatic Dimming Rearview
Mirror with OnStar®, Compass and
Temperature Display
Your vehicle may have this feature. When on, the
automatic dimming mirror dims to the proper level to
minimize glare from lights behind you after dark.
The mirror has a dual display in the upper right corner
of the mirror face that shows the compass reading
and the outside temperature.
Control buttons for the OnStar® system are at the
bottom of the mirror. See OnStar® System on page 2-44
for more information about the services OnStar®
provides.
P (On/Off):
This is the on/off button.
Temperature and Compass Display
Press the on/off button, located to the far left, briefly to
turn the compass/temperature display on or off.
If the display reads CAL, the compass needs to be
calibrated. For more information, see “Compass
Calibration” following.
1. Press and hold the on/off button for approximately
four seconds until either a flashing F or C appears.
2. Press the button again to change the display to the
desired unit of measurement. After approximately
four seconds of inactivity, the new unit will be locked
in and the compass/temperature display will return.
If an abnormal temperature reading is displayed for an
extended period of time, please see your GM dealer.
Under certain circumstances, a delay in updating
the temperature is normal.
Automatic Dimming Mirror Operation
The automatic dimming mirror function is turned
on automatically each time the ignition is started. To
operate the automatic dimming mirror, do the following:
1. Make sure the green indicator light, located to the
left of the on/off button, is lit. If it is not, press and
hold the on/off button for approximately six seconds
until the green light comes on, indicating that the
mirror is in automatic dimming mode.
2. Turn off the automatic dimming mirror function
by pressing and holding the on/off button for
approximately six seconds, until the green indicator
light turns off.
2-39
Compass Variance
The mirror is set in zone eight upon leaving the
factory. It will be necessary to adjust the compass to
compensate for compass variance if the vehicle is
outside of zone eight. Under certain circumstances, as
during a long distance cross-country trip, it will be
necessary to adjust for compass variance. Compass
variance is the difference between earth’s magnetic
north and true geographic north. If not adjusted
to account for compass variance, the compass could
give false readings.
To adjust for compass variance, do the following:
1. Find your current location and variance zone
number on the following zone map.
2. Press and hold the on/off button until a Z and a
zone number appears in the display. The compass
is now in zone mode.
3. Keep pressing the on/off button until the desired
zone number appears in the display. Release the
button. After approximately four seconds of
inactivity, the new zone number will be locked in
and the compass/temperature display will return.
4. Calibrate the compass as described next.
2-40
Compass Calibration
Cleaning the Mirror
The compass may need calibration if one of the
following occurs:
When cleaning the mirror, use a paper towel or similar
material dampened with glass cleaner. Do not spray
glass cleaner directly on the mirror as that may cause
the liquid cleaner to enter the mirror housing.
• After approximately five seconds, the display does
not show a compass heading, N for North, for
example, there may be a strong magnetic field
interfering with the compass. Such interference may
be caused by a magnetic antenna mount, magnetic
note pad holder, or a similar magnetic item.
• The compass does not display the correct heading
and the compass zone variance is set correctly.
Outside Power Mirrors
The controls are
located on the driver’s
door armrest.
In order to calibrate, CAL must be displayed in the
mirror compass windows. If CAL is not displayed, push
the on/off button for approximately 12 seconds or
until CAL is displayed.
The compass can be calibrated by driving the vehicle in
circles at 5 mph (8 km/h) or less until the display
reads a direction.
Passenger Air Bag Indicator
The vehicle may be equipped with a passenger airbag
indicator, on the mirror glass, just above the buttons.
For more information, see Passenger Sensing System
on page 1-54 and Passenger Airbag Status Indicator
on page 3-33.
Move the upper selector switch to the left or right to
choose the mirror to be adjusted, then press the dots,
located below the selector switch on the four-way control
pad, to adjust the direction of each mirror.
The mirrors may also include a memory function which
works in conjunction with the memory seats. See
Memory Seat on page 2-69 for more information.
2-41
Power Folding Mirrors
To fold or unfold the mirrors, move the selector switch,
located above the mirror control, to the middle
position. The mirror control will illuminate. Press the
right or left side of the mirror control to fold or unfold the
mirrors. The mirror will adjust as it folds in and will
reposition itself once it is unfolded.
If the mirrors are accidentally folded/unfolded manually,
they may shake or flutter at normal driving speeds
and may not stay in the unfolded position. If this
happens, the mirrors need to be reset. See “Resetting
the Power Folding Mirrors” next.
Resetting the Power Folding Mirrors
The power folding mirrors will need to be reset if:
• They are accidently manually folded/unfolded.
• The mirrors will not stay in the unfolded position.
• The mirrors shake and flutter at normal driving
speeds.
To reset the power folding mirrors, fold and unfold them
at least three times using the mirror controls. This will
reset them to their normal detent position.
2-42
Outside Convex Mirror
{CAUTION:
A convex mirror can make things (like other
vehicles) look farther away than they really are.
If you cut too sharply into the right lane, you
could hit a vehicle on your right. Check your
inside mirror or glance over your shoulder
before changing lanes.
The passenger’s side mirror is convex. A convex
mirror’s surface is curved so more can be seen from the
driver’s seat. It makes things in the mirror appear
farther away than they really are.
Outside Heated Mirrors
If the vehicle has heated
mirrors, the button to turn
this function on or off
is located on the climate
control panel.
Press this button to warm the driver’s and passenger’s
outside rearview mirrors to help clear them of ice,
snow, and condensation.
If the vehicle has a rear window defogger, the heated
mirrors will come on when this button is pressed.
See “Rear Window Defogger” under Dual Automatic
Climate Control System on page 3-23 for more
information.
Outside Automatic Dimming Mirror
with Curb View Assist
Your vehicle may have this feature.
The driver’s outside mirror will adjust for the glare
of the headlamps behind you. See Automatic Dimming
Rearview Mirror with OnStar®, Compass and
Temperature Display on page 2-39.
Your vehicle’s mirrors will also be capable of performing
the curb view assist mirror function. This feature will
cause the passenger’s and/or driver’s mirror to tilt
to a preselected position when the vehicle is in
REVERSE (R). This feature may be useful in allowing
you to view the curb when you are parallel parking.
When the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE (R) and
a short delay has occurred, the passenger’s and/or
driver’s mirror will return to its original position.
To change the preselected tilt position, adjust the
mirrors to the desired position while the vehicle is in
REVERSE (R). When the vehicle is shifted out of
REVERSE (R), this new position is saved in memory
as the tilt position.
This feature can be enabled/disabled through the
Driver Information Center. See Driver Information
Center (DIC) on page 3-46 for more information.
2-43
OnStar® System
OnStar® uses global positioning system (GPS) satellite
technology, wireless communications, and call centers
to provide you with a wide range of safety, security,
information, and convenience services.
A complete OnStar® user’s guide and the terms and
conditions of the OnStar® Subscription Service
Agreement are included in the vehicle’s glove box
literature. For more information, visit www.onstar.com
or www.onstarcanada.com. Contact OnStar® at
1-888-4-ONSTAR (1-888-466-7827), or press the
OnStar® button to speak to an OnStar® advisor
24 hours a day, 7 days a week.
Terms and conditions of the Subscription Service
Agreement can be found at www.onstar.com or
www.onstarcanada.com.
OnStar® Services
The Directions and Connections Plan is included for
new vehicles from the date of purchase. The OnStar®
subscription can be extended for time beyond the
first year to meet your needs. For more information,
press the OnStar® button to speak with an advisor.
2-44
Directions and Connections Plan
• Automatic Notification of Airbag Deployment
• Emergency Services
• Roadside Assistance
• Stolen Vehicle Tracking
• AccidentAssist
• Remote Door Unlock/Vehicle Alert
• Remote Diagnostics
• Online Concierge
• Driving Directions
• RideAssist
• Information and Convenience Services
OnStar® Personal Calling
OnStar® Steering Wheel Controls
As an OnStar® subscriber, the Personal Calling
capability is a hands-free wireless phone that is
integrated into the vehicle. Calls can be placed
nationwide using simple voice commands with no
additional contracts and no additional roaming charges.
To find out more about OnStar® Personal Calling,
refer to the OnStar® user’s guide in the vehicle’s glove
box, visit www.onstar.com or www.onstarcanada.com;
or speak to an OnStar® advisor by pressing the OnStar®
button or calling 1-888-4-ONSTAR (1-888-466-7827).
A steering wheel control can be used to interact with
the OnStar® personal calling feature.
OnStar® Virtual Advisor
Virtual Advisor is a feature of OnStar® Personal Calling
that uses minutes to access up-to-date weather and
traffic reports for your area, news and sports updates,
stock quotes, entertainment, and more. You are
also able to listen and reply to E-mail through the
vehicle’s audio system. Customize your information
profile at www.myonstar.com. See the OnStar® user’s
guide for more information.
Press the control with
this symbol on the
steering wheel to make
a phone call.
When calling into voice mail systems, or to dial directory
numbers, press the control, say the number(s), then
say “dial”.
See the OnStar® user’s guide for more information.
2-45
HomeLink® Transmitter
This device complies with RSS-210 of Industry Canada.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
(1) this device may not cause interference, and (2) this
device must accept any interference, including
interference that may cause undesired operation of
the device.
Changes and modifications to this system by other than
an authorized service facility could void authorization
to use this equipment.
HomeLink® a combined universal transmitter and
receiver, provides a way to replace up to three hand-held
transmitters used to activate devices such as gate
operators, garage door openers, entry door locks,
security systems and home lighting. Additional
HomeLink® information can be found on the Internet at
www.homelink.com or by calling 1-800-355-3515.
If your vehicle is equipped with the HomeLink®
Transmitter, it complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
(1) this device may not cause harmful interference, and
(2) this device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired
operation.
2-46
Programming the HomeLink®
Transmitter
Do not use the HomeLink® Transmitter with any garage
door opener that does not have the “stop and reverse”
feature. This includes any garage door opener model
manufactured before April 1, 1982. If you have a newer
garage door opener with rolling codes, please be
sure to follow Steps 6 through 8 to complete the
programming of your HomeLink® Transmitter.
Read the instructions completely before attempting to
program the HomeLink® Transmitter. Because of
the steps involved, it may be helpful to have another
person available to assist you in programming the
transmitter.
Keep the original transmitter for use in other vehicles as
well as for future HomeLink® programming. It is also
recommended that upon the sale of the vehicle,
the programmed HomeLink® buttons should be erased
for security purposes. Refer to “Erasing HomeLink®
Buttons” or, for assistance, contact HomeLink® on
the Internet at: www.homelink.com or by calling
1-800-355-3515.
Be sure that people and objects are clear of the garage
door or gate operator you are programming. When
programming a garage door, it is advised to park outside
of the garage.
It is recommended that a new battery be installed in
your hand-held transmitter for quicker and more
accurate transmission of the radio frequency.
Programming HomeLink®
Your vehicle’s engine should be turned off while
programming the transmitter. Follow these steps to
program up to three channels:
1. Press and hold down the two outside buttons,
releasing only when the indicator light begins to
flash, after 20 seconds. Do not hold down the
buttons for longer than 30 seconds and do not
repeat this step to program a second and/or third
transmitter to the remaining two HomeLink® buttons.
2. Position the end of your hand-held transmitter
about 1 to 3 inches (3 to 8 cm) away from the
HomeLink® buttons while keeping the indicator
light in view.
3. Simultaneously press and hold both the desired
button on HomeLink® and the hand-held transmitter
button. Do not release the buttons until Step 4
has been completed.
Some entry gates and garage door openers may
require you to substitute Step 3 with the procedure
noted in “Gate Operator and Canadian
Programming” later in this section.
4. The indicator light will flash slowly at first and then
rapidly after HomeLink® successfully receives the
frequency signal from the hand-held transmitter.
Release both buttons.
5. Press and hold the newly-trained HomeLink® button
and observe the indicator light.
If the indicator light stays on constantly,
programming is complete and your device should
activate when the HomeLink® button is pressed
and released.
To program the remaining two HomeLink® buttons,
begin with Step 2 under “Programming HomeLink®.”
Do not repeat Step 1 as this will erase all of the
programmed channels.
2-47
If the indicator light blinks rapidly for two seconds
and then turns to a constant light, continue with
Steps 6 through 8 following to complete the
programming of a rolling-code equipped device
(most commonly, a garage door opener).
6. Locate in the garage, the garage door opener
receiver (motor-head unit). Locate the “Learn”
or “Smart” button. This can usually be found where
the hanging antenna wire is attached to the
motor-head unit.
7. Firmly press and release the “Learn” or “Smart”
button. The name and color of the button may
vary by manufacturer.
You will have 30 seconds to start Step 8.
8. Return to the vehicle. Firmly press and hold the
programmed HomeLink® button for two seconds,
then release. Repeat the press/hold/release
sequence a second time, and depending on the
brand of the garage door opener (or other rolling
code device), repeat this sequence a third time
to complete the programming.
HomeLink® should now activate your rolling-code
equipped device.
To program the remaining two HomeLink® buttons,
begin with Step 2 of “Programming HomeLink®.”
You do not want to repeat Step 1, as this will erase
all previous programming.
2-48
Gate Operator and Canadian
Programming
Canadian radio-frequency laws require transmitter
signals to “time out” or quit after several seconds of
transmission. This may not be long enough for
HomeLink® to pick up the signal during programming.
Similarly, some U.S. gate operators are manufactured to
“time out” in the same manner.
If you live in Canada, or you are having difficulty
programming a gate operator by using the
“Programming HomeLink® ” procedures (regardless of
where you live), replace Step 3 under “Programming
HomeLink® ” with the following:
Continue to press and hold the HomeLink® button while
you press and release every two seconds (cycle)
your hand-held transmitter until the frequency signal has
been successfully accepted by HomeLink®. The
indicator light will flash slowly at first and then rapidly.
Proceed with Step 4 under “Programming HomeLink® ”
to complete.
Using HomeLink®
Press and hold the appropriate HomeLink® button for
at least half of a second. The indicator light will come on
while the signal is being transmitted.
Erasing HomeLink® Buttons
To erase programming from the three buttons do the
following:
Reprogramming a Single HomeLink®
Button
To program a device to HomeLink® using a HomeLink®
button previously trained, follow these steps:
1. Press and hold the desired HomeLink® button.
Do not release the button.
2. The indicator light will begin to flash after
20 seconds. While still holding the HomeLink®
button, proceed with Step 2 under “Programming
HomeLink® ” shown earlier in this section.
1. Press and hold down the two outside buttons until
the indicator light begins to flash, after 20 seconds.
Do not hold the two outside buttons for longer
than 30 seconds.
Resetting Defaults
2. Release both buttons.
To reset HomeLink® to default settings do the following:
®
HomeLink is now in the train (learning) mode and
can be programmed at any time beginning with Step 2
under “Programming HomeLink® ” shown earlier in
this section.
Individual buttons cannot be erased, but they can
be reprogrammed. See “Reprogramming a Single
HomeLink® Button” following this section.
1. Hold down the two outside buttons for about
20 seconds until the indicator light begins to flash.
2. Continue to hold both buttons until the HomeLink®
indicator light turns off.
3. Release both buttons.
For questions or comments, contact HomeLink®
at 1-800-355-3515, or on the Internet at
www.homelink.com.
2-49
Storage Areas
Instrument Panel Storage Area
Open the glove box by pulling the bottom of the handle
upward.
Your vehicle may have a closed storage area on the
instrument panel above the compact disc changer. You
can open the storage area by pressing in the bottom
of the lid and the lid will automatically raise up.
Press down on the lid to close the storage area.
Cupholder(s)
Center Console Storage Area
Your vehicle is equipped with cupholders for the front
and rear passengers.
Your vehicle has a console compartment between the
bucket seats.
The cupholders are located in the center console for the
front passengers and on the rear of the center console
for the rear passengers.
To open it, press the button on the side of the console
and swing the console lid open.
Glove Box
To use the front cupholders, press down on the access
door and release. The door will then open. Push the
door back down to close it.
To use the rear cupholders, pull down on the door
located on the back of the console.
The front cupholder may be removed for cleaning by
pushing down and then back on the cupholder.
2-50
The console may be equipped with an accessory power
outlet inside. See Accessory Power Outlets on
page 3-22.
The rear of the console also has a cupholder that
swings down for the rear seat passengers to use.
Luggage Carrier
You can load things on top of your vehicle if it has this
feature.
The luggage carrier has slats and siderails attached to
the roof and may have crossrails which can be
moved back and forth to help secure cargo. Tie the load
to the siderails or siderail supports.
Notice: Loading cargo on the luggage carrier that
weighs more than 200 lbs (91 kg) or hangs over
the rear or sides of the vehicle may damage your
vehicle. Load cargo so that it rests on the slats
as far forward as possible and against the side rails,
making sure to fasten it securely.
Don’t exceed the maximum vehicle capacity when
loading your vehicle. For more information on vehicle
capacity and loading, see Loading Your Vehicle on
page 4-44.
To prevent damage or loss of cargo as you’re leaving,
check now and then to make sure the luggage and
cargo are still securely fastened.
Be sure the cargo is properly loaded.
• If small heavy objects are placed on the roof cut a
piece of 3/8 inch plywood to fit inside the crossrails
and siderails to spread the load. If plywood is
used, tie it to the siderail supports.
• Tie the load to the crossrails or the siderail supports.
Use the crossrails only to keep the load from
sliding. To move a crossrail, turn the release knobs,
on both sides of the rail, counterclockwise to
loosen it. Slide the crossrail to the desired position
balancing the force side to side. Turn the release
knobs, on both sides of the rail, clockwise to tighten
it and try to slide the crossrail back and forth
slightly to be sure it is tight.
• If you need to carry long items, move the crossrails
as far apart as they will go. Tie the load to the
crossrails and the siderails or siderail supports. Also
tie the load to the bumpers. Do not tie the load
so tightly that the crossrails or siderails are
damaged.
• After moving a crossrail, be sure it is securely
locked into the siderail.
Your vehicle has a Center High-Mounted Stoplamp
(CHMSL) located above the rear glass.
If items are loaded on the roof of the vehicle, care
should be taken not to block or damage the CHMSL unit.
2-51
Rear Seat Armrest
Your vehicle’s second row seat may have an
armrest/storage compartment.
Pull the loop at the top of the armrest out to lower the
armrest.
To open the compartment, if equipped, push the button
on the front of the armrest and pull the top open.
Cargo Cover Panels
{CAUTION:
Improperly stored cargo cover panels could be
thrown about the vehicle during a collision or
sudden maneuver. You or others could be
injured. If you remove a panel, always store it
in the proper storage location. When you put it
back, always be sure that is securely
reattached.
2-52
Notice: Exceeding the weight limit of 250 lbs
(113 kg) can damage the cargo covers, and the
repairs would not be covered by your warranty.
Do not put anything on top of the cargo covers
over the weight limit.
Your vehicle is equipped with a three-piece cargo cover
system. The cargo panels can be removed and
stored in the cargo area of the vehicle with the cargo
panel storage bag.
To remove a cargo panel(s), do the following:
1. Lower the tailgate. Use the ignition/door key to
unlock the tailgate if it is locked. See Tailgate on
page 2-21 for more information on the tailgate.
Before removing the cargo panel(s), notice the
numbers embossed on the upper center portion of
each panel. The panels are labeled 1, 2 and 3.
There are also numbered labels on the bottom of
the panels. The numbers on the top and bottom of
the panels will be used as reference when
removing, storing and reinstalling the panels.
2. Remove cargo panel 3 by pulling the left and right
cargo panel latches, located on the bottom of each
cargo panel, toward you to unlock the cargo
panel latches.
3. Pull the cargo panel up and then out from the side
rails and set it aside. You only need to remove as
many cargo panels as needed for your cargo
carrying needs.
2-53
4. Remove cargo panel 2 in the same way and
set it aside.
5. Remove cargo panel 1, but notice that there
are four latches to release (two left-side and
two right-side latches). Set the panel aside.
After you have removed each cargo panel you can store
it within the cargo storage area using the cargo panel
storage system.
2-54
Cargo Panel Storage System
The three cargo panels can be stored on either the
driver’s or passenger’s side of the cargo box using the
storage bag. To store the panels, do the following:
1. Secure the storage bag
in the cargo storage
area by attaching
the four clips on the
cargo bag to the
tie-down locations on
either side of the
storage area.
Always use the storage bag to store the cargo panels
during driving.
Before storing the cargo panels, be sure that the
latches are in the locked position. The latches are in
the locked position when they are parallel to the
front and back edge of the panel.
2-55
Use the following instructions for the proper storage
sequence and location for each panel:
Panels 3, 2, 1 Loaded
2-56
2. Starting with cargo panel 1, load the cargo panel
with latches at the top of the bag and facing away
from you.
3. Store cargo panel 2 by loading the cargo panel with
latches down and facing toward you.
4. Store cargo panel 3 by loading the cargo panel with
latches at the top of the bag and facing toward you.
5. Zip the bag shut.
2-57
6. Tighten both straps on the bag by pulling on the
free end of the straps.
2-58
7. Close both top and bottom lever locks at the center
of the bag to secure tightly.
Reinstalling the Cargo Cover Panels
You only need to reinstall as many cargo panels
as you wish.
1. Remove the cargo panel(s) from the storage bag.
You can either leave the bag attached to the side
of the cargo area while it is not in use, or you
can store it outside of the vehicle.
Left Side Shown, Right Side Similar
Push the panel forward until it is snug against the
midgate and then let the back of the panel down
being sure that the pegs align with the receivers.
2. Starting with cargo panel 1, place the latches in the
unlocked position. Place cargo panel 1 on the cargo
area rails while holding the back of the cargo
panel up.
2-59
4. Install cargo cover 2 next. Place the latches in the
unlocked position. Place the cargo cover panel on
the cargo area rails while holding the back of
the cargo panel up.
3. Push both left latches away from you to lock the
latches (remember that there are two latches on
each side for panel 1). You should hear a click when
each latch locks correctly. Lock the remaining two
right latches on panel 1.
For any cargo cover panel you must lock the left
latch in place before you can lock the right latch.
If you do not follow this exactly, the cargo cover
panels may not lock in place correctly.
2-60
Left Side Shown, Right Side Similar
Push the panel forward until it is snug against the
other panel and then let the back of the panel down
being sure that the pegs align with the receivers.
Left Side Shown, Right Side Similar
5. Push the latches away from you, starting with the
left latch, to lock the panel in place. You should
hear a click when each latch locks correctly.
Push the panel forward until it is snug against the
other panel and then let the back of the panel down
being sure that the pegs align with the receivers.
6. Install cargo cover 3 next. Place the latches in the
unlocked position. Place the cargo cover panel on
the cargo area rails while holding the back of
the cargo panel up.
2-61
Cargo Tie Downs
7. Push the latches away from you, starting with the
left latch, to lock the panel in place. You should
hear a click when each latch locks correctly.
2-62
There are cargo tie downs in the rear cargo area that
you can use to strap cargo in. The tie downs are
also used to secure the cargo cover panel storage bag.
For more information see “Cargo Cover Panels”
earlier in this section.
All-Weather Cargo Area
Your vehicle has the ability to operate in many different
configurations — cargo panels on or off, midgate up
or down, rear glass in or out. To allow the vehicle
to operate in these configurations, it is equipped with
features to help it resist the elements and protect cargo
inside the cargo area. Parts of the water management
system, which is designed to quickly direct water out of
the cargo box, are the top drain grates, side rail
channels, catch cups, midgate drain, cargo area floor
drains and the rubber cargo mat.
Even when the water management system is working
properly and the cover system is on, there may be some
instances (heavy rains, automated car washes, etc.)
when water may be present in the following areas:
A. Top drain grates
B. Removable front drain
grate (midgate drain grate)
C. Side rail channels and
catch cups
D. Front drains
E. Water drainage area
(around both sides of the
cargo box and tailgate side)
F. Rear drains
G. Cargo floor
H. Cargo mat
(central area of
mat is intended
to be dry)
2-63
Maintenance and Cleaning
To ensure that the water management system performs
properly, be sure that the midgate, tailgate and cover
system are fully closed and that each element of
the water management system is clean and not blocked
with debris. Follow the instructions given next in this
section for the proper procedures on cleaning each item
of the water management system.
Top Drain Grates – Removal and
Cleaning
The top drain grates are located near the rear glass on
both sides of the vehicle. You may need to clean the
grates and drains if there seems to be blockage.
To remove each drain grate, do the following:
1. Remove the cargo panels. See Cargo Cover Panels
on page 2-52 for more information.
2-64
To replace the drain grate do the following:
2. Grasp the edges of the grate and pull it out from
the vehicle. Flush the drain with clean water.
1. Line up the clips on the vehicle with the slots in
the grate.
2. When you are sure that the clips are aligned with
the slots, push the grate down firmly.
The grate should clip into place. Don’t force the grate if
it won’t clip into place; realign the clips with the holes
and try again.
2-65
Side Rail Channels
Midgate Drain Grate Removal and
Cleaning
The side rail channels are located on top of both sides
of the cargo area. You may want to flush them out
with clean water if you notice any debris collecting inside
of them.
When loading cargo into the cargo area, be careful not
to damage the rails.
The midgate drain grate is located near the base of the
midgate in the cargo area. You will find a removable
drain grate covering the drain.
2-66
After hauling dirt, wood chips, pebbles etc. you will
need to flush the midgate drain with water. But first
you will have to remove the drain grate by using
the following steps:
1. Lower the midgate. See Midgate on page 2-13 for
more information.
2. Pull up on the rear side of the drain grate.
3. Tilt the drain grate away from you and pull it
straight out.
Reverse the procedure to reinstall the drain grate.
Cargo Area Floor Drains
Your vehicle also has four cargo-area floor drains
located under the cargo mat near the sides of the cargo
area. These drains should be cleaned periodically to
allow water to exit the cargo area.
The cargo mat has cutouts for the drains. You can flush
the drains through the cutouts, but if the cargo area
is extremely dirty you can lift up the edges of the cargo
floor mat or take the whole mat out and flush the
drains with water.
2-67
Top-Box Storage
Sunroof
The vehicle may be equipped with a power sliding
sunroof. To open or close your sunroof, the ignition
needs to be on or RAP needs to be active. See
Retained Accessory Power (RAP) on page 2-28.
Your vehicle is equipped with top-box storage units on
both side of the vehicle. The passenger side top box
contains the tools you will need to change a flat tire.
Use the ignition/door key to unlock/lock it. Press the key
cylinder button and swing the lid open. Turn on the
cargo lamps (if equipped) if you need more light inside.
See “Cargo Lamps” under Exterior Lamps on
page 3-13 for more information on cargo lamps.
2-68
Press and release the rear side of the button located in
the front overhead console to express-open the glass
panel and sunshade. To close the glass panel,
press and hold the front of the button. The glass will not
be fully seated unless the button is held until the
glass stops moving. With the sunroof closed, press the
forward side of the button to open the sunroof to the
vent position.
The sunroof is also equipped with a sunshade which
can be pulled forward to block sun rays.
If a hand, arm, or other object is blocking the sunroof
glass panel as it is closing, the glass panel will stop
at the obstruction. After the obstruction is removed, the
glass panel can be closed or opened.
Use care not to leave the sunroof open for long periods
of time as debris may collect in the tracks.
If the battery has been recharged, disconnected or is
not working, the sunroof may need to be reprogrammed.
To do this, start the vehicle and press the forward
side of the sunroof button until the glass panel moves to
a fully closed position. Release, and press again to
move to the vent position which occurs when the sunroof
is fully tilted rearward. This will reset the memory and
enable the sunroof to function properly.
Vehicle Personalization
Memory Seat
If your vehicle has this
feature, the controls for
the memory function
are located on the
driver’s door.
These buttons are used to program and recall memory
settings for the driver’s seat, throttle and brake
pedals and both the driver’s and passenger’s outside
mirrors. The settings for these features can be saved
for up to two drivers.
2-69
To store the settings, do the following:
1. While the vehicle is in PARK (P), adjust the driver’s
seat, including the seatback recliner, lumbar, and
side wing area, throttle and brake pedals and
both of the outside mirrors to your preference.
2. Press and hold the 1 or 2 button of the memory
control for three seconds. A double chime will sound
to let you know that the position has been stored.
To store the seat exit position, do the following:
1. Press and release the 1 or 2 button. The seat will
move to the stored memory position.
2. Adjust the seat to the desired exit position.
3. Press and hold the exit button of the memory
control for three seconds. A double chime will sound
to let you know that the position has been stored
for the selected button (1 or 2).
To repeat the procedure for a second driver, follow the
preceding steps, but press the other numbered
memory control button.
To repeat the procedure for a second driver, follow the
preceding steps, but press the other numbered
memory control button.
Each time button 1 or 2 is pressed and released while
the vehicle is in PARK (P), a single chime will sound and
the memory position will be recalled.
To use the seat exit position, do one of the following:
To stop recall movement of the memory seat feature at
any time, press one of the memory buttons or power
seat controls.
Easy Exit Seat
The controls for this memory function are located on the
driver’s door.
B (Easy Exit Seat):
This button is used to program
and recall the desired driver’s seat position when
exiting/entering the vehicle. The seat position can be
saved for up to two drivers.
2-70
• Press the exit button on the memory control.
• Or, if this feature is activated in the Driver
Information Center (DIC), removing the key from
the ignition will move the seat to the exit position.
See “Easy Exit Seat” under DIC Vehicle Customization
on page 3-60 for more information on activating this
feature in the DIC.
Section 3
Instrument Panel
Instrument Panel Overview ...............................3-4
Hazard Warning Flashers ................................3-6
Other Warning Devices ...................................3-6
Horn .............................................................3-6
Tilt Wheel .....................................................3-7
Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever .........................3-7
Turn and Lane-Change Signals ........................3-8
Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer ..................3-9
Flash-to-Pass .................................................3-9
Windshield Wipers ..........................................3-9
Windshield Washer .......................................3-10
Cruise Control ..............................................3-10
Exterior Lamps .............................................3-13
Headlamps on Reminder ................................3-14
Daytime Running Lamps (DRL) .......................3-15
Automatic Headlamp System ..........................3-15
Fog Lamps ..................................................3-16
Exterior Cargo Lamps ....................................3-17
Instrument Panel Brightness ...........................3-17
Dome Lamps ...............................................3-18
Entry/Exit Lighting .........................................3-18
Reading Lamps ............................................3-18
Battery Run-Down Protection ..........................3-19
Ultrasonic Rear Parking Assist (URPA) ............3-19
Accessory Power Outlets ...............................3-22
Ashtrays and Cigarette Lighter ........................3-22
Analog Clock ...............................................3-23
Climate Controls ............................................3-23
Dual Automatic Climate Control System ...........3-23
Outlet Adjustment .........................................3-28
Warning Lights, Gages, and Indicators ............3-29
Instrument Panel Cluster ................................3-30
Speedometer and Odometer ...........................3-31
Tachometer .................................................3-31
Safety Belt Reminder Light .............................3-31
Airbag Readiness Light ..................................3-32
Passenger Airbag Status Indicator ...................3-33
Charging System Light ..................................3-34
Voltmeter Gage ............................................3-35
Brake System Warning Light ..........................3-35
Anti-Lock Brake System Warning Light .............3-37
Low Tire Pressure Warning Light ....................3-37
Traction Off Light ..........................................3-38
Engine Coolant Temperature Gage ..................3-38
Transmission Temperature Gage .....................3-39
Malfunction Indicator Lamp .............................3-40
Oil Pressure Gage ........................................3-42
Security Light ...............................................3-43
Cruise Control Light ......................................3-44
Highbeam On Light .......................................3-44
Tow/Haul Mode Light ....................................3-44
Fuel Gage ...................................................3-45
Low Fuel Warning Light .................................3-45
3-1
Section 3
Instrument Panel
Driver Information Center (DIC) .......................3-46
DIC Operation and Displays ...........................3-47
DIC Warnings and Messages .........................3-50
DIC Vehicle Customization .............................3-60
Audio System(s) .............................................3-66
Setting the Time ...........................................3-66
Radio with Cassette and CD ..........................3-67
Rear Seat Entertainment System ....................3-80
Navigation/Radio System ...............................3-90
Rear Seat Audio (RSA) .................................3-91
CD Changer ................................................3-92
3-2
Theft-Deterrent Feature ..................................3-95
Audio Steering Wheel Controls .......................3-96
Radio Reception ...........................................3-97
Care of Your Cassette Tape Player .................3-97
Care of Your CDs and DVDs .........................3-98
Care of Your CD Player ................................3-98
Care of Your CD and DVD Player ...................3-99
Fixed Mast Antenna ......................................3-99
XM™ Satellite Radio Antenna System .............3-99
Chime Level Adjustment ................................3-99
✍ NOTES
3-3
Instrument Panel Overview
3-4
The main components of your instrument panel are the following:
A. Air Outlets. See Outlet Adjustment on page 3-28.
B. Exterior Lamps Control. See Exterior Lamps
on page 3-13.
C. Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever. See Turn
Signal/Multifunction Lever on page 3-7.
D. OnStar® and Radio Steering Wheel Buttons. See
OnStar® System on page 2-44 and Audio Steering
Wheel Controls on page 3-96.
E. Instrument Panel Cluster. See Instrument Panel
Cluster on page 3-30.
F. Shift Lever/Tow/Haul Selector Button. See Automatic
Transmission Operation on page 2-31 and Tow/Haul
Mode on page 2-33.
G. Audio System. See Audio System(s) on page 3-66.
Navigation/Radio System (if equipped). See
Navigation/Radio System on page 3-90.
H. Dome Override Button. See Dome Lamps
on page 3-18.
I. Cargo/Top-Box Lamps Button. See Exterior Cargo
Lamps on page 3-17.
J. Fog Lamps Button. See Fog Lamps on page 3-16.
K. Driver Information Center (DIC) Buttons. See
Driver Information Center (DIC) on page 3-46.
L. Parking Brake Release. See Parking Brake
on page 2-34.
M. Tilt Lever. See Tilt Wheel on page 3-7.
N. Climate Control System. See Dual Automatic
Climate Control System on page 3-23.
O. Compact Disc Changer. See CD Changer
on page 3-92.
P. Storage Area. See Instrument Panel Storage Area
on page 2-50.
Q. Clock. See Analog Clock on page 3-23.
R. Ultrasonic Rear Parking Assist Button.
See Ultrasonic Rear Parking Assist (URPA)
on page 3-19.
S. StabiliTrak® Button. See StabiliTrak® System
on page 4-8.
T. Glove Box. See Glove Box on page 2-50.
3-5
Hazard Warning Flashers
Other Warning Devices
Your hazard warning flashers let you warn others. They
also let police know you have a problem. Your front
and rear turn signal lamps will flash on and off.
If you carry reflective triangles, you can set them up at
the side of the road about 300 feet (100 m) behind
your vehicle.
The hazard warning
flasher button is located
on top of the steering
column.
Your hazard warning flashers work no matter what
position your key is in, and even if the key is not in the
ignition.
Press the button to make the front and rear turn signal
lamps flash on and off. Press the button again to
turn the flashers off.
When the hazard warning flashers are on, your turn
signals will not work.
3-6
Horn
To sound the horn, press the center pad on the steering
wheel.
Tilt Wheel
Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever
The tilt steering wheel allows you to adjust the steering
wheel before you drive. You can raise it to the highest
level to give your legs more room when you enter
and exit the vehicle.
The lever on the left side of the steering column
includes the following:
• G Turn and Lane Change Signals. Turn and
Lane-Change Signals on page 3-8.
• 3 Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer. Headlamp
High/Low-Beam Changer on page 3-9.
The tilt lever is located on the driver’s side of the
steering column under the turn signal lever.
To tilt the wheel, hold the steering wheel and pull the
lever. Move the steering wheel to a comfortable
level, then release the lever to lock the wheel in place.
• Flash-to-Pass Feature. See Flash-to-Pass on
page 3-9.
• N Windshield Wipers. See Windshield Wipers
on page 3-9.
3-7
An arrow on the instrument
panel cluster will flash in
the direction of the
turn or lane change.
• L Windshield Washer. See Windshield Washer
on page 3-10.
• I Cruise Control. Cruise Control on page 3-10.
For information on the exterior lamps, see Exterior
Lamps on page 3-13 later in this section.
Turn and Lane-Change Signals
The turn signal has two upward (for right) and two
downward (for left) positions. These positions allow you
to signal a turn or a lane change.
To signal a turn, move the lever all the way up or down.
When the turn is finished, the lever will return
automatically.
To signal a lane change, just raise or lower the lever
until the arrow starts to flash. Hold it there until you
complete your lane change. The lever will return by itself
when you release it.
As you signal a turn or a lane change, if the arrows
flash more quickly than normal, a signal bulb may
be burned out and other drivers won’t see your turn
signal.
If a bulb is burned out, replace it to help avoid an
accident. If the arrows don’t go on at all when you signal
a turn, check for burned-out bulbs and a blown fuse.
See Instrument Panel Fuse Block on page 5-106
and Underhood Fuse Block on page 5-109.
Turn Signal On Chime
If your turn signal is left on for more than 3/4 of a mile
(1.2 km), a chime will sound at each flash of the
turn signal and the message TURN SIGNAL ON will
also appear in the DIC. To turn the chime and message
off, move the turn signal lever to the off position.
3-8
Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer
53(Headlamp High/Low Beam Changer):
To change the headlamps from low to high beam,
push the lever toward the instrument panel. To return
to low-beam headlamps, pull the multifunction lever
toward you. Then release it.
When the high beams are
on, this indicator light on
the instrument panel
cluster will also be on.
Flash-to-Pass
This feature lets you use your high-beam headlamps to
signal a driver in front of you that you want to pass.
It works even if your headlamps are in the automatic
position.
To use it, pull the turn signal lever toward you, then
release it.
If your headlamps are in the automatic position or on
low beam, your high-beam headlamps will turn on.
They’ll stay on as long as you hold the lever toward you.
The high-beam indicator on the instrument panel
cluster will come on. Release the lever to return to
normal operation.
Windshield Wipers
You control the windshield wipers by turning the band
with the wiper symbol on it.
8 (Mist):
For a single wiping cycle, turn the band to
mist. Hold it there until the wipers start. Then let go.
The wipers will stop after one wipe. If you want
more wipes, hold the band on mist longer.
N (Delay):
You can set the wiper speed for a long or
short delay between wipes. This can be very useful
in light rain or snow. Turn the band to choose the delay
time. The closer to the top of the lever, the shorter
the delay.
6 (Low Speed): For steady wiping at low speed,
turn the band away from you to the first solid band past
the delay settings.
3-9
1 (High Speed):
For high-speed wiping, turn the
band further, to the second solid band past the
delay settings.
9(Off):
Cruise Control
9(Off): This position
turns the system off.
To stop the wipers, move the band to off.
Be sure to clear ice and snow from the wiper blades
before using them. If they’re frozen to the windshield,
carefully loosen or thaw them. If your blades do become
worn or damaged, get new blades or blade inserts.
Windshield Washer
L (Washer Fluid):
There is a paddle marked with the
windshield washer symbol at the top of the multifunction
lever. To spray washer fluid on the windshield, push
the paddle. The wipers will clear the window and then
either stop or return to your preset speed.
R (On):
This position activates the system.
+ (Resume/Accelerate): Push the lever to this symbol
to make the vehicle accelerate or resume to a
previously set speed.
{CAUTION:
T (Set):
In freezing weather, do not use your washer
until the windshield is warmed. Otherwise the
washer fluid can form ice on the windshield,
blocking your vision.
With cruise control, you can maintain a speed of about
25 mph (40 km/h) or more without keeping your foot
on the accelerator. This can really help on long
trips. Cruise control does not work at speeds below
about 25 mph (40 km/h).
3-10
Press this button to set the speed.
If you apply your brakes, the cruise control will shut off.
Setting Cruise Control
{CAUTION:
{CAUTION:
Cruise control can be dangerous where you
cannot drive safely at a steady speed. So, do
not use your cruise control on winding roads
or in heavy traffic.
If you leave your cruise control on when you
are not using cruise, you might hit a button
and go into cruise when you do not want to.
You could be startled and even lose control.
Keep the cruise control switch off until you
want to use cruise control.
Cruise control can be dangerous on slippery
roads. On such roads, fast changes in tire
traction can cause needless wheel spinning,
and you could lose control. Do not use cruise
control on slippery roads.
1. Move the cruise control switch to on.
2. Get up to the speed you want.
3. Press in the set button at the end of the lever and
release it.
4. Take your foot off the accelerator pedal.
The cruise light on the
instrument panel will
illuminate when the cruise
control is engaged.
3-11
Resuming a Set Speed
Suppose you set your cruise control at a desired speed
and then you apply the brake. This, of course,
disengages the cruise control. But you do not need to
reset it.
Once you’re going about 25 mph (40 km/h) or more, you
can move the cruise control switch briefly from on to
resume/accelerate.
You will go right back up to your chosen speed and
stay there.
If you hold the switch at resume/accelerate the vehicle
will keep going faster until you release the switch or
apply the brake. So unless you want to go faster, do not
hold the switch at resume/accelerate.
• Move the cruise switch from on to
resume/accelerate. Hold it there until you get up to
the speed you want, and then release the switch.
To increase your speed in very small amounts,
move the switch briefly to resume/accelerate.
Each time you do this, your vehicle will go about
1 mph (1.6 km/h) faster.
Reducing Speed While Using Cruise
Control
• Press in the button at the end of the lever until you
reach the lower speed you want, then release it.
• To slow down in very small amounts, briefly press
the set button. Each time you do this, you will go
about 1 mph (1.6 km/h) slower.
Increasing Speed While Using Cruise
Control
Passing Another Vehicle While Using
Cruise Control
There are two ways to go to a higher speed:
Use the accelerator pedal to increase your speed.
When you take your foot off the pedal, your vehicle will
slow down to the cruise control speed you set earlier.
• Use the accelerator pedal to get to the higher
speed. Press the set button at the end of the lever,
then release the button and the accelerator
pedal. You will now cruise at the higher speed.
If the accelerator pedal is held longer than
60 seconds, cruise control will turn off.
3-12
Using Cruise Control on Hills
Erasing Speed Memory
How well your cruise control will work on hills depends
upon your speed, load and the steepness of the
hills. When going up steep hills, you may want to step
on the accelerator pedal to maintain your speed.
When going downhill, you may have to brake or shift to
a lower gear to keep your speed down. Of course,
applying the brake takes you out of cruise control. Many
drivers find this to be too much trouble and do not
use cruise control on steep hills.
When you turn off the cruise control or the ignition,
your cruise control set speed memory is erased.
Exterior Lamps
Ending Cruise Control
To turn off the cruise control, do one of the following:
•
•
•
•
Step lightly on the brake pedal,
move the cruise control switch to off, or
shift the transmission to NEUTRAL (N).
If your vehicle has the StabiliTrak® feature,
cruise control will turn off if road conditions
cause StabiliTrak® to activate.
• If the accelerator pedal is held longer than
60 seconds, cruise control will turn off.
The control on the driver’s side of your instrument panel
operates the exterior lamps.
The cruise control will turn off automatically if the
traction control system or StabiliTrak® system activate,
if your vehicle is equipped with either feature.
3-13
The exterior lamp control has four positions:
2(Headlamps):
9(Off): Turn the knob to this position and release
it to turn off all exterior lamps including the DRL. To turn
any lamps back on when in the off mode, turn the
knob to the desired lamp mode. To return to the AUTO
mode, turn the knob to the off position and release
it. The off or AUTO mode will also cancel and the lamps
will return to the AUTO when the vehicle is turned off.
This mode is not available for vehicles sold in Canada.
When the vehicle is turned off and the headlamps are in
AUTO, the headlamps may automatically remain on
for a set time. You can change this delay time using the
DIC. See Driver Information Center (DIC) on page 3-46.
AUTO: Turn the control to this position to put the
system into automatic headlamp mode. The Daytime
Running Lamps (DRL) will also be activated if it is light
enough outside.
; (Parking Lamps):
Turn the control to this position
to turn on the parking lamps, together with the
following:
•
•
•
•
Sidemarker Lamps
Taillamps
License Plate Lamps
Instrument Panel Lights
3-14
Turn the control to this position to
turn on the headlamps, together with the previously
listed lamps and lights.
You can switch your headlamps from low to high-beam
by pushing the turn signal/multifunction lever toward
the instrument panel.
Headlamps on Reminder
If a door is open, a reminder chime will sound when your
headlamps or parking lamps are manually turned on and
your key is out of the ignition. To turn off the chime, turn
the headlamp switch to off or AUTO and then back on.
In the AUTO mode, the headlamps turn off once the
ignition is in LOCK or may remain on until the headlamp
delay ends (if enabled in the DIC).
Daytime Running Lamps (DRL)
Automatic Headlamp System
Daytime Running Lamps (DRL) can make it easier for
others to see the front of your vehicle during the
day. DRL can be helpful in many different driving
conditions, but they can be especially helpful in the short
periods after dawn and before sunset. Fully functional
daytime running lamps are required on all vehicles
first sold in Canada.
When it is dark enough outside and the headlamp
switch is in AUTO, your automatic headlamp system will
turn on your headlamps at the normal brightness
along with other lamps such as the taillamps,
sidemarker, parking lamps, roof marker lamps and the
instrument panel lights. The radio lights will also be dim.
The DRL system will come on when the following
conditions are met:
•
•
•
•
The ignition is on,
the exterior lamps control is in AUTO,
the transmission is not in PARK (P), and
the light sensor determines it is daytime.
When the DRL are on, only your DRL lamps will be on.
The taillamps, sidemarker and other lamps won’t be
on. The instrument panel won’t be lit up either.
When it begins to get dark, the automatic headlamp
system will switch from DRL to the headlamps.
As with any vehicle, you should turn on the regular
headlamp system when you need it.
To turn off the automatic headlamp system, turn the
exterior lamps switch to the off position and then
release. Turning off the automatic headlamp system
with the headlamp switch is not available for vehicles
first sold in Canada. For vehicles first sold in Canada,
you can turn off the automatic headlamp system
when parked at night by applying the parking brake
before starting your vehicle. The headlamps will remain
off once the vehicle is started for as long as you are
parked. If you release the parking brake, the lights will
turn on. If the parking brake is not released before
you begin to drive, the exterior lamps will turn on
above 2 mph (3.2 km/h).
Your vehicle has a light sensor located on the top of
the instrument panel. Be sure it is not covered, or
the system will be on whenever the ignition is on.
3-15
The system may also turn on your headlamps when
driving through a parking garage, heavy overcast
weather or a tunnel. This is normal.
There is a delay in the transition between the daytime
and nighttime operation of the Daytime Running
Lamps (DRL) and the automatic headlamp systems so
that driving under bridges or bright overhead street
lights does not affect the system. The DRL and
automatic headlamp system will only be affected when
the light sensor sees a change in lighting lasting
longer than the delay.
If you start your vehicle in a dark garage, the automatic
headlamp system will come on immediately. Once
you leave the garage, it will take approximately
one minute for the automatic headlamp system to
change to DRL if it is light outside. During that delay,
your instrument panel cluster may not be as bright
as usual. Make sure your instrument panel brightness
control is in the full bright position. See Instrument Panel
Brightness on page 3-17.
3-16
Fog Lamps
If your vehicle has fog lamps you can use them for
better vision in foggy or misty conditions. Your parking
lamps and/or low-beam headlamps must be on for
your fog lamps to work.
The fog lamp button is
located on the left side of
your instrument panel.
Press the button to turn the fog lamps on while the
headlamps or parking lamps are on. Press the button
again to turn them off. An indicator light will glow
near the button when the fog lamps are on.
Remember, fog lamps alone will not give off as much
light as your headlamps. Never use your fog lamps
in the dark without turning on the headlamps.
The cargo lamps symbol light will come on in the
instrument panel cluster when the cargo lamps are
on and the ignition key is turned to run.
The fog lamps will go off whenever your high-beam
headlamps come on. When the high beams go off, the
fog lamps will come on again.
Instrument Panel Brightness
The fog lamps will be cancelled after the ignition is
turned off. If you still want to use the fog lamps after you
restart the vehicle, you will need to press the fog
lamp button again.
Exterior Cargo Lamps
You can use the cargo lamps if you need more light in
the cargo area of your vehicle or in the top-box
storage units. Some vehicles will only have a cargo
lamp in the passenger side top box.
The thumbwheel for this feature is located next to the
exterior lamps control.
D (Instrument Panel Lights): Turn the thumbwheel
up or down to brighten or dim the instrument panel
lights and the radio display. This will only work if
the headlamps or parking lamps are on.
To turn on the dome lamps, with the vehicle doors
closed, turn the thumbwheel all the way up.
Press the button, with this
symbol to turn the cargo
lamps on or off.
3-17
Dome Lamps
Entry/Exit Lighting
The dome lamps will come on when you open a door
or the midgate, if equipped, and will turn off when
all doors or midgate are closed.
Your vehicle is equipped with an illuminated entry/exit
feature.
You can also turn the dome lamps on by turning the
thumbwheel, located next to the exterior lamp control,
all the way up. In this position, the dome lamps will
remain on whether a door is opened or closed.
E (Dome Override):
Press this button, located below
the exterior lamp control, to turn dome lamps off even
while a door is opened. To return the lamps to automatic
operation, press the button again and it will return to
the out position. In this position, the dome lamps
will come on when you open a door.
3-18
When a door is opened or the key is removed from the
ignition, the dome lamps will come on if the dome
override button is in the out position.
Reading Lamps
If your vehicle has reading
lamps, press the button
located next to the lamp to
turn it on or off. The
lamps can be adjusted to
point in the direction
you want.
Ultrasonic Rear Parking
Assist (URPA)
Your vehicle may also have reading lamps in other
locations. To turn on or off, press the button located next
to the lamp. The lamps cannot be adjusted.
Battery Run-Down Protection
This feature shuts off the dome lamps if they are left on
for more than 10 minutes when the ignition is in lock.
This will keep your battery from running down.
The Ultrasonic Rear Parking Assist (URPA) system is
designed to help you park, while the vehicle is in
REVERSE (R). It operates only at very low speeds, less
than 3 mph (5 km/h). URPA can help make parking
easier and to help you avoid colliding with objects such
as parked vehicles. The URPA system can detect
objects up to 5 feet (1.5 m) behind the vehicle, and tell
you how close these objects are from your rear
bumper.
Your vehicle’s URPA operates when the shift lever is
moved into REVERSE (R) and the vehicle speed is less
than 3 mph (5 km/h). Four ultrasonic sensors located at
the rear bumper are used to detect the distance to the
object.
3-19
The URPA display is
located inside the vehicle,
near the rear window.
It has three color-coded
lights used to provide
distance and system
information to the driver.
URPA can be turned off by
pressing the rear park aid
disable button located
near the climate control
system and radio. You will
not see any lights on
the rear display if URPA
is turned off.
3-20
{CAUTION:
Even with the Ultrasonic Rear Park Assist
system, the driver must check carefully before
backing up. The system does not operate above
typical backing speeds of 3 mph (5 km/h) while
parking. And, the system does not detect
objects that are more than 5 feet (1.5 meters)
behind the vehicle.
So, unless you check carefully behind you
before and when you back up, you could strike
children, pedestrians, bicyclists or pets behind
you, and they could be injured or killed.
Whether or not you are using rear park assist,
always check carefully behind your vehicle
before you back up and then watch closely as
you do.
How the System Works
Unless disabled, the URPA will turn on automatically
when the shift lever is moved into REVERSE (R). When
the system turns on, the three lights on the display
will illuminate for one and a half seconds to let you know
that the system is working. If your vehicle is moving in
REVERSE (R) at a speed greater than 3 mph (5 km/h),
the red light will flash to remind you that the system
does not work at a speed greater than 3 mph (5 km/h).
If an object is detected at a REVERSE (R) speed of
less than 3 mph (5 km/h), one of the following will occur:
A chime will sound the first time an object is detected
between 20 inches (0.5 m) and 5 feet (1.5 m) away.
Description
English
Metric
amber light
5 ft.
1.5 m
amber/amber lights
40 in.
1.0 m
amber/amber/red lights &
continuous chime
20 in.
0.5 m
amber/amber/red lights
flashing & continuous
chime
1 ft
0.3 m
URPA cannot detect objects that are above tailgate level.
In order for the rear sensors to recognize an object, it
must be within detection range behind the vehicle.
Notice: If you use URPA while the tailgate is
lowered, it may not detect an object behind your
vehicle, and you might back into the object and
damage your vehicle. Always verify the tailgate is
closed when using URPA or turn off URPA when
driving with the tailgate lowered.
When the System Does Not Seem to
Work Properly
The light may flash red when the vehicle is in
REVERSE (R) if the ultrasonic sensors are not kept
clean. So be sure to keep your rear bumper free of mud,
dirt, snow, ice and slush. Other conditions that may
affect system performance include things like the
vibrations from a jackhammer or the compression of
air brakes on a very large truck. If after cleaning the
rear bumper and then driving forward at least
15 mph (25 km/h), the display continues to flash red,
see your dealer.
If a trailer was attached to your vehicle, or a bicycle or
an object was on the back of, or hanging out of your
cargo area during your last drive cycle, the light
may also flash red. The light will continue to flash
whenever in REVERSE (R) until your vehicle is driven
forward at least 15 mph (25 km/h) without any
obstructions behind the vehicle.
For cleaning instructions, see Washing Your Vehicle on
page 5-99.
3-21
Accessory Power Outlets
Ashtrays and Cigarette Lighter
Your vehicle is equipped with many accessory power
outlets.
The front ashtray and lighter are located in the center
console near the cupholders. Press on the access door
to open it and use the ashtray and lighter.
One outlet is located in the center console. Press the
button on the side of the console door to access
the outlet.
There may also be an accessory power outlet located
on the back of the center console above the cupholder.
Do not try to put the cigarette lighter in any of the
accessory outlets.
Notice: Adding any electrical equipment to your
vehicle may damage it or keep other components
from working as they should. The repairs would not
be covered by your warranty. Check with your
dealer before adding electrical equipment.
Certain power accessory plugs may not be compatible
with the accessory power outlets and could result in
blown vehicle or adapter fuses. If you experience
a problem, see your dealer for additional information on
the accessory power plugs.
Notice: Improper use of the power outlet can cause
damage not covered by your warranty. Do not
hang any type of accessory or accessory bracket
from the plug because the power outlets are
designed for accessory power plugs only.
3-22
Notice: If you put papers or other flammable items
in the ashtray, hot cigarettes or other smoking
materials could ignite them and possibly damage
your vehicle. Never put flammable items in the
ashtray.
To remove the ashtray, pull it from the center console.
Slide it back in and push down to be sure it is secure.
To use the cigarette lighter, push it in all the way, and let
go. When it’s ready, it will pop back out by itself.
Notice: Holding a cigarette lighter in while it is
heating will not allow the lighter to back away from
the heating element when it is hot. Damage from
overheating may occur to the lighter or heating
element, or a fuse could be blown. Do not hold a
cigarette lighter in while it is heating. Do not
use anything other than the cigarette lighter in the
heating element.
Analog Clock
Climate Controls
To adjust the clock, do the following:
1. Locate the adjustment button to the lower left
corner of the clock.
Dual Automatic Climate Control
System
2. Push and hold the adjustment button to advance
the clock hands. Release the button before you
get to the desired time.
With this system, you can control the heating, cooling
and ventilation in your vehicle.
3. Push and release the button to increase the time by
one minute increments until the desired time is
reached.
You can select different climate control settings for the
driver and passengers.
3-23
Driver’s Side Temperature Knob
The driver’s side knob is used to adjust the temperature
of the air coming through the system on the driver’s
side. The temperature can be adjusted even if the
system is turned off. This is possible since outside air
will always flow through the system as the vehicle
is moving forward unless it is set to recirculation mode.
See “Recirculation” later in this section.
Turn the knob counterclockwise or clockwise to lower or
increase the cabin temperature. The display will show
the temperature setting decreasing or increasing and an
arrow pointing to the driver will be displayed under
and to the left of the temperature setting.
Passenger’s Side Temperature Knob
The passenger’s side knob can be used to change the
temperature of the air coming through the system
on the passenger’s side of the vehicle. The temperature
can be adjusted even if the system is turned off. This
is possible since outside air will always flow through the
system as the vehicle is moving forward unless it is
set to recirculation mode. See “Recirculation” later in this
section.
Turn the knob counterclockwise or clockwise to lower or
increase the cabin temperature. The display will show
the temperature setting decreasing or increasing and an
arrow pointing to the passenger will be displayed
under and to the right of the temperature setting.
3-24
The passenger’s temperature setting can be set to
match the driver’s temperature setting by pressing and
holding the AUTO button for four seconds. Both the
driver and passenger arrows will be displayed.
Automatic Operation
AUTO (Automatic): When automatic operation is
active the system will control the inside temperature,
the air delivery, and the fan speed.
Use the steps below to place the entire system in
automatic mode:
1. Press the AUTO button.
When AUTO is selected, the display will change to
show the current driver’s set temperature, delivery
mode and fan speed. Press the AUTO button again
within five seconds to display the passenger’s set
temperature.
If the driver’s and passenger’s temperature settings
are the same when AUTO is pressed, the
temperature setting and both arrows will be
displayed for five seconds along with the automatic
air delivery mode and fan speed. After the five
second update, the display will change to show the
temperature setting, both arrows and AUTO.
If the driver’s and passenger’s temperature settings
are not the same, the opposite side temperature
setting will be displayed for an additional five
seconds. To make the passenger’s temperature the
same as the driver’s press and hold the AUTO
button for about four seconds.
When auto is selected, the air conditioning operation
and air inlet will be automatically controlled. The
air conditioning compressor will run when the
outside temperature is over about 40°F (4°C). The
air inlet will normally be set to outside air. If it’s
hot outside, the air inlet may automatically switch to
recirculate inside air to help quickly cool down
your vehicle. The light on the button will illuminate
in recirculation.
2. Set the driver’s and passenger’s temperature.
To find your comfort setting, start with a 74°F (23°C)
temperature setting and allow about 20 minutes
for the system to regulate. Turn the driver’s or
passenger’s side temperature knob to adjust the
temperature setting as necessary. If you choose the
temperature setting of 60°F (15°C) the system
will remain at the maximum cooling setting. If you
choose the temperature setting of 90°F (32°C)
the system will remain at the maximum heat setting.
Choosing either maximum setting will not cause
the vehicle to heat or cool any faster.
Be careful not to cover the sensor located on the
top of the instrument panel near the windshield. This
sensor regulates air temperature based on sun
load, and also turns on your headlamps.
To avoid blowing cold air in cold weather, the
system will delay turning on the fan until warm air is
available. The length of delay depends on the
engine coolant temperature. Pressing the fan switch
will override this delay and change the fan to a
selected speed.
9(Off): Press this button to turn off the entire climate
control system. Outside air will still enter the vehicle,
and will be directed to the floor. This direction can
be changed by pressing the mode button. The
temperature can also be adjusted using either
temperature knob. Press the up or down arrows on the
fan switch, the defrost button, the AUTO button, or
the air conditioning button to turn the system on when
it is off.
3-25
Manual Operation
6 (Floor):
You may manually adjust the air delivery mode or fan
speed.
outlets.
w9x (Fan):
The switch with the fan symbol allows
you to manually adjust the fan speed. Press the up
arrow to increase fan speed and the down arrow
to decrease fan speed.
Pressing this button when the system is off will turn the
system on.
C (Mode): Press this button to manually change the
direction of the airflow in your vehicle. Keep pressing the
button until the desired mode appears on the display.
If you press the mode button to select an air delivery
mode, the display will change to show you the selected
air mode delivery. The display will then show the
current status of the system. When the system is turned
off, the display will go blank after displaying the
current status of the system.
H (Panel):
This setting will deliver air to the
instrument panel outlets.
) (Bi-Level):
This setting will deliver warmer air to
the floor and cooler air to the instrument panel outlets.
3-26
This setting will deliver air to the floor
- (Defog): See “Defogging and Defrosting” later in
this section.
@ (Recirculation):
Press this button to limit the
amount of outside air entering your vehicle. The light on
the recirculation button will glow. This is helpful when
you are trying to limit odors entering your vehicle and for
maximum air conditioning performance in hot weather.
Press this button again to allow outside air to enter
the vehicle. The light on the recirculation button will
go off.
Pressing this button also cancels the auto recirculation
feature. To resume the auto recirculation function,
press the AUTO button. Each time the vehicle is started,
the system will revert to the auto recirculation function.
If you select recirculation while in defrost, defog or
floor, the light in the button will flash and then go out to
let you know that this is not allowed. This is normal
and helps to prevent fogging.
When the weather is cool or damp, operating the
system in recirculation for extended periods of time may
cause fogging of the vehicle’s windows. To clear the
fog, select either defog or front defrost.
You may also notice that the A/C compressor will run
while in recirculation mode. This is normal and helps to
prevent fogging.
#(Air Conditioning):
Press this button to turn the air
conditioning (A/C) compressor on and off. The
snowflake symbol will appear on the display when the
A/C is on and will turn off when the air conditioning is off.
Pressing this button when the outside temperature is
too cool for air conditioning to be effective will make the
snowflake symbol flash three times and then turn off
to let you know that the air conditioning mode is
not available. If the air conditioning is on and the outside
temperature drops below a temperature which is too
cool for air conditioning to be effective, the snowflake
symbol will turn off to let you know that the air
conditioning mode has been canceled.
When air conditioning is selected or in AUTO mode,
the system will run the air conditioning automatically
to cool and dehumidify the air entering the vehicle.
If you select A/C off while in front defrost, defog
or recirculation, the A/C snowflake symbol will turn off,
but the A/C compressor will still run to help prevent
fogging.
On hot days, open the windows long enough to let hot
inside air escape. This reduces the time it takes for
your vehicle to cool down. Then keep your windows
closed for the air conditioner to work its best.
On cool, but sunny days while using manual operation
of the automatic system, use bi-level to deliver warm
air to the floor and cooler air to the instrument
panel outlets. To warm or cool the air delivered, turn
the temperature knob to the desired setting.
In AUTO mode the system will cool and dehumidify
the air inside the vehicle. Also while in AUTO mode,
the system will maximize its performance by using
recirculation as necessary.
9(Off): Press this button to turn off the entire climate
control system. Outside air will still enter the vehicle,
and will be directed to the floor. This direction can
be changed by pressing the mode button. The
temperature can also be adjusted using either
temperature knob. Press the up or down arrows on the
fan switch, the defrost button, the AUTO button, or
the air conditioning button to turn the system on when
it is off.
3-27
Defogging and Defrosting
You can use either defog or front defrost to clear fog or
frost from your windshield. Use the defog mode to
clear the windows of fog or moisture. Use the front
defrost button to defrost the front windshield.
- (Defog): Use this setting to clear the windows of
fog or moisture. Press the mode button to select
this setting. This setting will deliver air to the floor and
windshield outlets.
0 (Defrost):
Press this button to defrost the
windshield. The system will automatically control the fan
speed if you select defrost from AUTO mode. If the
outside temperature is 40°F (4°C) or warmer, your air
conditioning compressor will automatically run to
help dehumidify the air and dry the windshield.
Rear Window Defogger
If your vehicle has this feature, the lines you see on
the rear window warm the glass. The rear window
defogger uses a warming grid to remove fog from the
rear window.
3-28
< (Rear):
Press this button to turn the rear window
defogger on or off. An indicator light in the button
will come on to let you know that the rear window
defogger is activated.
The rear window defogger will turn off about 10 minutes
after the button is pressed. If you need additional
warming time, press the button again.
If your vehicle is equipped with heated mirrors this
button will activate them.
Notice: Using a razor blade or sharp object to
clear the inside rear window may damage the rear
window defogger. Repairs would not be covered
by your warranty. Do not clear the inside of the rear
window with sharp objects.
Outlet Adjustment
Your vehicle has air outlets located in the center and on
the side of your instrument panel that allow you to adjust
the direction and amount of airflow inside the vehicle.
Move the louvers up or down. Use the thumbwheel next
to or underneath the outlet to close the louvers. For the
most efficient airflow and temperature control, keep the
outlet in the fully opened position.
Operation Tips
• Keep the hood and front air inlets free of ice, snow,
or any other obstruction (such as leaves). The
heater and defroster will work far better, reducing
the chance of fogging the inside of your windows.
• Keep the air path under the front seats clear
of objects. This helps air to circulate throughout your
vehicle.
• Adding outside equipment to the front of your
vehicle, such as hood-air deflectors, etc., may affect
the performance of the heating and air conditioning
system. Check with your dealer before adding
equipment to the outside of your vehicle.
Warning Lights, Gages, and
Indicators
This part describes the warning lights and gages on
your vehicle. The pictures will help you locate them.
Warning lights and gages can signal that something is
wrong before it becomes serious enough to cause
an expensive repair or replacement. Paying attention to
your warning lights and gages could also save you
or others from injury.
Warning lights come on when there may be or is a
problem with one of your vehicle’s functions. As you
will see in the details on the next few pages, some
warning lights come on briefly when you start the engine
just to let you know they’re working. If you are familiar
with this section, you should not be alarmed when
this happens.
Gages can indicate when there may be or is a problem
with one of your vehicle’s functions. Often gages
and warning lights work together to let you know when
there’s a problem with your vehicle.
When one of the warning lights comes on and
stays on when you are driving, or when one of the
gages shows there may be a problem, check the
section that tells you what to do about it. Please follow
this manual’s advice. Waiting to do repairs can be
costly – and even dangerous. So please get to know
your warning lights and gages. They’re a big help.
Your vehicle also has a message center that works
along with the warning lights and gages. See Driver
Information Center (DIC) on page 3-46.
3-29
Instrument Panel Cluster
Your instrument panel cluster is designed to let you know at a glance how your vehicle is running. You’ll know how
fast you’re going, about how much fuel you have and many other things you’ll need to know to drive safely and
economically.
United States version shown, Canada similar.
3-30
Speedometer and Odometer
Safety Belt Reminder Light
Your speedometer lets you see your speed in both
miles per hour (mph) and kilometers per hour (km/h).
When the key is turned to RUN or START, a chime will
be provided for several seconds to remind people to
buckle their safety belts. The driver safety belt light will
also be provided and stay on for several seconds,
then it will flash for several more. You should buckle
your seat belt.
Your vehicle’s odometer works together with the
driver information center. You can set a Trip A and
Trip B odometer. See “Trip Information” under DIC
Operation and Displays on page 3-47.
The odometer mileage can be checked without the
vehicle running. Simply press the trip stem on the
instrument panel cluster.
If your vehicle ever needs a new odometer installed,
the new one will be set to the correct mileage total of
the old odometer.
Tachometer
Your tachometer displays the engine speed in
revolutions per minute (rpm).
If your vehicle is not
equipped with the
passenger sensing system,
this chime and light will be
repeated if the driver
remains unbuckled and the
vehicle is in motion.
See Passenger Sensing System on page 1-54 for more
information.
If the driver’s belt is buckled, neither the chime nor the
light will come on.
3-31
Airbag Readiness Light
There is an airbag readiness light on the instrument
panel, which shows the airbag symbol. The system
checks the airbag’s electrical system for malfunctions.
The light tells you if there is an electrical problem.
The system check includes the airbag sensors, the
airbag modules, the wiring and the crash sensing and
diagnostic module. For more information on the
airbag system, see Airbag System on page 1-46.
This light will come on
when you start your
vehicle, and it will flash
for a few seconds.
Then the light should go
out. This means the
system is ready.
If the airbag readiness light stays on after you start
the vehicle or comes on when you are driving,
your airbag system may not work properly. Have your
vehicle serviced right away.
3-32
{CAUTION:
If the airbag readiness light stays on after you
start your vehicle, it means the airbag system
may not be working properly. The airbags in
your vehicle may not inflate in a crash, or they
could even inflate without a crash. To help avoid
injury to yourself or others, have your vehicle
serviced right away if the airbag readiness light
stays on after you start your vehicle.
The airbag readiness light should flash for a few
seconds when you turn the ignition key to RUN. If the
light doesn’t come on then, have it fixed so it will
be ready to warn you if there is a problem.
Passenger Airbag Status Indicator
If your vehicle has the passenger sensing system
your rearview mirror will have a passenger airbag status
indicator.
If the word ON or the on symbol is lit on the passenger
airbag status indicator, it means that the right front
passenger’s frontal airbag is enabled (may inflate).
{CAUTION:
Passenger Airbag Status Indicator – United States
Passenger Airbag Status Indicator – Canada
When the ignition key is turned to RUN or START, the
passenger airbag status indicator will light ON and
OFF, or the symbol for on and off, for several seconds
as a system check. Then, after several more seconds,
the status indicator will light either ON or OFF, or either
the on or off symbol to let you know the status of the
right front passenger’s frontal airbag.
If the on indicator comes on when you have a
rear-facing child restraint installed in the right
front passenger’s seat, it means that the
passenger sensing system has not turned off
the passenger’s frontal airbag. A child in a
rear-facing child restraint can be seriously
injured or killed if the right front passenger’s
airbag inflates. This is because the back of the
rear-facing child restraint would be very close
to the inflating airbag. Do not use a rear-facing
child restraint in the right front passenger’s
seat unless the airbag has been turned off.
If the word OFF or the off symbol is lit on the airbag
status indicator, it means that the passenger sensing
system has turned off the right front passenger’s frontal
airbag. See Passenger Sensing System on page 1-54
for more on this, including important safety information.
3-33
If, after several seconds, all status indicator lights
remain on, or if there are no lights at all, there may
be a problem with the lights or the passenger sensing
system. See your dealer for service.
{CAUTION:
If the off indicator and the airbag readiness
light ever come on together, it means that
something may be wrong with the airbag
system. If this ever happens, have the vehicle
serviced promptly, because an adult-size
person sitting in the right front passenger
seat may not have the protection of the
frontal airbag. See Airbag Readiness Light
on page 3-32.
Charging System Light
The charging system light
will come on briefly when
you turn on the ignition,
but the engine is not
running, as a check to
show you it is working.
It should go out once the engine is running. If it stays
on, or comes on while you are driving, you may have a
problem with the charging system. It could indicate
that you have problems with a generator drive belt, or
another electrical problem. Have it checked right
away. Driving while this light is on could drain your
battery.
When this light comes on the DIC will also display the
battery not charging message. See DIC Warnings
and Messages on page 3-50.
If you must drive a short distance with the light on,
be certain to turn off all your accessories, such as the
radio and air conditioner.
3-34
Voltmeter Gage
When your engine is not
running, but the ignition
is in RUN, this gage shows
your battery’s state of
charge in DC volts.
When the engine is running, the gage shows the
condition of the charging system. The gage may
transition from a higher to lower or a lower to higher
reading, this is normal. Readings between the low and
high warning zones indicate the normal operating range.
Readings in the low warning zone may occur when a
large number of electrical accessories are operating in
the vehicle and the engine is left at an idle for an
extended period. This condition is normal since the
charging system is not able to provide full power
at engine idle. As engine speeds are increased, this
condition should correct itself as higher engine speeds
allow the charging system to create maximum power.
You can only drive for a short time with the reading in
either warning zone. If you must drive, turn off all
unnecessary accessories.
Readings in either warning zone indicate a possible
problem in the electrical system. Have the vehicle
serviced as soon as possible.
Brake System Warning Light
With the ignition on, the brake system warning
light will flash when you set the parking brake. The
light will flash if the parking brake doesn’t release fully.
If you try to drive with the parking brake engaged, a
chime will sound when the vehicle speed is greater
than 3 mph (5 km/h).
Your vehicle’s hydraulic brake system is divided into
two parts. If one part isn’t working, the other part can
still work and stop you. For good braking, though,
you need both parts working well.
If the warning light comes on and a chime sounds there
could be a brake problem. Have your brake system
inspected right away.
3-35
{CAUTION:
United States
Canada
This light should come on briefly when you turn the
ignition key to RUN. If it doesn’t come on then, have it
fixed so it will be ready to warn you if there’s a
problem.
If the light comes on while you are driving, pull off the
road and stop carefully. You may notice that the pedal is
harder to push or may go closer to the floor. It may
take longer to stop. If the light is still on, have the vehicle
towed for service. See Towing Your Vehicle on
page 4-50.
3-36
Your brake system may not be working
properly if the brake system warning light is
on. Driving with the brake system warning light
on can lead to an accident. If the light is still
on after you have pulled off the road and
stopped carefully, have the vehicle towed for
service.
Anti-Lock Brake System
Warning Light
With the anti-lock brake
system, this light will come
on when you start your
engine and may stay on
for several seconds.
That’s normal. If the light doesn’t come on then,
have it fixed so it will be ready to warn you if there
is a problem.
If the light stays on, or comes on when you’re driving,
your vehicle needs service. You will also hear a
chime sound when the light is on steady. If the regular
brake system warning light isn’t on, you still have
brakes, but you don’t have anti-lock brakes. If the
regular brake system warning light is also on you don’t
have anti-lock brakes and there’s a problem with
your regular brakes. In addition to both lights, you will
also hear a chime sound on the first occurrence of
a problem and each time the vehicle is shut off and
then restarted. See Brake System Warning Light
on page 3-35.
Low Tire Pressure Warning Light
This light and a chime will
come on along with the
CHECK TIRE PRESSURE
message in the DIC
when one or more of your
tires is significantly
under-inflated.
This light will also come on briefly when you turn the
ignition to RUN.
See “CHECK TIRE PRESSURE” under DIC Warnings
and Messages on page 3-50 for more information.
Stop and check your tires as soon as possible,
and inflate them to the proper pressure as indicated on
the vehicle’s certification/tire label. See Tires on
page 5-60 for more information on your vehicle’s tires.
3-37
Traction Off Light
Engine Coolant Temperature Gage
If you have the
StabiliTrak® system,
this light should come
on briefly when you turn
the ignition to RUN.
If the light doesn’t come on then, the system may
require service; have it fixed so it will be there to warn
you if the system is turned off.
For more information on the traction off light, see
StabiliTrak® System on page 4-8.
United States
Canada
This gage shows the engine coolant temperature.
It also provides an indicator of how hard your vehicle is
working. During a majority of the operation, the gage
will read 210°F (100°C) or less. If you are pulling a load
or going up hills, it is normal for the temperature to
fluctuate and approach the 250°F (122°C) mark. If the
gage reaches the 260°F (125°C) mark, it indicates
that the cooling system is working beyond its capacity.
See Engine Overheating on page 5-26.
3-38
Transmission Temperature Gage
United States
Canada
Your vehicle is equipped with a transmission
temperature gage.
When your ignition is on, the gage shows the temperature
of the transmission fluid. The normal operating range is
from 180°F (82°C) to about 200°F (93°C).
At approximately 265°F (130°C), the DIC will display a
TRANSMISSION HOT message and the transmission
will enter a transmission protection mode. When
the transmission enters the protection mode, you may
notice a change in the transmission shifting patterns.
The transmission will return to normal shifting patterns
when the transmission fluid temperature falls below
260°F (127°C).
See Driver Information Center (DIC) on page 3-46 for
further information.
If the transmission fluid reaches temperatures of
approximately 275°F (135°C) or greater, the DIC will
display a TRANS HOT IDLE ENGINE warning message
and a chime will sound. Pull the vehicle off the
roadway when it is safe to do so. Set the parking brake,
place the transmission in PARK (P) and allow the
engine to idle until the transmission temperature falls
below 260°F (127°C). If the transmission continues
to operate above 265°F (130°C), please contact your
nearest dealer or the Roadside Assistance Center.
Notice: If you drive your vehicle with the
transmission temperature gage above normal
operating range, you can damage the transmission.
This could lead to costly repairs that would not
be covered by your warranty. Do not drive your
vehicle while the transmission temperature gage
reading is above normal. See your dealer for service.
The following situations can cause the transmission to
operate at higher temperatures:
• Towing a trailer,
• hot outside air temperatures,
• hauling a large or heavy load,
• low transmission fluid level,
• high transmission fluid level,
• restricted air flow to the radiator.
3-39
Malfunction Indicator Lamp
Check Engine Light
Your vehicle is equipped
with a computer which
monitors operation of the
fuel, ignition, and emission
control systems.
This system is called OBD II (On-Board
Diagnostics-Second Generation) and is intended to
assure that emissions are at acceptable levels for the
life of the vehicle, helping to produce a cleaner
environment. The check engine light comes on to
indicate that there is a problem and service is required.
Malfunctions often will be indicated by the system
before any problem is apparent. This may prevent more
serious damage to your vehicle. This system is also
designed to assist your service technician in correctly
diagnosing any malfunction.
3-40
Notice: If you keep driving your vehicle with this
light on, after awhile, your emission controls
may not work as well, your fuel economy may not
be as good, and your engine may not run as
smoothly. This could lead to costly repairs that may
not be covered by your warranty.
Notice: Modifications made to the engine,
transmission, exhaust, intake, or fuel system of your
vehicle or the replacement of the original tires with
other than those of the same Tire Performance
Criteria (TPC) can affect your vehicle’s emission
controls and may cause this light to come on.
Modifications to these systems could lead to costly
repairs not covered by your warranty. This may also
result in a failure to pass a required Emission
Inspection/Maintenance test.
This light should come on, as a check to show you it is
working, when the ignition is on and the engine is
not running. If the light does not come on, have it
repaired. This light will also come on during a
malfunction in one of two ways:
• Light Flashing — A misfire condition has been
detected. A misfire increases vehicle emissions and
may damage the emission control system on your
vehicle. Diagnosis and service may be required.
• Light On Steady — An emission control system
malfunction has been detected on your vehicle.
Diagnosis and service may be required.
If the Light is Flashing
Reducing vehicle speed
The diagnostic system can determine if the fuel cap has
been left off or improperly installed. A loose or missing
fuel cap will allow fuel to evaporate into the atmosphere.
A few driving trips with the cap properly installed
should turn the light off.
Avoiding hard accelerations
Did you just drive through a deep puddle of water?
Avoiding steep uphill grades
If so, your electrical system may be wet. The condition
will usually be corrected when the electrical system
dries out. A few driving trips should turn the light off.
The following may prevent more serious damage to
your vehicle:
•
•
•
•
If you are towing a trailer, reduce the amount of
cargo being hauled as soon as it is possible
If the light stops flashing and remains on steady, see
“If the Light Is On Steady” following.
If the light continues to flash, when it is safe to do so,
stop the vehicle. Find a safe place to park your vehicle.
Turn the key off, wait at least 10 seconds and restart
the engine. If the light remains on steady, see “If
the Light Is On Steady” following. If the light is still
flashing, follow the previous steps, and see your dealer
for service as soon as possible.
If the Light Is On Steady
You may be able to correct the emission system
malfunction by considering the following:
Did you recently put fuel into your vehicle?
If so, reinstall the fuel cap, making sure to fully
install the cap. See Filling Your Tank on page 5-8.
Have you recently changed brands of fuel?
If so, be sure to fuel your vehicle with quality fuel. See
Gasoline Octane on page 5-5. Poor fuel quality will
cause your engine not to run as efficiently as designed.
You may notice this as stalling after start-up, stalling
when you put the vehicle into gear, misfiring, hesitation
on acceleration, or stumbling on acceleration. (These
conditions may go away once the engine is warmed up.)
This will be detected by the system and cause the
light to turn on.
If you experience one or more of these conditions,
change the fuel brand you use. It will require at least
one full tank of the proper fuel to turn the light off.
If none of the above steps have made the light turn off,
your dealer can check the vehicle. Your dealer has
the proper test equipment and diagnostic tools to fix any
mechanical or electrical problems that may have
developed.
3-41
Emissions Inspection and Maintenance
Programs
Oil Pressure Gage
Some state/provincial and local governments have or
may begin programs to inspect the emission control
equipment on your vehicle. Failure to pass this
inspection could prevent you from getting a vehicle
registration.
Here are some things you need to know to help your
vehicle pass an inspection:
Your vehicle will not pass this inspection if the check
engine light is on or not working properly.
Your vehicle will not pass this inspection if the OBD
(on-board diagnostic) system determines that critical
emission control systems have not been completely
diagnosed by the system. The vehicle would be
considered not ready for inspection. This can happen if
you have recently replaced your battery or if your
battery has run down. The diagnostic system is
designed to evaluate critical emission control systems
during normal driving. This may take several days
of routine driving. If you have done this and your vehicle
still does not pass the inspection for lack of OBD
system readiness, your GM dealer can prepare the
vehicle for inspection.
3-42
United States
Canada
The oil pressure gage shows the engine oil pressure in
psi (pounds per square inch) when the engine is
running. Canadian vehicles indicate pressure in kPa
(kilopascals).
Oil pressure may vary with engine speed, outside
temperature and oil viscosity, but readings above the
low pressure zone indicate the normal operating range.
A reading in the low pressure zone may be caused
by a dangerously low oil level or some other problem
causing low oil pressure. Check your oil as soon
as possible. See DIC Warnings and Messages on
page 3-50.
Security Light
{CAUTION:
Do not keep driving if the oil pressure is low.
If you do, your engine can become so hot that
it catches fire. You or others could be burned.
Check your oil as soon as possible and have
your vehicle serviced.
Notice: Lack of proper engine oil maintenance
may damage the engine. The repairs would not
be covered by your warranty. Always follow
the maintenance schedule in this manual for
changing engine oil.
This light will come on
briefly when you turn
the key toward START.
The light will stay on until
the engine starts.
If the light flashes, the Passlock® system has entered a
tamper mode. If the vehicle fails to start, see Passlock®
on page 2-26.
If the light comes on continuously while driving and
stays on, there may be a problem with the Passlock®
system. Your vehicle will not be protected by Passlock®,
and you should see your dealer.
Also, see Content Theft-Deterrent on page 2-25 for
additional information regarding the security light.
3-43
Cruise Control Light
This light comes on
whenever you set your
cruise control.
The light will go out when the cruise control is turned
off. See Cruise Control on page 3-10 for more
information.
Highbeam On Light
This light will come on
when the high-beam
headlamps are in use.
See Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer on page 3-9.
3-44
Tow/Haul Mode Light
This light is displayed
when the tow/haul mode
has been activated.
For more information, see “Tow/Haul Mode” under
Towing a Trailer on page 4-51.
Fuel Gage
Here are some situations you may experience with your
fuel gage. None of these indicate a problem with the
fuel gage.
• At the gas station, the fuel pump shuts off before
the gage reads full.
• It takes a little more or less fuel to fill up than the
fuel gage indicated. For example, the gage may
have indicated the tank was half full, but it actually
took a little more or less than half the tank’s
capacity to fill the tank.
• The gage goes back to empty when you turn off the
ignition.
United States
Canada
When the ignition is on, the fuel gage tells you about
how much fuel you have left in your tank.
The gage will first indicate empty before you are out of
fuel, and you should get more fuel as soon as
possible.
Low Fuel Warning Light
The light next to the fuel gage will come on briefly when
you are starting the engine.
This light comes on when the fuel tank is low on fuel.
To turn it off, add fuel to the fuel tank. See Fuel on
page 5-5.
3-45
Driver Information Center (DIC)
The Driver Information Center (DIC) display is located
on the instrument panel cluster, below the speedometer.
The DIC buttons, if equipped, are located on the
steering wheel. The DIC can display information such
as the trip odometer, fuel economy, customization
features and warning/status messages.
If your vehicle is not equipped with the DIC steering
wheel buttons, you will not have all of the features listed.
You will scroll through the odometer, trip odometer
and engine hours by pressing the trip odometer reset
stem located on the instrument panel cluster. You
will also turn off, or acknowledge, DIC messages by
pressing the trip odometer reset stem. See Speedometer
and Odometer on page 3-31 for information on
features for vehicles without DIC buttons.
A 3 (Trip Information): Press this button to display
the odometer, trip odometers, tire pressure for vehicles
equipped with a tire pressure monitor, timer and
engine hours.
B r (Fuel Information): Press this button to display
the current range, fuel used, average fuel economy and
engine oil life.
C 4 (Customization): Press this button to access the
vehicle settings menu and customize the personal
settings on your vehicle.
D r (Select): Press this button to reset certain DIC
functions and set your customization settings.
Pressing any of the four DIC buttons will acknowledge
DIC messages and clear them from the DIC display.
3-46
DIC Operation and Displays
The Driver Information Center (DIC) comes on when the
ignition is on. After a short delay, the DIC will display
the information that was last displayed before the engine
was turned off.
The DIC has different modes which can be accessed by
pressing the four DIC buttons located on the steering
wheel. These buttons are trip information, fuel
information, customization and select. The button
functions are detailed in the following pages.
Trip Information Button
3 (Trip Information): Press the trip information
button to scroll through the ODOMETER, TRIP A,
TRIP B, TIRE PRESSURES, TIMER and ENGINE
HOURS.
Odometer: Press the trip information button until
ODOMETER appears on the display. This mode shows
the total distance the vehicle has been driven in
either miles or kilometers. Pressing the reset stem
located on the instrument cluster with the vehicle off will
also display the odometer.
Trip A: Press the trip information button until TRIP A
appears on the display. This mode shows the current
distance traveled since the last reset for TRIP A in either
miles or kilometers.
Trip B: Press the trip information button until TRIP B
appears on the display. This mode shows the current
distance traveled since the last reset for TRIP B in either
miles or kilometers.
To reset TRIP A or TRIP B information, press and hold
the select button for one second while in one of the
trip modes. This will reset the information for TRIP A
or TRIP B.
You can also reset TRIP A or TRIP B while they are
displayed by pressing the reset stem on the cluster. If you
press and hold the reset stem or the select button for four
seconds, the display will show the distance traveled since
the last ignition cycle for TRIP A or TRIP B.
Tire Pressures: The tire pressure mode is available
only on vehicles equipped with a tire pressure monitor.
Press the trip information button until TIRE
PRESSURES appears on the display. This mode shows
the tire pressure in pounds per square inch (psi) or
kilopascals (kPa). Press the select button to scroll
through the following information:
• LF TIRE shows the tire pressure for the left front tire.
• RF TIRE shows the tire pressure for the right
front tire.
• LR TIRE shows the tire pressure for the left rear tire.
• RR TIRE shows the tire pressure for the right
rear tire.
3-47
Timer: The DIC can be used as a timer. Press the
select button while TIMER is displayed to start the timer.
The display will show the amount of time that has
passed since the timer was last reset, not including time
the ignition is off. Time will continue to be counted as
long as the ignition is on, even if another display is being
shown on the DIC. The timer will record up to 99 hours,
59 minutes and 59 seconds (99:59:59) after which
the display will roll back to zero.
To stop the counting of time, press the select button
briefly while TIMER is displayed.
To reset the timer to zero, press and hold the select
button while TIMER is displayed.
Engine Hours: Press the trip information button until
ENGINE HOURS appears on the display. This
mode shows the total number of hours the engine has
run. Pressing and holding the reset stem located on
the instrument cluster for about four seconds will also
display the engine hour information after the odometer is
displayed when the vehicle is off.
Fuel Information Button
t (Fuel Information):
Press the fuel information
button to scroll through the range, fuel used, average
fuel economy and the engine oil life system.
Fuel Range: Press the fuel information button until
RANGE appears on the display. This mode shows the
remaining distance you can drive without refueling. It is
based on fuel economy and the fuel remaining in the
tank. The display will show LOW if the fuel level is low.
The fuel economy data used to determine fuel range is an
average of recent driving conditions. As your driving
conditions change, this data is gradually updated. Fuel
range cannot be reset.
Fuel Used: Press the fuel information button until
FUEL USED appears on the display. This mode shows
the number of gallons or liters of fuel used since the
last reset of this menu item. To reset the fuel used
information, press and hold the select button for one
second while FUEL USED is displayed.
Average Fuel Economy: Press the fuel information
button until AVG ECON appears on the display.
This mode shows how many miles per gallon (MPG) or
liters per 100 kilometers (L/100 km) your vehicle is
getting based on current and past driving conditions.
3-48
Press and hold the select button for one second while
AVG ECON is displayed to reset the average fuel
economy. Average fuel economy will then be calculated
starting from that point. If the average fuel economy
is not reset, it will be continually updated each time
you drive.
Engine Oil Life System: Press the fuel information
button until ENGINE OIL LIFE appears on the display.
The engine oil life system shows an estimate of the
oil’s remaining useful life. It will show 100% when the
system is reset after an oil change. It will alert you
to change your oil on a schedule consistent with your
driving conditions.
Always reset the engine oil life system after an oil
change. To reset the engine oil life system, use the fuel
button to reach the ENGINE OIL LIFE screen and
then press and hold the select button for five seconds
while ENGINE OIL LIFE is displayed. OIL LIFE
RESET will appear on the display for 10 seconds to let
you know the system is reset. See Engine Oil Life
System on page 5-16 for more information.
In addition to the engine oil life system monitoring the
oil life, additional maintenance is recommended in
the Maintenance Schedule in this manual. See Engine
Oil on page 5-13 and Scheduled Maintenance on
page 6-4.
Customization Button
4 (Customization):
Press the customization button to
access the VEHICLE SETTINGS menu and customize
the settings to your vehicle. See DIC Vehicle
Customization on page 3-60 for more information.
Select Button
r (Select): Press the select button to reset certain
DIC functions and set your customization settings.
For example, this button will reset the trip odometers
and scroll through the languages in which you can select
the DIC to display information.
3-49
DIC Warnings and Messages
BATTERY NOT CHARGING
Warning messages are displayed on the Driver
Information Center (DIC) to notify the driver that the
status of the vehicle has changed and that some action
may be needed by the driver to correct the condition.
If there is more than one message that needs to
be displayed they will appear one after another. Some
messages may not require immediate action, but
you should press any of the four DIC buttons on the
steering wheel, if equipped, to acknowledge that
you received the messages and clear them from the
display. If your vehicle is not equipped with DIC buttons
on the steering wheel, press the trip odometer reset
stem located on the instrument panel cluster to
acknowledge messages and clear them from the display.
Some messages cannot be cleared from the display
because they are more urgent. These messages require
action before they can be removed from the DIC
display. You should take any messages that appear on
the display seriously and remember that clearing the
messages will only make the messages disappear, not
correct the problem. The following are the possible
messages that can be displayed and some information
about them.
On some vehicles, if the battery is not charging during
operation, this message will appear on the DIC.
Driving with this problem could drain your battery. Have
the electrical system checked by your GM dealer as
soon as possible. Pressing any of the four DIC buttons,
if equipped, will clear the message from the DIC
display. If your vehicle is not equipped with the four DIC
buttons, pressing the trip odometer reset stem will
clear the message from the DIC display. See Charging
System Light on page 3-34 and Voltmeter Gage on
page 3-35.
3-50
BUCKLE PASSENGER
If your vehicle is equipped with the passenger sensing
system, this message reminds you to buckle the
passenger’s seat belt. See Passenger Sensing System
on page 1-54.
This message will display and a chime will sound when
the ignition is on, the driver’s seat belt is buckled, the
passenger’s seat belt is unbuckled with the passenger
airbag enabled and the vehicle is in motion. You should
have the passenger buckle their seat belt.
This reminder will be repeated if the ignition is on, the
vehicle is in motion, the driver is buckled and the
passenger is still unbuckled and the passenger airbag is
enabled. If the passenger’s seat belt is already
buckled, this message and chime will not come on.
Pressing any of the four DIC buttons, if equipped, will
acknowledge the message and clear it from the
DIC display. If your vehicle is not equipped with the
four DIC buttons, pressing the trip odometer reset stem
will acknowledge the message and clear it from the
DIC display.
BUCKLE SEATBELT
If your vehicle is equipped with the passenger sensing
system, this message reminds you to buckle the
driver’s seat belt. See Passenger Sensing System
on page 1-54.
This message will display and a chime will sound when
the ignition is on, the driver’s seat belt is unbuckled
and the vehicle is in motion. You should buckle
your seat belt.
This message is an additional reminder to the Safety
Belt Reminder Light in the instrument panel cluster.
See Safety Belt Reminder Light on page 3-31.
Pressing any of the four DIC buttons, if equipped,
will acknowledge the message and clear it from the
DIC display. If your vehicle is not equipped with the
four DIC buttons, pressing the trip odometer reset stem
will acknowledge the message and clear it from the
DIC display.
CHANGE ENGINE OIL
This message is displayed when the engine oil needs to
be changed and service is required for your vehicle.
See your GM dealer. See Scheduled Maintenance
on page 6-4 and Engine Oil on page 5-13 for more
information. Also see Engine Oil Life System on
page 5-16 for information on how to reset the message.
This message will clear itself after 10 seconds until
the next ignition cycle.
If the driver remains unbuckled when the ignition
is on and the vehicle is in motion, the reminder will
be repeated. If the driver’s seat belt is already buckled,
this message and chime will not come on.
3-51
CHARGING SYSTEM FAILURE
CHECK TIRE PRESSURE
On some vehicles, if there is a problem with the
generator and battery charging system, this message
will appear on the DIC, a chime will sound and the
charging system light on the instrument panel cluster
will come on. See Charging System Light on page 3-34
and Voltmeter Gage on page 3-35 for more information.
Driving with this problem could drain your battery.
Turn off all unnecessary accessories. Stop and turn off
the vehicle as soon as it is safe to do so. Have the
electrical system checked by your GM dealer
immediately.
If low tire pressure is detected in any of the vehicle’s
tires, this message will appear on the DIC. Pressing any
of the four DIC buttons, if equipped, will clear the
message from the DIC display. If your vehicle is not
equipped with the four DIC buttons, pressing the
trip odometer reset stem will clear the message from
the DIC display. It will appear at each ignition cycle until
the tires are inflated to the correct inflation pressure.
CHECK OIL LEVEL
If the oil level in the vehicle is low, this message will
appear on the DIC. Check the oil level and correct it as
necessary. You may need to let the vehicle cool or
warm up and cycle the ignition to be sure this message
will clear. Once the problem is corrected, pressing
any of the four DIC buttons, if equipped, will clear the
message from the DIC display. If your vehicle is
not equipped with the four DIC buttons, pressing the trip
odometer reset stem will clear the message from the
DIC display. This message will clear itself after
10 seconds until the next ignition cycle.
3-52
See Tires on page 5-60 for more information on
tires and the correct inflation pressures.
CHECK WASHER FLUID
If the washer fluid level is low, this message will appear
on the DIC. Adding washer fluid will clear the message.
See Windshield Washer Fluid on page 5-36. Pressing
any of the four DIC buttons, if equipped, will clear
the message from the DIC display. If your vehicle is not
equipped with the four DIC buttons, pressing the trip
odometer reset stem will clear the message from
the DIC display. This message will clear itself after
10 seconds until the next ignition cycle.
DRIVER DOOR AJAR
ENGINE OVERHEATED
If the driver’s door is not fully closed and the vehicle is
in a drive gear, this message will appear on the
display and you will hear a chime. Stop and turn off the
vehicle, check the door for obstacles and close the
door again. Check to see if the message still appears
on the DIC. Pressing any of the four DIC buttons,
if equipped, will clear the message from the DIC display.
If your vehicle is not equipped with the four DIC
buttons, pressing the trip odometer reset stem will
clear the message from the DIC display.
If the engine cooling system reaches unsafe
temperatures for operation, this message will appear in
the DIC and you will hear a chime. Stop and turn off
the vehicle as soon as it is safe to do so to avoid severe
damage. This message will clear when the engine
has cooled to a safe operating temperature.
ENGINE COOLANT HOT
If the cooling system temperature gets hot, this message
will appear in the DIC. Stop the vehicle and let the
engine idle in PARK (P) to allow the coolant to reach a
safe temperature. This message will clear when the
coolant temperature drops to a safe operating
temperature. Pressing any of the four DIC buttons, if
equipped, will clear the message from the DIC display.
If your vehicle is not equipped with the four DIC
buttons, pressing the trip odometer reset stem will clear
the message from the DIC display.
Notice: If you drive your vehicle while the engine
is overheating, severe engine damage may occur.
If an overheat warning appears on the instrument
panel cluster and/or DIC, stop the vehicle as soon as
possible. Do not increase the engine speed above
normal idling speed. See Engine Overheating
on page 5-26 for more information.
FUEL LEVEL LOW
If the fuel level is low, this message will appear on the
DIC and you will hear a chime. Refuel as soon as
possible. Pressing any of the four DIC buttons, if
equipped, will clear the message from the DIC display.
If your vehicle is not equipped with the four DIC buttons,
pressing the trip odometer reset stem will clear the
message from the DIC display. It will also clear itself after
10 seconds until the next ignition cycle. The low fuel light
near the fuel gage will still remain on in either case. See
Low Fuel Warning Light on page 3-45, Fuel Gage on
page 3-45 and Fuel on page 5-5.
3-53
KEYFOB X BATTERY LOW
LOW COOLANT LEVEL
If a remote keyless entry transmitter battery is low, this
message will appear on the DIC. The battery needs
to be replaced in the transmitter. See “Battery
Replacement” under Remote Keyless Entry System
Operation on page 2-5. Pressing any of the four
DIC buttons, if equipped, will clear the message from
the DIC display. If your vehicle is not equipped with the
four DIC buttons, pressing the trip odometer reset
stem will clear the message from the DIC display.
If your vehicle has a low coolant sensor and the engine
coolant level is low, this message will appear on the
DIC. Adding coolant will clear the message. Pressing
any of the four DIC buttons, if equipped, will clear
the message from the DIC display. If your vehicle is not
equipped with the four DIC buttons, pressing the trip
odometer reset stem will clear the message from
the DIC display.
LEFT REAR DOOR AJAR
If the driver’s side rear door is not fully closed and the
vehicle is in a drive gear, this message will appear
on the display and you will hear a chime. Stop and turn
off the vehicle, check the door for obstacles and
close the door again. Check to see if the message still
appears on the DIC. Pressing any of the four DIC
buttons, if equipped, will clear the message from the
DIC display. If your vehicle is not equipped with the
four DIC buttons, pressing the trip odometer reset stem
will clear the message from the DIC display.
3-54
OIL LIFE RESET
This message will appear on the display for about
10 seconds after resetting the change engine oil
message. See “Engine Oil Life System” under DIC
Operation and Displays on page 3-47 and Engine Oil
on page 5-13.
OIL PRESSURE LOW
If low oil pressure levels occur, this message will be
displayed on the DIC and a chime will sound. Stop the
vehicle as soon as safely possible and do not operate
it until the cause of the low oil pressure has been
corrected. Check your oil as soon as possible and have
your vehicle serviced by your GM dealer.
Notice: If you drive your vehicle while the engine
oil pressure is low, severe engine damage may
occur. If a low oil pressure warning appears on the
Driver Information Center (DIC), stop the vehicle
as soon as possible. Do not drive the vehicle until
the cause of the low oil pressure is corrected.
See Engine Oil on page 5-13 for more information.
REDUCED ENGINE POWER
PASSENGER DOOR AJAR
You may also see this message when the vehicle
determines a problem with the electronic throttle control.
See your GM dealer for service.
If the passenger’s door is not fully closed and the
vehicle is in a drive gear, this message will appear on
the display and you will hear a chime. Stop and turn off
the vehicle, check the door for obstacles and close
the door again. Check to see if the message still
appears on the DIC. Pressing any of the four DIC
buttons, if equipped, will clear the message from the DIC
display. If your vehicle is not equipped with the four
DIC buttons, pressing the trip odometer reset stem will
clear the message from the DIC display.
This message is displayed and a chime will sound when
the cooling system temperature gets too hot and the
engine further enters the engine coolant protection
mode. See Engine Overheating on page 5-26 for further
information.
RIGHT REAR DOOR AJAR
If the passenger’s side rear door is not fully closed and
the vehicle is in a drive gear, this message will
appear on the display and you will hear a chime. Stop
and turn off the vehicle, check the door for obstacles and
close the door again. Check to see if the message
still appears on the DIC. Pressing any of the four DIC
buttons, if equipped, will clear the message from the
DIC display. If your vehicle is not equipped with the
four DIC buttons, pressing the trip odometer reset stem
will clear the message from the DIC display.
3-55
SERVICE 4WD
SERVICE BRAKE SYSTEM
If a problem occurs with the all-wheel-drive system, this
message will appear on the DIC. If this message
appears, stop as soon as possible and turn off the
vehicle. Restart the vehicle and check for the message
on the DIC display. If the message is still displayed
or appears again when you begin driving, the
four-wheel-drive system needs service. See your
GM dealer. Pressing any of the four DIC buttons, if
equipped, will clear the message from the DIC display.
If your vehicle is not equipped with the four DIC
buttons, pressing the trip odometer reset stem will clear
the message from the DIC display.
If a problem occurs with the brake system, this message
will appear on the DIC. If this message appears, stop
as soon as possible and turn off the vehicle. Restart the
vehicle and check for the message on the DIC display.
If the message is still displayed or appears again
when you begin driving, the brake system needs service.
See your GM dealer. Pressing any of the four DIC
buttons, if equipped, will clear the message from the
DIC display. If your vehicle is not equipped with the
four DIC buttons, pressing the trip odometer reset stem
will clear the message from the DIC display.
SERVICE AIR BAG
If there is a problem with the airbag system, this
message will be displayed on the DIC. Have your
GM dealer inspect the system for problems. See Airbag
Readiness Light on page 3-32 and Airbag System on
page 1-46 for more information. Pressing any of the
four DIC buttons, if equipped, will clear the message
from the DIC display. If your vehicle is not equipped with
the four DIC buttons, pressing the trip odometer reset
stem will clear the message from the DIC display.
3-56
SERVICE CHARGING SYSTEM
On some vehicles, if there is a problem with the battery
charging system, this message will appear on the
DIC. Under certain conditions, the charging system light
may also turn on in the instrument panel cluster. See
Charging System Light on page 3-34. The battery
will not be charging at an optimal rate and the vehicle
will lose the ability to enter the fuel economy mode. The
vehicle is safe to drive, however you should have the
electrical system checked by your GM dealer. Pressing
any of the four DIC buttons, if equipped, will clear
the message from the DIC display. If your vehicle is not
equipped with the four DIC buttons, pressing the trip
odometer reset stem will clear the message from
the DIC display.
SERVICE RIDE CONTROL
SERVICE TIRE MONITOR
If a problem occurs with the suspension system, this
message will appear on the DIC. If this message
appears, stop and turn off the vehicle. Restart the
vehicle and check for the message on the DIC display.
If the message is still displayed or appears again
when you begin driving, the suspension system needs
service. See your GM dealer. Pressing any of the
four DIC buttons, if equipped, will clear the message
from the DIC display. If your vehicle is not equipped with
the four DIC buttons, pressing the trip odometer reset
stem will clear the message from the DIC display.
This message will be displayed if any of the tire monitor
sensors have malfunctioned, if the tire monitor sensors
have not been programmed or if the recommended
tire pressures are not programmed. See your GM dealer.
Pressing any of the four DIC buttons, if equipped, will
clear the message from the DIC display. If your vehicle
is not equipped with the four DIC buttons, pressing
the trip odometer reset stem will clear the message from
the DIC display.
SERVICE STABILITY
You may see the STABILITY SYS ACTIVE message on
the DIC. It means that an advanced computer-controlled
system has come on to help your vehicle continue to
go in the direction in which you are steering.
If you ever see the SERVICE STABILITY message, it
means there may be a problem with your StabiliTrak®
system. If you see this message, try to reset the system.
Stop; turn off the engine; then start the engine again.
If the SERVICE STABILITY message still comes
on, it means there is a problem. You should see your
GM dealer for service. The vehicle is safe to drive,
however, you do not have the benefit of StabiliTrak®,
so reduce your speed and drive accordingly.
STABILITY SYS ACTIVE
For more information on the StabiliTrak® system,
see StabiliTrak® System on page 4-8.
For more information on the StabiliTrak® system,
see StabiliTrak® System on page 4-8.
3-57
STABILITY SYS DISABLED
TIGHTEN FUEL CAP
The STABILITY SYS DISABLED message will turn on
when you press the StabiliTrak® button or when the
stability control has been automatically disabled. There
are four conditions that can cause this message to
appear.
If the vehicle’s fuel cap is not tightened properly this
message may appear along with the check engine light
on the instrument panel. See Malfunction Indicator
Lamp on page 3-40. Reinstall the fuel cap, making sure
to fully install the cap. See Filling Your Tank on
page 5-8. The diagnostic system can determine if the
fuel cap has been left off or improperly installed. A loose
or missing fuel cap will allow fuel to evaporate into
the atmosphere. A few driving trips with the cap properly
installed should turn the light and message off.
• One condition is overheating, which could occur if
StabiliTrak® activates continuously for an extended
period of time.
• The message will also be displayed if the brake
system warning light is on. See Brake System
Warning Light on page 3-35.
• The message could be displayed if the stability
system takes longer than usual to complete its
diagnostic checks due to driving conditions.
• Also, if an engine or vehicle related problem has
been detected, and the vehicle needs service,
the message will appear.
The message will turn off as soon as the conditions that
caused the message to be displayed are no longer
present.
For more information on the StabiliTrak® system, see
StabiliTrak® System on page 4-8.
TRACTION ACTIVE
When the traction control system has detected that
any of the vehicle’s wheels are slipping, the traction
control system will activate and this message will appear
on the DIC. For more information on traction control
and the StabiliTrak® system, see StabiliTrak® System
on page 4-8.
TRACTION SYS LIMITED
If the brake traction control system activates constantly
or if the brakes have heated up due to high-speed
braking, brake traction control will be disabled and the
TRACTION SYS LIMITED message will be displayed.
For more information on the StabiliTrak® system and
traction control, see StabiliTrak® System on page 4-8.
3-58
TRANS HOT IDLE ENGINE
If the transmission fluid gets hot, this message will
appear on the DIC along with a continuous chime.
Driving with the transmission fluid temperature high can
cause damage to the vehicle. Stop the vehicle and
let it idle to allow the transmission to cool. This message
will clear and the chime will stop when the fluid
temperature reaches a safe level.
Notice: If you drive your vehicle while the
transmission fluid is overheating and the
transmission temperature warning is displayed on
the instrument panel cluster and/or DIC, you
can damage the transmission. This could lead to
costly repairs that would not be covered by
your warranty. Do not drive your vehicle with
overheated transmission fluid or while transmission
temperature warning is displayed.
TRANSMISSION HOT
If the transmission fluid temperature becomes high,
this message will appear on the DIC display.
When the transmission enters the protection mode,
you may notice a change in the transmission shifting
patterns. When the transmission fluid temperature
returns to normal, the display will turn off and the
transmission shifting patterns will return to normal.
Notice: If you drive your vehicle while the
transmission fluid is overheating and the
transmission temperature warning is displayed on
the instrument panel cluster and/or DIC, you
can damage the transmission. This could lead to
costly repairs that would not be covered by
your warranty. Do not drive your vehicle with
overheated transmission fluid or while transmission
temperature warning is displayed.
The following situations can cause the transmission to
operate at higher temperatures:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Towing a trailer
Hot outside air temperatures
Hauling a large or heavy load
Over-loading
Low transmission fluid level
High transmission fluid level
Restricted air flow to the radiator
A temporary solution to hotter transmission operating
temperatures may be to let the transmission cool down. If
the transmission is operated at higher temperatures on a
frequent basis, see Scheduled Maintenance on page 6-4
for the proper transmission maintenance intervals.
3-59
TURN SIGNAL ON
If a turn signal is left on for 3/4 of a mile (1.2 km), this
message will appear on the display and you will hear a
chime. Move the turn signal/multifunction lever to the
off position. Pressing any of the four DIC buttons,
if equipped, will clear the message from the DIC display.
If your vehicle is not equipped with the four DIC
buttons, pressing the trip odometer reset stem will clear
the message from the DIC display.
DIC Vehicle Customization
Your vehicle may have customization capabilities that
allow you to program some features to one setting
based on your preference. All of the customizable
options listed may not be available on your vehicle.
Only the options available will be displayed on
your Driver Information Center (DIC).
The default settings for the customization features were
set when your vehicle left the factory, but may have
been changed from their default state since then.
To change feature preferences, make sure the ignition
is on and the vehicle is in PARK (P). Press the
customization button to scroll through the available
customizable options.
3-60
After pressing the customization button, VEHICLE
SETTINGS will momentarily display before going to a
customization option.
Lock Doors
Press the customization button until LOCK DOORS
appears in the display. To select your preference
for automatic locking, press the select button while
LOCK DOORS is displayed on the DIC. Pressing the
select button will scroll through the following choices:
LOCK DOORS: IN GEAR (default): The doors will lock
when the vehicle is shifted out of PARK (P).
LOCK DOORS: WITH SPEED: The doors will lock
when the vehicle speed is above 8 mph (13 km/h) for
three seconds.
Choose one of the available options and press the
customization button while it is displayed on the DIC to
select it and move on to the next feature. For more
information on automatic door locks, see Programmable
Automatic Door Locks on page 2-10.
Unlock Doors
Press the customization button until UNLOCK DOORS
appears in the display. To select your preference for
automatic unlocking, press the select button while
UNLOCK DOORS is displayed on the DIC. Pressing the
select button will scroll through the following choices:
UNLOCK DOORS: IN PARK (default): All of the doors
will unlock when the vehicle is shifted into PARK (P).
UNLOCK DRIVER: IN PARK: The driver’s door will be
unlocked when the vehicle is shifted into PARK (P).
UNLOCK DOORS: KEY OUT: All of the doors
will unlock when the key is taken out of the ignition.
UNLOCK DOORS: MANUALLY: The doors will not be
unlocked automatically.
Choose one of the available options and press the
customization button while it is displayed on the DIC to
select it and move on to the next feature. For more
information on automatic door locks, see Programmable
Automatic Door Locks on page 2-10.
Door Lock Delay
If your DIC does not have this feature, you can still
program the delayed locking feature. See Delayed
Locking on page 2-9 for more information.
When locking the doors with the power lock switch or
the remote keyless entry transmitter and a door or
the tailgate is open, the delayed locking feature
will delay locking the doors and tailgate until five
seconds after the last door is closed.
Press the customization button until DOOR LOCK
DELAY appears in the display. To select your preference
for delayed locking, press the select button while DOOR
LOCK DELAY is displayed on the DIC. Pressing the
select button will scroll through the following choices:
DOOR LOCK DELAY: OFF (default): The doors will
lock immediately when pressing the power lock switch or
the lock button on the remote keyless entry transmitter.
DOOR LOCK DELAY: ON: The doors will not lock
until five seconds after the last door or the tailgate is
closed. You will hear three chimes to signal that
the delayed locking feature is in use. You can
temporarily override delayed locking by pressing the
lock button on the door or the remote keyless entry
transmitter a second time.
Choose one of the available options and press the
customization button while it is displayed on the DIC to
select it and move on to the next feature. For more
information on automatic door locks, see Programmable
Automatic Door Locks on page 2-10.
This feature will not operate if the key is in the ignition.
3-61
Lock Feedback
Unlock Feedback
Press the customization button until LOCK FEEDBACK
appears in the display. To select your preference for
the feedback you receive when locking the vehicle with
the remote keyless entry transmitter, press the select
button while LOCK FEEDBACK is displayed on the DIC.
Pressing the select button will scroll through the
following choices:
Press the customization button until UNLOCK
FEEDBACK appears in the display. To select your
preference for the feedback you will receive when
unlocking the vehicle with the remote keyless entry
transmitter, press the select button while UNLOCK
FEEDBACK is displayed on the DIC. Pressing the select
button will scroll through the following choices:
LOCK FEEDBACK: BOTH (default): The parking
lamps will flash each time you press the button with the
lock symbol on the remote keyless entry transmitter
and the horn will chirp the second time you press the
lock button.
UNLOCK FEEDBACK: LAMPS (default): The parking
lamps will flash each time you press the button with
the unlock symbol on the remote keyless entry
transmitter.
LOCK FEEDBACK: LAMPS: The parking lamps will
flash each time you press the button with the lock
symbol on the remote keyless entry transmitter.
LOCK FEEDBACK: HORN: The horn will chirp the
second time you press the button with the lock symbol
on the remote keyless entry transmitter.
LOCK FEEDBACK: OFF: There will be no feedback
when locking the vehicle.
Choose one of the available options and press the
customization button while it is displayed on the DIC
to select it and move on to the next feature.
3-62
UNLOCK FEEDBACK: HORN: The horn will chirp the
second time you press the button with the unlock
symbol on the remote keyless entry transmitter.
UNLOCK FEEDBACK: BOTH: The parking lamps will
flash each time you press the button with the unlock
symbol on the remote keyless entry transmitter and the
horn will chirp the second time you press the unlock
button.
UNLOCK FEEDBACK: OFF: There will be no feedback
when unlocking the vehicle.
Choose one of the available options and press the
customization button while it is displayed on the DIC to
select it and move on to the next feature.
Headlamp Delay
Perimeter Lights
Press the customization button until HEADLAMP
DELAY appears in the display. To select your
preference for how long the headlamps will stay on
when you turn off the vehicle, press the select button
while HEADLAMP DELAY is displayed on the DIC.
Pressing the select button will scroll through the
following choices:
Press the customization button until PERIMETER
LIGHTS appears in the display. To select your
preference for perimeter lighting, press the select button
while PERIMETER LIGHTS is displayed on the DIC.
Pressing the select button will scroll through the
following choices:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
HEADLAMP DELAY: 10 SEC (default)
HEADLAMP DELAY: 20 SEC
HEADLAMP DELAY: 40 SEC
HEADLAMP DELAY: 1 MIN
HEADLAMP DELAY: 2 MIN
HEADLAMP DELAY: 3 MIN
HEADLAMP DELAY: OFF
The amount of time you choose will be the amount of
time that the headlamps stay on after you turn off
the vehicle. If you choose off, the headlamps will turn
off as soon as you turn off the vehicle.
Choose one of the available options and press the
customization button while it is displayed on the DIC to
select it and move on to the next feature.
PERIMETER LIGHTS: ON (default): The headlamps
and back-up lamps will come on for 40 seconds, if
it is dark enough outside, when you unlock the vehicle
with the remote keyless entry transmitter.
PERIMETER LIGHTS: OFF: The perimeter lights will
not come on when you unlock the vehicle with the
remote keyless entry transmitter.
Choose one of the available options and press the
customization button while it is displayed on the DIC to
select it and move on to the next feature.
Easy Exit Seat
Press the customization button until EASY EXIT SEAT
appears in the display. To select your preference for
seat position exit, press the select button while
EASY EXIT SEAT is displayed on the DIC. Pressing the
select button will scroll through the following choices:
EASY EXIT SEAT: OFF (default): No seat exit
recall will occur.
3-63
EASY EXIT SEAT: ON: The driver’s seat will move
to the exit position when the key is removed from
the ignition.
Choose one of the available options and press the
customization button while it is displayed on the DIC to
select it and move on to the next feature. For more
information on seat position exit, see Memory Seat
on page 2-69.
Curb View
Press the customization button until CURB VIEW
appears in the display. To select your preference for
curb view, press the select button while CURB VIEW is
displayed on the DIC. Pressing the select button will
scroll through the following choices:
CURB VIEW: OFF (default): Neither outside mirror will
be tilted down when the vehicle is shifted into
REVERSE (R).
CURB VIEW: PASSENGER: The passenger’s outside
mirror will be tilted down when the vehicle is shifted
into REVERSE (R).
CURB VIEW: DRIVER: The driver’s outside mirror will
be tilted down when the vehicle is shifted into
REVERSE (R).
CURB VIEW: BOTH: The driver’s and passenger’s
outside mirrors will be tilted down when the vehicle is
shifted into REVERSE (R).
3-64
Choose one of the available options and press the
customization button while it is displayed on the DIC to
select it and move on to the next feature. For more
information on tilt mirror in reverse, see Outside
Automatic Dimming Mirror with Curb View Assist on
page 2-43.
Alarm Warning
Press the customization button until ALARM WARNING
appears in the display. To select your preference for
alarm warning, press the select button while ALARM
WARNING is displayed on the DIC. Pressing the select
button will scroll through the following choices:
ALARM WARNING: BOTH (default): The headlamps
will flash and the horn will chirp when the alarm is
active.
ALARM WARNING: OFF: There will be no alarm
warning on activation.
ALARM WARNING: HORN: The horn will chirp when
the alarm is active.
ALARM WARNING: LAMPS: The headlamps will flash
when the alarm is active.
Choose one of the available options and press the
customization button while your choice is displayed on
the DIC to select it and move on to the next feature.
For more information on alarm warning type, see
Content Theft-Deterrent on page 2-25.
Language
Display Units
To select your preference for display language, press
the select button while LANGUAGE is displayed on the
DIC. Pressing the select button will scroll through the
following languages:
Press the customization button until DISPLAY UNITS
appears in the display. To select English or metric, press
the select button while DISPLAY UNITS is displayed
on the DIC. Pressing the select button will scroll through
the following choices:
• ENGLISH
• FRANCAIS (French)
• ESPANOL (Spanish)
Choose one of the available options and press the
customization button while it is displayed on the DIC to
select it.
If you accidentally choose a language that you do not
want or understand, press and hold the customization
button and the trip information button at the same
time. The DIC will begin scrolling through the languages
in their particular language. English will be in English,
Francais will be in French and Espanol will be in
Spanish. When you see the language that you would
like, release both buttons. The DIC will then display the
information in the language you chose.
• DISPLAY UNITS: ENGLISH
• DISPLAY UNITS: METRIC
If you choose English, all information will be displayed
in English units. For example, distance in miles and fuel
economy in miles per gallon.
Choose one of the available options and press the
customization button while it is displayed on the DIC
to select it and end out of the customizable options.
You can also scroll through the different languages by
pressing and holding the trip reset stem for four seconds,
as long as you are in the odometer mode.
3-65
Audio System(s)
Setting the Time
Notice: Before adding any sound equipment to
your vehicle, like a tape player, CB radio, mobile
telephone, or two-way radio, make sure that it can
be added by checking with your dealer. Also,
check federal rules covering mobile radio and
telephone units. If sound equipment can be added,
it is very important to do it properly. Added
sound equipment may interfere with the operation
of your vehicle’s engine, radio, or other systems,
and even damage them. Your vehicle’s systems may
interfere with the operation of sound equipment
that has been added improperly.
Press and hold the HR button until the correct hour
appears on the display. Press and hold the MN button
until the correct minute appears on the display. The time
can be set with the ignition on or off.
Figure out which audio system is in your vehicle, find
out what your audio system can do, and how to operate
all of its controls.
RDS time is broadcast once a minute. After tuning to an
RDS broadcast station, it may take a few minutes for
the time to update.
Your vehicle has a feature called Retained Accessory
Power (RAP). With RAP, the audio system can be
played even after the ignition is turned off. See Retained
Accessory Power (RAP) on page 2-28 for more
information.
3-66
To synchronize the time with an FM station broadcasting
Radio Data System (RDS) information, press and
hold the hour and minute buttons at the same time until
RDS TIME appears on the display. To accept this
time, press and hold the hour and minute buttons, at the
same time, for another two seconds. If the time is not
available from the station, NO UPDAT will appear on the
display.
Radio with Cassette and CD
Radio Data System (RDS)
The audio system has a Radio Data System (RDS).
RDS features are available for use only on FM stations
that broadcast RDS information.
With RDS, the radio can do the following:
• Seek to stations broadcasting the selected type
of programming
• Receive announcements concerning local and
national emergencies
• Display messages from radio stations
This system relies upon receiving specific information
from these stations and will only work when the
information is available. In rare cases, a radio station
may broadcast incorrect information that will cause
the radio features to work improperly. If this happens,
contact the radio station.
While the radio is tuned to an RDS station, the station
name or call letters will appear on the display instead of
the frequency. RDS stations may also provide the
time of day, a program type (PTY) for current
programming, and the name of the program being
broadcast.
3-67
XM™ Satellite Radio Service
XM™ is a satellite radio service that is based
in the 48 contiguous Untied States. XM™ offers
100 coast-to-coast channels including music, news,
sports, talk, and children’s programming. XM™ provides
digital quality audio and text information that includes
song title and artist name. A service fee is required
in order to receive the XM™ service. For more
information, contact XM™ at www.xmradio.com or
call 1-800-852-XMXM (9696).
Playing the Radio
PWR (Power): Press this knob to turn the system
on and off.
o VOL p (Volume): Turn this knob to increase
or to decrease the volume.
INFO (Information): Press this knob to switch the
display between the radio station frequency and
the time. When the ignition is off, press this knob to
display the time.
For RDS, press the INFO knob to change what appears
on the display while using RDS. The display options
are station name, RDS station frequency, PTY, and the
name of the program (if available).
3-68
For XM™ (if equipped), press the INFO knob while in
XM™ mode to retrieve four different categories of
information related to the current song or channel:
Artist, Song Title, Category or PTY, Channel
Number/Channel Name.
To change the default on the display, press the INFO
knob until you see the display you want, then hold
the knob until you hear a beep. The selected display will
now be the default.
AUTO VOL (Automatic Volume): Your vehicle has the
Bose® AudioPilot® noise compensation technology.
When turned on, AudioPilot® continuously adjusts the
audio system to compensate for background noise, so
that your music always sounds the same at the set
volume level. This feature is most effective at lower radio
volume settings where background noise can affect how
well you hear the music being played through your
vehicle’s audio system. At higher volume settings, where
the music is much louder than the background noise,
there may be little or no adjustments by AudioPilot®.
To use AudioPilot®, set the radio volume to your desired
level. Turn AudioPilot® on by pressing the AUTO VOL
button until AVOL ON appears on the display. As you
increase vehicle speed, the background noise in your
vehicle will increase. AudioPilot® will adjust your audio
system’s output for the background noise it hears. To turn
AudioPilot® off, press AUTO VOL until AVOL OFF
appears on the display. For additional information on
AudioPilot®, please visit www.bose.com.
Finding a Station
Setting Preset Stations
BAND: Press this button to switch between FM1, FM2,
AM, or XM1 or XM2 (if equipped). The display will
show the selection.
Up to 30 stations (six FM1, six FM2, and six AM,
six XM1 and six XM2 (if equipped), can be programed
on the six numbered pushbuttons, by performing
the following steps:
o TUNE p:
Turn this knob to select radio stations.
© SEEK ¨:
1. Turn the radio on.
Press either the SEEK or the TYPE
arrows to go to the next or to the previous station and
stay there.
2. Press BAND to select FM1, FM2, AM, or XM1
or XM2.
The radio will only seek stations with a strong signal
that are in the selected band.
4. Press and hold one of the six numbered
pushbuttons until you hear a beep. Whenever that
numbered pushbutton is pressed, the station
that was set will return for that pushbutton.
© SCAN ¨: Press and hold either the SCAN or the
TYPE arrows for two seconds until SCAN appears
on the display and you hear a beep. The radio will go to
a station, play for a few seconds, then go on to the
next station. Press either the SCAN or the TYPE arrows
again to stop scanning.
To scan preset stations, press and hold either the
SCAN or the TYPE arrows for more than four seconds.
PSCN will appear on the display and you will hear a
double beep. The radio will go to a preset station, play
for a few seconds, then go on to the next preset
station. Press either the SCAN or the TYPE arrows
again to stop scanning presets.
3. Tune in the desired station.
5. Repeat the steps for each pushbutton.
To store an equalization setting to a preset station
perform the following:
1. Tune to the preset station.
2. Press and release the AUTO EQ button to select
the equalization setting.
Once the equalization no longer appears on the
display, the equalization will be set for that preset
station.
The radio will only scan stations with a strong signal
that are in the selected band.
3-69
Setting the Tone (Bass/Treble)
AUDIO: Push and release the AUDIO knob until BASS
or TREB appears on the display. Turn the knob to
increase or to decrease. The display will show the bass
or treble level. If a station is weak or noisy, decrease
the treble.
To adjust the bass and treble to the middle position,
push and hold the AUDIO knob. The radio will produce
one beep and adjust the display level to the middle
position.
To adjust all tone and speaker controls to the middle
position, push and hold the AUDIO knob when no tone
or speaker control is displayed. ALL CENTERED will
appear on the display, you will hear a beep, and
the display level will be adjusted to the middle position.
AUTO EQ (Automatic Equalization): Press this
button to enhance the audio performance for different
passengers in the vehicle.
The setting last chosen will appear on the display when
you first press AUTO EQ. Each time you press this
button, another setting will appear on the display and
AUTO EQ will switch to one of the preset settings listed.
The audio system allows you to choose from four
different equalization settings: normal, driver, rear and
spacious. These settings can be used while listening to
the radio, cassette or the CD player.
3-70
NORMAL: This setting provides the best overall vehicle
sound quality for all seating locations.
DRIVER: This setting gives the driver the best sound
quality.
REAR: This setting gives the rear seat passengers the
best sound quality.
SPACIOUS: This setting makes the listening space
seem larger.
The radio can save separate AUTO EQ settings for
each preset and source.
Adjusting the Speakers (Balance/Fade)
AUDIO: To adjust the balance between the right
and the left speakers, push and release the AUDIO
knob until BAL appears on the display. Turn the knob to
move the sound toward the right or the left speakers.
To adjust the fade between the front and the rear
speakers, push and release the AUDIO knob until FADE
appears on the display. Turn the knob to move the
sound toward the front or the rear speakers.
To adjust the balance and fade to the middle position,
push the AUDIO knob, then push it again and hold
it until the radio produces one beep. The balance and
fade will be adjusted to the middle position and the
display will show the speaker balance.
To adjust all tone and speaker controls to the middle
position, push and hold the AUDIO knob when no tone
or speaker control is displayed. ALL CENTERED will
appear on the display, you will hear a beep, and
the display level will be adjusted to the middle position.
Finding a Program Type (PTY)
Station (RDS and XM™)
To select and find a desired PTY perform the following:
1. Press the TYPE button to activate program type
select mode. TYPE and a PTY will appear on the
display.
2. Turn the TYPE knob or press and release the
TYPE button to select a PTY.
3. Once the desired PTY is displayed, press and
release either the TYPE or the SEEK arrows to
select and to take you to the PTY’s first station.
4. To go to another station within that PTY and the
PTY is displayed, press either TYPE or SEEK
arrow once. If the PTY is not displayed, go back to
Step 1.
5. Press either the TYPE or the SEEK arrows to exit
program type select mode.
If the radio cannot find the desired program type, NONE
will appear on the display and the radio will return to
the last station you were listening to.
SCAN: Scan the stations within a PTY by performing
the following:
1. Press the TYPE button to activate program type
select mode. TYPE and the last selected PTY will
appear on the display.
2. Turn the TYPE knob or press and release the
TYPE button to select a PTY.
3. Once the desired PTY is displayed, press and hold
either the TYPE or the SCAN arrows for two
seconds, and the radio will begin scanning the
stations in the PTY.
4. Press either the TYPE or the SCAN arrows to stop
at a station.
BAND (Alternate Frequency): Alternate frequency
allows the radio to switch to a stronger station with the
same program type. To turn alternate frequency on,
press and hold BAND for two seconds. AF ON will
appear on the display. The radio may switch to stations
with a stronger frequency.
To turn alternate frequency off, press and hold BAND
again for two seconds. AF OFF will appear on the
display. The radio will not switch to other stations.
This function does not apply for XM™ Satellite Radio
Service.
3-71
Setting Preset PTYs (RDS Only)
2. Press the TYPE button to activate program type
select mode. TYPE and the last selected PTY will
appear on the display.
If the entire message is not displayed, parts of the
message will appear every three seconds. To scroll
through the message, press and release the INFO
button. A new group of words will appear on the display
after every press of the button. Once the complete
message has been displayed, the information symbol
will disappear from the display until another new
message is received. The last message can be
displayed by pressing the INFO button. You can view
the last message until a new message is received
or a different station is tuned to.
3. Turn the TYPE knob or press and release the
TYPE button to select a PTY.
Radio Messages
These buttons have factory PTY presets. Up to
12 PTYs (six FM1 and six FM2), can be programmed
on the six numbered pushbuttons, by performing
the following steps:
1. Press BAND to select FM1 or FM2.
4. Press and hold one of the six numbered
pushbuttons until you hear a beep. Whenever that
numbered pushbutton is pressed, the PTY that
was set will return.
5. Repeat the steps for each pushbutton.
RDS Messages
INFO (Information): If the current station has a
message, the information symbol will appear on the
display. Press this button to see the message. The
message may display the artist, song title, call in phone
numbers, etc.
3-72
CAL ERR (Calibration Error): The audio system has
been calibrated for your vehicle from the factory. If
CAL ERR appears on the display, it means that the radio
has not been configured properly for the vehicle and
must be returned to your GM dealer for service.
LOCKED: This message is displayed when the
THEFTLOCK® system has locked up. Take the vehicle
to your GM dealer for service.
If any error occurs repeatedly, or if an error cannot be
corrected, contact your GM dealer.
XM™ Radio Messages
Radio Display
Message
Condition
Action Required
XL (Explicit Language
Channels)
XL on the radio display,
after the channel name,
indicates content with
explicit language.
These channels, or any others, can be blocked at a
customer’s request, by calling 1-800-852-XMXM (9696).
Updating
Updating
encryption code
The encryption code in the receiver is being updated, and
no action is required. This process should take no longer
than 30 seconds.
No Signal
Loss of signal
The system is functioning correctly, but the vehicle is in a
location that is blocking the XM™ signal. When you move
into an open area, the signal should return.
Loading XM
Acquiring channel audio
(after 4 second delay)
The audio system is acquiring and processing audio and
text data. No action is needed. This message should
disappear shortly.
CH Off Air
Channel not in service
This channel is not currently in service. Tune to another
channel.
CH Unavail
Channel no longer
available
This previously assigned channel is no longer assigned.
Tune to another station. If this station was one of the
presets, choose another station for that preset button.
No Info
Artist Name/Feature
not available
No artist information is available at this time on this channel.
The system is working properly.
No Info
Song/Program Title
not available
No song title information is available at this time on this
channel. The system is working properly.
3-73
XM™ Radio Messages (cont’d)
Radio Display
Message
Condition
Action Required
No Info
Category Name
not available
No category information is available at this time on this
channel. The system is working properly.
No Info
No Text/Informational
message available
No text or informational messages are available at this time
on this channel. The system is working properly.
Not Found
No channel available for
the chosen category
There are no channels available for the selected category.
The system is working properly.
XM Locked
Theft lock active
The XM™ receiver in the vehicle may have previously been
in another vehicle. For security purposes, XM™ receivers
cannot be swapped between vehicles. If this message is
received after having your vehicle serviced, check with your
GM dealer.
Radio ID
Radio ID label
(channel 0)
If tuned to channel 0, this message will alternate with the
XM™ Radio eight digit radio ID label. This label is needed
to activate the service.
Unknown
Radio ID not known
(should only be if
hardware failure)
If this message is received when tuned to channel 0, there
may be a receiver fault. Consult with your GM dealer.
Chk XMRcvr
Hardware failure
If this message does not clear within a short period of time,
the receiver may have a fault. Consult with your GM dealer.
3-74
Playing a Cassette Tape
The tape player is built to work best with tapes that are
up to 30 to 45 minutes long on each side. Tapes
longer than that are so thin they may not work well in
this player. The longer side with the tape visible should
face to the right. If you hear nothing or hear a garbled
sound, the tape may not be in squarely. Press the eject
button to remove the tape and start over.
If the ignition and radio are off, press the eject button or
the INFO knob to insert and to begin play of a tape.
If the ignition is on and the radio is off, the tape can be
inserted and will begin playing.
While the tape is playing, use the VOL, AUDIO, and
SEEK controls just as you do for the radio. The cassette
tape symbol will appear on the display and an arrow
showing which side of the tape is playing. The tape
player will play the other side of the tape when it
reaches the end.
Cassette tape adapter kits for portable CD players will
work in the cassette tape player. See “CD Adapter Kits”
later for more information.
The tape bias is set automatically when a metal or
chrome tape is inserted.
If an error appears on the display, see “Cassette Tape
Messages” later in this section.
1 PREV (Previous): The tape must have at least
three seconds of silence between each selection for
previous to work. Press this pushbutton to go to
the previous selection on the tape if the current selection
has been playing for less than three seconds. If
pressed when the current selection has been playing
from three to 13 seconds, it will go to the beginning
of the previous selection or the beginning of the current
selection, depending on the position on the tape. If
pressed when the current selection has been playing for
more than 13 seconds, it will go to the beginning of
the current selection.
SEEK and a negative number will appear on the display
while the cassette player is in the previous mode.
Pressing this pushbutton multiple times will increase the
number of selections to be searched back, up to −9.
2 NEXT: The tape must have at least three seconds
of silence between each selection for next to work.
Press this pushbutton to go to the next selection on the
tape. Pressing this pushbutton multiple times, in next
mode, will increase the number of selections to be
searched forward. SEEK and a positive number
will appear on the display.
3 REV (Reverse): Press this pushbutton to quickly
reverse the tape. The radio will play while the tape
reverses. Press it again to return to playing speed. The
station frequency and REV will appear on the display.
Select stations during reverse operation by using TUNE
and SEEK.
3-75
4 FWD (Forward): Press this pushbutton to quickly
advance the tape. The radio will play while the
tape advances. Press this pushbutton again to return to
playing speed. The station frequency and FWD will
appear on the display. Select stations during forward
operation by using TUNE and SEEK.
5 X SIDE: Press this pushbutton to play the other side
of the tape.
© SEEK ¨: The right arrow is the same as the
NEXT pushbutton, and the left arrow is the same as the
PREV pushbutton. If either arrow is held or pressed
more than once, the player will continue moving forward
or backward through the tape. SEEK and a positive
or negative number will appear on the display.
© SCAN ¨:
Press and hold either the SCAN or the
TYPE arrows for more than two seconds until SCAN
appears on the display and you hear a beep. The radio
will go to the next selection, play for 10 seconds,
then go on to the next selection. Press either the SCAN
or the TYPE arrows again, to stop scanning. The
tape must have at least three seconds of silence
between each selection for scan to work.
BAND: Press this button to listen to the radio when a
cassette tape or CD is playing. The inactive tape or CD
will remain safely inside the radio for future listening.
3-76
TAPE DISC: Press this button to play a cassette tape
or CD when listening to the radio. The inactive tape
or CD will remain safely inside the radio for future
listening.
Z (Eject): Press this button to stop a tape when it is
playing or to eject a tape when it is not playing. Eject may
be activated with the radio off. Cassette tapes may be
loaded with the radio off if this button is pressed first.
Cassette Tape Messages
CHK TAPE (Check Tape): If this message appears on
the display, the tape will not play due to one of the
following errors:
• The tape is tight and the player cannot turn the
tape hubs. Remove the tape. Hold the tape with
the open end down and try to turn the right
hub counterclockwise with a pencil. Turn the tape
over and repeat. If the hubs do not turn easily,
the tape may be damaged and should not be used
in the player. Try a new tape to make sure your
player is working properly.
• The tape is broken. Try a new tape.
• The tape is wrapped around the tape head.
Attempt to get the cassette out. Try a new tape.
CLEAN: If this message appears on the display, the
cassette tape player needs to be cleaned. It will still play
tapes, but it should be cleaned as soon as possible to
prevent damage to the tapes and player. See Care
of Your Cassette Tape Player on page 3-97.
If the cassette tape is not playing correctly, for any other
reason, try a known good cassette.
If any error occurs repeatedly or if an error cannot be
corrected, contact your GM dealer. If the radio displays
an error message, write it down and provide it to
your GM dealer when reporting the problem.
CD Adapter Kits
It is possible to use a portable CD player with the
cassette tape player after activating the bypass feature
on your tape player.
To activate the bypass feature, perform the following
steps:
1. Turn the ignition on.
2. Turn the radio off.
3. Press and hold the TAPE DISC button for five
seconds. READY will appear on the display and
the tape symbol on the display will flash, indicating
the feature is active.
4. Insert the adapter into the cassette tape slot. It will
power up the radio and begin playing.
The override feature will remain active until the eject
button is pressed.
Playing a CD
Insert a CD partway into the slot, label side up. The
player will pull it in and the CD should begin playing.
If you want to insert a CD with the ignition off, first press
the eject button or the INFO knob.
If the ignition or radio is turned off with the CD in the
player, it will stay in the player. When the ignition
or radio is turned on, the CD will start playing where it
stopped, if it was the last selected audio source.
When a CD is inserted, the CD symbol will appear on
the display. As each new track starts to play, the
track number will appear on the display.
The CD player can play the smaller 3 inch (8 cm) single
CDs with an adapter ring. Full-size CDs and the
smaller CDs are loaded in the same manner.
If playing a CD-R the sound quality may be reduced
due to CD-R quality, the method of recording, the quality
of the music that has been recorded, and the way the
CD-R has been handled. There may be an increase
in skipping, difficulty in finding tracks, and/or difficulty in
loading and ejecting. If these problems occur try a
known good CD.
Do not add paper labels to CDs, they could get caught
in the CD player.
If an error appears on the display, see “CD Messages”
later in this section.
3-77
1 PREV (Previous): Press this pushbutton to go to the
beginning of the current track if more than eight
seconds have played. TRACK and the track number will
appear on the display. If this pushbutton is held or
pressed more than once, the player will continue moving
backward through the CD.
6 RDM (Random): Press this pushbutton to hear the
tracks in random, rather than sequential, order. RDM ON
will appear on the display. RDM T and the track
number will appear on the display when each track
starts to play. Press this pushbutton again to turn
off random play. RDM OFF will appear on the display.
2 NEXT: Press this pushbutton to go to the next track.
TRACK and the track number will appear on the
display. If this pushbutton is held or pressed more than
once, the player will continue moving forward through
the CD.
© SEEK ¨:
3 REV (Reverse): Press and hold this pushbutton to
quickly reverse within a track. Press and hold this
pushbutton for less than two seconds to reverse at
six times the normal playing speed. Press and hold it for
more than two seconds to reverse at 17 times the
normal playing speed. Release this pushbutton to play
the passage. ET and the elapsed time of the track
will appear on the display.
© SCAN ¨: Press and hold either the SCAN or
the TYPE arrows for more than two seconds until SCAN
appears on the display and you hear a beep. The
radio will go to the next track, play for 10 seconds, then
go on to the next track. Press either the SCAN or the
TYPE arrows again, to stop scanning.
4 FWD (Forward): Press and hold this pushbutton to
quickly advance within a track. Press and hold this
pushbutton for less than two seconds to advance at
six times the normal playing speed. Press and hold it for
more than two seconds to advance at 17 times the
normal playing speed. Release this pushbutton to play
the passage. ET and the elapsed time of the track
will appear on the display.
3-78
Press the left arrow to go to the start
of the current or to the previous track. Press the
right arrow to go to the start of the next track. If either
arrow is held or pressed more than once, the player will
continue moving backward or forward through the CD.
INFO (Information): Press this knob to see how long
the current track has been playing. ET and the elapsed
time will appear on the display. To change the default
on the display, track or elapsed time, press the
knob until you see the display you want, then hold the
knob for two seconds. The radio will produce one
beep and the selected display will now be the default.
BAND: Press this button to listen to the radio when
a cassette tape or CD is playing. The inactive tape or
CD will remain safely inside the radio for future listening.
TAPE DISC: Press this button to play a cassette tape
or CD when listening to the radio. The inactive tape
or CD will remain safely inside the radio for future
listening.
If any error occurs repeatedly or if an error cannot be
corrected, contact your GM dealer. If the radio displays
an error message, write it down and provide it to
your GM dealer when reporting the problem.
Z (Eject):
Listening to a DVD
CD Messages
If your vehicle has the Rear Seat Entertainment (RSE)
system and a DVD is playing, the DVD symbol will
appear on the radio display indicating that the DVD is
available and can be listened to through your vehicle’s
speakers.
Press this button to stop a CD when it is
playing or to eject a CD when it is not playing. Eject
may be activated with either the ignition or radio off.
CDs may be loaded with the radio and ignition off if this
button is pressed first.
If the CD comes out, it could be for one of the following
reasons:
• It is very hot. When the temperature returns to
normal, the CD should play.
• You are driving on a very rough road. When the
road becomes smoother, the CD should play.
• The CD is dirty, scratched, wet, or upside down.
• The air is very humid. If so, wait about an hour
and try again.
• There may have been a problem while burning
the CD.
• The label may be caught in the CD player.
To listen to the DVD, press the TAPE DISC button until
RSE appears on the radio display. The current radio
source will stop and the DVD sound will come through
the speakers.
To stop listening to the DVD, press the TAPE DISC
button, if a cassette tape or a CD is loaded, or press the
BAND button to select a different source.
When the RSE system is turned off, the DVD symbol
will go off of the radio display and the radio will display
RSE OFF. The radio will return to the last radio
source that you were listening to.
See Rear Seat Entertainment System on page 3-80 for
more information.
If the CD is not playing correctly, for any other reason,
try a known good CD.
3-79
Rear Seat Entertainment System
Headphones
Your vehicle may have a DVD Rear Seat Entertainment
(RSE) system. The RSE system includes a DVD
player, a video display screen, two sets of wireless
headphones, and a remote control.
The RSE system includes two sets of wireless
headphones.
Parental Control
This button is located behind the video screen. Press
this button while a DVD or CD is playing to freeze
the video and mute the audio. The video screen will
display Parental Control ON and the power indicator
light on the DVD player will flash. It will also disable all
other button operations from the remote control and
the DVD player, with the exception of the eject button.
Press this button again to restore operation of the
DVD player.
This button may also be used to turn the DVD player
power on and automatically resume play if the ignition
is in RUN, ACCESSORY, or if RAP is active.
Before You Drive
The RSE system is for rear seat passengers only.
The driver cannot safely view the video screen while
driving and should not try to do so.
3-80
Each set of headphones has an ON/OFF control.
An indicator light will illuminate on the headphones
when they are on. If the light does not illuminate, the
batteries may need to be replaced. See “Battery
Replacement” following for more information.
Each set of headphones has a volume knob. To adjust
the volume, adjust this knob.
The transmitters are located below the video display
screen. The headphones will shut off automatically
if they lose the signal from the system after about four
minutes to save battery power. The signal may be lost if
the system is turned off or if the headphones are out
of range of the transmitters.
When using the wired headphones, if the front seat
passengers play a CD in the Radio with Six-Disc CD
(if equipped) or use XM™ Satellite Radio Service
(if equipped), you will hear the audio for these sources,
instead of the DVD or CD that is currently playing
through the RSE.
Notice: Do not store the headphones in heat or
direct sunlight. This could damage the headphones
and repairs would not be covered by your warranty.
Keep the headphones stored in a cool, dry place.
Battery Replacement
To change the batteries, do the following:
1. Loosen the screw on the battery compartment door
located on the left side of the headphone earpiece.
2. Replace the two AAA batteries in the compartment.
Make sure that they are installed correctly, using
the diagram on the inside of the battery
compartment.
3. Tighten the screw to close the compartment door.
If the headphones are to be stored for a long period
of time, remove the batteries and keep them in a cool,
dry place.
Stereo RCA Jacks
The RCA jacks are located behind the video screen.
The RCA jacks allow audio and video signals to
be connected from an auxiliary device such as a
camcorder or a video game unit to the RSE system.
Standard RCA cables, not included, are needed
to connect the auxiliary device to the RCA jacks.
The yellow connector inputs video and the red and
white connectors input right and left audio. Refer to
the manufacturer’s instructions for proper connection
of the auxiliary device.
To use the auxiliary inputs on the RSE system, connect
an external auxiliary device to the color-coded RCA
jacks and turn both the auxiliary device and the
RSE system power on. If the RSE system had been
previously in the DVD player mode, pressing the SRCE
button on the faceplate or the remote control will
switch the RSE system between the auxiliary device
and the DVD player.
How to Change the Video Format when
in the Auxiliary Mode
The auxiliary input video format is preset to NTSC.
In some countries, the video format may be in the PAL
system. To change the video format, perform the
following:
1. Press the display menu button.
2. Press the down arrow button to highlight the
Video Format option.
3. Press the enter button to select Video Format.
4. Press the right or left arrow button to select
the desired video format.
5. Press the enter button to accept the change.
3-81
Audio Output
Video Screen
Audio from the DVD player or auxiliary inputs may be
heard through the following possible sources:
• Wireless Headphones
• Vehicle Speakers
• Vehicle wired headphone jacks on the Rear Seat
Audio system (if equipped)
The RSE system will always transmit the audio signal
by infrared to the wireless headphones, if there is audio
available. See “Headphones” previously for more
information.
The RSE system is capable of outputting audio to the
vehicle speakers by using the radio. The RSE system
may be selected as an audio source on the radio if the
RSE system power is on. Once the RSE system is
selected as an audio source on the radio, adjust the
speaker volume on the radio, if necessary. If the RSE
system power is not on, the RSE system will not be an
available source on the radio. Refer to the radio
information for the radio that your vehicle has for more
information.
The RSE system is capable of outputting audio to the
wired headphone jacks on the rear seat audio system
(if equipped). The RSE system may be selected as
an audio source on the rear seat audio system if
the RSE system power is on. Refer to Rear Seat Audio
(RSA) on page 3-91 for more information.
The video screen is located in the overhead console.
To use the video screen, push forward on the release
latch and the screen will fold down. Adjust the screen’s
position as desired. When the video screen is not in
use, push it up into its latched position.
3-82
The DVD player and display will continue to operate
when the screen is in the up or the down position. The
video screen contains the transmitters for the wireless
headphones and the remote control. If the screen is in the
closed position, the signals will not be available for the
operation of the headphones or the remote control.
Notice: Directly touching the video screen may
damage it. Do not touch the screen. See “Cleaning
the Video Screen” later in this section for more
information.
DVD Player
The DVD player is located in the overhead console.
The DVD player can be controlled by the buttons on
the DVD player and/or by the buttons on the remote
control. See “Remote Control” later in this section
for more information.
The DVD player power may be turned on when the
ignition is in RUN, ACCESSORY, or when Retained
Accessory Power (RAP) is active.
The RSE system DVD player is only compatible with
DVDs of the appropriate region code for the country that
the vehicle was sold in. The DVD region code is
printed on the jacket of most DVDs.
Standard audio CDs, CD-R, CD-RW, Video CD and
Photo CD/CD-R media are fully supported by this DVD
player. DVD-R and DVD-RW media is supported if
formatted as DVD-Video. DVD+R and DVD+RW media
may or may not be supported by the DVD player.
The DVD player does not support DVD-RAM,
DVD-ROM, and DVD Audio media. An error message
will appear on the display if this type of media is inserted
into the DVD player.
When using the wired headphones, not included, if the
front seat passengers play a CD in the Radio with
Six-Disc CD (if equipped) or use XM™ Satellite Radio
Service (if equipped), you will hear the audio for
these sources, instead of the DVD or CD that is currently
playing through the RSE.
If an error message appears on the video screen, see
“DVD Messages” later in this section.
DVD Player Buttons
O (Power): Press this button to turn the RSE system
on and off. The power indicator light will illuminate
when the power is on.
X (Eject):
Press this button to eject a DVD or CD.
SRCE (Source): Press this button to switch between
the DVD player and an auxiliary source.
c (Stop): Press this button to stop playing, rewinding,
or fast forwarding a DVD or CD. Press this button
twice to return to the beginning of the DVD.
s (Play/Pause):
Press this button to start play of a
DVD or CD. Press this button while a DVD or CD is
playing to pause it. Press this button again to continue
the play of the DVD or CD.
3-83
y (Main DVD Menu):
Press this button to access the
DVD menu. The DVD menu is different on every
DVD. Use the up, down, left, and right arrow buttons to
move the cursor around the DVD menu. After making
a selection press the enter button. This button only
operates when playing a DVD.
Playing a Disc
z (Set-up Menu):
If a disc is already in the player, press the play/pause
button on the DVD player faceplate or on the remote
control.
Press this button to adjust the
color, tint, brightness, contrast, display mode, and
dynamic range compression. The dynamic range
compression feature can be used to reduce loud audio
and increase low audio produced by some DVDs.
To change a feature back to the factory default setting,
press this button to display the feature, then press
and hold this button. The default setting will appear on
the display.
To play a disc, gently insert the disc with the label side
up into the loading slot. The DVD player will continue
loading the disc and the player will automatically start,
if the vehicle is in RUN, ACCESSORY, or when
RAP is active.
Some DVDs will not allow fast forwarding or skipping
of the copyright information or the previews. Some
DVDs will begin playing after the previews have finished.
If the DVD does not begin to play the main title, refer
to the on-screen instructions.
Stopping and Resuming Playback
While playing an Audio or DVD disc, press and hold this
button to display and to remove the track and time
information.
To stop playing a disc, press and release the stop
button on the DVD player faceplate or the remote
control.
n, q, p, o (Menu Navigation Arrows): Use the
arrow buttons to navigate through a menu.
To resume playback, press the play/pause button on
the DVD player faceplate or the remote control.
The movie should resume play from where it was last
stopped, if the disc has not been ejected and the
stop button has not been pressed twice. If the disc has
been ejected or if the stop button has been pressed
twice, the disc will resume play at the beginning.
r (Enter): Press this button to select the choices
that are highlighted in any menu.
3-84
Ejecting a Disc
Remote Control Buttons
Press the eject button on the DVD player faceplate to
eject the disc. There is not an eject button on the remote
control.
If a disc is ejected from the player, but is not removed,
the DVD player will reload the disc after a short
period of time. The disc will be stored in the DVD player.
The DVD player will not resume play of the disc
automatically.
Remote Control
To use the remote control, aim it at the transmitter
window below the video screen and press the desired
button. Direct sunlight or very bright light may affect the
ability of the RSE system to receive signals from the
remote control. If the remote control does not seem to
be working, the batteries may need to be replaced.
See “Battery Replacement” later in this section.
O (Power): Press this button to turn the DVD player
on and off.
Objects blocking the line of sight may also affect the
function of the remote control.
v (Title):
Notice: Storing the remote control in a hot area or
in direct sunlight may damage it, and the repairs
would not be covered by your warranty. Keep
the remote control stored in a cool, dry place.
n, q, p, o (Menu Navigation Arrows): Use the
arrow buttons to navigate through a menu.
Press this button to return the DVD to the
main menu of the DVD.
To extend the life of the batteries, the remote control
does not have a press and hold feature.
3-85
z (Set-up Menu):
Press this button to adjust the
color, tint, brightness, contrast, display mode, and
dynamic range compression. The dynamic range
compression feature can be used to reduce loud audio
and increase low audio produced by some DVDs.
e (Audio):
Press this button to display a menu that
will only appear when a DVD is being played. The format
and content of this function will vary for each disc.
r (Fast Reverse): Press this button to fast reverse
the DVD or CD. To stop fast reversing, press this button
again. This button may not work when the DVD is
playing the copyright information or the previews.
SRCE (Source): Press this button to switch between
the DVD player and an auxiliary source.
c (Stop): Press this button to stop playing, rewinding,
or fast forwarding a DVD or CD. Press this button
twice to return to the beginning of the DVD.
t (Previous Track/Chapter):
Press this button to
return to the start of the current track or chapter. Press
this button again to return to the previous track or
chapter. This button may not work when the DVD is
playing the copyright information or the previews.
3-86
1 through 0 (Numeric Keypad): The numeric keypad
provides you with the capability of direct chapter,
title, and track number selection.
}10 (Double Digit Entries):
Press this button to
select chapter, title, and track numbers greater than 9.
Press this button before inputting the number.
\ (Clear):
Press this button within three seconds after
inputting a number to clear the number(s).
P (Illumination): Press this button to turn the remote
control backlight on. The backlight will time out after
about 7 to 10 seconds if no other button is pressed while
the backlight is on.
y (Main DVD Menu):
Press this button to access the
DVD menu. The DVD menu is different on every
DVD. Use the up, down, left, and right arrow buttons to
move the cursor around the DVD menu. After making
a selection press the enter button. This button only
operates when playing a DVD.
r (Enter): Press this button to select the choices
that are highlighted in any menu.
q (Return): Press this button to exit the current
active menu and return to the previous menu. This
button will operate only when a DVD is playing and a
menu is active.
When the DVD is playing, press the pause button then
press the fast forward button. The DVD will continue
playing in a slow play mode. To cancel slow play mode,
press the play/pause button.
| (Camera Angle):
u (Next Track/Chapter):
{ (Subtitle):
Battery Replacement
Press this button to change
camera angles on DVDs that have this feature when a
DVD is playing. The format and content of this
function will vary for each disc.
Press this button to turn on subtitles
and to move through subtitle options when a DVD
is playing. The format and content of this function will
vary for each disc.
[ (Fast Forward):
Press this button to fast forward
the DVD or CD. To stop fast forwarding, press this
button again. This button may not work when the DVD
is playing the copyright information or the previews.
s (Play/Pause):
Press this button to start play of a
DVD or CD. Press this button while a DVD or CD is
playing to pause it. Press this button again to continue
the play of the DVD or CD.
Press this button to advance
to the beginning of the next track or chapter. This
button may not work when the DVD is playing the
copyright information or the previews.
To change the batteries, do the following:
1. Remove the battery compartment door located on
the bottom of the remote control.
2. Replace the two AA batteries in the compartment.
Make sure that they are installed correctly, using
the diagram on the inside of the battery
compartment.
3. Close the battery door securely.
3-87
If the remote control is to be stored for a long period of
time, remove the batteries and keep them in a cool,
dry place.
Problem
Recommended Action
No power.
The ignition might not be
in on or accessory.
The parental control
button might have been
turned on. The power
indicator light will flash.
Disc will not play.
The system might be off.
The parental control
button might have been
turned on. The power
indicator light will flash.
The system might be
in auxiliary mode.
The disc is upside down
or is not compatible.
The picture does not fill
the screen. There are
black borders on the
top and bottom or on
both sides or it looks
stretched out.
3-88
Check the display
mode settings in the
display menu.
Problem
Recommended Action
The disc was ejected,
but it was pulled back
into the DVD player.
The disc is being stored
in the DVD player. Press
the eject button again to
eject the disc.
In auxiliary mode, the
picture moves or scrolls.
Check the auxiliary input
connections at both
devices.
Change the Video Format
to PAL or NTSC. See
“Stereo RCA Jacks”
previously for how to
change the video format.
The language in the
audio or on the screen
is wrong.
Check the audio or
language selection in the
main DVD menu.
The remote control
does not work.
Check to make sure there
is no obstruction between
the remote control and
the transmitter window.
Check the batteries to
make sure they are not
dead or installed
incorrectly.
The parental control
button might have been
turned on. The power
indicator light will flash.
Problem
Recommended Action
After stopping the
player, I push Play but
sometimes the DVD
starts where I left off
and sometimes at the
beginning.
If the stop button was
pressed one time, the
DVD player will resume
playing where the DVD
was stopped. If the stop
button was pressed two
times the DVD player will
begin to play from the
beginning of the DVD.
The auxiliary source is
running but there is no
picture or sound.
Check that the DVD
player is in the auxiliary
source mode.
Check the auxiliary input
connections at both
devices.
My disc is stuck in the
player. The Load/Eject
button does not work.
Turn the DVD power off,
then on, then press the
load/eject button on the
DVD player.
Do not attempt to forcibly
remove the disc from the
DVD player. This could
permanently damage the
disc and DVD player.
Problem
Recommended Action
Sometimes the wireless
headphone audio cuts
out or buzzes.
Check for obstructions,
low batteries, reception
range, and interference
from cellular telephone
towers or by using your
cellular telephone in the
vehicle.
Check that the
headphones are facing
the front of the vehicle.
I lost the remote and/or
the headphones.
See your dealer for
assistance.
The DVD is playing,
but there is no picture
or sound.
Check that the DVD
player is in DVD mode.
The audio/video skips
or jumps.
The DVD or CD could
be dirty, scratched, or
damaged.
The audio from the radio
for the Radio with
Six-Disc CD and XM™
has taken over the audio
from the DVD or CD
when using the wired
headphones.
The RSE is working
correctly.
Use the wireless
headphones or have the
front seat passengers
listen to another audio
source.
3-89
DVD Messages
DVD Distortion
The following errors may be displayed on the video
screen:
There may be an experience with audio distortion in the
wireless headphones when operating cellular phones,
scanners, CB radios, Global Positioning Systems
(GPS)*, two-way radios, mobile fax, or walkie talkies.
Disc Format Error: This message will be displayed if a
disc is inserted upside down, if the disc is not readable,
or if the format is not compatible with the DVD player.
Load/Eject Error: This message will be displayed if the
disc is not properly loaded or ejected.
Disc Play Error: This message will be displayed if the
DVD player cannot play the disc. Scratched or
damaged discs will cause this error.
Region Code Error: This message will be displayed if
the region code of the DVD is not compatible with
the region code of the DVD player.
No Disc: This message will be displayed if any of the
buttons on the DVD faceplate or remote control are
pressed and no disc is present in the DVD player.
3-90
It may be necessary to turn off the DVD player when
operating one of these devices in or near the vehicle.
* Excludes the OnStar® System.
Cleaning the Video Screen
Pour some isopropyl or rubbing alcohol on a clean
cloth and gently wipe the video screen. Do not spray
directly onto the screen and do not press too hard or too
long on the video screen.
Navigation/Radio System
Your vehicle may have a navigation radio system that
includes Radio Data System (RDS) with Program Type
(PTY) selections that will seek out the kind of music you
want to listen to and XM™ Satellite Radio Service
capabilities (if equipped). The radio can also
communicate with the navigation system to broadcast
announcements on traffic, weather, and emergency alert
communications. For information on how to use this
system, see the “Navigation System” manual.
Rear Seat Audio (RSA)
This feature allows rear seat passengers to listen to any
of the sources: radio, CDs, or DVDs. However, the
rear seat passengers can only control the sources that
the front seat passengers are not listening to. For
example, rear seat passengers may listen to and control
CDs or DVDs through the headphones while the
driver listens to the radio through the front speakers.
The rear seat passengers have control of the volume for
each set of headphones.
The front seat audio controls always have priority
over the RSA controls. If the front seat passengers
switch the source for the main radio to a remote
source, the RSA will not be able to control the source.
You can operate the rear seat audio when the main
radio is off.
P (Power):
Press this button to turn the system
on or off. The rear speakers will be muted when the
power is turned on unless your vehicle is equipped
with the Bose® audio system.
u (Volume):
Turn this knob to increase or to
decrease the volume. The left knob controls the
left headphones and the right knob controls the
right headphones.
SRC (Source): Press this button to select a source:
radio, CDs, or DVDs.
3-91
x SEEK w: When listening to FM1, FM2, or AM,
press the up or the down arrow to go to the next or to
the previous station and stay there. This function is
inactive if the front seat passengers are listening to
the radio.
When a CD is playing, press the up arrow to go to the
next track on the CD. Press the down arrow to go
to the start of the current track if more than eight
seconds have played. This function is inactive if the
front seat passengers are listening to a CD.
PROG (Program): Press this button to go to the next
preset radio station set on the pushbuttons on the
main radio. This function is inactive if the front seat
passengers are listening to the radio.
When a cassette tape is playing, press this button
to go to the other side of the tape. This function
is inactive if the front seat passengers are listening
to a cassette tape.
When a CD is playing, press this button to go to the
beginning of the CD. This function is inactive if the
front seat passengers are listening to a CD.
When a CD is playing in the six-disc CD changer,
press this button to select the next CD, if multiple
CDs are loaded. This function is inactive if the front
seat passengers are listening to a CD.
3-92
CD Changer
The CD changer plays up to six standard size CDs
continuously. Individual CDs may be loaded or ejected
into or from any position.
A green light on each numbered button indicates a CD
is loaded in the respective position. An amber light
on a numbered button indicates that a CD is playing.
When loading CDs, the loading slot indicators turn
amber to indicate that the player is ready to accept a
CD. CDs can be loaded or ejected with the radio or the
ignition off.
You must load CDs with the label side up. If you do not,
the player will automatically eject the CDs.
Notice: Loading CDs with adhesive labels will
damage the player.
To load a CD, perform the following steps:
To eject a single CD, perform the following steps:
1. Press the LOAD button. Available positions will
blink amber.
1. Press the eject button (upward pointing arrow).
The buttons with loaded CDs will blink amber.
2. Select a position by pressing the numbered button
with the amber blinking light. If a button is not
pressed within five seconds, the changer will go to
the lowest available position.
2. Press one of the amber blinking buttons to select
the location of the CD you want to eject. The
changer will move to that location and eject the CD.
If you do not remove the CD from the player
within 10 seconds, it will be reloaded. If the eject
button is pressed and a numbered location button is
not pressed within five seconds, the current or
last played CD will be ejected.
3. Load the CD when the loading slot indicators
turn amber. An internal door will open allowing
a single CD to be inserted into the changer.
After approximately 10 seconds the changer will
be ready to play.
To load two or more CDs, perform the following steps:
1. Press and hold the LOAD button. The first CD
will be loaded into the lowest numbered empty
position.
2. Load a single CD when the loading slot indicators
turn amber. After about 10 seconds the changer will
cycle to the next available position.
To eject all CDs, press and hold the eject button.
To play a CD, perform one of the following:
• With the radio on, press the numbered button with
a green indicator light on the CD changer.
• Press the TAPE CD button on the radio. The CD
changer will go to its last played position.
3. Repeat Step 2 until all CDs are loaded into all of
the desired positions. If you do not wish to load
all of the positions, cancel loading by pressing
a button with a green flashing indicator light or
wait 20 seconds for the changer to time out.
3-93
CD Functions
All of the CD changer functions are performed by the
radio, except for loading and ejecting.
6 RDM (Random): Press and release this pushbutton
to hear all of the tracks on all of the loaded CDs in
random, rather than sequential, order. RDM ALL
will appear on the display.
1 PREV (Previous): Press this pushbutton to go to
beginning of the current track if more than eight seconds
have played. If this pushbutton is held or pressed
more than once, the player will continue moving
backward through the CD.
Press and hold this pushbutton to hear the tracks on
the current CD in random, rather than sequential order.
You will hear a beep and RDM ONE will appear on
the display. Press this pushbutton again to turn
off random play. RDM OFF will appear on the display.
2 NEXT: Press this pushbutton to go to the next track.
If this pushbutton is held or pressed more than once,
the player will continue moving forward through the CD.
q SEEK r: Press the right or the left arrow to
go to the next or to the previous track on the CD.
3 REV (Reverse): Press and hold this pushbutton
to reverse quickly within a track. Release it to play the
passage. The elapsed time of the track will appear
on the display.
q SCAN r: Press and hold either arrow for more
than two seconds until SCAN appears on the display
and you hear a beep. The radio will go to the next track,
play for 10 seconds, then go on to the next track.
Press either SCAN arrow again to stop scanning.
4 FWD (Forward): Press and hold this pushbutton
to advance quickly within a track. Release it to play
the passage. The elapsed time of the track will appear
on the display.
BAND: Press this button to listen to the radio when a
CD is playing. The inactive CD(s) will remain safely
inside the player for future listening.
5 X SIDE: Press this pushbutton to select a CD.
The CD number and track number will appear on
the display.
3-94
TAPE DISC: Press this button to play a CD, if have a
CD is loaded in the changer and the radio is on.
Press this button to switch between playing a tape and
a CD in the CD changer if both are loaded.
CD Changer Errors
Theft-Deterrent Feature
CHK CD (Check): If this message appears on the
display, it could be for one of the following reasons:
THEFTLOCK® is designed to discourage theft of your
vehicle’s radio. The feature works automatically by
learning a portion of the Vehicle Identification Number
(VIN). If the radio is moved to a different vehicle, it
will not operate and LOCKED will appear on the display.
• It is very hot. When the temperature returns to
normal, the CD should play.
• You are driving on a very rough road. When the
road becomes smoother, the CD should play.
When the radio and vehicle are turned off, the blinking
red light indicates that THEFTLOCK® is armed.
• The CD is dirty, scratched, wet, or upside down.
• The air is very humid. If so, wait about an hour
With THEFTLOCK® activated, the radio will not operate
if stolen.
and try again.
• There may have been a problem while burning
the CD.
• The label may be caught in the CD player.
• The CD player is very hot.
If the CD is not playing correctly, for any other reason,
try a known good CD.
If any error occurs repeatedly or if an error cannot be
corrected, contact your GM dealer. If the radio displays
an error message, write it down and provide it to
your GM dealer when reporting the problem.
3-95
Audio Steering Wheel Controls
PROG (Program): Press this button to play a station
you have programmed on the radio preset pushbuttons.
The radio will only seek preset stations with a strong
signal that are in the selected band.
When a CD is playing in the CD changer, press this
button to go to the next available CD, if multiple CDs are
loaded.
Q SOURCE R: Press this button to switch between
FM1, FM2, AM, or XM1 or XM2 (if equipped), or a
CD. If a CD is loaded the CD symbol will appear on the
display.
Some audio controls can be adjusted at the steering
wheel. They include the following:
g (OnStar/Voice Recognition): If your vehicle has
OnStar®, press this button to interact with the OnStar®
system. See the OnStar® manual provided with your
vehicle for more information.
If your vehicle does not have OnStar®, press this
button to silence the system. Press it again, or any
other radio button, to turn on the sound.
3-96
Q SEEK R: Press the up or the down arrow to go
to the next or to the previous radio station and stay
there. The radio will only seek stations with a strong
signal that are in the selected band.
When a CD is playing, press the up or the down arrow
to fast forward or reverse.
Q VOL R (Volume): Press the up or the down arrow
to increase or to decrease the volume.
Radio Reception
Care of Your Cassette Tape Player
AM
A tape player that is not cleaned regularly can cause
reduced sound quality, ruined cassettes, or a damaged
mechanism. Cassette tapes should be stored in their
cases away from contaminants, direct sunlight, and
extreme heat. If they are not, they may not operate
properly or may cause failure of the tape player.
The range for most AM stations is greater than for FM,
especially at night. The longer range can cause
station frequencies to interfere with each other. Static
can occur on AM stations caused by things like
storms and power lines. Try reducing the treble to
reduce this noise.
FM Stereo
FM stereo will give the best sound, but FM signals will
reach only about 10 to 40 miles (16 to 65 km). Tall
buildings or hills can interfere with FM signals, causing
the sound to fade in and out.
XM™ Satellite Radio Service
XM™ Satellite Radio Service gives digital radio
reception from coast to coast. Just as with FM, tall
buildings or hills can interfere with satellite radio signals,
causing the sound to fade in and out. The radio may
display NO SIGNAL to indicate interference.
The tape player should be cleaned regularly after every
50 hours of use. The radio may display CLEAN to
indicate that the tape player has been used for 50 hours
without resetting the tape clean timer. If this message
appears on the display, the cassette tape player
needs to be cleaned. It will still play tapes, but it should
be cleaned as soon as possible to prevent damage
to the tapes and player. If there is a reduction in sound
quality, try a known good cassette to see if the tape
or the tape player is at fault. If this other cassette has no
improvement in sound quality, clean the tape player.
For best results, use a scrubbing action, non-abrasive
cleaning cassette with pads which scrub the tape
head as the hubs of the cleaner cassette turn. The
recommended cleaning cassette is available through
your dealer.
3-97
When cleaning the cassette tape player with the
recommended non-abrasive cleaning cassette, it is
possible that the cassette may eject, because the cut
tape detection feature on the radio may recognize it as a
broken tape, in error. To prevent the cleaning cassette
from being ejected, use the following steps:
1. Turn the ignition on.
2. Turn the radio off.
3. Press and hold the TAPE DISC button for five
seconds. READY will appear on the display and
the cassette symbol will flash for five seconds.
4. Insert the scrubbing action cleaning cassette.
5. Eject the cleaning cassette after the manufacturer’s
recommended cleaning time.
When the cleaning cassette has been ejected, the
cut tape detection feature will be active again.
A non-scrubbing action, wet-type cleaner which uses a
cassette with a fabric belt to clean the tape head
can be used. This type of cleaning cassette will not
eject on its own. A non-scrubbing action cleaner may not
clean as thoroughly as the scrubbing type cleaner.
The use of a non-scrubbing action, dry-type cleaning
cassette is not recommended.
3-98
After the player is cleaned, press and hold the eject
button for five seconds to reset the CLEAN indicator.
The radio will display --- or CLEANED to show the
indicator was reset.
Cassettes are subject to wear and the sound quality
may degrade over time. Always make sure the cassette
tape is in good condition before the tape player is
serviced.
Care of Your CDs and DVDs
Handle discs carefully. Store them in their original cases
or other protective cases and away from direct sunlight
and dust. If the surface of a disc is soiled, dampen
a clean, soft cloth in a mild, neutral detergent solution
and clean it, wiping from the center to the edge.
Be sure never to touch the side without writing when
handling discs. Pick up discs by grasping the outer
edges or the edge of the hole and the outer edge.
Care of Your CD Player
The use of CD lens cleaners for CD players is not
advised, due to the risk of contaminating the lens of the
CD optics with lubricants internal to the CD mechanism.
Care of Your CD and DVD Player
The performance of the XM™ system may be affected if
the sunroof is open.
The use of CD lens cleaners for CDs is not advised,
due to the risk of contaminating the lens of the CD optics
with lubricants internal to the CD mechanism.
Loading items onto the roof of your vehicle can interfere
with the performance of the XM™ system. Make sure
that the XM™ satellite antenna is not obstructed.
Fixed Mast Antenna
Chime Level Adjustment
The fixed mast antenna can withstand most car washes
without being damaged. If the mast should ever
become slightly bent, straighten it out by hand. If the
mast is badly bent, replace it.
The radio is the vehicle chime producer. To change the
volume level, press and hold pushbutton 6 with the
ignition on and the radio power off. The chime volume
level will change from the normal level to loud, and
LOUD will appear on the radio display. To change back
to the default or normal setting, press and hold
pushbutton 6 again. The chime level will change from
the loud level to normal, and NORMAL will appear
on the radio display. Each time the chime volume is
changed, three chimes will sound as an example of the
new volume selected. Removing the radio and not
replacing it with a factory radio or chime module will
disable vehicle chimes.
Check occasionally to make sure the mast is still
tightened to the cowl. If tightening is required, tighten
by hand, then with a wrench one quarter turn.
XM™ Satellite Radio Antenna
System
The XM™ Satellite Radio antenna is located on the
roof of your vehicle. Keep this antenna clear of snow
and ice build up for clear radio reception.
3-99
✍ NOTES
3-100
Section 4
Driving Your Vehicle
Your Driving, the Road, and Your Vehicle ..........4-2
Defensive Driving ...........................................4-2
Drunken Driving .............................................4-2
Control of a Vehicle ........................................4-5
Braking .........................................................4-5
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) .........................4-6
Braking in Emergencies ...................................4-8
Road Sensing Suspension ...............................4-8
StabiliTrak® System ........................................4-8
Steering ......................................................4-11
Off-Road Recovery .......................................4-13
Passing .......................................................4-14
Loss of Control .............................................4-15
Operating Your All-Wheel-Drive Vehicle
Off Paved Roads .......................................4-16
Driving at Night ............................................4-29
Driving in Rain and on Wet Roads ..................4-30
City Driving ..................................................4-33
Freeway Driving ...........................................4-34
Before Leaving on a Long Trip .......................4-35
Highway Hypnosis ........................................4-36
Hill and Mountain Roads ................................4-36
Winter Driving ..............................................4-38
If You Are Stuck: In Sand, Mud, Ice or Snow .......4-42
Rocking Your Vehicle to Get It Out .................4-42
Recovery Hooks ...........................................4-43
Loading Your Vehicle ....................................4-44
Towing ..........................................................4-50
Towing Your Vehicle .....................................4-50
Recreational Vehicle Towing ...........................4-50
Towing a Trailer ...........................................4-51
4-1
Your Driving, the Road, and
Your Vehicle
Defensive Driving
The best advice anyone can give about driving is: Drive
defensively.
proper defensive driving more difficult and can even
cause a collision, with resulting injury. Ask a passenger to
help do things like this, or pull off the road in a safe place
to do them yourself. These simple defensive driving
techniques could save your life.
Drunken Driving
Please start with a very important safety device in your
vehicle: Buckle up. See Safety Belts: They Are for
Everyone on page 1-8.
Death and injury associated with drinking and driving is
a national tragedy. It is the number one contributor
to the highway death toll, claiming thousands of victims
every year.
Defensive driving really means “be ready for anything.”
On city streets, rural roads, or freeways, it means
“always expect the unexpected.”
Alcohol affects four things that anyone needs to drive a
vehicle:
Assume that pedestrians or other drivers are going to
be careless and make mistakes. Anticipate what
they might do. Be ready for their mistakes.
Rear-end collisions are about the most preventable of
accidents. Yet they are common. Allow enough following
distance. It is the best defensive driving maneuver, in
both city and rural driving. You never know when the
vehicle in front of you is going to brake or turn suddenly.
Defensive driving requires that a driver concentrate on
the driving task. Anything that distracts from the driving
task — such as concentrating on a cellular telephone call,
reading, or reaching for something on the floor — makes
4-2
•
•
•
•
Judgment
Muscular Coordination
Vision
Attentiveness
Police records show that almost half of all motor
vehicle-related deaths involve alcohol. In most cases,
these deaths are the result of someone who was
drinking and driving. In recent years, more than
16,000 annual motor vehicle-related deaths have been
associated with the use of alcohol, with more than
300,000 people injured.
Many adults — by some estimates, nearly half the adult
population — choose never to drink alcohol, so they
never drive after drinking. For persons under 21,
it is against the law in every U.S. state to drink alcohol.
There are good medical, psychological and
developmental reasons for these laws.
same BAC by drinking three 4 ounce (120 ml) glasses
of wine or three mixed drinks if each had 1-1/2 ounces
(45 ml) of liquors like whiskey, gin, or vodka.
The obvious way to eliminate the leading highway
safety problem is for people never to drink alcohol and
then drive. But what if people do? How much is “too
much” if someone plans to drive? It is a lot less
than many might think. Although it depends on each
person and situation, here is some general information
on the problem.
The Blood Alcohol Concentration (BAC) of someone
who is drinking depends upon four things:
• The amount of alcohol consumed
• The drinker’s body weight
• The amount of food that is consumed before and
during drinking
• The length of time it has taken the drinker to
consume the alcohol
According to the American Medical Association, a 180 lb
(82 kg) person who drinks three 12 ounce (355 ml)
bottles of beer in an hour will end up with a BAC
of about 0.06 percent. The person would reach the
It is the amount of alcohol that counts. For example, if
the same person drank three double martinis (3 ounces
or 90 ml of liquor each) within an hour, the person’s
BAC would be close to 0.12 percent. A person
who consumes food just before or during drinking will
have a somewhat lower BAC level.
4-3
There is a gender difference, too. Women generally
have a lower relative percentage of body water
than men. Since alcohol is carried in body water, this
means that a woman generally will reach a higher BAC
level than a man of her same body weight will when
each has the same number of drinks.
The law in most U.S. states, and throughout Canada,
sets the legal limit at 0.08 percent. In some other
countries, the limit is even lower. For example, it is
0.05 percent in both France and Germany. The
BAC limit for all commercial drivers in the United States
is 0.04 percent.
The BAC will be over 0.10 percent after three to
six drinks (in one hour). Of course, as we have seen,
it depends on how much alcohol is in the drinks,
and how quickly the person drinks them.
But the ability to drive is affected well below a BAC of
0.10 percent. Research shows that the driving skills
of many people are impaired at a BAC approaching
0.05 percent, and that the effects are worse at night. All
drivers are impaired at BAC levels above 0.05 percent.
Statistics show that the chance of being in a collision
increases sharply for drivers who have a BAC of
4-4
0.05 percent or above. A driver with a BAC level of
0.06 percent has doubled his or her chance of having a
collision. At a BAC level of 0.10 percent, the chance
of this driver having a collision is 12 times greater; at a
level of 0.15 percent, the chance is 25 times greater!
The body takes about an hour to rid itself of the alcohol
in one drink. No amount of coffee or number of cold
showers will speed that up. “I will be careful” is not the
right answer. What if there is an emergency, a need
to take sudden action, as when a child darts into
the street? A person with even a moderate BAC might
not be able to react quickly enough to avoid the
collision.
There is something else about drinking and driving that
many people do not know. Medical research shows
that alcohol in a person’s system can make crash
injuries worse, especially injuries to the brain, spinal
cord, or heart. This means that when anyone who has
been drinking — driver or passenger — is in a crash,
that person’s chance of being killed or permanently
disabled is higher than if the person had not been
drinking.
Braking
{CAUTION:
Drinking and then driving is very dangerous.
Your reflexes, perceptions, attentiveness, and
judgment can be affected by even a small
amount of alcohol. You can have a serious — or
even fatal — collision if you drive after drinking.
Please do not drink and drive or ride with a
driver who has been drinking. Ride home in a
cab; or if you are with a group, designate a
driver who will not drink.
Control of a Vehicle
You have three systems that make your vehicle go where
you want it to go. They are the brakes, the steering, and
the accelerator. All three systems have to do their work at
the places where the tires meet the road.
Sometimes, as when you are driving on snow or ice, it is
easy to ask more of those control systems than the tires
and road can provide. That means you can lose control of
your vehicle. See StabiliTrak® System on page 4-8.
Braking action involves perception time and
reaction time.
First, you have to decide to push on the brake pedal.
That is perception time. Then you have to bring up your
foot and do it. That is reaction time.
Average reaction time is about three-fourths of a
second. But that is only an average. It might be less
with one driver and as long as two or three seconds or
more with another. Age, physical condition, alertness,
coordination and eyesight all play a part. So do alcohol,
drugs and frustration. But even in three-fourths of a
second, a vehicle moving at 60 mph (100 km/h) travels
66 feet (20 m). That could be a lot of distance in an
emergency, so keeping enough space between
your vehicle and others is important.
And, of course, actual stopping distances vary greatly
with the surface of the road (whether it is pavement
or gravel); the condition of the road (wet, dry, icy); tire
tread; the condition of your brakes; the weight of
the vehicle and the amount of brake force applied.
4-5
Avoid needless heavy braking. Some people drive
in spurts — heavy acceleration followed by heavy
braking — rather than keeping pace with traffic. This is
a mistake. Your brakes may not have time to cool
between hard stops. Your brakes will wear out much
faster if you do a lot of heavy braking. If you keep pace
with the traffic and allow realistic following distances,
you will eliminate a lot of unnecessary braking.
That means better braking and longer brake life.
If your engine ever stops while you are driving, brake
normally but do not pump your brakes. If you do,
the pedal may get harder to push down. If your engine
stops, you will still have some power brake assist.
But you will use it when you brake. Once the power
assist is used up, it may take longer to stop and
the brake pedal will be harder to push.
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS)
Your vehicle has anti-lock brakes. ABS is an advanced
electronic braking system that will help prevent a
braking skid.
When you start your engine and begin to drive away,
your anti-lock brake system will check itself. You
may hear a momentary motor or clicking noise while
this test is going on. This is normal.
If there is a problem with
the anti-lock brake system,
this warning light will
stay on. See Anti-Lock
Brake System Warning
Light on page 3-37.
Along with ABS, your vehicle has a Dynamic Rear
Proportioning (DRP) system. If there is a DRP problem,
both the brake and ABS warning lights will come on
accompanied by a 10-second chime. The lights
and chime will come on each time the ignition is turned
on until the problem is repaired. See your dealer for
service.
4-6
The anti-lock system can change the brake pressure
faster than any driver could. The computer is
programmed to make the most of available tire and
road conditions. This can help you steer around
the obstacle while braking hard.
Let us say the road is wet and you are driving safely.
Suddenly, an animal jumps out in front of you. You slam
on the brakes and continue braking. Here is what
happens with ABS:
A computer senses that wheels are slowing down. If
one of the wheels is about to stop rolling, the computer
will separately work the brakes at each front wheel
and at both rear wheels.
As you brake, your computer keeps receiving updates
on wheel speed and controls braking pressure
accordingly.
4-7
Remember: Anti-lock does not change the time you
need to get your foot up to the brake pedal or always
decrease stopping distance. If you get too close to
the vehicle in front of you, you will not have time to apply
your brakes if that vehicle suddenly slows or stops.
Always leave enough room up ahead to stop, even
though you have anti-lock brakes.
Using Anti-Lock
Do not pump the brakes. Just hold the brake pedal
down firmly and let anti-lock work for you. You may feel
the brakes vibrate, or you may notice some noise,
but this is normal.
Braking in Emergencies
With anti-lock, you can steer and brake at the same
time. In many emergencies, steering can help you more
than even the very best braking.
Road Sensing Suspension
The Road Sensing Suspension (RSS) feature provides
superior vehicle ride and handling under a variety of
passenger and loading conditions.
4-8
The system is fully automatic and uses a computer
controller to continuously monitor vehicle speed, wheel
to body position, lift/dive and steering position of the
vehicle. The controller then sends signals to each shock
absorber to independently adjust the damping level to
provide the optimum vehicle ride.
RSS also interacts with the tow/haul mode that, when
engaged, will provide additional control of the shock
absorbers. This additional control results in better ride
and handling characteristics when the vehicle is
loaded or towing a trailer. See “Tow/Haul Mode” under
Towing a Trailer on page 4-51.
StabiliTrak® System
Your vehicle is equipped with StabiliTrak®, which
combines antilock brake, traction and stability control
systems and helps the driver maintain directional control
of the vehicle in most driving conditions.
When you first start your vehicle and begin to drive
away, the system performs several diagnostic checks
to insure there are no problems. You may hear or
feel the system working. This is normal and does not
mean there is a problem with your vehicle. The system
should initialize before the vehicle reaches 20 mph
(32 km/h). In some cases, it may take approximately
two miles of driving before the system initializes.
If the system fails to turn on or activate, the STABILITY
SYS DISABLED or SERVICE STABILITY message
will be displayed. If the vehicle has gone through heavy
acceleration or braking or multiple turns during the
first two miles of driving after starting your vehicle, the
STABILITY SYS DISABLED message may appear.
If this is the case, your vehicle does not need servicing.
You will need to turn the vehicle off and then restart
it to initialize StabiliTrak®. If either message appears on
the Driver Information Center (DIC), and your vehicle
hasn’t gone through hard acceleration, braking or
multiple turns in the first two miles of driving, your
vehicle should be taken in for service.
The STABILITY SYS ACTIVE message will appear on
the Driver Information Center (DIC) only when the system
is both on and activated. It means that an advanced
computer-controlled system has come on to help your
vehicle continue to go in the direction in which you’re
steering. StabiliTrak® activates when the computer
senses that your vehicle is just starting to spin, as it might
if you hit a patch of ice or other slippery spot on the road.
When the system activates, you may hear a noise or feel
a vibration in the brake pedal. This is normal. When the
STABILITY SYS ACTIVE message is on, you should
continue to steer in the direction you want to go.
The system is designed to help you in bad weather or
other difficult driving situations by making the most of
whatever road conditions will permit. For more
information on the stability messages, see Driver
Information Center (DIC) on page 3-46.
StabiliTrak® and part of
the traction control system
can be turned off or
back on by pressing the
StabiliTrak® button located
on the instrument panel.
When the system is turned off, the traction off light will
illuminate, and the STABILITY SYS DISABLED
message will appear on the DIC to warn the driver that
both the stability system and part of the traction
control system are disabled. Your vehicle will still have
brake-traction control when StabiliTrak® is off, but
will not be able to use the engine speed management
system. See “Traction Control Operation” next for
more information.
4-9
When the StabiliTrak® system has been turned off
you may still hear system noises as a result of
the brake-traction control coming on.
To limit wheel spin and realize the full benefits of the
stability enhancement system, you should normally
leave StabiliTrak® on, but it may be necessary to turn
the system off if your vehicle is stuck in sand, mud,
ice or snow, and you want to “rock” your vehicle
to attempt to free it. It may also be necessary to turn off
the system when driving in extreme off-road conditions
where high wheel spin is required. See If You Are Stuck:
In Sand, Mud, Ice or Snow on page 4-42.
Traction Control Operation
The traction control system is part of the StabiliTrak®
system. Traction control limits wheel spin by reducing
engine power to the wheels (engine speed
management) and by applying brakes to each individual
wheel (brake-traction control) as necessary.
The traction control system is enabled automatically
when you start your vehicle, and it will activate
and display the TRACTION ACTIVE message in the
Driver Information Center (DIC) if it senses that any of
the wheels are spinning or beginning to lose traction
while driving. If you turn off StabiliTrak®, only the
brake-traction control portion of traction control will work.
The engine speed management will be disabled.
4-10
In this state, engine power is not reduced automatically
and the driven wheels can spin more freely. This
can cause the brake-traction control to activate
constantly. For more information on the traction active
message, see Driver Information Center (DIC) on
page 3-46.
Notice: If the traction off light comes on due to
heavy braking and/or because the traction control
system has been continuously active, do not
allow the wheel(s) of one axle to spin excessively.
If you do, you may be causing damage to the
transfer case. This could lead to costly repairs not
covered by your warranty.
If the brake traction-control system activates constantly
or if the brakes have heated up due to high-speed
braking, brake traction-control will be disabled and the
TRACTION SYS LIMITED message will be displayed.
In the limited mode, the traction control system will only
use engine traction-control and is limited in its ability
to provide optimal performance since the system will not
utilize brake traction-control to control slip on the
drive wheels. The system will return to normal operation
after the brakes have cooled. This can take up to
two minutes or longer depending on brake usage.
Notice: If you allow the wheel(s) of one axle to spin
excessively while the traction off, ABS and brake
warning lights and the SERVICE STABILITY
message are displayed, you could damage the
transfer case. The repairs would not be covered by
your warranty. Reduce engine power and do not
spin the wheel(s) excessively while these lights and
this message are displayed.
The traction control system may activate on dry or
rough roads or under conditions such as heavy
acceleration while turning or abrupt upshifts/downshifts
of the transmission. When this happens you may
notice a reduction in acceleration, or may hear a noise
or vibration. This is normal.
If your vehicle is in cruise control when the system
activates, the STABILITY SYS ACTIVE message will
appear on the Driver Information Center and the cruise
control will automatically disengage. When road
conditions allow you to use cruise again, you may
re-engage the cruise control. See Cruise Control on
page 3-10.
StabiliTrak® may also turn off automatically if it
determines that a problem exists with the system.
If the problem does not clear itself after restarting the
vehicle, you should see your dealer for service.
Steering
Power Steering
If you lose power steering assist because the engine
stops or the system is not functioning, you can steer
but it will take much more effort.
Steering Tips
Driving on Curves
It is important to take curves at a reasonable speed.
A lot of the “driver lost control” accidents mentioned on
the news happen on curves. Here is why:
Experienced driver or beginner, each of us is subject
to the same laws of physics when driving on curves. The
traction of the tires against the road surface makes it
possible for the vehicle to change its path when you
turn the front wheels. If there is no traction, inertia will
keep the vehicle going in the same direction. If you
have ever tried to steer a vehicle on wet ice, you will
understand this.
The traction you can get in a curve depends on the
condition of your tires and the road surface, the angle
at which the curve is banked, and your speed. While you
are in a curve, speed is the one factor you can control.
4-11
Suppose you are steering through a sharp curve.
Then you suddenly accelerate. Both control
systems — steering and acceleration — have to do
their work where the tires meet the road. Adding
the sudden acceleration can demand too much of those
places. You can lose control. See StabiliTrak® System
on page 4-8.
What should you do if this ever happens? Ease up on
the accelerator pedal, steer the vehicle the way you
want it to go, and slow down.
You may see the STABILITY SYSTEM ACTIVE
message on the message center. See “Stability System
Active Message” under DIC Warnings and Messages
on page 3-50.
Speed limit signs near curves warn that you should
adjust your speed. Of course, the posted speeds
are based on good weather and road conditions. Under
less favorable conditions you will want to go slower.
If you need to reduce your speed as you approach
a curve, do it before you enter the curve, while your
front wheels are straight ahead.
Try to adjust your speed so you can “drive” through the
curve. Maintain a reasonable, steady speed. Wait to
accelerate until you are out of the curve, and then
accelerate gently into the straightaway.
4-12
Steering in Emergencies
There are times when steering can be more effective
than braking. For example, you come over a hill and find
a truck stopped in your lane, or a car suddenly pulls
out from nowhere, or a child darts out from between
parked cars and stops right in front of you. You
can avoid these problems by braking — if you can stop
in time. But sometimes you cannot; there is not room.
That is the time for evasive action — steering around
the problem.
Your vehicle can perform very well in emergencies like
these. First apply your brakes.
See Braking on page 4-5. It is better to remove as much
speed as you can from a possible collision. Then
steer around the problem, to the left or right depending
on the space available.
Off-Road Recovery
You may find that your right wheels have dropped
off the edge of a road onto the shoulder while you
are driving.
An emergency like this requires close attention and a
quick decision. If you are holding the steering wheel at
the recommended 9 and 3 o’clock positions, you
can turn it a full 180 degrees very quickly without
removing either hand. But you have to act fast, steer
quickly, and just as quickly straighten the wheel
once you have avoided the object.
The fact that such emergency situations are always
possible is a good reason to practice defensive driving
at all times and wear safety belts properly.
If the level of the shoulder is only slightly below the
pavement, recovery should be fairly easy. Ease off the
accelerator and then, if there is nothing in the way,
steer so that your vehicle straddles the edge of
the pavement. You can turn the steering wheel up to
one-quarter turn until the right front tire contacts
the pavement edge. Then turn your steering wheel to
go straight down the roadway.
4-13
Passing
The driver of a vehicle about to pass another on a
two-lane highway waits for just the right moment,
accelerates, moves around the vehicle ahead, then
goes back into the right lane again. A simple maneuver?
Not necessarily! Passing another vehicle on a two-lane
highway is a potentially dangerous move, since the
passing vehicle occupies the same lane as oncoming
traffic for several seconds. A miscalculation, an error in
judgment, or a brief surrender to frustration or anger
can suddenly put the passing driver face to face with the
worst of all traffic accidents — the head-on collision.
So here are some tips for passing:
• Drive ahead. Look down the road, to the sides
and to crossroads for situations that might affect
your passing patterns. If you have any doubt
whatsoever about making a successful pass, wait
for a better time.
• Watch for traffic signs, pavement markings and
lines. If you can see a sign up ahead that might
indicate a turn or an intersection, delay your pass.
A broken center line usually indicates it is all
right to pass, providing the road ahead is clear.
Never cross a solid line on your side of the lane or
a double solid line, even if the road seems empty
of approaching traffic.
4-14
• Do not get too close to the vehicle you want to
pass while you are awaiting an opportunity. For one
thing, following too closely reduces your area of
vision, especially if you are following a larger
vehicle. Also, you will not have adequate space if
the vehicle ahead suddenly slows or stops.
Keep back a reasonable distance.
• When it looks like a chance to pass is coming up,
start to accelerate but stay in the right lane and
do not get too close. Time your move so you will be
increasing speed as the time comes to move into
the other lane. If the way is clear to pass, you
will have a running start that more than makes up
for the distance you would lose by dropping
back. And if something happens to cause you to
cancel your pass, you need only slow down
and drop back again and wait for another
opportunity.
• If other vehicles are lined up to pass a slow vehicle,
wait your turn. But take care that someone is not
trying to pass you as you pull out to pass the slow
vehicle. Remember to glance over your shoulder
and check the blind spot.
• Check your mirrors, glance over your shoulder
and start your left lane change signal before moving
out of the right lane to pass. When you are far
enough ahead of the passed vehicle to see its
front in your inside mirror, activate your right lane
change signal and move back into the right
lane. Remember that if your right outside mirror
is convex, the vehicle you just passed may seem
to be farther away from you than it really is.
• Try not to pass more than one vehicle at a time
on two-lane roads. Reconsider before passing
the next vehicle.
• Do not overtake a slowly moving vehicle too rapidly.
Even though the brake lamps are not flashing, it
may be slowing down or starting to turn.
• If you are being passed, make it easy for the
following driver to get ahead of you. Perhaps
you can ease a little to the right.
Loss of Control
Let us review what driving experts say about what
happens when the three control systems — brakes,
steering, and acceleration — do not have enough friction
where the tires meet the road to do what the driver
has asked.
In any emergency, do not give up. Keep trying to
steer and constantly seek an escape route or area of
less danger.
Skidding
In a skid, a driver can lose control of the vehicle.
Defensive drivers avoid most skids by taking reasonable
care suited to existing conditions, and by not overdriving
those conditions. But skids are always possible.
The three types of skids correspond to your vehicle’s
three control systems. In the braking skid, your
wheels are not rolling. In the steering or cornering skid,
too much speed or steering in a curve causes tires
to slip and lose cornering force. And in the acceleration
skid, too much throttle causes the driving wheels
to spin.
A cornering skid is best handled by easing your foot off
the accelerator pedal.
4-15
Remember: Any traction control system helps avoid only
the acceleration skid. If your traction control system is
off, then an acceleration skid is also best handled
by easing your foot off the accelerator pedal.
If your vehicle starts to slide, ease your foot off the
accelerator pedal and quickly steer the way you want
the vehicle to go. If you start steering quickly enough,
your vehicle may straighten out. Always be ready
for a second skid if it occurs.
Of course, traction is reduced when water, snow, ice,
gravel, or other material is on the road. For safety,
you will want to slow down and adjust your driving to
these conditions. It is important to slow down on slippery
surfaces because stopping distance will be longer and
vehicle control more limited.
Operating Your All-Wheel-Drive
Vehicle Off Paved Roads
Many of the same design features that help
make your vehicle responsive on paved roads during
poor weather conditions — features like all-wheel
drive — help make it much better suited for off-road use
than a conventional passenger car. Its higher ground
clearance also helps your vehicle step over some
off-road obstacles. But your vehicle does not have
features like special underbody shielding and a transfer
case low gear range, things that are usually thought
necessary for extended or severe off-road service.
This guide is for operating your vehicle off paved roads.
Also, see Braking on page 4-5.
While driving on a surface with reduced traction, try
your best to avoid sudden steering, acceleration,
or braking, including engine braking by shifting to a
lower gear. Any sudden changes could cause the tires
to slide. You may not realize the surface is slippery
until your vehicle is skidding. Learn to recognize warning
clues — such as enough water, ice, or packed snow
on the road to make a mirrored surface — and
slow down when you have any doubt.
Off-road driving can be great fun. But it does have
some definite hazards. The greatest of these is
the terrain itself.
Remember: Any anti-lock brake system (ABS) helps
avoid only the braking skid.
Off-road driving involves some new skills. And that is why
it is very important that you read this guide. You will find
many driving tips and suggestions. These will help make
your off-road driving safer and more enjoyable.
4-16
“Off-roading” means you have left the great North
American road system behind. Traffic lanes are not
marked. Curves are not banked. There are no
road signs. Surfaces can be slippery, rough, uphill or
downhill. In short, you have gone right back to nature.
Before You Go Off-Roading
There are some things to do before you go out. For
example, be sure to have all necessary maintenance
and service work done. Check to make sure all
underbody shields (if equipped) are properly attached.
Is there enough fuel? Is the spare tire fully inflated?
Are the fluid levels up where they should be? What
are the local laws that apply to off-roading where
you will be driving? If you do not know, you should
check with law enforcement people in the area. Will
you be on someone’s private land? If so, be sure to
get the necessary permission.
Loading Your Vehicle for Off-Road
Driving
There are some important things to remember about
how to load your vehicle.
• The heaviest things should be on the load floor and
forward of your rear axle. Put heavier items as far
forward as you can.
• Be sure the load is secured properly, so driving on
the off-road terrain does not toss things around.
{CAUTION:
• Cargo on the load floor piled higher than
•
•
the seatbacks can be thrown forward
during a sudden stop. You or your
passengers could be injured. Keep cargo
below the top of the seatbacks.
Unsecured cargo on the load floor can be
tossed about when driving over rough
terrain. You or your passengers can be
struck by flying objects. Secure the cargo
properly.
Heavy loads on the roof raise the vehicle’s
center of gravity, making it more likely to
roll over. You can be seriously or fatally
injured if the vehicle rolls over. Put heavy
loads inside the cargo area, not on the
roof. Keep cargo in the cargo area as far
forward and low as possible.
You will find other important information in this manual.
See Loading Your Vehicle on page 4-44 and Tires
on page 5-60.
4-17
Environmental Concerns
Traveling to Remote Areas
Off-road driving can provide wholesome and satisfying
recreation. However, it also raises environmental
concerns. We recognize these concerns and urge every
off-roader to follow these basic rules for protecting
the environment:
It makes sense to plan your trip, especially when going
to a remote area. Know the terrain and plan your
route. You are much less likely to get bad surprises.
Get accurate maps of trails and terrain. Try to learn of
any blocked or closed roads.
• Always use established trails, roads and areas that
It is also a good idea to travel with at least one other
vehicle. If something happens to one of them, the other
can help quickly.
have been specially set aside for public off-road
recreational driving; obey all posted regulations.
• Avoid any driving practice that could damage
the environment — shrubs, flowers, trees,
grasses — or disturb wildlife (this includes
wheel-spinning, breaking down trees or
unnecessary driving through streams or over
soft ground).
• Always carry a litter bag — make sure all refuse
is removed from any campsite before leaving.
• Take extreme care with open fires (where
permitted), camp stoves and lanterns.
• Never park your vehicle over dry grass or other
combustible materials that could catch fire from
the heat of the vehicle’s exhaust system.
4-18
Getting Familiar with Off-Road Driving
It is a good idea to practice in an area that is safe
and close to home before you go into the wilderness.
Off-road driving does require some new and different
driving skills. Here is what we mean.
Tune your senses to different kinds of signals. Your
eyes, for example, need to constantly sweep the terrain
for unexpected obstacles. Your ears need to listen
for unusual tire or engine sounds. With your arms,
hands, feet and body, you’ll need to respond to
vibrations and vehicle bounce.
Controlling your vehicle is the key to successful off-road
driving. One of the best ways to control your vehicle
is to control your speed. Here are some things to keep
in mind. At higher speeds:
• you approach things faster and you have less time
to scan the terrain for obstacles.
• you have less time to react.
• you have more vehicle bounce when you drive over
obstacles.
• you’ll need more distance for braking, especially
since you are on an unpaved surface.
{CAUTION:
When you are driving off-road, bouncing and
quick changes in direction can easily throw
you out of position. This could cause you to
lose control and crash. So, whether you’re
driving on or off the road, you and your
passengers should wear safety belts.
Scanning the Terrain
Off-road driving can take you over many different kinds
of terrain. You need to be familiar with the terrain
and its many different features. Here are some things
to consider.
Surface Conditions: Off-roading can take you over
hard-packed dirt, gravel, rocks, grass, sand, mud, snow
or ice. Each of these surfaces affects the steering,
acceleration and braking of your vehicle in different
ways. Depending upon the kind of surface you are on,
you may experience slipping, sliding, wheel spinning,
delayed acceleration, poor traction and longer braking
distances.
Surface Obstacles: Unseen or hidden obstacles can
be hazardous. A rock, log, hole, rut or bump can startle
you if you are not prepared for them. Often these
obstacles are hidden by grass, bushes, snow or even
the rise and fall of the terrain itself. Here are some
things to consider:
• Is the path ahead clear?
• Will the surface texture change abruptly up ahead?
• Does the travel take you uphill or downhill?
There is more discussion of these subjects later.
• Will you have to stop suddenly or change direction
quickly?
4-19
When you drive over obstacles or rough terrain, keep a
firm grip on the steering wheel. Ruts, troughs or
other surface features can jerk the wheel out of your
hands if you are not prepared.
When you drive over bumps, rocks, or other obstacles,
your wheels can leave the ground. If this happens,
even with one or two wheels, you cannot control the
vehicle as well or at all.
Because you will be on an unpaved surface, it is
especially important to avoid sudden acceleration,
sudden turns or sudden braking.
In a way, off-road driving requires a different kind of
alertness from driving on paved roads and highways.
There are no road signs, posted speed limits or
signal lights. You have to use your own good judgment
about what is safe and what is not.
Drinking and driving can be very dangerous on any
road. And this is certainly true for off-road driving. At
the very time you need special alertness and driving
skills, your reflexes, perceptions and judgment can be
affected by even a small amount of alcohol. You
could have a serious — or even fatal — accident if you
drink and drive or ride with a driver who has been
drinking. See Drunken Driving on page 4-2.
4-20
Driving on Off-Road Hills
Off-road driving often takes you up, down or across a
hill. Driving safely on hills requires good judgment
and an understanding of what your vehicle can and
cannot do. There are some hills that simply cannot be
driven, no matter how well built the vehicle.
{CAUTION:
Many hills are simply too steep for any vehicle.
If you drive up them, you will stall. If you drive
down them, you cannot control your speed.
If you drive across them, you will roll over.
You could be seriously injured or killed. If you
have any doubt about the steepness, do not
drive the hill.
Approaching a Hill
When you approach a hill, you need to decide if
it is one of those hills that is just too steep to climb,
descend or cross. Steepness can be hard to judge. On
a very small hill, for example, there may be a smooth,
constant incline with only a small change in elevation
where you can easily see all the way to the top.
On a large hill, the incline may get steeper as you near
the top, but you may not see this because the crest
of the hill is hidden by bushes, grass or shrubs.
Here are some other things to consider as you
approach a hill.
• Is there a constant incline, or does the hill get
sharply steeper in places?
• Is there good traction on the hillside, or will the
surface cause tire slipping?
• Is there a straight path up or down the hill so you
will not have to make turning maneuvers?
• Are there obstructions on the hill that can block your
Driving Uphill
Once you decide you can safely drive up the hill, you
need to take some special steps.
• Use a low gear and get a firm grip on the steering
wheel.
• Get a smooth start up the hill and try to maintain
your speed. Do not use more power than you
need, because you do not want your wheels to start
spinning or sliding.
• Try to drive straight up the hill if at all possible. If
the path twists and turns, you might want to find
another route.
path, such as boulders, trees, logs, or ruts?
• What is beyond the hill? Is there a cliff, an
embankment, a drop-off, a fence? Get out and
walk the hill if you do not know. It is the smart way
to find out.
• Is the hill simply too rough? Steep hills often have
ruts, gullies, troughs and exposed rocks because
they are more susceptible to the effects of erosion.
{CAUTION:
Turning or driving across steep hills can be
dangerous. You could lose traction, slide
sideways, and possibly roll over. You could be
seriously injured or killed. When driving up
hills, always try to go straight up.
• Ease up on your speed as you approach the top
of the hill.
4-21
• Attach a flag to the vehicle to make you more
visible to approaching traffic on trails or hills.
• Sound the horn as you approach the top of the hill
to let opposing traffic know you are there.
• Use your headlamps even during the day. They
make you more visible to oncoming traffic.
{CAUTION:
Driving to the top (crest) of a hill at full speed
can cause an accident. There could be a
drop-off, embankment, cliff, or even another
vehicle. You could be seriously injured or
killed. As you near the top of a hill, slow down
and stay alert.
4-22
Q: What should I do if my vehicle stalls, or is about
to stall, and I cannot make it up the hill?
A: If this happens, there are some things you should
do, and there are some things you must not do.
First, here is what you should do:
• Push the brake pedal to stop the vehicle and
keep it from rolling backwards. Also, apply the
parking brake.
• If your engine is still running, shift the transmission
to REVERSE (R), release the parking brake, and
slowly back down the hill in REVERSE (R).
• If your engine has stopped running, you will need to
restart it. With the brake pedal pressed and the
parking brake still applied, shift the transmission to
PARK (P) and restart the engine. Then, shift to
REVERSE (R), release the parking brake, and
slowly back down the hill as straight as possible in
REVERSE (R).
• As you are backing down the hill, put your left hand
on the steering wheel at the 12 o’clock position.
This way, you will be able to tell if your wheels are
straight and maneuver as you back down. It is
best that you back down the hill with your wheels
straight rather than in the left or right direction.
Turning the wheel too far to the left or right
will increase the possibility of a rollover.
Here are some things you must not do if you stall, or
are about to stall, when going up a hill.
• Never attempt to prevent a stall by shifting into
NEUTRAL (N) to rev-up the engine and regain
forward momentum. This will not work. Your vehicle
will roll backwards very quickly and you could go
out of control.
Instead, apply the regular brake to stop the
vehicle. Then apply the parking brake. Shift to
REVERSE (R), release the parking brake,
and slowly back straight down.
• Never attempt to turn around if you are about to
stall when going up a hill. If the hill is steep
enough to stall your vehicle, it is steep enough to
cause you to roll over if you turn around. If you
cannot make it up the hill, you must back straight
down the hill.
Q: Suppose, after stalling, I try to back down
the hill and decide I just cannot do it. What
should I do?
A: Set the parking brake, put your transmission in
PARK (P) and turn off the engine. Leave the
vehicle and go get some help. Exit on the uphill
side and stay clear of the path the vehicle would
take if it rolled downhill.
4-23
Driving Downhill
When off-roading takes you downhill, you will want to
consider a number of things:
• How steep is the downhill? Will I be able to maintain
vehicle control?
• What’s the surface like? Smooth? Rough? Slippery?
Hard-packed dirt? Gravel?
• Are there hidden surface obstacles? Ruts? Logs?
Boulders?
{CAUTION:
Heavy braking when going down a hill can
cause your brakes to overheat and fade.
This could cause loss of control and a serious
accident. Apply the brakes lightly when
descending a hill and use a low gear to keep
vehicle speed under control.
• What is at the bottom of the hill? Is there a
hidden creek bank or even a river bottom with
large rocks?
If you decide you can go down a hill safely, then try to
keep your vehicle headed straight down, and use a
low gear. This way, engine drag can help your brakes
and they will not have to do all the work. Descend
slowly, keeping your vehicle under control at all times.
Q: Are there some things I should not do when
driving down a hill?
A: Yes! These are important because if you ignore
them you could lose control and have a serious
accident.
• When driving downhill, avoid turns that take you
across the incline of the hill. A hill that is not too
steep to drive down may be too steep to drive
across. You could roll over if you do not drive
straight down.
• Never go downhill with the transmission in
NEUTRAL (N). This is called “free-wheeling.”
Your brakes will have to do all the work and
could overheat and fade.
4-24
Q: Am I likely to stall when going downhill?
A: It is much more likely to happen going uphill. But if
it happens going downhill, here is what to do.
1. Stop your vehicle by applying the regular brakes.
Apply the parking brake.
2. Shift to PARK (P) and, while still braking, restart
the engine.
3. Shift back to a low gear, release the parking brake,
and drive straight down.
4. If the engine will not start, get out and get help.
Driving Across an Incline
Sooner or later, an off-road trail will probably go
across the incline of a hill. If this happens, you have to
decide whether to try to drive across the incline.
Here are some things to consider:
• A hill that can be driven straight up or down may be
too steep to drive across. When you go straight up
or down a hill, the length of the wheel base — the
distance from the front wheels to the rear
wheels — reduces the likelihood the vehicle will
tumble end over end. But when you drive across an
incline, the much more narrow track width — the
distance between the left and right wheels — may
not prevent the vehicle from tilting and rolling over.
Also, driving across an incline puts more weight on
the downhill wheels. This could cause a downhill
slide or a rollover.
• Surface conditions can be a problem when you drive
across a hill. Loose gravel, muddy spots, or even wet
grass can cause your tires to slip sideways, downhill.
If the vehicle slips sideways, it can hit something that
will trip it — a rock, a rut, etc. — and roll over.
• Hidden obstacles can make the steepness of the
incline even worse. If you drive across a rock with the
uphill wheels, or if the downhill wheels drop into a rut
or depression, your vehicle can tilt even more.
4-25
For reasons like these, you need to decide carefully
whether to try to drive across an incline. Just because the
trail goes across the incline does not mean you have to
drive it. The last vehicle to try it might have rolled over.
{CAUTION:
Driving across an incline that is too steep will
make your vehicle roll over. You could be
seriously injured or killed. If you have any
doubt about the steepness of the incline, do
not drive across it. Find another route instead.
Q: What if I am driving across an incline that is not
too steep, but I hit some loose gravel and start
to slide downhill. What should I do?
A: If you feel your vehicle starting to slide sideways,
turn downhill. This should help straighten out the
vehicle and prevent the side slipping. However,
a much better way to prevent this is to get out and
“walk the course” so you know what the surface
is like before you drive it.
4-26
Stalling on an Incline
If your vehicle stalls when you are crossing an incline,
be sure you, and any passengers, get out on the
uphill side, even if the door there is harder to open.
If you get out on the downhill side and the vehicle starts
to roll over, you will be right in its path.
If you have to walk down the slope, stay out of the path
the vehicle will take if it does roll over.
{CAUTION:
Getting out on the downhill (low) side of a
vehicle stopped across an incline is dangerous.
If the vehicle rolls over, you could be crushed
or killed. Always get out on the uphill (high)
side of the vehicle and stay well clear of the
rollover path.
Driving in Mud, Sand, Snow or Ice
When you drive in mud, snow or sand, your wheels
will not get good traction. You cannot accelerate
as quickly, turning is more difficult, and you will need
longer braking distances.
It is best to use a low gear when you are in mud — the
deeper the mud, the lower the gear. In really deep
mud, the idea is to keep your vehicle moving so you do
not get stuck.
When you drive on sand, you will sense a change in
wheel traction. But it will depend upon how loosely
packed the sand is. On loosely packed sand, such as
on beaches or sand dunes, your tires will tend to
sink into the sand. This has an effect on steering,
accelerating and braking. Drive at a reduced speed and
avoid sharp turns or abrupt maneuvers.
Hard packed snow and ice offer the worst tire traction.
On these surfaces, it is very easy to lose control.
On wet ice, for example, the traction is so poor that you
will have difficulty accelerating. And if you do get
moving, poor steering and difficult braking can cause
you to slide out of control.
{CAUTION:
Driving on frozen lakes, ponds or rivers can
be dangerous. Underwater springs, currents
under the ice, or sudden thaws can weaken the
ice. Your vehicle could fall through the ice and
you and your passengers could drown. Drive
your vehicle on safe surfaces only.
4-27
Driving in Water
Heavy rain can mean flash flooding, and flood waters
demand extreme caution.
{CAUTION:
Find out how deep the water is before you drive through
it. If it is deep enough to cover your wheel hubs,
axles or exhaust pipe, do not try it — you probably will
not get through. Also, water that deep can damage
your axle and other vehicle parts.
Driving through rushing water can be
dangerous. Deep water can sweep your vehicle
downstream and you and your passengers
could drown. If it is only shallow water, it can
still wash away the ground from under your
tires, and you could lose traction and roll the
vehicle over. Do not drive through rushing
water.
If the water is not too deep, drive slowly through it. At
faster speeds, water splashes on your ignition system
and your vehicle can stall. Stalling can also occur if you
get your tailpipe under water. And, as long as your
tailpipe is under water, you will never be able to start your
engine. When you go through water, remember that when
your brakes get wet, it may take you longer to stop.
See Driving in Rain and on Wet Roads on page 4-30 for
more information on driving through water.
After Off-Road Driving
Remove any brush or debris that has collected on the
underbody, chassis or under the hood. These
accumulations can be a fire hazard.
After operation in mud or sand, have the brake linings
cleaned and checked. These substances can cause
glazing and uneven braking. Check the body structure,
steering, suspension, wheels, tires and exhaust
system for damage. Also, check the fuel lines and
cooling system for any leakage.
4-28
Your vehicle will require more frequent service due to
off-road use. Refer to the Maintenance Schedule
for additional information.
Driving at Night
Here are some tips on night driving.
• Drive defensively.
• Do not drink and drive.
• Adjust your inside rearview mirror to reduce the
glare from headlamps behind you.
• Since you cannot see as well, you may need to
slow down and keep more space between you
and other vehicles.
• Slow down, especially on higher speed roads. Your
headlamps can light up only so much road ahead.
• In remote areas, watch for animals.
• If you are tired, pull off the road in a safe place
and rest.
No one can see as well at night as in the daytime.
But as we get older these differences increase.
A 50-year-old driver may require at least twice as much
light to see the same thing at night as a 20-year-old.
Night driving is more dangerous than day driving. One
reason is that some drivers are likely to be impaired — by
alcohol or drugs, with night vision problems, or by fatigue.
What you do in the daytime can also affect your
night vision. For example, if you spend the day in bright
sunshine you are wise to wear sunglasses. Your
eyes will have less trouble adjusting to night. But if you
are driving, do not wear sunglasses at night. They
may cut down on glare from headlamps, but they also
make a lot of things invisible.
4-29
You can be temporarily blinded by approaching
headlamps. It can take a second or two, or even several
seconds, for your eyes to re-adjust to the dark. When
you are faced with severe glare, as from a driver
who does not lower the high beams, or a vehicle with
misaimed headlamps, slow down a little. Avoid
staring directly into the approaching headlamps.
Driving in Rain and on Wet Roads
Keep your windshield and all the glass on your vehicle
clean — inside and out. Glare at night is made much
worse by dirt on the glass. Even the inside of the glass
can build up a film caused by dust. Dirty glass makes
lights dazzle and flash more than clean glass would,
making the pupils of your eyes contract repeatedly.
Remember that your headlamps light up far less of a
roadway when you are in a turn or curve. Keep
your eyes moving; that way, it is easier to pick out
dimly lighted objects. Just as your headlamps should
be checked regularly for proper aim, so should your
eyes be examined regularly. Some drivers suffer from
night blindness — the inability to see in dim light — and
are not even aware of it.
4-30
Rain and wet roads can mean driving trouble. On a wet
road, you cannot stop, accelerate, or turn as well
because your tire-to-road traction is not as good as on
dry roads. And, if your tires do not have much tread
left, you will get even less traction. It is always wise to
go slower and be cautious if rain starts to fall while
you are driving. The surface may get wet suddenly when
your reflexes are tuned for driving on dry pavement.
The heavier the rain, the harder it is to see. Even if
your windshield wiper blades are in good shape, a heavy
rain can make it harder to see road signs and traffic
signals, pavement markings, the edge of the road, and
even people walking.
It is wise to keep your wiping equipment in good shape
and keep your windshield washer tank filled with
washer fluid. Replace your windshield wiper inserts
when they show signs of streaking or missing areas on
the windshield, or when strips of rubber start to
separate from the inserts.
Driving too fast through large water puddles or even
going through some car washes can cause problems,
too. The water may affect your brakes. Try to avoid
puddles. But if you cannot, try to slow down before
you hit them.
{CAUTION:
Wet brakes can cause accidents. They will not
work as well in a quick stop and may cause
pulling to one side. You could lose control of
the vehicle.
After driving through a large puddle of water
or a car wash, apply your brake pedal lightly
until your brakes work normally.
4-31
Hydroplaning
Driving Through Flowing Water
Hydroplaning is dangerous. So much water can build up
under your tires that they can actually ride on the
water. This can happen if the road is wet enough and
you are going fast enough. When your vehicle is
hydroplaning, it has little or no contact with the road.
{CAUTION:
Flowing or rushing water creates strong forces.
If you try to drive through flowing water, as
you might at a low water crossing, your vehicle
can be carried away. As little as six inches
of flowing water can carry away a smaller
vehicle. If this happens, you and other vehicle
occupants could drown. Do not ignore police
warning signs, and otherwise be very cautious
about trying to drive through flowing water.
Hydroplaning does not happen often. But it can if your
tires do not have much tread or if the pressure in
one or more is low. It can happen if a lot of water is
standing on the road. If you can see reflections
from trees, telephone poles, or other vehicles, and
raindrops dimple the water’s surface, there could be
hydroplaning.
Hydroplaning usually happens at higher speeds. There
just is not a hard and fast rule about hydroplaning.
The best advice is to slow down when it is raining.
Driving Through Deep Standing Water
Notice: If you drive too quickly through deep
puddles or standing water, water can come in
through your engine’s air intake and badly damage
your engine. Never drive through water that is
slightly lower than the underbody of your vehicle.
If you cannot avoid deep puddles or standing water,
drive through them very slowly.
Some Other Rainy Weather Tips
• Turn on your low-beam headlamps — not just your
•
•
4-32
parking lamps — to help make you more visible to
others.
Besides slowing down, allow some extra following
distance. And be especially careful when you
pass another vehicle. Allow yourself more clear
room ahead, and be prepared to have your
view restricted by road spray.
Have good tires with proper tread depth. See Tires
on page 5-60.
City Driving
Here are ways to increase your safety in city driving:
• Know the best way to get to where you are
going. Get a city map and plan your trip into
an unknown part of the city just as you would for a
cross-country trip.
• Try to use the freeways that rim and crisscross
most large cities. You will save time and energy.
See Freeway Driving on page 4-34.
• Treat a green light as a warning signal. A traffic
light is there because the corner is busy enough
to need it. When a light turns green, and just before
you start to move, check both ways for vehicles
that have not cleared the intersection or may
be running the red light.
One of the biggest problems with city streets is the
amount of traffic on them. You will want to watch out for
what the other drivers are doing and pay attention to
traffic signals.
4-33
Freeway Driving
The most important advice on freeway driving is: Keep
up with traffic and keep to the right. Drive at the
same speed most of the other drivers are driving.
Too-fast or too-slow driving breaks a smooth traffic flow.
Treat the left lane on a freeway as a passing lane.
At the entrance, there is usually a ramp that leads to
the freeway. If you have a clear view of the freeway as
you drive along the entrance ramp, you should begin
to check traffic. Try to determine where you expect
to blend with the flow. Try to merge into the gap at close
to the prevailing speed. Switch on your turn signal,
check your mirrors, and glance over your shoulder as
often as necessary. Try to blend smoothly with the
traffic flow.
Once you are on the freeway, adjust your speed to
the posted limit or to the prevailing rate if it is slower.
Stay in the right lane unless you want to pass.
Before changing lanes, check your mirrors. Then use
your turn signal.
Mile for mile, freeways — also called thruways,
parkways, expressways, turnpikes, or
superhighways — are the safest of all roads.
But they have their own special rules.
4-34
Just before you leave the lane, glance quickly over your
shoulder to make sure there is not another vehicle in
your blind spot.
Once you are moving on the freeway, make certain
you allow a reasonable following distance. Expect
to move slightly slower at night.
When you want to leave the freeway, move to the
proper lane well in advance. If you miss your exit, do
not, under any circumstances, stop and back up. Drive
on to the next exit.
Is your vehicle ready for a long trip? If you keep it
serviced and maintained, it is ready to go. If it needs
service, have it done before starting out. Of course, you
will find experienced and able service experts in GM
dealerships all across North America. They will be ready
and willing to help if you need it.
Here are some things you can check before a trip:
The exit ramp can be curved, sometimes quite sharply.
The exit speed is usually posted.
• Windshield Washer Fluid: Is the reservoir full?
Reduce your speed according to your speedometer, not
to your sense of motion. After driving for any distance
at higher speeds, you may tend to think you are
going slower than you actually are.
• Wiper Blades: Are they in good shape?
• Fuel, Engine Oil, Other Fluids: Have you checked
Before Leaving on a Long Trip
Make sure you are ready. Try to be well rested. If you
must start when you are not fresh — such as after
a day’s work — do not plan to make too many miles that
first part of the journey. Wear comfortable clothing
and shoes you can easily drive in.
Are all windows clean inside and outside?
all levels?
• Lamps: Are they all working? Are the lenses clean?
• Tires: They are vitally important to a safe,
trouble-free trip. Is the tread good enough for
long-distance driving? Are the tires all inflated
to the recommended pressure?
• Weather Forecasts: What is the weather outlook
along your route? Should you delay your trip a
short time to avoid a major storm system?
• Maps: Do you have up-to-date maps?
4-35
Highway Hypnosis
Hill and Mountain Roads
Is there actually such a condition as highway hypnosis?
Or is it just plain falling asleep at the wheel? Call it
highway hypnosis, lack of awareness, or whatever.
There is something about an easy stretch of road with
the same scenery, along with the hum of the tires on
the road, the drone of the engine, and the rush of
the wind against the vehicle that can make you sleepy.
Do not let it happen to you! If it does, your vehicle
can leave the road in less than a second, and you
could crash and be injured.
What can you do about highway hypnosis? First, be
aware that it can happen.
Then here are some tips:
• Make sure your vehicle is well ventilated, with a
comfortably cool interior.
• Keep your eyes moving. Scan the road ahead
and to the sides. Check your mirrors and your
instruments frequently.
• If you get sleepy, pull off the road into a rest,
service, or parking area and take a nap, get some
exercise, or both. For safety, treat drowsiness
on the highway as an emergency.
4-36
Driving on steep hills or mountains is different from
driving in flat or rolling terrain.
If you drive regularly in steep country, or if you are
planning to visit there, here are some tips that can make
your trips safer and more enjoyable. See Operating
Your All-Wheel-Drive Vehicle Off Paved Roads on
page 4-16 for information about driving off-road.
• Keep your vehicle in good shape. Check all fluid
levels and also the brakes, tires, cooling system,
and transmission. These parts can work hard
on mountain roads.
{CAUTION:
Coasting downhill in NEUTRAL (N) or with
the ignition off is dangerous. Your brakes
will have to do all the work of slowing down.
They could get so hot that they would not
work well. You would then have poor braking
or even none going down a hill. You could
crash. Always have your engine running and
your vehicle in gear when you go downhill.
• Know how to go down hills. The most important
thing to know is this: let your engine do some of
the slowing down. Shift to a lower gear when you
go down a steep or long hill.
{CAUTION:
If you do not shift down, your brakes could
get so hot that they would not work well. You
would then have poor braking or even none
going down a hill. You could crash. Shift down
to let your engine assist your brakes on a
steep downhill slope.
• Know how to go uphill. You may want to shift down to
•
•
•
a lower gear. The lower gears help cool your engine
and transmission, and you can climb the hill better.
Stay in your own lane when driving on two-lane
roads in hills or mountains. Do not swing wide or cut
across the center of the road. Drive at speeds that let
you stay in your own lane.
As you go over the top of a hill, be alert. There could
be something in your lane, like a stalled car or an
accident.
You may see highway signs on mountains that warn
of special problems. Examples are long grades,
passing or no-passing zones, a falling rocks area, or
winding roads. Be alert to these and take appropriate
action.
4-37
Winter Driving
Include an ice scraper, a small brush or broom, a
supply of windshield washer fluid, a rag, some winter
outer clothing, a small shovel, a flashlight, a red
cloth, and a couple of reflective warning triangles. And,
if you will be driving under severe conditions, include
a small bag of sand, a piece of old carpet, or a couple of
burlap bags to help provide traction. Be sure you
properly secure these items in your vehicle.
Driving on Snow or Ice
Most of the time, those places where your tires meet
the road probably have good traction.
However, if there is snow or ice between your tires and
the road, you can have a very slippery situation. You
will have a lot less traction, or grip, and will need to be
very careful.
Here are some tips for winter driving:
• Have your vehicle in good shape for winter.
• You may want to put winter emergency supplies
in your vehicle.
Also see Tires on page 5-60.
4-38
Whatever the condition — smooth ice, packed, blowing,
or loose snow — drive with caution.
Accelerate gently. Try not to break the fragile traction.
If you accelerate too fast, the drive wheels will spin and
polish the surface under the tires even more.
Your anti-lock brakes improve your vehicle’s stability
when you make a hard stop on a slippery road.
Even though you have an anti-lock braking system, you
will want to begin stopping sooner than you would on
dry pavement. See Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS)
on page 4-6.
• Allow greater following distance on any
slippery road.
• Watch for slippery spots. The road might be
What is the worst time for this? Wet ice. Very cold
snow or ice can be slick and hard to drive on. But wet
ice can be even more trouble because it may offer
the least traction of all. You can get wet ice when it is
about freezing (32°F; 0°C) and freezing rain begins
to fall. Try to avoid driving on wet ice until salt and
sand crews can get there.
fine until you hit a spot that is covered with ice. On
an otherwise clear road, ice patches may appear
in shaded areas where the sun cannot reach, such
as around clumps of trees, behind buildings, or
under bridges. Sometimes the surface of a curve or
an overpass may remain icy when the surrounding
roads are clear. If you see a patch of ice ahead
of you, brake before you are on it. Try not to brake
while you are actually on the ice, and avoid
sudden steering maneuvers.
4-39
If You Are Caught in a Blizzard
If you are stopped by heavy snow, you could be in a
serious situation. You should probably stay with
your vehicle unless you know for sure that you are near
help and you can hike through the snow. Here are
some things to do to summon help and keep yourself
and your passengers safe:
• Turn on your hazard flashers.
• Tie a red cloth to your vehicle to alert police that
you have been stopped by the snow.
• Put on extra clothing or wrap a blanket around you.
If you do not have blankets or extra clothing, make
body insulators from newspapers, burlap bags,
rags, floor mats — anything you can wrap around
yourself or tuck under your clothing to keep warm.
You can run the engine to keep warm, but be careful.
4-40
{CAUTION:
Snow can trap exhaust gases under your
vehicle. This can cause deadly CO (carbon
monoxide) gas to get inside. CO could
overcome you and kill you. You cannot see it
or smell it, so you might not know it is in your
vehicle. Clear away snow from around the
base of your vehicle, especially any that is
blocking your exhaust pipe. And check around
again from time to time to be sure snow does
not collect there.
Open a window just a little on the side of the
vehicle that is away from the wind. This will
help keep CO out.
Run your engine only as long as you must. This saves
fuel. When you run the engine, make it go a little
faster than just idle. That is, push the accelerator
slightly. This uses less fuel for the heat that you get
and it keeps the battery charged. You will need a
well-charged battery to restart the vehicle, and possibly
for signaling later on with your headlamps. Let the
heater run for a while.
Then, shut the engine off and close the window
almost all the way to preserve the heat. Start the
engine again and repeat this only when you feel really
uncomfortable from the cold. But do it as little as
possible. Preserve the fuel as long as you can. To
help keep warm, you can get out of the vehicle and
do some fairly vigorous exercises every half hour or
so until help comes.
4-41
If You Are Stuck: In Sand, Mud,
Ice or Snow
In order to free your vehicle when it is stuck, you will
need to spin the wheels, but you do not want to
spin your wheels too fast. The method known as rocking
can help you get out when you are stuck, but you
must use caution.
{CAUTION:
If you let your tires spin at high speed, they
can explode, and you or others could be
injured. And, the transmission or other parts of
the vehicle can overheat. That could cause an
engine compartment fire or other damage.
When you are stuck, spin the wheels as little
as possible. Do not spin the wheels above
35 mph (55 km/h) as shown on the
speedometer.
4-42
Notice: Spinning your wheels can destroy parts of
your vehicle as well as the tires. If you spin the
wheels too fast while shifting your transmission
back and forth, you can destroy your transmission.
For more information about using tire chains on your
vehicle, see Tire Chains on page 5-76.
Rocking Your Vehicle to Get It Out
First, turn your steering wheel left and right. That
will clear the area around your front wheels. If your
vehicle has the StabiliTrak® System, turn the system
off by pressing the StabiliTrak® button so that the
STABILITY SYS DISABLED message and the traction
off light are illuminated on the instrument panel
cluster. Then shift back and forth between
REVERSE (R) and a forward gear, spinning the wheels
as little as possible. Release the accelerator pedal
while you shift, and press lightly on the accelerator pedal
when the transmission is in gear. By slowly spinning
your wheels in the forward and reverse directions, you
will cause a rocking motion that may free your
vehicle. If that does not get you out after a few tries,
you may need to be towed out. Or, you can use
your recovery hooks. If you do need to be towed out,
see Towing Your Vehicle on page 4-50.
Recovery Hooks
Your vehicle is equipped with recovery hooks. The
hooks are provided at the front of your vehicle. You
may need to use them if you are stuck off-road and
need to be pulled to some place where you can
continue driving.
{CAUTION:
These hooks, when used, are under a lot of
force. Always pull the vehicle straight out.
Never pull on the hooks at a sideways angle.
The hooks could break off and you or others
could be injured from the chain or cable
snapping back.
Notice: Never use recovery hooks to tow the
vehicle. Your vehicle could be damaged and it
would not be covered by warranty.
4-43
Loading Your Vehicle
Tire and Loading Information Label
It is very important to know how much weight your
vehicle can carry. This weight is called the vehicle
capacity weight and includes the weight of all occupants,
cargo and all nonfactory-installed options. Two labels
on your vehicle show how much weight it was designed
to carry, the Tire and Loading Information label and
the Certification/Tire label.
{CAUTION:
Do not load your vehicle any heavier than
the Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR), or
either the maximum front or rear Gross Axle
Weight Rating (GAWR). If you do, parts on
your vehicle can break, and it can change
the way your vehicle handles. These could
cause you to lose control and crash. Also,
overloading can shorten the life of your
vehicle.
4-44
Label Example
A vehicle specific Tire and Loading Information label is
attached to the center pillar (B-pillar). With the driver’s
door open, you will find the label attached below
the door lock post (striker). The tire and loading
information label shows the number of occupant seating
positions (A), and the maximum vehicle capacity
weight (B) in kilograms and pounds.
The Tire and Loading Information label also shows the
size of the original equipment tires (C) and the
recommended cold tire inflation pressures (D). For more
information on tires and inflation see Tires on page 5-60
and Inflation - Tire Pressure on page 5-66.
There is also important loading information on the
vehicle Certification/Tire label. It tells you the Gross
Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) and the Gross
Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) for the front and rear axles.
See “Certification/Tire Label” later in this section.
Steps for Determining Correct Load Limit
1. Locate the statement “The combined weight of
occupants and cargo should never exceed
XXX kg or XXX pounds” on your vehicle’s placard.
2. Determine the combined weight of the driver and
passengers that will be riding in your vehicle.
4. The resulting figure equals the available amount of
cargo and luggage load capacity. For example, if
the “XXX” amount equals 1400 lbs and there will be
five 150 lb passengers in your vehicle, the amount
of available cargo and luggage load capacity is
650 lbs (1400 − 750 (5 x 150) = 650 lbs).
5. Determine the combined weight of luggage and
cargo being loaded on the vehicle. That weight
may not safely exceed the available cargo
and luggage load capacity calculated in Step 4.
6. If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, the load from
your trailer will be transferred to your vehicle.
Consult this manual to determine how this reduces
the available cargo and luggage load capacity of
your vehicle. See Towing a Trailer on page 4-51 for
important information on towing a trailer, towing
safety rules and trailering tips.
3. Subtract the combined weight of the driver and
passengers from XXX kilograms or XXX pounds.
4-45
Example 2
Example 1
Item
Description
Total
Item
Description
1,000 lbs (453 kg)
A
Vehicle Capacity
Weight for Example 2 =
Total
A
Vehicle Capacity
Weight for Example 1 =
B
Subtract
Occupant Weight
150 lbs (68 kg) × 2 =
300 lbs (136 kg)
B
Subtract
Occupant Weight
150 lbs (68 kg) × 5 =
750 lbs (136 kg)
C
Available Occupant
and Cargo Weight =
700 lbs (317 kg)
C
Available
Cargo Weight =
250 lbs (113 kg)
4-46
1,000 lbs (453 kg)
Certification/Tire Label
Example 3
Item
Description
Total
A
Vehicle Capacity
Weight for Example 3 =
1,000 lbs (453 kg)
B
Subtract
Occupant Weight
200 lbs (91 kg) × 5 =
1,000 lbs (453 kg)
C
Available
Cargo Weight =
0 lbs (0 kg)
Refer to your vehicle’s tire and loading information
label for specific information about your vehicle’s
capacity weight and seating positions. The combined
weight of the driver, passengers and cargo should
never exceed your vehicle’s capacity weight.
A vehicle specific Certification/Tire label is attached to
the rear edge of the driver’s door. The label shows
the size of your vehicle’s original tires and the inflation
pressures needed to obtain the gross weight capacity
of your vehicle. This is called Gross Vehicle Weight
Rating (GVWR). The GVWR includes the weight of the
vehicle, all occupants, fuel and cargo.
4-47
The Certification/Tire label also tells you the maximum
weights for the front and rear axles, called Gross
Axle Weight Rating (GAWR). To find out the actual loads
on your front and rear axles, you need to go to a
weigh station and weigh your vehicle. Your dealer can
help you with this. Be sure to spread out your load
equally on both sides of the centerline.
Never exceed the GVWR for your vehicle, or the GAWR
for either the front or rear axle.
And, if you do have a heavy load, you should spread
it out.
{CAUTION:
In the case of a sudden stop or collision,
things carried in the bed of your truck could
shift forward and come into the passenger
area, injuring you and others. If you put things
in the bed of your truck, you should make sure
they are properly secured.
{CAUTION:
Do not load your vehicle any heavier than the
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR), or either
the maximum front or rear Gross Axle Weight
Rating (GAWR). If you do, parts on your
vehicle can break, and it can change the way
your vehicle handles. These could cause you
to lose control and crash. Also, overloading
can shorten the life of your vehicle.
Your warranty does not cover parts or components that
fail because of overloading.
The label will help you decide how much cargo and
installed equipment your truck can carry.
Using heavier suspension components to get added
durability might not change your weight ratings. Ask your
dealer to help you load your vehicle the right way.
If you put things inside your vehicle — like suitcases,
tools, packages, or anything else — they go as fast
as the vehicle goes. If you have to stop or turn quickly,
or if there is a crash, they’ll keep going.
4-48
Add-On Equipment
{CAUTION:
Things you put inside your vehicle can strike
and injure people in a sudden stop or turn, or
in a crash.
• Put things in the cargo area of your
vehicle. Try to spread the weight evenly.
• Never stack heavier things, like suitcases,
inside the vehicle so that some of them
are above the tops of the seats.
• Do not leave an unsecured child restraint
in your vehicle.
• When you carry something inside the
vehicle, secure it whenever you can.
• Do not leave a seat folded down unless
you need to.
When you carry removable items, you may need to
put a limit on how many people you can carry inside
your vehicle. Be sure to weigh your vehicle before you
buy and install the new equipment.
Notice: Overloading your vehicle may cause
damage. Repairs would not be covered by your
warranty. Do not overload your vehicle.
Remember not to exceed the Gross Axle Weight Rating
(GAWR) of the front or rear axle. See Loading Your
Vehicle on page 4-44.
The Cargo Weight Rating (CWR) is the maximum
weight of the load your vehicle can carry. It does not
include the weight of the people inside. But you
can figure about 150 lbs (68 kg) for each seat.
The total cargo load must not be more than your
vehicle’s CWR.
There’s also important loading information for off-road
driving in this manual. See “Loading Your Vehicle
for Off-Road Driving” under Operating Your
All-Wheel-Drive Vehicle Off Paved Roads on page 4-16.
4-49
Automatic Level Control
Towing
The automatic level control rear suspension comes
as a part of the Road Sensing Suspension. See Road
Sensing Suspension on page 4-8.
Towing Your Vehicle
This type of level control is fully automatic and will
provide a better leveled riding position as well as better
handling under a variety of passenger and loading
conditions. An air compressor connected to the rear
shocks will raise or lower the rear of the vehicle
to maintain proper vehicle height. The system is
activated when the ignition key is turned to RUN and
will automatically adjust vehicle height thereafter.
The system may exhaust (lower vehicle height) for up
to 10 minutes after the ignition key has been turned
to LOCK. You may hear the air compressor operating
when the height is being adjusted.
If a weight-distributing hitch is being used, it is
recommended to allow the shocks to inflate, thereby
leveling the vehicle prior to adjusting the height.
Consult your dealer or a professional towing service if
you need to have your disabled vehicle towed. See
Roadside Service on page 7-6.
If you want to tow your vehicle behind another vehicle
for recreational purposes (such as behind a motorhome),
see Recreational Vehicle Towing following.
Recreational Vehicle Towing
Recreational vehicle towing means towing your vehicle
behind another vehicle — such as behind a motorhome.
The two most common types of recreational vehicle
towing are known as “dinghy towing” (towing your vehicle
with all four wheels on the ground) and “dolly towing”
(towing your vehicle with two wheels on the ground and
two wheels up on a device known as a “dolly”).
Dinghy Towing and Dolly Towing
All-Wheel Drive Vehicles
Your vehicle is not designed to be towed with any of the
wheels on the ground. If your vehicle must be towed,
see Towing Your Vehicle on page 4-50.
4-50
Notice: Towing an all-wheel-drive vehicle with all
four wheels on the ground, or even with only two of
its wheels on the ground, will damage drivetrain
components. Do not tow an all-wheel-drive vehicle
if any of its wheels will be on the ground.
Notice: Pulling a trailer improperly can damage
your vehicle and result in costly repairs not covered
by your warranty. To pull a trailer correctly, follow
the advice in this part, and see your dealer for
important information about towing a trailer with
your vehicle.
Towing a Trailer
To identify the trailering capacity of your vehicle, you
should read the information in “Weight of the Trailer” that
appears later in this section.
Do not tow a trailer during break-in. See New Vehicle
Break-In on page 2-27 for more information.
{CAUTION:
If you do not use the correct equipment and
drive properly, you can lose control when you
pull a trailer. For example, if the trailer is too
heavy, the brakes may not work well — or even
at all. You and your passengers could be
seriously injured. Pull a trailer only if you have
followed all the steps in this section. Ask your
dealer for advice and information about towing
a trailer with your vehicle.
If yours was built with trailering options, as many are,
it’s ready for heavier trailers. But trailering is different
than just driving your vehicle by itself. Trailering means
changes in handling, acceleration, braking, durability
and fuel economy. Successful, safe trailering takes
correct equipment, and it has to be used properly.
That’s the reason for this part. In it are many time-tested,
important trailering tips and safety rules. Many of
these are important for your safety and that of your
passengers. So please read this section carefully before
you pull a trailer.
4-51
If You Do Decide To Pull A Trailer
If you do, here are some important points:
• There are many different laws, including speed limit
restrictions, having to do with trailering. Make sure
your rig will be legal, not only where you live
but also where you’ll be driving. A good source for
this information can be state or provincial police.
• Consider using a sway control. See “Hitches” later
in this section.
• Don’t tow a trailer at all during the first 500 miles
(800 km) your new vehicle is driven. Your engine,
axle or other parts could be damaged.
• Then, during the first 500 miles (800 km) that you
tow a trailer, don’t drive over 50 mph (80 km/h)
and don’t make starts at full throttle. This helps your
engine and other parts of your vehicle wear in at
the heavier loads.
• You can tow in DRIVE (D). You may want to shift
the transmission to THIRD (3) or, if necessary, a
lower gear selection if the transmission shifts
too often (e.g., under heavy loads and/or hilly
conditions). See “Tow/Haul Mode” following.
4-52
Three important considerations have to do with weight:
• the weight of the trailer
• the weight of the trailer tongue
• and the weight on your vehicle’s tires
Tow/Haul Mode
Tow/haul is designed to assist while your vehicle is
pulling a large or heavy load or trailer. Tow/haul is most
useful while pulling such a load in rolling terrain, in
stop-and-go traffic, or when you need improved
low-speed control, such as when parking. The purpose
of the tow/haul mode is to do the following:
• Reduce the frequency and improve the predictability
of transmission shifts when pulling a heavy trailer or
a large or heavy load.
• Provide the same solid shift feel when pulling a
heavy trailer or a large or heavy load as when
the vehicle is unloaded.
• Improve control of vehicle speed while requiring
less throttle pedal activity when pulling a heavy
trailer or a large or heavy load.
Tow/haul is designed to be most effective when the
vehicle and trailer combined weight is at least 75 percent
of the vehicle’s Gross Combination Weight Rating
(GCWR). See “Weight of the Trailer” later in this section.
A light on the instrument
panel will illuminate to
indicate that tow/haul
mode has been selected.
The vehicle will automatically turn off tow/haul every
time it is started.
Operating the vehicle in tow/haul when lightly loaded or
with no trailer at all will not cause damage. However,
there is no benefit to the selection of tow/haul when the
vehicle is unloaded. Such a selection when unloaded
may result in unpleasant engine and transmission driving
characteristics and reduced fuel economy. Tow/haul
is recommended only when pulling a heavy trailer or a
large or heavy load.
Press the button at the end of the shift lever to
enable/disable the tow/haul mode.
4-53
Weight of the Trailer
How heavy can a trailer safely be?
It depends on how you plan to use your rig. For
example, speed, altitude, road grades, outside
temperature and how much your vehicle is used to pull
a trailer are all important. And, it can also depend
on any special equipment that you have on your vehicle.
Use one of the following charts to determine how
much your vehicle can weigh, based upon your vehicle
model and options.
Vehicle
AWD 6.0L
Maximum trailer weight is calculated assuming only the
driver is in the tow vehicle and it has all the required
trailering equipment. The weight of additional optional
equipment, passengers and cargo in the tow vehicle
must be subtracted from the maximum trailer weight.
Notice: Using a fifth-wheel or goose-neck hitch
device on your vehicle could damage the vehicle.
The repairs would not be covered by your warranty.
Do not use a fifth-wheel or goose-neck hitch
device on your vehicle.
Axle Ratio
Maximum Trailer Weight
**GCWR
3.73
7,300 lbs (3 311 kg)
14,000 lbs (6 350 kg)
**The Gross Combination Weight Rating (GCWR) in the total allowable weight of the completely loaded vehicle
and trailer including any passengers, cargo, equipment and conversions. The GCWR for your vehicle should
not be exceeded.
You can ask your dealer for our trailering information
or advice, or you can write us at the address listed
in your Warranty and Owner Assistance Information
Booklet.
4-54
In Canada, write to:
General Motors of Canada Limited
Customer Communication Centre, 163-005
1908 Colonel Sam Drive
Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7
Weight of the Trailer Tongue
The tongue load (A) of any trailer is an important weight
to measure because it affects the total or gross weight
of your vehicle. The Gross Vehicle Weight (GVW)
includes the curb weight of the vehicle, any cargo you
may carry in it, and the people who will be riding in
the vehicle. If you have a lot of options, equipment,
passengers or cargo in your vehicle, it will reduce the
tongue weight your vehicle can carry, which will
also reduce the trailer weight your vehicle can tow.
And if you will tow a trailer, you must add the tongue
load to the GVW because your vehicle will be carrying
that weight, too. See Loading Your Vehicle on
page 4-44 for more information about your vehicle’s
maximum load capacity.
The trailer tongue weight (A) should be 10 percent to
15 percent of the total loaded trailer weight (B), up to a
maximum of 600 lbs (272 kg) with a weight carrying
hitch. The trailer tongue weight (A) should be 10 percent
to 15 percent of the total loaded trailer weight (B), up
to the maximum of 1,000 lbs (454 kg) with a weight
distributing hitch.
Do not exceed the maximum allowable tongue weight
for your vehicle. Choose the shortest hitch extension
that will position the hitch ball closest to the vehicle.
This will help reduce the effect of trailer tongue weight
on the rear axle.
After you’ve loaded your trailer, weigh the trailer and
then the tongue, separately, to see if the weights
are proper. If they aren’t, you may be able to get
them right simply by moving some items around in
the trailer.
4-55
Total Weight on Your Vehicle’s Tires
Be sure your vehicle’s tires are inflated to the upper
limit for cold tires. You’ll find these numbers on
the Certification label at the rear edge of the driver’s
door or see Loading Your Vehicle on page 4-44.
Then be sure you don’t go over the GVW limit for your
vehicle, or the GAWR, including the weight of the
trailer tongue. If you use a weight distributing hitch,
make sure you don’t go over the rear axle limit before
you apply the weight distribution spring bars.
Weight-Distributing Hitches and Weight
Carrying Hitches
Hitches
It’s important to have the correct hitch equipment.
Crosswinds, large trucks going by and rough roads
are a few reasons why you’ll need the right hitch.
(A) Body-to-Ground Distance (B) Front of Vehicle
When using a weight-distributing hitch, the hitch must
be adjusted so that the distance (A) remains the
same both before and after coupling the trailer to the
tow vehicle.
4-56
If you’ll be pulling a trailer that, when loaded, will
weigh more than 5,000 lbs (2 270 kg) be sure to use a
properly mounted weight-distributing hitch and sway
control of the proper size. This equipment is very
important for proper vehicle loading and good handling
when driving. You should always use a sway control
if your trailer will weigh more than these limits. You can
ask a hitch dealer about sway controls.
Safety Chains
You should always attach chains between your vehicle
and your trailer. Cross the safety chains under the
tongue of the trailer to help prevent the tongue from
contacting the road if it becomes separated from
the hitch. Always leave just enough slack so you can
turn with your rig. Never allow safety chains to drag on
the ground.
Trailer Brakes
If your trailer weighs more than 2,000 lbs (900 kg)
loaded, then it needs its own brakes – and they must
be adequate. Be sure to read and follow the instructions
for the trailer brakes so you’ll be able to install, adjust
and maintain them properly.
Since your vehicle is equipped with StabiliTrak®, your
trailer brake system cannot tap into the vehicle’s
hydraulic brake system.
Driving with a Trailer
Towing a trailer requires a certain amount of experience.
Before setting out for the open road, you’ll want to get
to know your rig. Acquaint yourself with the feel of
handling and braking with the added weight of the trailer.
And always keep in mind that the vehicle you are
driving is now a good deal longer and not nearly as
responsive as your vehicle is by itself.
Before you start, check all trailer hitch parts and
attachments, safety chains, electrical connector, lamps,
tires and mirror adjustment. If the trailer has electric
brakes, start your vehicle and trailer moving and then
apply the trailer brake controller by hand to be sure
the brakes are working. This lets you check your
electrical connection at the same time.
During your trip, check occasionally to be sure that
the load is secure, and that the lamps and any trailer
brakes are still working.
Following Distance
Stay at least twice as far behind the vehicle ahead as
you would when driving your vehicle without a trailer.
This can help you avoid situations that require
heavy braking and sudden turns.
4-57
Passing
Turn Signals When Towing a Trailer
You’ll need more passing distance up ahead when
you’re towing a trailer. And, because you’re a good deal
longer, you’ll need to go much farther beyond the
passed vehicle before you can return to your lane.
The arrows on your instrument panel will flash whenever
you signal a turn or lane change. Properly hooked up,
the trailer lamps will also flash, telling other drivers
you’re about to turn, change lanes or stop.
Backing Up
When towing a trailer, the arrows on your instrument
panel will flash for turns even if the bulbs on the trailer
are burned out. Thus, you may think drivers behind
you are seeing your signal when they are not. It’s
important to check occasionally to be sure the trailer
bulbs are still working.
Hold the bottom of the steering wheel with one hand.
Then, to move the trailer to the left, just move that hand
to the left. To move the trailer to the right, move your
hand to the right. Always back up slowly and, if possible,
have someone guide you.
Making Turns
Notice: Making very sharp turns while trailering
could cause the trailer to come in contact with the
vehicle. Your vehicle could be damaged. Avoid
making very sharp turns while trailering.
When you’re turning with a trailer, make wider turns
than normal. Do this so your trailer won’t strike
soft shoulders, curbs, road signs, trees or other objects.
Avoid jerky or sudden maneuvers. Signal well in
advance.
4-58
Driving On Grades
Reduce speed and shift to a lower gear before you
start down a long or steep downgrade. If you don’t shift
down, you might have to use your brakes so much
that they would get hot and no longer work well.
You can tow in DRIVE (D). You may want to shift the
transmission to THIRD (3) or, if necessary, a lower
gear selection if the transmission shifts too often
(e.g., under heavy loads and/or hilly conditions).
You may also want to activate the tow/haul mode if the
transmission shifts too often. See “Tow/Haul Mode”
earlier.
When towing at high altitude on steep uphill grades,
consider the following: Engine coolant will boil at a lower
temperature than at normal altitudes. If you turn your
engine off immediately after towing at high altitude
on steep uphill grades, your vehicle may show signs
similar to engine overheating. To avoid this, let the
engine run while parked (preferably on level ground)
with the automatic transmission in PARK (P) for a
few minutes before turning the engine off. If you do
get the overheat warning, see Engine Overheating
on page 5-26.
Parking on Hills
{CAUTION:
You really should not park your vehicle, with
a trailer attached, on a hill. If something goes
wrong, your rig could start to move. People
can be injured, and both your vehicle and the
trailer can be damaged.
But if you ever have to park your rig on a hill, here’s
how to do it:
1. Apply your regular brakes, but don’t shift into
PARK (P) yet.
2. Have someone place chocks under the trailer
wheels.
3. When the wheel chocks are in place, release the
regular brakes until the chocks absorb the load.
4. Reapply the regular brakes. Then apply your
parking brake and shift into PARK (P).
5. Release the regular brakes.
4-59
When You Are Ready to Leave
After Parking on a Hill
Trailer Wiring Harness
Heavy-Duty Trailer Wiring Package
1. Apply your regular brakes and hold the pedal down
while you:
• start your engine,
• shift into a gear, and
• release the parking brake.
2. Let up on the brake pedal.
3. Drive slowly until the trailer is clear of the chocks.
4. Stop and have someone pick up and store the
chocks.
Maintenance When Trailer Towing
Your vehicle will need service more often when you’re
pulling a trailer. See the Maintenance Schedule for more
on this. Things that are especially important in trailer
operation are automatic transmission fluid (don’t overfill),
engine oil, axle lubricant, belts, cooling system
and brake system. Each of these is covered in this
manual, and the Index will help you find them quickly.
If you’re trailering, it’s a good idea to review these
sections before you start your trip.
Check periodically to see that all hitch nuts and bolts
are tight.
4-60
Your vehicle is equipped with the seven-wire trailer
towing harness. This harness with a seven-pin universal
heavy-duty trailer connector is attached to a bracket
on the hitch platform.
The Center High-Mounted Stoplamp (CHMSL) wire
is tied next to the trailer wiring harness for use with
a trailer.
Electric Brake Control Jumper
The seven-wire harness contains the following trailer
circuits:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Yellow: Left Stop/Turn Signal
Dark Green: Right Stop/Turn Signal
Brown: Taillamps
White: Ground
Light Green: Back-up Lamps
Red: Battery Feed
Dark Blue: Trailer Brake
This harness may be included with your vehicle as part
of the heavy-duty trailer wiring package.
This harness is for an electric brake controller and
includes a trailer battery feed fuse. It should be installed
by your dealer or a qualified service center.
4-61
Four-Wire Harness Adapter
This adapter may be
included with your vehicle
as part of the heavy-duty
trailer wiring package.
Use this adapter to connect a standard four-way
round pin connector to the seven-wire harness on
your vehicle.
4-62
Connect the adapter with the tab pointing up. The flip
cap on the vehicle’s seven-wire harness will lock
onto the tab and help hold the adapter in place. Plug
the four-way round pin connector onto the adapter.
Section 5
Service and Appearance Care
Service ............................................................5-3
Doing Your Own Service Work .........................5-4
Adding Equipment to the Outside
of Your Vehicle ...........................................5-5
Fuel ................................................................5-5
Gasoline Octane ............................................5-5
Gasoline Specifications ....................................5-5
California Fuel ...............................................5-6
Additives .......................................................5-6
Fuels in Foreign Countries ...............................5-7
Filling Your Tank ............................................5-8
Filling a Portable Fuel Container .......................5-9
Checking Things Under the Hood ....................5-10
Hood Release ..............................................5-10
Engine Compartment Overview .......................5-12
Engine Oil ...................................................5-13
Engine Oil Life System ..................................5-16
Engine Air Cleaner/Filter ................................5-18
Automatic Transmission Fluid .........................5-20
Engine Coolant .............................................5-23
Coolant Surge Tank Pressure Cap ..................5-26
Engine Overheating .......................................5-26
Overheated Engine Protection
Operating Mode ........................................5-28
Cooling System ............................................5-29
Engine Fan Noise .........................................5-34
Power Steering Fluid .....................................5-35
Windshield Washer Fluid ................................5-36
Brakes ........................................................5-37
Battery ........................................................5-40
Jump Starting ...............................................5-41
All-Wheel Drive ..............................................5-45
Rear Axle .......................................................5-46
Front Axle ......................................................5-47
Headlamp Aiming ...........................................5-48
Headlamp Horizontal Aiming ...........................5-49
Headlamp Vertical Aiming ..............................5-50
Bulb Replacement ..........................................5-52
High Intensity Discharge (HID) Lighting ............5-52
Halogen Bulbs ..............................................5-52
Headlamps ..................................................5-53
Front Turn Signal, Sidemarker and Daytime
Running Lamps .........................................5-56
Taillamps .....................................................5-57
Replacement Bulbs .......................................5-58
Windshield Wiper Blade Replacement ..............5-59
Tires ..............................................................5-60
Tire Sidewall Labelling ...................................5-61
Tire Terminology and Definitions .....................5-64
5-1
Section 5
Service and Appearance Care
Inflation - Tire Pressure .................................5-66
Tire Pressure Monitor System .........................5-68
Tire Inspection and Rotation ...........................5-70
When It Is Time for New Tires .......................5-72
Buying New Tires .........................................5-72
Uniform Tire Quality Grading ..........................5-73
Wheel Alignment and Tire Balance ..................5-74
Wheel Replacement ......................................5-75
Tire Chains ..................................................5-76
If a Tire Goes Flat ........................................5-77
Changing a Flat Tire .....................................5-78
Removing the Spare Tire and Tools ................5-79
Removing the Flat Tire and Installing
the Spare Tire ..........................................5-83
Secondary Latch System ...............................5-88
Storing a Flat or Spare Tire and Tools ............5-92
Spare Tire ...................................................5-95
Appearance Care ............................................5-95
Fabric/Carpet ...............................................5-96
Vinyl ...........................................................5-97
Leather .......................................................5-98
Instrument Panel ..........................................5-98
Interior Plastic Components ............................5-98
Wood Panels ...............................................5-98
Speaker Covers ............................................5-98
Glass Surfaces .............................................5-98
5-2
Care of Safety Belts ......................................5-99
Weatherstrips ...............................................5-99
Washing Your Vehicle ...................................5-99
Cleaning Exterior Lamps/Lenses ....................5-100
Finish Care ................................................5-100
Windshield and Wiper Blades .......................5-101
Aluminum Wheels .......................................5-101
Tires .........................................................5-102
Sheet Metal Damage ...................................5-102
Finish Damage ...........................................5-102
Underbody Maintenance ...............................5-102
Chemical Paint Spotting ...............................5-102
Vehicle Care/Appearance Materials ................5-103
Vehicle Identification .....................................5-104
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) ................5-104
Service Parts Identification Label ...................5-104
Electrical System ..........................................5-105
Add-On Electrical Equipment .........................5-105
Windshield Wiper Fuses ...............................5-105
Power Windows and Other Power Options ......5-105
Fuses and Circuit Breakers ..........................5-105
Instrument Panel Fuse Block ........................5-106
Center Instrument Panel Fuse Block ..............5-108
Underhood Fuse Block ................................5-109
Capacities and Specifications ........................5-115
Service
Your dealer knows your vehicle best and wants you to
be happy with it. We hope you will go to your dealer
for all your service needs. You will get genuine GM parts
and GM-trained and supported service people.
We hope you will want to keep your GM vehicle all GM.
Genuine GM parts have one of these marks:
California Proposition 65 Warning
Most motor vehicles, including this one, contain and/or
emit chemicals known to the State of California to
cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive
harm. Engine exhaust, many parts and systems
(including some inside the vehicle), many fluids, and
some component wear by-products contain and/or emit
these chemicals.
5-3
Doing Your Own Service Work
If you want to do some of your own service work, you
will want to use the proper service manual. It tells
you much more about how to service your vehicle than
this manual can. To order the proper service manual,
see Service Publications Ordering Information on
page 7-12.
Your vehicle has an airbag system. Before attempting to
do your own service work, see Servicing Your
Airbag-Equipped Vehicle on page 1-58.
You should keep a record with all parts receipts and list
the mileage and the date of any service work you
perform. See Maintenance Record on page 6-15.
5-4
{CAUTION:
You can be injured and your vehicle could be
damaged if you try to do service work on a
vehicle without knowing enough about it.
• Be sure you have sufficient knowledge,
experience, the proper replacement parts
and tools before you attempt any vehicle
maintenance task.
• Be sure to use the proper nuts, bolts and
other fasteners. English and metric
fasteners can be easily confused. If you
use the wrong fasteners, parts can later
break or fall off. You could be hurt.
Adding Equipment to the Outside
of Your Vehicle
Gasoline Octane
Fuel
Use premium unleaded gasoline with a posted octane
of 91 or higher for best performance. You may also use
middle grade or regular unleaded gasoline rated at
87 octane or higher, but your vehicle’s acceleration may
be slightly reduced. If the octane is less than 87, you
may get a heavy knocking noise when you drive. If this
occurs, use a gasoline rated at 87 octane or higher
as soon as possible. Otherwise, you might damage
your engine.
Use of the recommended fuel is an important part of
the proper maintenance of your vehicle.
Gasoline Specifications
Things you might add to the outside of your vehicle
can affect the airflow around it. This may cause
wind noise and affect windshield washer performance.
Check with your dealer before adding equipment to
the outside of your vehicle.
It is recommended that gasoline meet specifications
which were developed by automobile manufacturers
around the world and contained in the World-Wide Fuel
Charter which is available from the Alliance of Automobile
Manufacturers at www.autoalliance.org/fuel_charter.htm.
Gasoline meeting these specifications could provide
improved driveability and emission control system
performance compared to other gasoline.
5-5
California Fuel
Additives
If your vehicle is certified to meet California Emission
Standards (see the underhood emission control label),
it is designed to operate on fuels that meet California
specifications. If this fuel is not available in states
adopting California emissions standards, your vehicle
will operate satisfactorily on fuels meeting federal
specifications, but emission control system performance
may be affected. The malfunction indicator lamp may
turn on and your vehicle may fail a smog-check test.
See Malfunction Indicator Lamp on page 3-40. If
this occurs, return to your authorized GM dealer for
diagnosis. If it is determined that the condition is caused
by the type of fuel used, repairs may not be covered
by your warranty.
To provide cleaner air, all gasolines in the United States
are now required to contain additives that will help
prevent engine and fuel system deposits from forming,
allowing your emission control system to work
properly. In most cases, you should not have to add
anything to your fuel. However, some gasolines contain
only the minimum amount of additive required to
meet U.S. Environmental Protection Agency regulations.
General Motors recommends that you buy gasolines
that are advertised to help keep fuel injectors and intake
valves clean. If your vehicle experiences problems
due to dirty injectors or valves, try a different brand of
gasoline. Also, your GM dealer has additives that
will help correct and prevent most deposit-related
problems.
Gasolines containing oxygenates, such as ethers and
ethanol, and reformulated gasolines may be available in
your area to contribute to clean air. General Motors
recommends that you use these gasolines, particularly if
they comply with the specifications described earlier.
5-6
Notice: Your vehicle was not designed for fuel that
contains methanol. Do not use fuel containing
methanol. It can corrode metal parts in your fuel
system and also damage the plastic and rubber
parts. That damage would not be covered under
your warranty.
Some gasolines that are not reformulated for low
emissions may contain an octane-enhancing additive
called methylcyclopentadienyl manganese tricarbonyl
(MMT); ask the attendant where you buy gasoline
whether the fuel contains MMT. General Motors does
not recommend the use of such gasolines. Fuels
containing MMT can reduce the life of spark plugs and
the performance of the emission control system may
be affected. The malfunction indicator lamp may turn on.
If this occurs, return to your authorized GM dealer for
service.
Fuels in Foreign Countries
If you plan on driving in another country outside the
United States or Canada, the proper fuel may be hard
to find. Never use leaded gasoline or any other fuel
not recommended in the previous text on fuel. Costly
repairs caused by use of improper fuel would not
be covered by your warranty.
To check the fuel availability, ask an auto club, or
contact a major oil company that does business in the
country where you will be driving.
5-7
Filling Your Tank
{CAUTION:
{CAUTION:
Fuel vapor burns violently and a fuel fire can
cause bad injuries. To help avoid injuries to
you and others, read and follow all the
instructions on the pump island. Turn off your
engine when you are refueling. Do not smoke
if you are near fuel or refueling your vehicle.
Keep sparks, flames and smoking materials
away from fuel. Do not leave the fuel pump
unattended when refueling your vehicle — this
is against the law in some places. Keep
children away from the fuel pump; never let
children pump fuel.
The tethered fuel cap is located behind a hinged fuel
door on the driver’s side of the vehicle.
To remove the fuel cap, turn it slowly to the left
(counterclockwise). It will require more effort to turn
the fuel cap on the last turn as you loosen it.
5-8
If you spill fuel and then something ignites it,
you could be badly burned. Fuel can spray out
on you if you open the fuel cap too quickly.
This spray can happen if your tank is nearly
full, and is more likely in hot weather. Open
the fuel cap slowly and wait for any hiss noise
to stop. Then unscrew the cap all the way.
If your vehicle is a dual fuel tank chassis cab model,
and it runs out of fuel, refuel the front fuel tank first
to ensure a quick restart.
Be careful not to spill fuel. Do not top off or overfill the
tank and wait a few seconds after you have finished
pumping before removing the nozzle. Clean fuel
from painted surfaces as soon as possible. See
Washing Your Vehicle on page 5-99.
When replacing the fuel cap, turn it to the right
(clockwise) until it clicks. It will require more effort to
turn the fuel cap on the last turn as you tighten it. Make
sure the cap is fully installed. The diagnostic system
can determine if the fuel cap has been left off or
improperly installed. This would allow fuel to evaporate
into the atmosphere. See Malfunction Indicator Lamp
on page 3-40.
{CAUTION:
If a fire starts while you are refueling, do not
remove the nozzle. Shut off the flow of fuel
by shutting off the pump or by notifying the
station attendant. Leave the area immediately.
Notice: If you need a new fuel cap, be sure to get
the right type. Your dealer can get one for you.
If you get the wrong type, it may not fit properly.
This may cause your malfunction indicator lamp to
light and may damage your fuel tank and emissions
system. See Malfunction Indicator Lamp on
page 3-40.
Filling a Portable Fuel Container
{CAUTION:
Never fill a portable fuel container while it is in
your vehicle. Static electricity discharge from
the container can ignite the gasoline vapor.
You can be badly burned and your vehicle
damaged if this occurs. To help avoid injury
to you and others:
• Dispense gasoline only into approved
containers.
• Do not fill a container while it is inside a
vehicle, in a vehicle’s trunk, pickup bed or
on any surface other than the ground.
• Bring the fill nozzle in contact with the
inside of the fill opening before operating
the nozzle. Contact should be maintained
until the filling is complete.
• Do not smoke while pumping gasoline.
5-9
Checking Things Under
the Hood
{CAUTION:
An electric fan under the hood can start up
and injure you even when the engine is not
running. Keep hands, clothing and tools away
from any underhood electric fan.
{CAUTION:
Things that burn can get on hot engine parts
and start a fire. These include liquids like fuel,
oil, coolant, brake fluid, windshield washer and
other fluids, and plastic or rubber. You or
others could be burned. Be careful not to drop
or spill things that will burn onto a hot engine.
5-10
Hood Release
To open the hood do the following:
1. Pull the handle located
inside the vehicle to
the lower left of
the steering wheel.
2. Then go to the front of the vehicle and pull up on
the secondary hood release located near the
center of the grille.
3. Lift the hood.
Before closing the hood, be sure all the filler caps
are on properly. Then pull down the hood and close
it firmly.
5-11
Engine Compartment Overview
When you open the hood on the VORTEC™ 6000 High-Output V8 engine, here is what you will see:
5-12
A. Engine Air Cleaner/Filter. See Engine Air
Cleaner/Filter on page 5-18.
B. Coolant Surge Tank and Pressure Cap. See Cooling
System on page 5-29 and Coolant Surge Tank
Pressure Cap on page 5-26.
C. Air Filter Restriction Indicator (If Equipped). See
Engine Air Cleaner/Filter on page 5-18.
D. Engine Oil Fill Cap. See “When to Add Engine Oil”
under Engine Oil on page 5-13.
E. Engine Oil Dipstick. See “Checking Engine Oil”
under Engine Oil on page 5-13.
F. Automatic Transmission Fluid Dipstick. See
“Checking the Fluid Level” under Automatic
Transmission Fluid on page 5-20.
G. Electric Engine Cooling Fan (If Equipped).
See Cooling System on page 5-29.
H. Remote Negative (−) Terminal (GND). See Jump
Starting on page 5-41.
I. Remote Positive (+) Terminal. See Jump Starting
on page 5-41.
J. Power Steering Fluid Reservoir (Out of View).
See Power Steering Fluid on page 5-35.
K. Brake Fluid Reservoir. See “Brake Fluid” under
Brakes on page 5-37.
L. Underhood Fuse Block. See Underhood Fuse Block
on page 5-109.
M. Battery. See Battery on page 5-40.
N. Windshield Washer Fluid Reservoir. See “Adding
Washer Fluid” under Windshield Washer Fluid
on page 5-36.
Engine Oil
If the CHECK OIL LEVEL message appears on the
Driver Information Center (DIC), it means you need to
check your engine oil level right away. For more
information, see CHECK OIL LEVEL under DIC
Warnings and Messages on page 3-50.
You should check your engine oil level regularly; this
is an added reminder.
Checking Engine Oil
It is a good idea to check your engine oil every time you
get fuel. In order to get an accurate reading, the oil
must be warm and the vehicle must be on level ground.
5-13
The engine oil dipstick handle is a yellow loop. See
Engine Compartment Overview on page 5-12 for
the location of the engine oil dipstick.
1. Turn off the engine and give the oil several minutes
to drain back into the oil pan. If you do not do this,
the oil dipstick might not show the actual level.
Notice: Do not add too much oil. If your engine
has so much oil that the oil level gets above
the cross-hatched area that shows the proper
operating range, your engine could be damaged.
See Engine Compartment
Overview on page 5-12
for the location of the
engine oil fill cap.
2. Pull out the dipstick and clean it with a paper towel
or cloth, then push it back in all the way. Remove it
again, keeping the tip down, and check the level.
When to Add Engine Oil
If the oil is at or below the cross-hatched area at the
tip of the dipstick, then you will need to add at least
one quart of oil. But you must use the right kind. This
section explains what kind of oil to use. For engine
oil crankcase capacity, see Capacities and
Specifications on page 5-115.
5-14
Be sure to add enough oil to put the level somewhere
in the proper operating range. Push the dipstick all
the way back in when you are through.
What Kind of Engine Oil to Use
Look for two things:
• GM6094M
Your vehicle’s engine requires oil meeting GM
Standard GM6094M. You should look for and use
only an oil that meets GM Standard GM6094M.
• SAE 5W-30
As shown in the viscosity chart, SAE 5W-30 is best
for your vehicle.
These numbers on an oil container show its
viscosity, or thickness. Do not use other viscosity
oils such as SAE 20W-50.
Oils meeting these
requirements should also
have the starburst
symbol on the container.
This symbol indicates
that the oil has been
certified by the American
Petroleum Institute (API).
You should look for this information on the oil container,
and use only those oils that are identified as meeting
GM Standard GM6094M and have the starburst symbol
on the front of the oil container.
Notice: Use only engine oil identified as meeting
GM Standard GM6094M and showing the American
Petroleum Institute Certified For Gasoline Engines
starburst symbol. Failure to use the recommended
oil can result in engine damage not covered by
your warranty.
5-15
GM Goodwrench® oil meets all the requirements for
your vehicle.
Engine Oil Life System
If you are in an area of extreme cold, where the
temperature falls below −20°F (−29°C), it is
recommended that you use either an SAE 5W-30
synthetic oil or an SAE 0W-30 oil. Both will provide
easier cold starting and better protection for your
engine at extremely low temperatures.
When to Change Engine Oil
Engine Oil Additives
Do not add anything to your oil. The recommended
oils with the starburst symbol that meet GM Standard
GM6094M are all you will need for good performance
and engine protection.
5-16
Your vehicle has a computer system that lets you
know when to change the engine oil and filter. This is
based on engine revolutions and engine temperature,
and not on mileage. Based on driving conditions,
the mileage at which an oil change will be indicated
can vary considerably. For the oil life system to
work properly, you must reset the system every time
the oil is changed.
When the system has calculated that oil life has been
diminished, it will indicate that an oil change is
necessary. A CHANGE ENGINE OIL message will
come on. Change your oil as soon as possible within
the next 600 miles (1 000 km). It is possible that, if you
are driving under the best conditions, the oil life
system may not indicate that an oil change is necessary
for over a year. However, your engine oil and filter
must be changed at least once a year and at this time
the system must be reset. Your dealer has GM-trained
service people who will perform this work using
genuine GM parts and reset the system. It is also
important to check your oil regularly and keep it at the
proper level.
If the system is ever reset accidentally, you must
change your oil at 3,000 miles (5 000 km) since your
last oil change. Remember to reset the oil life system
whenever the oil is changed.
If the CHANGE ENGINE OIL message comes back on
when you start your vehicle, the engine oil life system
has not reset. Repeat the procedure. If it still does
not reset, see your dealer for service.
How to Reset the Engine Oil Life
System
What to Do with Used Oil
The Engine Oil Life System calculates when to change
your engine oil and filter based on vehicle use.
Anytime your oil is changed, reset the system so it can
calculate when the next oil change is required. If a
situation occurs where you change your oil prior to a
CHANGE ENGINE OIL message being turned on, reset
the system.
To reset the CHANGE ENGINE OIL message, see
“Engine Oil Life System” under DIC Operation and
Displays on page 3-47 for vehicles equipped with the
DIC, or do the following:
1. Turn the ignition key to RUN with the engine off.
2. Fully press and release the accelerator pedal slowly
three times within five seconds.
If the OIL LIFE RESET message flashes for
10 seconds, the system is resetting.
Used engine oil contains certain elements that may be
unhealthy for your skin and could even cause cancer.
Do not let used oil stay on your skin for very long. Clean
your skin and nails with soap and water, or a good
hand cleaner. Wash or properly dispose of clothing or
rags containing used engine oil. See the manufacturer’s
warnings about the use and disposal of oil products.
Used oil can be a threat to the environment. If you
change your own oil, be sure to drain all the oil from the
filter before disposal. Never dispose of oil by putting it in
the trash, pouring it on the ground, into sewers, or into
streams or bodies of water. Instead, recycle it by taking it
to a place that collects used oil. If you have a problem
properly disposing of your used oil, ask your dealer, a
service station or a local recycling center for help.
3. Turn the key to LOCK.
5-17
Engine Air Cleaner/Filter
See Engine Compartment
Overview on page 5-12
for the location of the
engine air cleaner/filter and
the air filter restriction
indicator, if equipped.
How to Inspect
Vehicles with an Air Filter Restriction
Indicator
Locate the air filter restriction indicator on the engine air
cleaner/filter cover. When the indicator turns black or
is in the red/orange “change” zone, replace the filter and
reset the indicator. See the steps following to replace
the engine air cleaner/filter and to reset the air filter
restriction indicator.
Vehicles without an Air Filter Restriction
Indicator
When to Inspect
If your vehicle is equipped with an air filter restriction
indicator, it lets you know when the engine air cleaner/
filter needs to be replaced. On vehicles with a restriction
indicator, you should inspect the air filter restriction
indicator at every oil change and replace the engine air
cleaner/filter when the indicator tells you to.
On vehicles without an air filter restriction indicator,
inspect the air cleaner/filter at the Maintenance II
intervals and replace it at the first oil change after
50,000 miles (83 000 km). See Scheduled Maintenance
on page 6-4 for more information. If you are driving
in dusty/dirty conditions, inspect the filter at each
engine oil change.
5-18
To inspect the air cleaner/filter, remove the engine air
cleaner/filter from the vehicle using the steps following.
When you have the engine air cleaner/filter removed,
lightly shake it to release loose dust and dirt. If the
engine air cleaner/filter remains caked with dirt, a new
filter is required.
Replacing the Engine Air Cleaner/Filter
and Resetting the Air Filter Restriction
Indicator
3. Remove the engine air cleaner/filter from the
housing. Care should be taken to dislodge as
little dirt as possible.
1. Locate the air cleaner/filter assembly on the front
corner of the engine compartment on the
passenger’s side of the vehicle.
4. Clean the engine air cleaner/filter sealing surfaces
and the housing.
5. Inspect or replace the engine air cleaner/filter.
2. Loosen the screws on the cover of the housing and
lift up the cover.
5-19
6. Reinstall the cover and tighten the screws.
Automatic Transmission Fluid
7. Reset the air filter restriction indicator, if equipped,
by pressing the top button on the indicator.
When to Check and Change
{CAUTION:
Operating the engine with the air cleaner/filter
off can cause you or others to be burned.
The air cleaner not only cleans the air; it helps
to stop flame if the engine backfires. If it is
not there and the engine backfires, you could
be burned. Do not drive with it off, and be
careful working on the engine with the air
cleaner/filter off.
A good time to check your automatic transmission fluid
level is when the engine oil is changed.
Change both the fluid and filter every 50,000 miles
(83 000 km) if the vehicle is mainly driven under one or
more of these conditions:
• In heavy city traffic where the outside temperature
regularly reaches 90°F (32°C) or higher.
• In hilly or mountainous terrain.
• When doing frequent trailer towing.
• Uses such as found in taxi, police or delivery
service.
If you do not use your vehicle under any of these
conditions, change the fluid and filter every
100,000 miles (166 000 km).
See Scheduled Maintenance on page 6-4.
5-20
How to Check
Because this operation can be a little difficult, you may
choose to have this done at the dealership service
department.
If you do it yourself, be sure to follow all the instructions
here, or you could get a false reading on the dipstick.
Notice: Too much or too little fluid can damage
your transmission. Too much can mean that some
of the fluid could come out and fall on hot engine
part or exhaust system parts, starting a fire.
Too little fluid could cause the transmission to
overheat. Be sure to get an accurate reading if you
check your transmission fluid.
Wait at least 30 minutes before checking the
transmission fluid level if you have been driving:
•
•
•
•
When outside temperatures are above 90°F (32°C).
At high speed for quite a while.
In heavy traffic — especially in hot weather.
While pulling a trailer.
To get the right reading, the fluid should be at normal
operating temperature, which is 180°F to 200°F
(82°C to 93°C).
Get the vehicle warmed up by driving about
15 miles (24 km) when outside temperatures are above
50°F (10°C). If it is colder than 50°F (10°C), drive
the vehicle in THIRD (3) until the engine temperature
gage moves and then remains steady for 10 minutes.
A cold fluid check can be made after the vehicle
has been sitting for eight hours or more with the engine
off, but this is used only as a reference. Let the
engine run at idle for five minutes if outside
temperatures are 50°F (10°C) or more. If it is colder
than 50°F (10°C), you may have to idle the engine
longer. Should the fluid level be low during this cold
check, you must check the fluid hot before adding fluid.
Checking the fluid hot will give you a more accurate
reading of the fluid level.
Checking the Fluid Level
Prepare your vehicle as follows:
• Park your vehicle on a level place. Keep the
engine running.
• With the parking brake applied, place the shift lever
in PARK (P).
• With your foot on the brake pedal, move the shift
lever through each gear range, pausing for about
three seconds in each range. Then, position the shift
lever in PARK (P).
• Let the engine run at idle for three minutes or more.
5-21
Then, without shutting off the engine, follow these steps:
The transmission dipstick
handle with this graphic is
located at the rear of
the engine compartment,
on the passenger’s
side of the vehicle.
See Engine Compartment Overview on page 5-12 for
more information on location.
1. Flip the handle up and then pull out the dipstick
and wipe it with a clean rag or paper towel.
2. Push it back in all the way, wait three seconds and
then pull it back out again.
3. Check both sides of the dipstick, and read the lower
level. The fluid level must be in the COLD area,
below the cross-hatched area, for a cold check or in
the HOT or cross-hatched area for a hot check.
Be sure to keep the dipstick pointed down to get an
accurate reading.
4. If the fluid level is in the acceptable range, push the
dipstick back in all the way; then flip the handle
down to lock the dipstick in place.
Consistency of Readings
Always check the fluid level at least twice using the
procedure described previously. Consistency (repeatable
readings) is important to maintaining proper fluid
level. If inconsistent readings persist, check the
transmission breather hose to be sure it is clean and
unclogged. If readings are still inconsistent, contact
your dealer.
5-22
How to Add Fluid
Engine Coolant
Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine what
kind of transmission fluid to use. See Recommended
Fluids and Lubricants on page 6-12.
The cooling system in your vehicle is filled with
DEX-COOL® engine coolant. This coolant is designed
to remain in your vehicle for five years or 150,000 miles
(240 000 km), whichever occurs first, if you add only
DEX-COOL® extended life coolant.
Add fluid only after checking the transmission fluid while
it is hot. A cold check is used only as a reference. If
the fluid level is low, add only enough of the proper fluid
to bring the level up to the HOT area for a hot check.
It does not take much fluid, generally less than one pint
(0.5 L). Do not overfill.
Notice: Use of automatic transmission fluid
labeled other than DEXRON®-III, Approved for the
H-Specification, may damage your vehicle, and
the damages may not be covered by your warranty.
Always use automatic transmission fluid labeled
DEXRON®-III, Approved for the H-Specification.
• After adding fluid, recheck the fluid level as
described under “How to Check,” earlier in
this section.
• When the correct fluid level is obtained, push the
dipstick back in all the way; then flip the handle
down to lock the dipstick in place.
The following explains your cooling system and how to
add coolant when it is low. If you have a problem
with engine overheating, see Engine Overheating on
page 5-26.
A 50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable water and
DEX-COOL® coolant will:
• Give freezing protection down to −34°F (−37°C).
• Give boiling protection up to 265°F (129°C).
• Protect against rust and corrosion.
• Help keep the proper engine temperature.
• Let the warning lights and gages work as
they should.
Notice: Using coolant other than DEX-COOL® may
cause premature engine, heater core or radiator
corrosion. In addition, the engine coolant may
require changing sooner, at 30,000 miles (50 000 km)
or 24 months, whichever occurs first. Any repairs
would not be covered by your warranty. Always use
DEX-COOL® (silicate-free) coolant in your vehicle.
5-23
What to Use
Use a mixture of one-half clean, drinkable water and
one-half DEX-COOL® coolant which will not damage
aluminum parts. If you use this coolant mixture, you do
not need to add anything else.
{CAUTION:
Adding only plain water to your cooling
system can be dangerous. Plain water, or
some other liquid such as alcohol, can boil
before the proper coolant mixture will. Your
vehicle’s coolant warning system is set for the
proper coolant mixture. With plain water or the
wrong mixture, your engine could get too hot
but you would not get the overheat warning.
Your engine could catch fire and you or others
could be burned. Use a 50/50 mixture of clean,
drinkable water and DEX-COOL® coolant.
5-24
Notice: If you use an improper coolant mixture,
your engine could overheat and be badly damaged.
The repair cost would not be covered by your
warranty. Too much water in the mixture can freeze
and crack the engine, radiator, heater core and
other parts.
If you have to add coolant more than four times a year,
have your dealer check your cooling system.
Notice: If you use the proper coolant, you do not
have to add extra inhibitors or additives which claim
to improve the system. These can be harmful.
Checking Coolant
Adding Coolant
The coolant surge tank is located in the engine
compartment on the passenger’s side of the vehicle.
See Engine Compartment Overview on page 5-12
for more information on location.
If you need more coolant, add the proper DEX-COOL®
coolant mixture at the surge tank, but only when the
engine is cool.
{CAUTION:
Turning the surge tank pressure cap when the
engine and radiator are hot can allow steam
and scalding liquids to blow out and burn you
badly. Never turn the surge tank pressure
cap — even a little — when the engine and
radiator are hot.
{CAUTION:
You can be burned if you spill coolant on hot
engine parts. Coolant contains ethylene glycol,
and it will burn if the engine parts are hot
enough. Do not spill coolant on a hot engine.
When replacing the pressure cap, make sure it is
hand-tight.
The vehicle must be on a level surface. When your
engine is cold, the coolant level should be at the
FULL COLD mark.
If your vehicle is equipped with the LOW COOLANT
LEVEL message and it comes on and stays on, it means
you are low on engine coolant. See “LOW COOLANT
LEVEL” under DIC Warnings and Messages on
page 3-50.
5-25
Coolant Surge Tank Pressure Cap
Engine Overheating
You will find a coolant temperature gage on your
vehicle’s instrument panel cluster. See Engine Coolant
Temperature Gage on page 3-38.
In addition, you will find an ENGINE COOLANT HOT,
ENGINE OVERHEATED and a REDUCED ENGINE
POWER message in the Driver Information Center (DIC)
on the instrument panel. See DIC Warnings and
Messages on page 3-50.
The coolant surge tank pressure cap must be fully
installed on the coolant surge tank.
Notice: If the pressure cap is not tightly installed,
coolant loss and possible engine damage may
occur. Be sure the cap is properly and tightly
secured.
5-26
If Steam Is Coming From Your Engine
{CAUTION:
Steam from an overheated engine can burn
you badly, even if you just open the hood. Stay
away from the engine if you see or hear steam
coming from it. Just turn it off and get
everyone away from the vehicle until it cools
down. Wait until there is no sign of steam or
coolant before you open the hood.
If you keep driving when your engine is
overheated, the liquids in it can catch fire. You
or others could be badly burned. Stop your
engine if it overheats, and get out of the
vehicle until the engine is cool.
See Overheated Engine Protection Operating
Mode on page 5-28 for information on driving
to a safe place in an emergency.
Notice: If your engine catches fire because you keep
driving with no coolant, your vehicle can be badly
damaged. The costly repairs would not be covered by
your warranty. See Overheated Engine Protection
Operating Mode on page 5-28 for information on
driving to a safe place in an emergency.
If No Steam Is Coming From
Your Engine
An overheat warning, along with a low coolant condition,
can indicate a serious problem.
If you get an engine overheat warning, but see or hear
no steam, the problem may not be too serious.
Sometimes the engine can get a little too hot when you:
• Climb a long hill on a hot day.
• Stop after high-speed driving.
• Idle for long periods in traffic.
• Tow a trailer. See Towing a Trailer on page 4-51.
If you get the overheat warning with no sign of steam, try
this for a minute or so:
1. If your air conditioner is on, turn it off.
2. Turn on your heater to full hot at the highest fan
speed and open the windows as necessary.
3. If you are in a traffic jam, shift to NEUTRAL (N);
otherwise, shift to the highest gear while
driving — DRIVE (D).
5-27
If you no longer have the overheat warning, you can
drive. Just to be safe, drive slower for about 10 minutes.
If the warning does not come back on, you can drive
normally.
If the warning continues, pull over, stop, and park your
vehicle right away.
If there is still no sign of steam and your vehicle is
equipped with an engine-driven cooling fan, push down
the accelerator until the engine speed is about twice
as fast as normal idle speed for at least three minutes
while you are parked.
If there is still no sign of steam and your vehicle is
equipped with an electric engine cooling fan, idle the
engine for three minutes while you are parked.
If you still have the warning, turn off the engine and get
everyone out of the vehicle until it cools down. Also,
see “Overheated Engine Protection Operating Mode”
later in this section.
You may decide not to lift the hood but to get service
help right away.
5-28
Overheated Engine Protection
Operating Mode
If an overheated engine condition exists and the
REDUCED ENGINE POWER message is displayed,
an overheat protection mode which alternates firing
groups of cylinders helps prevent engine damage. In this
mode, you will notice a loss in power and engine
performance. This operating mode allows your vehicle
to be driven to a safe place in an emergency. Driving
extended miles (km) and/or towing a trailer in the
overheat protection mode should be avoided.
Notice: After driving in the overheated engine
protection operating mode, to avoid engine damage,
allow the engine to cool before attempting any
repair. The engine oil will be severely degraded.
Repair the cause of coolant loss, change the oil and
reset the oil life system. See Engine Oil on
page 5-13.
Cooling System
When you decide it is safe to lift the hood, here is what
you will see:
{CAUTION:
An electric engine cooling fan under the hood
can start up even when the engine is not
running and can injure you. Keep hands,
clothing and tools away from any underhood
electric fan.
If the coolant inside the coolant surge tank is boiling,
do not do anything else until it cools down. The vehicle
should be parked on a level surface.
A. Coolant Surge Tank
B. Coolant Surge Tank Pressure Cap
C. Electric Engine Cooling Fan (If Equipped)
5-29
The coolant level should
be at or above the FULL
COLD mark. If it is not, you
may have a leak at the
pressure cap or in
the radiator hoses, heater
hoses, radiator, water
pump or somewhere else
in the cooling system.
{CAUTION:
Heater and radiator hoses, and other engine
parts, can be very hot. Do not touch them. If
you do, you can be burned.
Do not run the engine if there is a leak. If you
run the engine, it could lose all coolant. That
could cause an engine fire, and you could be
burned. Get any leak fixed before you drive the
vehicle.
5-30
If there seems to be no leak and your vehicle is
equipped with an electric engine cooling fan, with the
engine on check to see if the cooling fan is running. If it
is not, your vehicle needs service. Turn off the engine.
If there seems to be no leak and your vehicle is
equipped with an engine-driven cooling fan, start the
engine again and see if the fan speed increases when
idle speed is doubled by pushing the accelerator
pedal down. If it does not, your vehicle needs service.
Turn off the engine.
Notice: Engine damage from running your engine
without coolant is not covered by your warranty. See
Overheated Engine Protection Operating Mode on
page 5-28 for information on driving to a safe place
in an emergency.
Notice: Using coolant other than DEX-COOL® may
cause premature engine, heater core or radiator
corrosion. In addition, the engine coolant may
require changing sooner, at 30,000 miles (50 000 km)
or 24 months, whichever occurs first. Any repairs
would not be covered by your warranty. Always use
DEX-COOL® (silicate-free) coolant in your vehicle.
How to Add Coolant to the Coolant
Surge Tank
If you have not found a problem yet, check to see if
coolant is visible in the surge tank. If coolant is visible
but the coolant level is not at or above the FULL COLD
mark, add a 50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable water
and DEX-COOL® coolant at the coolant surge tank, but
be sure the cooling system, including the coolant
surge tank pressure cap, is cool before you do it. See
Engine Coolant on page 5-23 for more information.
If no coolant is visible in the surge tank, add coolant as
follows:
{CAUTION:
Steam and scalding liquids from a hot cooling
system can blow out and burn you badly. They
are under pressure, and if you turn the radiator
pressure cap — even a little — they can come
out at high speed. Never turn the cap when the
cooling system, including the radiator pressure
cap, is hot. Wait for the cooling system and
radiator pressure cap to cool if you ever have
to turn the pressure cap.
{CAUTION:
Adding only plain water to your cooling
system can be dangerous. Plain water, or
some other liquid such as alcohol, can boil
before the proper coolant mixture will. Your
vehicle’s coolant warning system is set for the
proper coolant mixture. With plain water or the
wrong mixture, your engine could get too hot
but you would not get the overheat warning.
Your engine could catch fire and you or others
could be burned. Use a 50/50 mixture of clean,
drinkable water and DEX-COOL® coolant.
Notice: In cold weather, water can freeze and crack
the engine, radiator, heater core and other parts.
Use the recommended coolant and the proper
coolant mixture.
5-31
{CAUTION:
You can be burned if you spill coolant on hot
engine parts. Coolant contains ethylene glycol
and it will burn if the engine parts are hot
enough. Do not spill coolant on a hot engine.
1. You can remove the coolant surge tank pressure
cap when the cooling system, including the coolant
surge tank pressure cap and upper radiator
hose, is no longer hot. Turn the pressure cap slowly
counterclockwise (left) about one full turn. If you
hear a hiss, wait for that to stop. A hiss means there
is still some pressure left.
5-32
2. Then keep turning the pressure cap slowly, and
remove it.
3. Fill the coolant surge tank with the proper mixture,
to the FULL COLD mark.
4. With the coolant surge tank pressure cap off, start
the engine and let it run until you can feel the upper
radiator hose getting hot. Watch out for the
engine cooling fan.
By this time, the coolant level inside the coolant
surge tank may be lower. If the level is lower, add
more of the proper mixture to the coolant surge tank
until the level reaches the FULL COLD mark.
5. Then replace the pressure cap. Be sure the
pressure cap is hand-tight and fully seated.
5-33
Engine Fan Noise
If your vehicle is equipped with a clutched engine
cooling fan, when the clutch is engaged, the fan spins
faster to provide more air to cool the engine. In
most everyday driving conditions, the fan is spinning
slower and the clutch is not fully engaged. This improves
fuel economy and reduces fan noise. Under heavy
vehicle loading, trailer towing, and/or high outside
temperatures, the fan speed increases as the clutch
more fully engages, so you may hear an increase in fan
noise. This is normal and should not be mistaken as
the transmission slipping or making extra shifts. It
is merely the cooling system functioning properly. The
fan will slow down when additional cooling is not
required and the clutch disengages.
You may also hear this fan noise when you start the
engine. It will go away as the fan clutch partially
disengages.
5-34
If your vehicle is equipped with electric cooling fans, you
may hear the fans spinning at low speed during most
everyday driving. The fans may turn off if no cooling is
required. Under heavy vehicle loading, trailer towing,
and/or high outside temperatures, or if you are operating
your air conditioning system, the fans change to high
speed and you may hear an increase in fan noise. This
is normal and indicates that the cooling system is
functioning properly. The fans will change to low speed
when additional cooling is no longer required.
Power Steering Fluid
How to Check Power Steering Fluid
Locate the cap with this
symbol. See Engine
Compartment Overview on
page 5-12 for more
information on location.
To check the power steering fluid, do the following:
See Engine Compartment Overview on page 5-12 for
power steering fluid reservoir location.
When to Check Power Steering Fluid
It is not necessary to regularly check power steering fluid
unless you suspect there is a leak in the system or
you hear an unusual noise. A fluid loss in this system
could indicate a problem. Have the system inspected
and repaired.
1. Turn the key off and let the engine compartment
cool down.
2. Wipe the cap and the top of the reservoir clean.
3. Unscrew the cap and wipe the dipstick with a
clean rag.
4. Replace the cap and completely tighten it.
5. Remove the cap again and look at the fluid level
on the dipstick.
The level should be at the FULL COLD mark.
If necessary, add only enough fluid to bring the
level up to the mark.
5-35
What to Use
Open the cap with the
washer symbol on it. Add
washer fluid until the
tank is full. See Engine
Compartment Overview on
page 5-12 for reservoir
location.
To determine what kind of fluid to use, see
Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 6-12.
Always use the proper fluid. Failure to use the proper
fluid can cause leaks and damage hoses and seals.
Windshield Washer Fluid
What to Use
When you need windshield washer fluid, be sure to read
the manufacturer’s instructions before use. If you will
be operating your vehicle in an area where the
temperature may fall below freezing, use a fluid that has
sufficient protection against freezing.
Adding Washer Fluid
Your vehicle has a low washer fluid message that
comes on when the washer fluid is low. The message is
displayed for 15 seconds at the start of each ignition
cycle. When the LOW WASHER FLUID message
is displayed, you will need to add washer fluid to the
windshield washer fluid reservoir.
Notice:
• When using concentrated washer fluid, follow
the manufacturer’s instructions for adding
water.
• Do not mix water with ready-to-use washer fluid.
Water can cause the solution to freeze and
damage your washer fluid tank and other parts
of the washer system. Also, water does not
clean as well as washer fluid.
• Fill your washer fluid tank only three-quarters
full when it is very cold. This allows for
expansion if freezing occurs, which could
damage the tank if it is completely full.
• Do not use engine coolant (antifreeze) in your
windshield washer. It can damage your washer
system and paint.
5-36
Brakes
Brake Fluid
Your brake master cylinder
reservoir is filled with
DOT-3 brake fluid. See
Engine Compartment
Overview on page 5-12 for
the location of the
reservoir.
There are only two reasons why the brake fluid level in
the reservoir might go down. The first is that the
brake fluid goes down to an acceptable level during
normal brake lining wear. When new linings are put in,
the fluid level goes back up. The other reason is
that fluid is leaking out of the brake system. If it is, you
should have your brake system fixed, since a leak
means that sooner or later your brakes will not work
well, or will not work at all.
So, it is not a good idea to top off your brake fluid.
Adding brake fluid will not correct a leak. If you add fluid
when your linings are worn, then you will have too
much fluid when you get new brake linings. You should
add or remove brake fluid, as necessary, only when
work is done on the brake hydraulic system.
{CAUTION:
If you have too much brake fluid, it can spill on
the engine. The fluid will burn if the engine is
hot enough. You or others could be burned,
and your vehicle could be damaged. Add brake
fluid only when work is done on the brake
hydraulic system. See “Checking Brake Fluid”
in this section.
Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine when
to check your brake fluid. See Scheduled Maintenance
on page 6-4.
5-37
Checking Brake Fluid
You can check the brake fluid without taking off the cap.
Look at the brake fluid
reservoir. The fluid level
should be above MIN. If it
is not, have your brake
system checked to
see if there is a leak.
Always clean the brake fluid reservoir cap and the area
around the cap before removing it. This will help
keep dirt from entering the reservoir.
{CAUTION:
With the wrong kind of fluid in your brake
system, your brakes may not work well, or they
may not even work at all. This could cause a
crash. Always use the proper brake fluid.
Notice:
• Using the wrong fluid can badly damage brake
After work is done on the brake hydraulic system,
make sure the level is above the MIN but not over the
MAX mark.
What to Add
When you do need brake fluid, use only DOT-3 brake
fluid. Use new brake fluid from a sealed container
only. See Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on
page 6-12.
5-38
system parts. For example, just a few drops of
mineral-based oil, such as engine oil, in your
brake system can damage brake system parts so
badly that they will have to be replaced. Do not
let someone put in the wrong kind of fluid.
• If you spill brake fluid on your vehicle’s painted
surfaces, the paint finish can be damaged. Be
careful not to spill brake fluid on your vehicle. If
you do, wash it off immediately. See Appearance
Care on page 5-95.
Brake Wear
Your vehicle has four-wheel disc brakes.
Disc brake pads have built-in wear indicators that make
a high-pitched warning sound when the brake pads
are worn and new pads are needed. The sound
may come and go or be heard all the time your vehicle
is moving, except when you are pushing on the
brake pedal firmly.
{CAUTION:
The brake wear warning sound means that
soon your brakes will not work well. That
could lead to an accident. When you hear the
brake wear warning sound, have your vehicle
serviced.
Notice: Continuing to drive with worn-out brake
pads could result in costly brake repair.
Some driving conditions or climates may cause a brake
squeal when the brakes are first applied or lightly
applied. This does not mean something is wrong with
your brakes.
Properly torqued wheel nuts are necessary to help
prevent brake pulsation. When tires are rotated, inspect
brake pads for wear and evenly tighten wheel nuts in
the proper sequence to GM torque specifications.
Brake linings should always be replaced as complete
axle sets.
Brake Pedal Travel
See your dealer if the brake pedal does not return to
normal height, or if there is a rapid increase in
pedal travel. This could be a sign of brake trouble.
Brake Adjustment
Every time you make a brake stop, your disc brakes
adjust for wear.
Replacing Brake System Parts
The braking system on a vehicle is complex. Its
many parts have to be of top quality and work well
together if the vehicle is to have really good braking.
Your vehicle was designed and tested with top-quality
GM brake parts. When you replace parts of your
braking system — for example, when your brake
linings wear down and you need new ones put in — be
sure you get new approved GM replacement parts.
5-39
If you do not, your brakes may no longer work properly.
For example, if someone puts in brake linings that
are wrong for your vehicle, the balance between your
front and rear brakes can change — for the worse. The
braking performance you have come to expect can
change in many other ways if someone puts in
the wrong replacement brake parts.
Vehicle Storage
If you are not going to drive your vehicle for 25 days
or more, remove the black, negative (−) cable from
the battery. This will help keep your battery from
running down.
Battery
{CAUTION:
Your vehicle has a maintenance free battery. When
it is time for a new battery, get one that has the
replacement number shown on the original battery’s
label. We recommend an ACDelco® replacement
battery. See Engine Compartment Overview on
page 5-12 for battery location.
Batteries have acid that can burn you and gas
that can explode. You can be badly hurt if you
are not careful. See Jump Starting on
page 5-41 for tips on working around a battery
without getting hurt.
Warning: Battery posts, terminals and related
accessories contain lead and lead compounds,
chemicals known to the State of California to cause
cancer and reproductive harm. Wash hands after
handling.
5-40
Also, for your audio system, see Theft-Deterrent
Feature on page 3-95.
To reprogram your sunroof (if equipped), see Sunroof
on page 2-68.
Jump Starting
If your battery has run down, you may want to use
another vehicle and some jumper cables to start your
vehicle. Be sure to use the following steps to do it safely.
{CAUTION:
Batteries can hurt you. They can be dangerous
because:
• They contain acid that can burn you.
• They contain gas that can explode or
ignite.
• They contain enough electricity to
burn you.
If you do not follow these steps exactly, some
or all of these things can hurt you.
Trying to start your vehicle by pushing or pulling it
will not work, and it could damage your vehicle.
1. Check the other vehicle. It must have a 12-volt
battery with a negative ground system.
Notice: If the other vehicle’s system is not a 12-volt
system with a negative ground, both vehicles can
be damaged. Only use vehicles with 12-volt systems
with negative grounds to jump start your vehicle.
2. Get the vehicles close enough so the jumper cables
can reach, but be sure the vehicles are not touching
each other. If they are, it could cause a ground
connection you do not want. You would not be able
to start your vehicle, and the bad grounding
could damage the electrical systems.
To avoid the possibility of the vehicles rolling, set
the parking brake firmly on both vehicles involved in
the jump start procedure. Put an automatic
transmission in PARK (P) or a manual transmission
in NEUTRAL before setting the parking brake.
Notice: Ignoring these steps could result in costly
damage to your vehicle that would not be covered
by your warranty.
5-41
Notice: If you leave your radio or other accessories
on during the jump starting procedure, they could
be damaged. The repairs would not be covered
by your warranty. Always turn off your radio and
other accessories when jump starting your vehicle.
3. Turn off the ignition on both vehicles. Unplug
unnecessary accessories plugged into the cigarette
lighter or accessory power outlets. Turn off the
radio and all lamps that are not needed. This will
avoid sparks and help save both batteries. And
it could save your radio!
4. Open the hoods and locate the positive (+) and
negative (−) terminal locations of the other vehicle.
Your vehicle has a remote positive (+) jump
starting terminal and a remote negative (−) jump
starting terminal. You should always use these
remote terminals instead of the terminals on the
battery.
5-42
The remote positive (+)
terminal is located near the
engine accessory drive
bracket. On some vehicles,
the terminal may be
covered by a red plastic
cover. To access the
remote positive (+)
terminal, open the cover.
The remote negative (−)
terminal is located
on the engine accessory
drive bracket and is
marked GND.
See Engine Compartment Overview on page 5-12
for more information on the location of the
remote terminals.
{CAUTION:
Using a match near a battery can cause battery
gas to explode. People have been hurt doing
this, and some have been blinded. Use a
flashlight if you need more light.
Be sure the battery has enough water. You do
not need to add water to the battery installed
in your new vehicle. But if a battery has filler
caps, be sure the right amount of fluid is there.
If it is low, add water to take care of that first.
If you do not, explosive gas could be present.
Battery fluid contains acid that can burn you.
Do not get it on you. If you accidentally get it
in your eyes or on your skin, flush the place
with water and get medical help immediately.
5. Check that the jumper cables do not have loose or
missing insulation. If they do, you could get a
shock. The vehicles could be damaged too.
Before you connect the cables, here are some
basic things you should know. Positive (+) will go to
positive (+) or to a remote positive terminal (+) if
the vehicle has one. Negative (−) will go to a heavy,
unpainted metal engine part or to a remote
negative (−) terminal, if the vehicle has one.
Do not connect positive (+) to negative (−) or you
will get a short that would damage the battery
and maybe other parts too.
{CAUTION:
Fans or other moving engine parts can injure
you badly. Keep your hands away from moving
parts once the engine is running.
6. Connect the red positive (+) cable to the positive (+)
terminal of the dead battery. Use a remote
positive (+) terminal if the vehicle has one.
7. Do not let the other end touch metal. Connect
it to the positive (+) terminal of the good battery.
Use a remote positive (+) terminal if the vehicle
has one.
5-43
8. Now connect the black negative (−) cable to the
negative (−) terminal of the good battery. Use a
remote negative (−) terminal if the vehicle has one.
Do not let the other end touch anything until the
next step. The other end of the negative (−) cable
does not go to the dead battery. It goes to a
heavy, unpainted metal engine part or to a remote
negative (−) terminal on the vehicle with the
dead battery.
Notice: If the jumper cables are removed in the
wrong order, electrical shorting may occur and
damage the vehicle. The repairs would not be
covered by your warranty. Remove the jumper
cables in the correct order, making sure that the
cables do not touch each other or other metal.
9. Connect the other end of the negative (−) cable at
least 18 inches (45 cm) away from the dead battery,
but not near engine parts that move. The electrical
connection is just as good there, and the chance
of sparks getting back to the battery is much less.
Use a remote negative (−) terminal if the vehicle has
one. Your vehicle’s remote negative (−) terminal
is marked GND.
10. Now start the vehicle with the good battery and run
the engine for awhile.
11. Try to start the vehicle that had the dead battery.
If it will not start after a few tries, it probably
needs service.
5-44
Jumper Cable Removal
A. Heavy, Unpainted Metal Engine Part or Remote
Negative (−) Terminal
B. Good Battery or Remote Positive (+) and
Negative (−) Terminals
C. Dead Battery or Remote Positive (+) Terminal
To disconnect the jumper cables from both vehicles
do the following:
How to Check Lubricant
1. Disconnect the black negative (−) cable from the
vehicle that had the dead battery.
2. Disconnect the black negative (−) cable from the
vehicle with the good battery.
3. Disconnect the red positive (+) cable from the
vehicle with the good battery.
4. Disconnect the red positive (+) cable from the other
vehicle.
5. Return the positive (+) remote terminal cover to its
original position.
All-Wheel Drive
Transfer Case
It is not necessary to regularly check transfer case fluid
unless you suspect there is a leak or you hear an
unusual noise. A fluid loss could indicate a problem.
Have it inspected and repaired.
(A) Drain Plug (B) Filler Plug
To get an accurate reading, the vehicle should be on a
level surface.
If the level is below the bottom of the filler plug hole,
located on the transfer case, you’ll need to add
some lubricant. Add enough lubricant to raise the level
to the bottom of the filler plug hole. Use care not to
overtighten the plug.
What to Use
Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine what
kind of lubricant to use. See Recommended Fluids
and Lubricants on page 6-12.
5-45
Rear Axle
To get an accurate reading, the vehicle should be on a
level surface.
When to Check Lubricant
The proper level is from 5/8 inch to 1-5/8 inch
(15 mm to 40 mm) below the bottom of the filler plug
hole, located on the rear axle. Add only enough fluid
to reach the proper level.
It is not necessary to regularly check rear axle fluid
unless you suspect there is a leak or you hear an
unusual noise. A fluid loss could indicate a problem.
Have it inspected and repaired.
How to Check Lubricant
5-46
What to Use
Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine what
kind of lubricant to use. See Recommended Fluids
and Lubricants on page 6-12.
Front Axle
To get an accurate reading, the vehicle should be on a
level surface.
When to Check and Change Lubricant
If the level is below the bottom of the filler plug hole,
located on the front axle, you may need to add
some lubricant:
It is not necessary to regularly check front axle fluid
unless you suspect there is a leak or you hear an
unusual noise. A fluid loss could indicate a problem.
Have it inspected and repaired.
How to Check Lubricant
• When the differential is cold, add enough lubricant
to raise the level from 1/2 inch (12 mm) to about
5/8 inch (18 mm) below the filler plug hole.
• When the differential is at operating temperature
(warm), add enough lubricant to raise the level
to the bottom of the filler plug hole.
What to Use
Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine what
kind of lubricant to use. See Recommended Fluids
and Lubricants on page 6-12.
5-47
Headlamp Aiming
Notice: To make sure your headlamps are aimed
properly, read all the instructions before beginning.
Failure to follow these instructions could cause
damage to headlamp parts.
The vehicle should be properly prepared as follows:
• The vehicle should be placed so the headlamps are
25 ft. (7.6 m) from a light colored wall or other flat
surface.
• The vehicle must have all four tires on a perfectly
level surface which is level all the way to the wall
or other flat surface.
• The vehicle should be placed so it is perpendicular
Your vehicle has a visual optical headlamp aiming
system equipped with horizontal aim indicators. The aim
has been preset at the factory and should need no
further adjustment. This is true even though your
horizontal aim indicators may not fall exactly on the
“0” (zero) marks on their scales.
If your vehicle is damaged in an accident, the headlamp
aim may be affected. Aim adjustment to the low beam
may be necessary if it is difficult to see lane markers
(for horizontal aim), or if oncoming drivers flash
their high beams at you (for vertical aim).
If you believe your headlamps need to be re-aimed, we
recommend that you take your vehicle to your dealer
for service. However, it is possible for you to re-aim your
headlamps as described in the following procedure.
5-48
to the wall or other flat surface.
• The vehicle should not have any snow, ice or mud
attached to it.
• The vehicle should be fully assembled and all other
work stopped while headlamp aiming is being done.
• The vehicle should be normally loaded with a
full tank of fuel and one person or 160 lbs (75 kg)
on the driver’s seat.
• Tires should be properly inflated.
• Start the vehicle and rock it to level the suspension.
Headlamp aiming is done with the vehicle low-beam
lamps. The high-beam lamps will be correctly aimed if
the low-beam lamps are aimed properly.
The headlamp aiming devices are under the hood near
the headlamps.
Headlamp Horizontal Aiming
Turn the horizontal aiming screw (A) until the
indicator (B) is lined up with zero.
If you believe your headlamps need horizontal (H)
(left/right) adjustment, follow the horizontal aiming
procedure. If you believe your headlamps need only
vertical (V) (up/down) adjustment, follow only the vertical
aiming procedure.
Once the horizontal aim is adjusted, then adjust the
vertical aim.
Adjustment screws can be turned with an E8 Torx®
socket or T15 Torx® screwdriver.
5-49
Headlamp Vertical Aiming
Notice: Horizontal aiming must be performed
before making any adjustments to the vertical aim.
Adjusting the vertical aim first will result in an
incorrect headlamp aim.
1. Find the aim dot on the lens of the low-beam lamps.
2. Measure the distance from the ground to the aim
dot on each low-beam lamp. Record this distance.
5-50
3. At the wall or other flat surface, measure from the
ground upward the recorded distance from Step 2
and draw or tape a horizontal line the width of
the vehicle.
4. Turn on the low-beam headlamps and place a
piece of cardboard or equivalent in front of the
headlamp not being aimed. This should allow only
the beam of light from the headlamp being
aimed to be seen on the flat surface.
Notice: Do not cover a headlamp to improve beam
cut-off when aiming. Covering a headlamp may
cause excessive heat build-up which may cause
damage to the headlamp.
6. Repeat Steps 4 and 5 for the opposite headlamp.
5. Turn the vertical aiming screw (V) until the
headlamp beam is aimed to the horizontal tape line.
The top edge of the cut-off should be positioned
at the bottom edge of the horizontal tape line.
5-51
Bulb Replacement
For the proper type of replacement bulbs, see
Replacement Bulbs on page 5-58.
Your vehicle may have HID headlamps. After your
vehicle’s HID headlamp bulb has been replaced, you
may notice that the beam is a slightly different
shade than it was originally. This is normal.
For any bulb changing procedure not listed in this
section, contact your dealer.
Halogen Bulbs
High Intensity Discharge (HID)
Lighting
{CAUTION:
The low beam high intensity discharge lighting
system operates at a very high voltage. If you
try to service any of the system components,
you could be seriously injured. Have your
dealer or a qualified technician service them.
5-52
{CAUTION:
Halogen bulbs have pressurized gas inside
and can burst if you drop or scratch the bulb.
You or others could be injured. Be sure to read
and follow the instructions on the bulb
package.
Headlamps
To replace a headlamp bulb, do the following:
1. Open the hood of the vehicle. See Hood Release
on page 5-10 for more information.
A. Low-Beam
Headlamp (HID)
B. Daytime Running
Lamp (DRL)
C. Sidemarker Lamp
D. High-Beam Headlamp
E. Front Parking/Turn
Signal Lamp
2. Pry up the eight fastener plugs on the radiator
cover and pull the fasteners out.
3. Lift off the radiator cover.
5-53
4. Pull the top left or right corner of the grill out so the
clips release. This will give you the needed
clearance for removing the headlamp assembly.
5-54
5. Remove the horizontal pin from the headlamp
assembly by lifting the end of the pin upward
until it unsnaps and then pulling it toward the center
of the vehicle.
9. Remove the rubber,
circular-shaped bulb
cap of the affected bulb
from the headlamp
assembly.
6. Remove the vertical pin from the headlamp
assembly by turning the end of the pin away from
you until it unsnaps and then pulling it upward.
7. Remove the headlamp assembly by lifting it up and
then pulling it out and away from the front of the
vehicle.
10. Turn the bulb connector counterclockwise and
remove it with the old bulb from the headlamp
assembly.
11. Unplug the electrical connector from the old bulb.
12. Plug in the electrical connector to the new bulb,
using care not to touch the bulb with your hands,
fingers or anything damp or oily.
8. Disconnect the electrical connector from the lower
corner of the headlamp assembly. This will give you
better access to the headlamp assembly.
5-55
Front Turn Signal, Sidemarker and
Daytime Running Lamps
13. Place the headlamp assembly back into the vehicle,
being sure to align the lower locator tab with the
pocket on the vehicle (see arrow). Push the
headlamp assembly straight in and then down into
position.
14. Install the two pins and snap the ends into their
locked position.
15. Reinstall the grille and radiator cover by reversing
the removal procedure described previously.
5-56
A. Low-Beam
Headlamp (HID)
B. Daytime Running
Lamp (DRL)
C. Sidemarker Lamp
D. High-Beam Headlamp
E. Front Parking/Turn
Signal Lamp
To replace a front turn signal, sidemarker or DRL bulb,
do the following:
1. Remove the headlamp assembly as described
previously. See Headlamps on page 5-53 for
more information.
2. Remove the rubber, circular-shaped bulb cap for
the affected bulb from the headlamp assembly.
3. Press the locking release lever, turn the bulb
socket counterclockwise and remove it from
the headlamp assembly. (There is no lock for
the sidemarker lamp.)
Taillamps
To replace a taillamp bulb, do the following:
A. Stoplamp/Taillamp
B. Turn Signal
Lamp/Taillamp
C. Back-Up Lamp
4. Remove the old bulb from the bulb socket.
5. Put the new bulb into the bulb socket.
6. Put the bulb socket into the turn signal housing
and turn it clockwise until it locks. (There is no
lock for the sidemarker lamp.)
7. Reverse the steps to reinstall.
1. Open the tailgate. See Tailgate on page 2-21 for
more information.
5-57
2. Remove the two
screws from the
taillamp assembly.
5. Pull the bulb straight out from the socket.
6. Press a new bulb into the socket, insert it into the
taillamp housing and turn the socket clockwise into
the taillamp housing until it clicks.
7. Reinstall the rear lamp assembly and tighten the
screws.
Replacement Bulbs
Exterior Lamp
Back-up
3. Remove the taillamp assembly.
4. Press the release
tab and turn the
bulb socket
counterclockwise to
remove it from
the taillamp housing.
Bulb Number
3157
Daytime Running Lamp (DRL)
4114K
Front Parking and Turn Signal
3157 or
3157K Long Life
Front Sidemarker
High-Beam Headlamp
194
9005 or 9005 LL
Rear Turn Signal Lamp and
Stoplamp
3057
Stoplamp and Taillamp
3057
For replacement bulbs not listed here, contact
your dealer.
5-58
Windshield Wiper Blade
Replacement
Windshield wiper blades should be inspected at least
twice a year for wear and cracking. See Scheduled
Maintenance on page 6-4 for more information.
Replacement blades come in different types and are
removed in different ways. For proper type and length,
see Normal Maintenance Replacement Parts on
page 6-14.
To replace the windshield wiper blade assembly do the
following:
1. Lift the wiper arm and turn the blade until it is
facing away from the windshield.
2. Push the release lever and slide the wiper assembly
toward the driver’s side of the vehicle.
3. Install a new blade by reversing Steps 1 and 2.
5-59
Tires
Your new vehicle comes with high-quality tires made by
a leading tire manufacturer. If you ever have questions
about your tire warranty and where to obtain service,
see your GM Warranty booklet for details. For additional
information refer to the tire manufacturer’s booklet
included with your vehicle’s Owner’s Manual.
5-60
{CAUTION:
Poorly maintained and improperly used tires are
dangerous.
• Overloading your tires can cause
overheating as a result of too much friction.
You could have an air-out and a serious
accident. See Loading Your Vehicle on
page 4-44.
• Underinflated tires pose the same danger
as overloaded tires. The resulting accident
could cause serious injury. Check all tires
frequently to maintain the recommended
pressure. Tire pressure should be checked
when your tires are cold. See Inflation - Tire
Pressure on page 5-66.
• Overinflated tires are more likely to be
cut, punctured or broken by a sudden
impact — such as when you hit a pothole.
Keep tires at the recommended pressure.
• Worn, old tires can cause accidents. If your
tread is badly worn, or if your tires have
been damaged, replace them.
Tire Sidewall Labelling
Useful information about a tire is molded into the
sidewall. The following illustrations are examples of a
typical P-Metric and a LT-Metric tire sidewall.
(B) TPC Spec (Tire Performance Criteria
Specification): Original equipment tires designed to
GM’s specific tire performance criteria have a TPC
specification code molded onto the sidewall. GM’s TPC
specifications meet or exceed all federal safety
guidelines.
(C) DOT (Department of Transportation): The
Department of Transportation (DOT) code indicates that
the tire is in compliance with the U.S. Department of
Transportation Motor Vehicle Safety Standards.
(D) Tire Identification Number (TIN): The letters and
numbers following DOT code are the Tire Identification
Number (TIN). The TIN shows the manufacturer and
plant code, tire size, and date the tire was manufactured.
The TIN is molded onto both sides of the tire, although
only one side may have the date of manufacture.
(E) Tire Ply Material: The type of cord and number of
plies in the sidewall and under the tread.
Passenger (P-Metric) Tire
(A) Tire Size: The tire size code is a combination of
letters and numbers used to define a particular
tire’s width, height, aspect ratio, construction type and
service description. See the “Tire Size” illustration
later in this section for more detail.
(F) Uniform Tire Quality Grading (UTQG): Tire
manufacturers are required to grade tires based on three
performance factors: treadwear, traction and
temperature resistance. For more information, see
Uniform Tire Quality Grading on page 5-73.
5-61
(G) Maximum Cold Inflation Load Limit: Maximum
load that can be carried and the maximum pressure
needed to support that load. For information on
recommended tire pressure see Inflation - Tire Pressure
on page 5-66 and Loading Your Vehicle on page 4-44.
(B) TPC Spec (Tire Performance Criteria
Specification): Original equipment tires designed to
GM’s specific tire performance criteria have a TPC
specification code molded onto the sidewall. GM’s TPC
specifications meet or exceed all federal safety
guidelines.
(C) Dual Tire Maximum Load: Maximum load that
can be carried and the maximum pressure needed to
support that load when used in a dual configuration.
For information on recommended tire pressure see
Inflation - Tire Pressure on page 5-66 and Loading Your
Vehicle on page 4-44.
(D) DOT (Department of Transportation): The
Department of Transportation (DOT) code indicates that
the tire is in compliance with the U.S. Department of
Transportation Motor Vehicle Safety Standards.
Light Truck (LT-Metric) Tire
(A) Tire Size: The tire size code is a combination of
letters and numbers used to define a particular
tire’s width, height, aspect ratio, construction type and
service description. See the “Tire Size” illustration
later in this section for more detail.
5-62
(E) Tire Identification Number (TIN): The letters and
numbers following DOT code are the Tire Identification
Number (TIN). The TIN shows the manufacturer and
plant code, tire size, and date the tire was manufactured.
The TIN is molded onto both sides of the tire, although
only one side may have the date of manufacture.
(F) Tire Ply Material: The type of cord and number of
plies in the sidewall and under the tread.
(G) Single Tire Maximum Load: Maximum load that
can be carried and the maximum pressure needed to
support that load when used as a single. For information
on recommended tire pressure see Inflation - Tire
Pressure on page 5-66 and Loading Your Vehicle on
page 4-44.
Tire Size
The following examples show the different parts of
a tire size.
(A) Passenger (P-Metric) Tire: The United States
version of a metric tire sizing system. The letter P as
the first character in the tire size means a passenger
vehicle tire engineered to standards set by the U.S. Tire
and Rim Association.
(A) Light Truck (LT-Metric) Tire: The United States
version of a metric tire sizing system. The letters LT as
the first two characters in the tire size means a light
truck tire engineered to standards set by the U.S. Tire
and Rim Association.
(B) Tire Width: The three-digit number indicates the
tire section width in millimeters from sidewall to sidewall.
(C) Aspect Ratio: A two-digit number that indicates
the tire height-to-width measurements. For example, if
the tire size aspect ratio is 75, as shown in item C of the
light truck (LT-Metric) tire illustration, it would mean
that the tire’s sidewall is 75% as high as it is wide.
Passenger (P-Metric) Tire
(D) Construction Code: A letter code is used to
indicate the type of ply construction in the tire.
The letter R means radial ply construction; the letter D
means diagonal or bias ply construction; and the
letter B means belted-bias ply construction.
(E) Rim Diameter: Diameter of the wheel in inches.
Light Truck (LT-Metric) Tire
(F) Service Description: The service description
indicates the load range and speed rating of a tire. The
load index can range from 1 to 279. Speed ratings range
from A to Z.
5-63
Tire Terminology and Definitions
Air Pressure: The amount of air inside the tire pressing
outward on each square inch of the tire. Air pressure
is expressed in pounds per square inch (psi) or
kiloPascal (kPa).
Curb Weight: This means the weight of a motor
vehicle with standard and optional equipment including
the maximum capacity of fuel, oil and coolant, but
without passengers and cargo.
Accessory Weight: This means the combined weight
of optional accessories. Some examples of optional
accessories are, automatic transmission, power steering,
power brakes, power windows, power seats, and air
conditioning.
DOT Markings: A code molded into the sidewall of a
tire signifying that the tire is in compliance with the
U.S. Department of Transportation (DOT) motor vehicle
safety standards. The DOT code includes the Tire
Identification Number (TIN), an alphanumeric designator
which can also identify the tire manufacturer, production
plant, brand and date of production.
Aspect Ratio: The relationship of a tire’s height to
its width.
GVWR: Gross Vehicle Weight Rating, see Loading
Your Vehicle on page 4-44.
Belt: A rubber coated layer of cords that is located
between the plies and the tread. Cords may be made
from steel or other reinforcing materials.
GAWR FRT: Gross Axle Weight Rating for the front
axle, see Loading Your Vehicle on page 4-44.
Bead: The tire bead contains steel wires wrapped by
steel cords that hold the tire onto the rim.
Bias Ply Tire: A pneumatic tire in which the plies are
laid at alternate angles less than 90 degrees to the
centerline of the tread.
Cold Inflation Pressure: The amount of air pressure in
a tire, measured in pounds per square inch (psi) or
kilopascals (kPa) before a tire has built up heat
from driving. See Inflation - Tire Pressure on page 5-66.
5-64
GAWR RR: Gross Axle Weight Rating for the rear axle,
see Loading Your Vehicle on page 4-44.
Intended Outboard Sidewall: The side of an
asymmetrical tire, that must always face outward when
mounted on a vehicle.
KiloPascal (kPa): The metric unit for air pressure.
Light Truck (LT-Metric) Tire: A tire used on light duty
trucks and some multipurpose passenger vehicles.
Load Index: An assigned number ranging from
1 to 279 that corresponds to the load carrying capacity
of a tire.
Maximum Inflation Pressure: The maximum air
pressure to which a cold tire may be inflated. The
maximum air pressure is molded onto the sidewall.
Maximum Load Rating: The load rating for a tire at the
maximum permissible inflation pressure for that tire.
Maximum Loaded Vehicle Weight: The sum of curb
weight; accessory weight; vehicle capacity weight;
and production options weight.
Recommended Inflation Pressure: Vehicle
manufacturer’s recommended tire inflation pressure and
shown on the tire placard. See Inflation - Tire Pressure
on page 5-66 and Loading Your Vehicle on page 4-44.
Radial Ply Tire: A pneumatic tire in which the ply cords
that extend to the beads are laid at 90 degrees to the
centerline of the tread.
Rim: A metal support for a tire and upon which the tire
beads are seated.
Sidewall: The portion of a tire between the tread and
the bead.
Normal Occupant Weight: The number of occupants a
vehicle is designed to seat multiplied by 150 lbs (68 kg).
See Loading Your Vehicle on page 4-44.
Speed Rating: An alphanumeric code assigned to a
tire indicating the maximum speed at which a tire
can operate.
Occupant Distribution: Designated seating positions.
Traction: The friction between the tire and the road
surface. The amount of grip provided.
Outward Facing Sidewall: The side of an
asymmetrical tire that has a particular side that faces
outward when mounted on a vehicle. The side of the
tire that contains a whitewall, bears white lettering
or bears manufacturer, brand, and/or model name
molding that is higher or deeper than the same moldings
on the other sidewall of the tire.
Tread: The portion of a tire that comes into contact
with the road.
Treadwear Indicators: Narrow bands, sometimes
called “wear bars,” that show across the tread of a tire
when only 1/16 inch (1.6 mm) of tread remains. See
When It Is Time for New Tires on page 5-72.
Passenger (P-Metric) Tire: A tire used on passenger
cars and some light duty trucks and multipurpose
vehicles.
5-65
UTQGS (Uniform Tire Quality Grading Standards):
A tire information system that provides consumers
with ratings for a tire’s traction, temperature, and
treadwear. Ratings are determined by tire manufacturers
using government testing procedures. The ratings are
molded into the sidewall of the tire. See Uniform
Tire Quality Grading on page 5-73.
Vehicle Capacity Weight: The number of designated
seating positions multiplied by 150 lbs (68 kg) plus
the rated cargo load. See Loading Your Vehicle
on page 4-44.
Vehicle Maximum Load on the Tire: Load on an
individual tire due to curb weight, accessory weight,
occupant weight, and cargo weight.
Vehicle Placard: A label permanently attached to a
vehicle showing the vehicle’s capacity weight and
the original equipment tire size and recommended
inflation pressure. See “Tire and Loading Information
Label” under Loading Your Vehicle on page 4-44.
5-66
Inflation - Tire Pressure
Tires need the correct amount of air pressure to operate
effectively.
Notice: Do not let anyone tell you that
under-inflation or over-inflation is all right. It is not.
If your tires do not have enough air (under-inflation),
you can get the following:
•
•
•
•
•
•
Too much flexing
Too much heat
Tire overloading
Premature or irregular wear
Poor handling
Reduced fuel economy
If your tires have too much air (over-inflation), you
can get the following:
•
•
•
•
Unusual wear
Poor handling
Rough ride
Needless damage from road hazards
A Tire and Loading Information label is attached to the
vehicle’s center pillar (B-pillar), below the driver’s
door lock post (striker). This label lists your vehicle’s
original equipment tires and their recommended cold tire
inflation pressures. The recommended cold tire
inflation pressure, shown on the label, is the minimum
amount of air pressure needed to support your vehicle’s
maximum load carrying capacity.
For additional information regarding how much weight
your vehicle can carry, and an example of the tire
and loading information label, see Loading Your Vehicle
on page 4-44.
When to Check
Check your tires once a month or more. Do not forget
to check the spare tire. For additional information
regarding the spare tire, see Spare Tire on page 5-95.
How to Check
Use a good quality pocket-type gage to check tire
pressure. You cannot tell if your tires are properly
inflated simply by looking at them. Radial tires may look
properly inflated even when they’re underinflated.
Check the tire’s inflation pressure when the tires are
cold. Cold means your vehicle has been sitting for
at least three hours or driven no more than
1 mile (1.6 km).
Remove the valve cap from the tire valve stem. Press
the tire gage firmly onto the valve to get a pressure
measurement. If the cold tire inflation pressure matches
the recommended pressure on the Tire and Loading
Information label, no further adjustment is necessary.
If the inflation pressure is low, add air until you reach the
recommended amount.
If you overfill the tire, release air by pushing on the
metal stem in the center of the tire valve. Recheck the
tire pressure with the tire gage.
Be sure to put the valve caps back on the valve stems.
They help prevent leaks by keeping out dirt and
moisture.
5-67
Tire Pressure Monitor System
The Tire Pressure Monitor (TPM) system uses radio
and sensor technology to check tire pressure levels.
If your vehicle has this feature, sensors are mounted on
each tire and wheel assembly, except the spare tire.
The TPM sensors transmit tire pressure readings
to a receiver located in the vehicle.
When a low tire pressure condition is detected, the
TPM system will display the CHECK TIRE PRESSURE
warning message on the Driver Information Center
(DIC); and at the same time illuminate the low tire
pressure warning symbol. For additional information and
details about the DIC operation and displays see DIC
Operation and Displays on page 3-47 and DIC Warnings
and Messages on page 3-50.
When the tire pressure
monitoring system warning
light is lit, one or more
of your tires is significantly
under-inflated.
You should stop and check your tires as soon as
possible, and inflate them to the proper pressure as
indicated on the vehicle’s tire information placard.
5-68
Driving on a significantly under-inflated tire causes
the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure.
Under-inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread
life, and may affect the vehicle’s handling and stopping
ability. Each tire, including the spare, should be
checked monthly when cold and set to the
recommended inflation pressure as specified in the
vehicle placard and owner’s manual.
The Tire and Loading Information label (tire information
placard) shows the size of your vehicle’s original
tires and the correct inflation pressure for your vehicle’s
tires when they are cold. See Inflation - Tire Pressure
on page 5-66. For the location of the tire and loading
information label, see Loading Your Vehicle on
page 4-44.
Your vehicle’s TPM system can alert you about a low
tire pressure condition but it does not replace normal tire
maintenance. See Tire Inspection and Rotation on
page 5-70 and Tires on page 5-60.
Notice: Do not use a tire sealant if your vehicle is
equipped with Tire Pressure Monitors. The liquid
sealant can damage the tire pressure monitor
sensors.
TPM Sensor Identification Codes
Each TPM sensor has a unique identification code.
Any time you rotate your vehicle’s tires or replace one
or more of the TPM sensors, the identification codes
will need to be matched to the new tire/wheel position.
Each tire/wheel position is matched to a sensor, by
increasing or decreasing the tire’s air pressure.
The sensors are matched to the tire/wheel positions in
the following order: left front (LF), right front (RF),
right rear (RR) and left rear (LR).
You will have one minute to match the first tire/wheel
position, and five minutes overall to match all four
tire/wheel positions. If it takes longer than one minute,
to match the first tire and wheel, or more than five
minutes to match all four tire and wheel positions the
matching process stops and you will need to start over.
The TPM sensor matching process is outlined below:
1. Set the Parking brake.
2. Turn the ignition switch to RUN with the engine off.
3. Turn the exterior lamp switch from “Off” to “On”
four times within 3 seconds. A double horn
chirp will sound and the TPM low tire warning
light will begin to flash. The double horn chirp
and flashing TPM warning light indicate that
the TPM matching process has started.
The TPM warning light should continue flashing
throughout the matching procedure. The SERVICE
TIRE MONITOR message will be displayed on
the Driver Information Center (DIC).
4. Start with the left (driver’s side) front tire.
5. Remove the valve cap from the valve cap stem.
Activate the TPM sensor by increasing or
decreasing the tire’s air pressure for 10 seconds,
then stop and listen for a single horn chirp.
The single horn chirp should sound within
15 seconds, confirming that the sensor identification
code has been matched to this tire and wheel
position. If you do not hear the confirming single
horn chirp, you will need to start over with step
number one. To let air-pressure out of a tire you can
use the pointy end of the valve cap, a pencil-style
air pressure gage or a key.
6. Proceed to the right (passenger’s side) front tire,
and repeat the procedure in Step 5.
7. Proceed to the right (passenger’s side) rear tire,
and repeat the procedure in Step 5.
8. Proceed to the left (driver’s side) rear tire, and
repeat the procedure in Step 5.
5-69
9. After hearing the confirming horn chirp for the left
rear tire, check to see if the TPM warning light is
still flashing. If yes, turn the ignition switch to OFF.
10. Set all four tires to the recommended air pressure
level as indicated on the Tire and Loading
Information label.
11. Put the valve caps back on the valve stems
The spare tire does not have a TPM sensor. If you
replace one of the road tires with the spare, the CHECK
TIRE PRESSURE message will be displayed on the
DIC screen. This message should go off once you
re-install the road tire containing the TPM sensor. The
SERVICE TIRE MONITOR message is displayed
when the TPM system is malfunctioning. One or more
missing or inoperable TPM sensors will cause the
service tire monitor message to be displayed. See your
dealer for service.
Federal Communications Commission and
Industry and Science Canada
The TPM system operates on a radio frequency subject
to Federal Communications Commission (FCC) Rules
and with Industry and Science Canada.
5-70
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules
and with RSS-210 of Industry and Science Canada.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
(1) This device may not cause harmful interference,
and (2) this device must accept any interference
received including interference that may cause
undesired operation of the device.
Changes or modifications to this system by other than
an authorized service facility could void authorization to
use this equipment.
Tire Inspection and Rotation
Tires should be rotated every 5,000 to 8,000 miles
(8 000 to 13 000 km).
Any time you notice unusual wear, rotate your tires as
soon as possible and check wheel alignment. Also
check for damaged tires or wheels. See When It Is Time
for New Tires on page 5-72 and Wheel Replacement
on page 5-75 for more information.
Make sure the spare tire is stored securely. Push, pull,
and then try to rotate or turn the tire. If it moves,
use the ratchet/wheel wrench to tighten the cable. See
Changing a Flat Tire on page 5-78.
The purpose of regular rotation is to achieve more
uniform wear for all tires on the vehicle. The first rotation
is the most important. See Scheduled Maintenance
on page 6-4.
{CAUTION:
Rust or dirt on a wheel, or on the parts to
which it is fastened, can make wheel nuts
become loose after a time. The wheel could
come off and cause an accident. When you
change a wheel, remove any rust or dirt from
places where the wheel attaches to the vehicle.
In an emergency, you can use a cloth or a
paper towel to do this; but be sure to use a
scraper or wire brush later, if needed, to get all
the rust or dirt off. See Changing a Flat Tire
on page 5-78.
When rotating your tires, always use the correct rotation
pattern shown here.
Do not include the spare tire in your tire rotation.
After the tires have been rotated, adjust the front and
rear inflation pressures as shown on the tire and loading
information label. See Loading Your Vehicle on
page 4-44 and Inflation - Tire Pressure on page 5-66,
for more information. Make certain that all wheel
nuts are properly tightened. See “Wheel Nut Torque”
under Capacities and Specifications on page 5-115.
5-71
When It Is Time for New Tires
One way to tell when it’s
time for new tires is to
check the treadwear
indicators, which will
appear when your tires
have only 1/16 inch
(1.6 mm) or less of tread
remaining. Some
commercial truck tires may
not have treadwear
indicators.
You need a new tire if any of the following statements
are true:
• You can see the indicators at three or more places
around the tire.
• You can see cord or fabric showing through the
tire’s rubber.
• The tread or sidewall is cracked, cut or snagged
deep enough to show cord or fabric.
• The tire has a bump, bulge or split.
• The tire has a puncture, cut or other damage that
can’t be repaired well because of the size or
location of the damage.
5-72
Buying New Tires
To find out what kind and size of tires you need, look
at the Certification/Tire label or the Tire and Loading
Information label. See Loading Your Vehicle on
page 4-44 for more information about these labels and
where they can be found on your vehicle.
The tires installed on your vehicle when it was new
had a Tire Performance Criteria Specifications (TPC
Spec) number on each tire’s sidewall. When you
get new tires, GM recommends that you get tires with
that same TPC Spec number. That way your vehicle will
continue to have tires that are designed to give proper
endurance, handling, speed rating, load range, traction,
ride, tire pressure monitoring system performance
and other things during normal service on your vehicle.
If your tires have an all-season tread design, the
TPC number will be followed by an “MS” (for mud
and snow).
Whenever you replace your tires with those not having
a TPC Spec number, make sure they are the same
size, load range, speed rating and construction
type (bias, bias-belted or radial) as your original tires.
If you replace your vehicle’s tires with those not having a
TPC Spec number, the tire pressure monitoring
system may give an inaccurate low pressure warning.
Non-TPC Spec tires may give a low pressure warning
that is higher or lower than the proper warning level you
would get with TPC Spec numbered tires.
{CAUTION:
{CAUTION:
Mixing tires could cause you to lose control
while driving. If you mix tires of different sizes
or types (radial and bias-belted tires), the
vehicle may not handle properly, and you
could have a crash. Using tires of different
sizes may also cause damage to your vehicle.
Be sure to use the same size and type tires on
all wheels.
If you use bias-ply tires on your vehicle, the
wheel rim flanges could develop cracks after
many miles of driving. A tire and/or wheel
could fail suddenly, causing a crash. Use only
radial-ply tires with the wheels on your vehicle.
Your vehicle may be equipped with a different
size spare than the road tires (those originally
installed on your vehicle). When new, your
vehicle included a spare tire and wheel
assembly with a similar overall diameter as
your vehicle’s road tires and wheels, so it is all
right to drive on it. Because this spare was
developed for use on your vehicle, it will not
affect vehicle handling.
Uniform Tire Quality Grading
Quality grades can be found where applicable on the
tire sidewall between tread shoulder and maximum
section width. For example:
Treadwear 200 Traction AA Temperature A
The following information relates to the system
developed by the United States National Highway
Traffic Safety Administration, which grades tires by
treadwear, traction and temperature performance.
(This applies only to vehicles sold in the United States.)
The grades are molded on the sidewalls of most
passenger car tires. The Uniform Tire Quality Grading
system does not apply to deep tread, winter-type
snow tires, space-saver or temporary use spare tires,
tires with nominal rim diameters of 10 to 12 inches
(25 to 30 cm), or to some limited-production tires.
5-73
While the tires available on General Motors passenger
cars and light trucks may vary with respect to these
grades, they must also conform to federal safety
requirements and additional General Motors Tire
Performance Criteria (TPC) standards.
Treadwear
The treadwear grade is a comparative rating based on
the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled
conditions on a specified government test course.
For example, a tire graded 150 would wear one and
a half (1.5) times as well on the government course as
a tire graded 100. The relative performance of tires
depends upon the actual conditions of their use,
however, and may depart significantly from the norm
due to variations in driving habits, service practices and
differences in road characteristics and climate.
Traction – AA, A, B, C
The traction grades, from highest to lowest, are AA, A,
B, and C. Those grades represent the tire’s ability
to stop on wet pavement as measured under controlled
conditions on specified government test surfaces of
asphalt and concrete. A tire marked C may have poor
traction performance. Warning: The traction grade
assigned to this tire is based on straight-ahead braking
traction tests, and does not include acceleration,
cornering, hydroplaning, or peak traction characteristics.
5-74
Temperature – A, B, C
The temperature grades are A (the highest), B, and C,
representing the tire’s resistance to the generation
of heat and its ability to dissipate heat when tested
under controlled conditions on a specified indoor
laboratory test wheel. Sustained high temperature can
cause the material of the tire to degenerate and
reduce tire life, and excessive temperature can lead to
sudden tire failure. The grade C corresponds to a
level of performance which all passenger car tires must
meet under the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard
No. 109. Grades B and A represent higher levels of
performance on the laboratory test wheel than the
minimum required by law.
Warning: The temperature grade for this tire is
established for a tire that is properly inflated and not
overloaded. Excessive speed, underinflation, or
excessive loading, either separately or in combination,
can cause heat buildup and possible tire failure.
Wheel Alignment and Tire Balance
The wheels on your vehicle were aligned and balanced
carefully at the factory to give you the longest tire life
and best overall performance.
If you notice unusual tire wear or your vehicle pulling
one way or the other, the alignment may need to
be reset. If you notice your vehicle vibrating when driving
on a smooth road, your wheels may need to be
rebalanced.
Wheel Replacement
Replace any wheel that is bent, cracked, or badly
rusted or corroded. If wheel nuts keep coming loose,
the wheel, wheel bolts and wheel nuts should be
replaced. If the wheel leaks air, replace it (except some
aluminum wheels, which can sometimes be repaired).
See your dealer if any of these conditions exist.
Your dealer will know the kind of wheel you need.
Each new wheel should have the same load-carrying
capacity, diameter, width, offset and be mounted
the same way as the one it replaces.
If you need to replace any of your wheels, wheel
bolts or wheel nuts, replace them only with new
GM original equipment parts. This way, you will be
sure to have the right wheel, wheel bolts and wheel
nuts for your vehicle.
{CAUTION:
Using the wrong replacement wheels, wheel
bolts or wheel nuts on your vehicle can be
dangerous. It could affect the braking and
handling of your vehicle, make your tires lose
air and make you lose control. You could have
a collision in which you or others could be
injured. Always use the correct wheel, wheel
bolts and wheel nuts for replacement.
Notice: The wrong wheel can also cause problems
with bearing life, brake cooling, speedometer or
odometer calibration, headlamp aim, bumper height,
vehicle ground clearance and tire clearance to the
body and chassis.
See Changing a Flat Tire on page 5-78 for more
information.
5-75
Used Replacement Wheels
Tire Chains
{CAUTION:
{CAUTION:
Putting a used wheel on your vehicle is
dangerous. You can’t know how it’s been
used or how far it’s been driven. It could fail
suddenly and cause a crash. If you have to
replace a wheel, use a new GM original
equipment wheel.
Do not use tire chains. There is not enough
clearance. Tire chains used on a vehicle
without the proper amount of clearance can
cause damage to the brakes, suspension or
other vehicle parts. The area damaged by the
tire chains could cause you to lose control of
your vehicle and you or others may be injured
in a crash. Use another type of traction device
only if its manufacturer recommends it for use
on your vehicle and tire size combination and
road conditions. Follow that manufacturer’s
instructions. To help avoid damage to your
vehicle, drive slowly, re-adjust or remove the
device if it is contacting your vehicle, and do
not spin your wheels. If you do find traction
devices that will fit, install them on the
rear tires.
5-76
If a Tire Goes Flat
It’s unusual for a tire to “blowout” while you’re driving,
especially if you maintain your tires properly. If air goes
out of a tire, it’s much more likely to leak out slowly.
But if you should ever have a “blowout,” here are a
few tips about what to expect and what to do:
If a front tire fails, the flat tire will create a drag that
pulls the vehicle toward that side. Take your foot off the
accelerator pedal and grip the steering wheel firmly.
Steer to maintain lane position, and then gently brake to
a stop well out of the traffic lane.
A rear blowout, particularly on a curve, acts much like a
skid and may require the same correction you’d use
in a skid. In any rear blowout, remove your foot from the
accelerator pedal. Get the vehicle under control by
steering the way you want the vehicle to go. It may be
very bumpy and noisy, but you can still steer. Gently
brake to a stop, well off the road if possible.
{CAUTION:
Lifting a vehicle and getting under it to do
maintenance or repairs is dangerous without
the appropriate safety equipment and training.
The jack provided with your vehicle is
designed only for changing a flat tire. If it is
used for anything else, you or others could be
badly injured or killed if the vehicle slips off
the jack. Use the jack provided with your
vehicle only for changing a flat tire.
If a tire goes flat, the next part shows how to use your
jacking equipment to change a flat tire safely.
5-77
Changing a Flat Tire
If a tire goes flat, avoid further tire and wheel damage
by driving slowly to a level place. Turn on your
hazard warning flashers.
When you have a flat tire, use the following example
as a guide to assist you in the placement of wheel
blocks.
{CAUTION:
Changing a tire can be dangerous. The vehicle
can slip off the jack and roll over or fall on you
or other people. You and they could be badly
injured or even killed. Find a level place to
change your tire. To help prevent the vehicle
from moving:
1. Set the parking brake firmly.
2. Put the shift lever in PARK (P).
3. Turn off the engine and do not restart
while the vehicle is raised.
4. Do not allow passengers to remain in
the vehicle.
To be even more certain the vehicle will not
move, you should put blocks at the front and
rear of the tire farthest away from the one
being changed. That would be the tire, on the
other side, at the opposite end of the vehicle.
5-78
The following information will tell you next how to use
the jack and change a tire.
Removing the Spare Tire and Tools
The jack and wheel blocks are located under a cover
near the passenger side rear seat.
To remove the jack and wheel blocks, do the following:
Rear Seat (Passenger’s Side) Jack Cover
1. Remove the jack cover by turning the two wing nuts
one-quarter turn counterclockwise and pulling the
jack cover off.
A.
B.
C.
D.
Wheel Blocks
Knob
Wing Nut
Retaining Hook
E. Jack
F. Jack Head
G. Mounting Bracket
2. Release the jack (E) from the mounting bracket (G)
by turning the knob (B) on the jack counterclockwise
to lower the jack head (F) from the mounting
bracket.
5-79
3. Remove the wheel blocks (A) attached to the
jack (E) by turning the wing nut (C)
counterclockwise.
4. Place the wheel blocks where needed as indicated
in Changing a Flat Tire on page 5-78.
The tools for changing a flat tire are located in the
passenger’s side top-box storage unit.
To remove the tools, do the following:
1. Open the top door on the passenger’s side top-box
storage box. Use the ignition/door key to unlock it if
it is locked. See Top-Box Storage on page 2-68
for more information on the top-box storage unit.
Top-box Storage (Passenger’s Side)
2. Remove the black pouch from the top-box.
You now have all of the tools you will need to lower
the spare tire and change a flat.
You’ll use the jack handle extensions and the wheel
wrench to remove the underbody-mounted spare tire.
5-80
To lower the spare tire, do the following:
1. Open the spare tire lock cover on the bumper and
use the ignition key to remove the lock if your
vehicle is equipped with a hoist lock (J).
2. Assemble the wheel wrench (H) and the two jack
handle extensions (I) as shown.
A. Spare Tire (Valve
Stem Pointed Down)
B. Hoist Assembly
C. Hoist Cable
D. Tire Retainer
E. Hoist Shaft
F. Hoist End of
Extension Tool
G. Hoist Shaft
Access Hole
H. Wheel Wrench
I. Jack Handle
Extensions
J. Hoist Lock
(If Equipped)
5-81
3. Insert the hoist end
(open end) (F) of the
extension through
the hole (G) in the rear
bumper.
Be sure the hoist end of the extension connects to
the hoist shaft (E). The ribbed square end of the
extension is used to lower the spare tire.
4. Turn the wheel wrench (H) counterclockwise to
lower the spare tire to the ground. Continue to
turn the wheel wrench until the spare tire can be
pulled out from under the vehicle.
If the spare tire does not lower to the ground,
the secondary latch is engaged causing the tire
not to lower. See Secondary Latch System
on page 5-88.
5-82
5. Pull the spare tire
towards you. The
wheel wrench has a
hook that allows you
to pull the hoist
cable towards you to
assist in reaching
the spare tire.
6. Tilt the retainer (D) at
the end of the cable
when the tire has been
lowered, so it can
be pulled up through
the wheel opening.
7. Put the spare tire near the flat tire.
Removing the Flat Tire and
Installing the Spare Tire
Use the following pictures and instructions to remove
the flat tire and raise the vehicle.
1. Remove the center cap by placing the chisel end
of the wheel wrench in the slot on the wheel and
gently prying the cap out.
The tools you’ll be using include the jack (A), the wheel
blocks (B), the jack handle (C), the jack handle
extensions (D), and the wheel wrench (E).
5-83
Jack Positions (Overall View)
2. Use the wheel wrench to loosen all the wheel nuts.
Turn the wheel wrench counterclockwise to loosen
the wheel nuts.
Don’t remove the wheel nuts yet.
3. Refer to the above graphic. These locations, (A)
front position and (B) rear position, are the general
area of jack placement. See the following text
and art for the exact jack placement.
{CAUTION:
Getting under a vehicle when it is jacked up
is dangerous. If the vehicle slips off the jack
you could be badly injured or killed. Never
get under a vehicle when it is supported only
by a jack.
5-84
{CAUTION:
Raising your vehicle with the jack improperly
positioned can damage the vehicle and even
make the vehicle fall. To help avoid personal
injury and vehicle damage, be sure to fit the
jack lift head into the proper location before
raising the vehicle.
4. Position the jack under the vehicle.
Front Tire Flat: If the flat tire is on a front tire of
the vehicle, you’ll need to use the jack handle (C)
and only one jack handle extension (D). Attach
the wheel wrench to the jack handle extension.
Attach the jack handle to the jack. Position the jack
on the frame behind the flat tire where the frame
sections overlap.
Rear Tire Flat: If the flat
tire is on a rear tire of the
vehicle, you’ll need to
use the jack handle (C)
and both jack handle
extensions (D). Attach the
wheel wrench to the
jack handle extensions.
Attach the jack handle to
the jack. Use the
jacking pad provided on
the rear axle.
Rear Position
5. Turn the wheel wrench clockwise to raise the
vehicle. Raise the vehicle far enough off the ground
so there is enough room for the spare tire to
clear the ground.
Front Position
5-85
7. Remove any rust or dirt
from the wheel bolts,
mounting surfaces
and spare wheel.
6. Remove all the wheel
nuts and take off the
flat tire.
8. Put the spare tire on the mounting surface.
{CAUTION:
Rust or dirt on the wheel, or on the parts to
which it is fastened, can make the wheel nuts
become loose after a time. The wheel could
come off and cause an accident. When you
change a wheel, remove any rust or dirt from
the places where the wheel attaches to the
vehicle. In an emergency, you can use a cloth
or a paper towel to do this; but be sure to use
a scraper or wire brush later, if you need to,
to get all the rust or dirt off.
5-86
{CAUTION:
Never use oil or grease on studs or nuts.
If you do, the nuts might come loose.
Your wheel could fall off, causing a serious
accident.
9. Put the wheel nuts
back on with the
rounded end of the
nuts toward the wheel
after mounting the
spare. Tighten each
wheel nut by hand.
Then use the wheel
wrench to tighten
the wheel nuts until the
wheel is held against
the hub.
10. Turn the wheel wrench counterclockwise to lower
the vehicle. Lower the jack completely.
{CAUTION:
Incorrect wheel nuts or improperly tightened
wheel nuts can cause the wheel to come loose
and even come off. This could lead to an
accident. Be sure to use the correct wheel
nuts. If you have to replace them, be sure to
get new GM original equipment wheel nuts.
Stop somewhere as soon as you can and have
the nuts tightened with a torque wrench to the
proper torque specification. See Capacities
and Specifications on page 5-115 for wheel nut
torque specification.
Notice: Improperly tightened wheel nuts can lead
to brake pulsation and rotor damage. To avoid
expensive brake repairs, evenly tighten the wheel
nuts in the proper sequence and to the proper
torque specification. See Capacities and
Specifications on page 5-115 for the wheel nut
torque specification.
5-87
11. Tighten the nuts
firmly in a crisscross
sequence as shown
by turning the
wheel wrench
clockwise.
Secondary Latch System
Your vehicle has an underbody-mounted tire hoist
assembly equipped with a secondary latch system.
It is designed to stop the spare tire from suddenly falling
off your vehicle. For the secondary latch to work, the
spare must be installed with the valve stem pointing
down. See Storing a Flat or Spare Tire and Tools
on page 5-92.
{CAUTION:
When you reinstall the regular wheel and tire, you must
also reinstall the center cap. Place the cap on the wheel
and tap it into place until it seats flush with the wheel.
The cap only goes on one way. Be sure to line up the tab
on the center cap with the indentation on the wheel.
Before beginning this procedure read all the
instructions. Failure to read and follow the
instructions could damage the hoist assembly
and you and others could get hurt. Read and
follow the instructions listed below.
To release the spare tire from the secondary latch,
do the following:
5-88
4. Repeat this procedure at least two times. If the
spare tire lowers to the ground, continue with
Step 5 of Removing the Spare Tire and Tools
on page 5-79.
5. If the spare does not lower, turn the
wrench counterclockwise until approximately
6 inches (15 cm) of cable is exposed.
6. Stand the wheel blocks on their shortest ends,
with the backs facing each other.
1. Check under the vehicle to see if the cable end
is visible.
If the cable is not visible proceed to Step 6.
7. Place the bottom edge
of the jack (A) on the
wheel blocks (B),
separating them so that
the jack is balanced
securely.
2. If it is visible, first try to tighten the cable by
turning the wheel wrench clockwise until you
hear two clicks or feel it skip twice. You cannot
overtighten the cable.
3. Loosen the cable by turning the wrench
counterclockwise three or four turns.
5-89
8. Attach the jack handle, extension, and wheel
wrench to the jack and place it (with the wheel
blocks) under the vehicle toward the front of the
rear bumper.
9. Position the center lift point of the jack under the
center of the spare tire.
10. Turn the wrench clockwise to raise the jack until it
lifts the end fitting.
11. Continue raising the jack until the spare tire stops
moving upward and is held firmly in place. The
secondary latch has released and the spare tire is
balancing on the jack.
12. Lower the jack by turning the wheel wrench
counterclockwise. Keep lowering the jack until the
spare tire slides off the jack or is hanging by
the cable.
5-90
{CAUTION:
Someone standing too close during the
procedure could be injured by the jack.
If the spare tire does not slide off the jack
completely, make sure no one is behind you
or on either side of you as you pull the jack
out from the spare.
13. Disconnect the jack handle from the jack and
carefully remove the jack. Use one hand to
push against the spare while firmly pulling the
jack out from under the spare tire with the
other hand.
If the spare tire is hanging from the cable, insert the
hoist handle, extension and wheel wrench into
the hoist shaft hole in the bumper and turn
the wheel wrench counterclockwise to lower the
spare the rest of the way.
14. Tilt the retainer (D) at
the end of the cable
and pull it through
the wheel opening.
Pull the tire out
from under the vehicle.
15. Turn the wheel wrench in the hoist shaft hole in the
bumper clockwise to raise the cable back up if the
cable is hanging under the vehicle.
Have the hoist assembly inspected as soon as you can.
You will not be able to store a spare or flat tire using
the hoist assembly until it has been replaced.
To continue changing the flat tire, see Removing the
Flat Tire and Installing the Spare Tire on page 5-83.
5-91
Storing a Flat or Spare Tire
and Tools
Store the tire under the rear of the vehicle in the spare
tire carrier. Use the art and text following to help you:
{CAUTION:
Storing a jack, a tire, or other equipment in the
passenger compartment of the vehicle could
cause injury. In a sudden stop or collision,
loose equipment could strike someone. Store
all these in the proper place.
Notice: Storing an aluminum wheel with a flat tire
under your vehicle for an extended period of time
or with the valve stem pointing up may damage the
wheel. Always stow the wheel with the valve stem
pointing down and have the wheel/tire repaired
as soon as possible.
A. Spare Tire (Valve
Stem Pointed Down)
B. Hoist Assembly
C. Hoist Cable
D. Tire Retainer
E. Hoist Shaft
F. Hoist End of
Extension Tool
5-92
G. Hoist Shaft
Access Hole
H. Wheel Wrench
I. Jack Handle
Extensions
J. Hoist Lock
(If Equipped)
1. Put the tire on the ground at the rear of the vehicle
with the valve stem pointed down and toward the
rear of the vehicle.
2. Tilt the retainer (D)
downward and through
the wheel opening.
Make sure the retainer
is fully seated across
the underside of
the wheel.
4. Insert the hoist end (F)
through the hole (G)
in the rear bumper and
into the hoist shaft.
5. Raise the tire partway upward. Make sure the
retainer is seated in the wheel opening.
6. Raise the tire fully against the underside of the
vehicle by turning the wheel wrench clockwise
until you hear two clicks or feel it skip twice.
The cable cannot be overtightened.
3. Attach the wheel wrench (H) and extensions (I)
together.
5-93
To store the jack and tools, do the following:
1. Return the tools to the tool bag and place it back in
the top-box storage area.
2. Assemble the wheel blocks and jack together with
the wing nut by reversing Step 2 under Removing
the Spare Tire and Tools on page 5-79.
7. Make sure the tire is stored securely. Push, pull (A),
and then try to turn (B) the tire. If the tire moves,
use the wheel wrench to tighten the cable. Reinstall
the spare tire lock (if equipped).
5-94
3. Replace the jack cover and tighten the jack-cover
wingnuts.
Spare Tire
Appearance Care
Your vehicle, when new, had a fully-inflated spare tire.
A spare tire may lose air over time, so check its
inflation pressure regularly. See Inflation - Tire Pressure
on page 5-66 and Loading Your Vehicle on page 4-44
for information regarding proper tire inflation and loading
your vehicle. For instruction on how to remove, install
or store a spare tire, see Removing the Flat Tire
and Installing the Spare Tire on page 5-83 and Storing
a Flat or Spare Tire and Tools on page 5-92.
Cleaning products can be hazardous. Some are toxic.
Other cleaning products can burst into flames if a match
is struck near them or if they get on a hot part of the
vehicle. Some are dangerous if their fumes are inhaled
in an enclosed space. When anything from a container
is used to clean the vehicle, be sure to follow the
manufacturer’s warnings and instructions. Always open
the doors or windows of the vehicle when cleaning
the inside.
After installing the spare tire on your vehicle, you should
stop as soon as possible and make sure the spare is
correctly inflated. Have the damaged or flat road
tire repaired or replaced as soon as you can and
installed back onto your vehicle. This way, a spare tire
will be available in case you need it again.
Never use these to clean the vehicle:
Your vehicle may have a different size spare tire than
the road tires, those originally installed on your vehicle.
This spare tire was developed for use on your vehicle,
so it is all right to drive on it.
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Gasoline
Benzene
Naphtha
Carbon Tetrachloride
Acetone
Paint Thinner
Turpentine
Lacquer Thinner
Nail Polish Remover
They can all be hazardous — some more than
others — and they can all damage the vehicle, too.
5-95
Do not use any of these products unless this manual
says you can. In many uses, these will damage
the vehicle:
•
•
•
•
Alcohol
Laundry Soap
Bleach
Reducing Agents
• Use a clean cloth or sponge, and change to a clean
area often. A soft brush may be used if stains are
stubborn.
• To avoid forming a ring on fabric after spot cleaning,
clean the entire area immediately or it will set.
Most stains can be removed with club soda water.
To clean, use the following instructions:
Fabric/Carpet
1. For liquids: blot with a clean, soft, white cloth.
For solids: remove as much as possible and
then vacuum or brush.
Use a vacuum cleaner often to get rid of dust and loose
dirt. Wipe vinyl, leather, plastic, and painted surfaces
with a clean, damp cloth.
2. Apply club soda water to a clean, soft, white
cloth. Do not over-saturate; the cloth should not
drip water.
GM-approved cleaning products can be obtained from
your dealer.
3. Clean the entire area. Avoid getting the fabric
too wet.
Here are some cleaning tips:
4. Start cleaning from the seams into the stain to
avoid a ring effect.
• Always read the instructions on the cleaner label.
• Clean up stains as soon as you can before they set.
• Carefully scrape off any excess stain.
5-96
5. Continue cleaning, using a clean area of the cloth
each time it becomes soiled.
6. When the stain is removed, blot the cleaned area
with another dry, clean, soft, white cloth.
Using Cleaner on Fabric
1. First, try the cleaner on an area of the fabric that is
not easily seen to make sure the cleaner does not
affect the color of the fabric.
2. For liquids: blot with a clean, soft, white cloth.
For solids: remove as much as possible and
then vacuum or brush.
3. Spray a small amount of the cleaner onto a clean
soft, white, cloth. Do not apply spray directly to the
fabric.
4. Start cleaning from the seams into the stain to
avoid a ring effect.
5. Continue cleaning, using a clean area of the cloth
each time it becomes soiled.
6. When the stain is removed, blot the cleaned area
with another dry, clean, soft, white cloth.
7. If the cleaner leaves a ring effect, follow up with the
club soda water instructions given earlier in this
section.
Special Fabric Cleaning Problems
Stains caused by such things as catsup, black coffee,
egg, fruit, fruit juice, milk, soft drinks, vomit, urine,
and blood can be removed using the club soda water
instructions given earlier in this section. If an odor lingers
after cleaning vomit or urine, treat the area with a
water and baking soda solution: 1 teaspoon (5 ml) of
baking soda to 1 cup (250 ml) of lukewarm water.
Let dry.
Stains caused by oil and grease can be cleaned with an
approved GM cleaner and a clean, white cloth.
1. Carefully scrape off excess stain.
2. Clean with cool water and allow to dry completely.
3. If a stain remains, follow the “Using Cleaner on
Fabric” instructions described earlier.
Vinyl
Use warm water and a clean cloth.
• Rub with a clean, damp cloth to remove dirt. This
may have to be done more than once.
• Things like tar, asphalt, and shoe polish will stain if
they are not removed quickly. Use a clean cloth
and vinyl cleaner. See your dealer for this product.
5-97
Leather
Wood Panels
Use a soft cloth with lukewarm water and a mild soap or
saddle soap and wipe dry with a soft cloth. Then, let
the leather dry naturally. Do not use heat to dry.
Use a clean cloth moistened in warm, soapy water
(use mild dish washing soap). Dry the wood immediately
with a clean cloth.
• For stubborn stains, use a leather cleaner.
• Never use oils, varnishes, solvent-based or abrasive
cleaners, furniture polish, or shoe polish on leather.
• Soiled or stained leather should be cleaned
immediately. If dirt is allowed to work into the finish,
it can harm the leather.
Speaker Covers
Vacuum around a speaker cover gently, so that the
speaker will not be damaged. Clean spots with
just water and mild soap.
Glass Surfaces
Instrument Panel
Use only mild soap and water to clean the top surfaces
of the instrument panel. Sprays containing silicones
or waxes may cause annoying reflections in the
windshield and even make it difficult to see through the
windshield under certain conditions.
Interior Plastic Components
Use only a mild soap and water solution on a soft cloth
or sponge. Commercial cleaners may affect the
surface finish.
5-98
Glass should be cleaned often. GM Glass Cleaner or a
liquid household glass cleaner will remove normal
tobacco smoke and dust films on interior glass. See
Vehicle Care/Appearance Materials on page 5-103.
Notice: If you use abrasive cleaners when cleaning
glass surfaces on your vehicle, you could scratch
the glass and/or cause damage to the rear window
defogger and the integrated radio antenna. When
cleaning the glass on your vehicle, use only a soft
cloth and glass cleaner.
Care of Safety Belts
Washing Your Vehicle
Keep belts clean and dry.
The paint finish on the vehicle provides beauty, depth
of color, gloss retention, and durability.
{CAUTION:
Do not bleach or dye safety belts. If you do,
it may severely weaken them. In a crash,
they might not be able to provide adequate
protection. Clean safety belts only with mild
soap and lukewarm water.
Weatherstrips
Silicone grease on weatherstrips will make them last
longer, seal better, and not stick or squeak. Apply
silicone grease with a clean cloth. During very cold,
damp weather frequent application may be required.
See Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 6-12.
The best way to preserve the vehicle’s finish is to
keep it clean by washing it often with lukewarm or
cold water.
Do not wash the vehicle in the direct rays of the sun.
Use a car washing soap. Do not use strong soaps
or chemical detergents. Be sure to rinse the vehicle well,
removing all soap residue completely. GM-approved
cleaning products can be obtained from your dealer.
See Vehicle Care/Appearance Materials on page 5-103.
Do not use cleaning agents that are petroleum based,
or that contain acid or abrasives. All cleaning agents
should be flushed promptly and not allowed to dry on the
surface, or they could stain. Dry the finish with a soft,
clean chamois or an all-cotton towel to avoid surface
scratches and water spotting.
High pressure car washes may cause water to enter
the vehicle.
5-99
Cleaning Exterior Lamps/Lenses
Use only lukewarm or cold water, a soft cloth and a
car washing soap to clean exterior lamps and lenses.
Follow instructions under Washing Your Vehicle
on page 5-99.
Finish Care
Occasional waxing or mild polishing of your vehicle by
hand may be necessary to remove residue from the
paint finish. You can get GM-approved cleaning products
from your dealer. See Vehicle Care/Appearance
Materials on page 5-103.
If your vehicle has a “basecoat/clearcoat” paint finish.
The clearcoat gives more depth and gloss to the colored
basecoat. Always use waxes and polishes that are
non-abrasive and made for a basecoat/clearcoat
paint finish.
Notice: Machine compounding or aggressive
polishing on a basecoat/clearcoat paint finish may
damage it. Use only non-abrasive waxes and
polishes that are made for a basecoat/clearcoat
paint finish on your vehicle.
5-100
Foreign materials such as calcium chloride and other
salts, ice melting agents, road oil and tar, tree sap, bird
droppings, chemicals from industrial chimneys, etc.,
can damage your vehicle’s finish if they remain
on painted surfaces. Wash the vehicle as soon as
possible. If necessary, use non-abrasive cleaners that
are marked safe for painted surfaces to remove
foreign matter.
Exterior painted surfaces are subject to aging, weather
and chemical fallout that can take their toll over a
period of years. You can help to keep the paint finish
looking new by keeping your vehicle garaged or covered
whenever possible.
Protecting Exterior Bright Metal Parts
Bright metal parts should be cleaned regularly to keep
their luster. Washing with water is all that is usually
needed. However, you may use chrome polish on
chrome or stainless steel trim, if necessary.
Use special care with aluminum trim. To avoid damaging
protective trim, never use auto or chrome polish,
steam or caustic soap to clean aluminum. A coating of
wax, rubbed to high polish, is recommended for all
bright metal parts.
Windshield and Wiper Blades
If the windshield is not clear after using the windshield
washer, or if the wiper blade chatters when running,
wax, sap, or other material may be on the blade
or windshield.
Clean the outside of the windshield with a glass
cleaning liquid or powder and water solution. The
windshield is clean if beads do not form when it is
rinsed with water.
Grime from the windshield will stick to the wiper blades
and affect their performance. Clean the blade by
wiping vigorously with a cloth soaked in full-strength
windshield washer solvent. Then rinse the blade
with water.
Check the wiper blades and clean them as necessary;
replace blades that look worn.
Aluminum Wheels
Notice: If you use strong soaps, chemicals,
abrasive polishes, cleaners, brushes, or cleaners
that contain acid on aluminum or chrome-plated
wheels, you could damage the surface of the
wheel(s). The repairs would not be covered by
your warranty. Use only GM-approved cleaners on
aluminum or chrome-plated wheels.
Keep the wheels clean using a soft clean cloth with mild
soap and water. Rinse with clean water. After rinsing
thoroughly, dry with a soft clean towel. A wax may then
be applied.
Notice: Using chrome polish on aluminum wheels
could damage the wheels. The repairs would not
be covered by your warranty. Use chrome polish on
chrome wheels only.
The surface of these wheels is similar to the painted
surface of the vehicle. Do not use strong soaps,
chemicals, abrasive polishes, abrasive cleaners,
cleaners with acid, or abrasive cleaning brushes on
them because the surface could be damaged. Do not
use chrome polish on aluminum wheels.
Notice: If you drive your vehicle through an
automatic car wash that has silicone carbide tire
cleaning brushes, you could damage the aluminum
or chrome-plated wheels. The repairs would not
be covered by your warranty. Never drive a vehicle
equipped with aluminum or chrome-plated wheels
through an automatic car wash that uses silicone
carbide tire cleaning brushes.
Do not take the vehicle through an automatic car wash
that has silicone carbide tire cleaning brushes. These
brushes can also damage the surface of these wheels.
5-101
Tires
Underbody Maintenance
To clean the tires, use a stiff brush with tire cleaner.
Chemicals used for ice and snow removal and dust
control can collect on the underbody. If these are not
removed, corrosion and rust can develop on the
underbody parts such as fuel lines, frame, floor pan,
and exhaust system even though they have corrosion
protection.
Notice: Using petroleum-based tire dressing
products on your vehicle may damage the paint
finish and/or tires. When applying a tire dressing,
always wipe off any overspray from all painted
surfaces on your vehicle.
Sheet Metal Damage
If the vehicle is damaged and requires sheet metal
repair or replacement, make sure the body repair shop
applies anti-corrosion material to parts repaired or
replaced to restore corrosion protection.
Original manufacturer replacement parts will provide the
corrosion protection while maintaining the warranty.
Finish Damage
Any stone chips, fractures or deep scratches in the
finish should be repaired right away. Bare metal
will corrode quickly and may develop into major repair
expense.
Minor chips and scratches can be repaired with touch-up
materials available from your GM dealer. Larger areas
of finish damage can be corrected in your GM
dealer’s body and paint shop.
5-102
At least every spring, flush these materials from the
underbody with plain water. Clean any areas where mud
and debris can collect. Dirt packed in close areas of
the frame should be loosened before being flushed.
Your GM dealer or an underbody car washing system
can do this for you.
Chemical Paint Spotting
Some weather and atmospheric conditions can create a
chemical fallout. Airborne pollutants can fall upon and
attack painted surfaces on the vehicle. This damage can
take two forms: blotchy, ring-shaped discolorations,
and small, irregular dark spots etched into the
paint surface.
Although no defect in the paint job causes this, GM will
repair, at no charge to the owner, the surfaces of
new vehicles damaged by this fallout condition within
12 months or 12,000 miles (20 000 km) of purchase,
whichever occurs first.
Vehicle Care/Appearance Materials
See your GM dealer for more information on purchasing
the following products.
Description
Description
Usage
Swirl Remover Polish
Removes swirl marks,
fine scratches, and
other light surface
contamination.
Usage
Polishing Cloth
Wax-Treated
Interior and exterior
polishing cloth.
Cleaner Wax
Removes light scratches
and protects finish.
Tar and Road Oil
Remover
Removes tar, road oil,
and asphalt.
Foaming Tire Shine
Low Gloss
Cleans, shines, and
protects in one step.
No wiping necessary.
Chrome Cleaner
and Polish
Use on chrome or
stainless steel.
White Sidewall
Tire Cleaner
Removes soil and black
marks from whitewalls.
Wash Wax Concentrate
Medium foaming
shampoo. Cleans and
lightly waxes.
Biodegradable and
phosphate free.
Vinyl Cleaner
Cleans vinyl tops,
upholstery, and
convertible tops.
Spot Lifter
Quickly removes spots
and stains from carpets,
vinyl, and cloth
upholstery.
Odor Eliminator
Odorless spray odor
eliminator used on fabrics,
vinyl, leather and carpet.
Glass Cleaner
Removes dirt, grime,
smoke and fingerprints.
Chrome and Wire
Wheel Cleaner
Removes dirt and grime
from chrome wheels and
wire wheel covers.
Finish Enhancer
Removes dust,
fingerprints, and surface
contaminants. Spray on
and wipe off.
See your General Motors parts department for these
products. See Recommended Fluids and Lubricants
on page 6-12.
5-103
Vehicle Identification
Engine Identification
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
The eighth character in your VIN is the engine code.
This code will help you identify your engine,
specifications and replacement parts.
Service Parts Identification Label
You will find this label on the inside of the glove box.
It is very helpful if you ever need to order parts.
On this label, you will find the following:
•
•
•
•
This is the legal identifier for your vehicle. It appears on
a plate in the front corner of the instrument panel, on
the driver’s side. You can see it if you look through the
windshield from outside your vehicle. The VIN also
appears on the Vehicle Certification and Service Parts
labels and the certificates of title and registration.
5-104
VIN
Model designation
Paint information
Production options and special equipment
Be sure that this label is not removed from the vehicle.
Electrical System
Add-On Electrical Equipment
Notice: Don’t add anything electrical to your
vehicle unless you check with your dealer first.
Some electrical equipment can damage your vehicle
and the damage wouldn’t be covered by your
warranty. Some add-on electrical equipment can
keep other components from working as they
should.
Your vehicle has an airbag system. Before attempting to
add anything electrical to your vehicle, see Servicing
Your Airbag-Equipped Vehicle on page 1-58.
Windshield Wiper Fuses
The windshield wiper motor is protected by an internal
circuit breaker and a fuse. If the motor overheats due to
heavy snow, etc., the wiper will stop until the motor
cools. If the overload is caused by some electrical
problem and not snow, etc., be sure to get it fixed.
Power Windows and Other Power
Options
Circuit breakers protect the power windows and other
power accessories. When the current load is too heavy,
the circuit breaker opens and closes, protecting the
circuit until the problem is fixed or goes away.
Fuses and Circuit Breakers
The wiring circuits in your vehicle are protected from
short circuits by a combination of fuses, circuit breakers
and fusible thermal links. This greatly reduces the
chance of fires caused by electrical problems.
Look at the silver-colored band inside the fuse. If the
band is broken or melted, replace the fuse. Be sure you
replace a bad fuse with a new one of the identical
size and rating.
If you ever have a problem on the road and don’t have
a spare fuse, you can borrow one that has the same
amperage. Just pick some feature of your vehicle
that you can get along without – like the radio or
cigarette lighter – and use its fuse, if it is the correct
amperage. Replace it as soon as you can.
5-105
Instrument Panel Fuse Block
The fuse block access
door is on the driver’s side
edge of the instrument
panel. Pull off the cover to
access the fuse block.
To remove fuses if you don’t have a fuse extractor, hold
the end of the fuse between your thumb and index
finger and pull straight out.
You may have spare fuses located behind the fuse
block access door. These can be used to replace a bad
fuse. However, make sure it is of the correct amperage.
5-106
Fuses
Usage
RR Wiper
Rear Window Wiper Switch
SEO ACCY
Special Equipment Option
Accessory
WS WPR
Windshield Wipers
TBC ACCY
Truck Body Controller
Accessory
IGN 3
Ignition, Heated Seats
Fuses
Usage
4WD
Four-Wheel Drive System
HTR A/C
Climate Control System
LOCK
Fuses
Usage
LT TRN
Left Turn Signals and
Sidemarkers
Power Door Lock Relay
(Lock Function)
VEH STOP
Vehicle Stoplamps, Brake
Module, Electronic Throttle
Control Module
HVAC 1
Inside Rearview Mirror,
Climate Control System
Body
Harness Connector
Driver’s Door Harness
Connection
RT TRLR ST/TRN
Right Turn Signal/Stop Trailer
L DOOR
RT TRN
CRUISE
Cruise Control
Right Turn Signals and
Sidemarkers
UNLOCK
Power Door Lock Relay
(Unlock Function)
RR FOG LP
Rear Fog Lamp (Export Only)
BRAKE
Anti-Lock Brake System
DRIVER UNLOCK
DDM
Driver Door Module
AUX PWR 2
Rear Cargo Area Power
Outlets
LOCKS
Power Door Lock System
Power Door Lock Relay
(Driver’s Door Unlock
Function)
ECC
Rear Electronic Climate
Control, Liftgate
TBC 2C
Truck Body Controller
PCM, TCM
FLASH
Flasher Module
TBC IGN 0
Truck Body Controller
CB LT DOORS
Left Power Window Circuit
Breaker
VEH CHMSL
Vehicle and Trailer High
Mounted Stoplamp
TBC 2B
Truck Body Controller
LT TRLR ST/TRN
Left Turn Signal/Stop Trailer
TBC 2A
Truck Body Controller
IGN 0
5-107
Center Instrument Panel Fuse Block
Device
The center instrument panel utility block is located
underneath the instrument panel, to the left of the
steering column.
SEO
Special Equipment
Option/Off-road Lamps
Harness Connector
TRAILER
Trailer Brake Wiring
UPFIT
Upfitter (Not Used)
SL RIDE
Ride Control (Not Used)
HDLR 2
Headliner Wiring Connector 2
BODY
Body Wiring Connector
DEFOG
Rear Defogger Relay
5-108
Usage
HDLNR 1
Headliner Wiring Connector 1
SPARE RELAY
Not Used
CB SEAT
Driver and Passenger Seat
Module Circuit Breaker
CB RT DOOR
Rear Right Power Window,
Passenger Door Module
SPARE
Not Used
INFO
Not Used
Underhood Fuse Block
The underhood fuse block is located in the engine
compartment on the driver’s side of the vehicle,
near the battery. Lift the cover for access to the
fuse/relay block.
To remove fuses, hold the end of the fuse between
your thumb and index finger and pull straight out.
See Engine Compartment Overview on page 5-12 for
more information on its location.
5-109
5-110
*1 — Gasoline Engine and Fuel Injection Rail #2.
Fuses
*2 — Gasoline Engine and Fuel Injection Rail #1.
ABS
Anti-Lock Brakes
VSES/ECAS
Vehicle Stability
IGN A
Ignition Power
IGN B
Ignition Power
LBEC 1
Left Bussed Electrical Center,
Left Doors, Truck Body
Controller, Flasher Module
TRL PARK
Parking Lamps Trailer Wiring
RR PARK
Right Rear Parking and
Sidemarker Lamps
*3 — Gasoline Engine; Oxygen Sensors.
*4 — Gasoline Engine; Oxygen Sensors.
*5 — PCM Ignition
Fuses
Usage
Usage
GLOW PLUG
Not Used
CUST FEED
Accessory Power
HYBRID
Hybrid
STUD #1
Auxiliary Power
MBEC
Mid Bussed Electrical Center
Power Feed, Front Seats,
Right Doors
LR PARK
Left Rear Parking and
Sidemarker Lamps
PARK LP
Parking Lamps Relay
BLOWER
Front Climate Control Fan
STRTR
Starter Relay
INTPARK
Interior Lamps
LBEC
Left Bussed Electrical
Center, Door Modules,
Door Locks, Auxiliary Power
Outlet — Rear Cargo Area
and Instrument Panel
STOP LP
Stoplamps
TBC BATT
Truck Body Controller
Battery Feed
S/ROOF
Sunroof
STUD 2
Accessory Power/Trailer
Wiring Brake Feed
5-111
Fuses
Usage
Fuses
Usage
SEO B2
Off-Road Lamps
PCM B
4WS
Vent Solenoid
Canister/QUADRASTEER™
Module Power
Powertrain Control Module,
Fuel Pump
F/PMP
Fuel Pump (Relay)
RR HVAC
Rear Climate Control
AUX PWR
O2A
Oxygen Sensors
Auxiliary Power
Outlet — Console
B/U LP
Back-up Lamps, Automatic
Transmission Shift Lock
Control System
IGN 1
Ignition Relay
RR DEFOG
Rear Window Defogger
PCM 1
Powertrain Control Module
HDLP-HI
Headlamp High Beam Relay
ETC/ECM
Electronic Throttle Control,
Electronic Brake Controller
PRIME
Not Used
O2B
Oxygen Sensors
INJ 1
Ignition Coil, Fuel
Injectors--Bank 1
AIRBAG
Supplemental Inflatable
Restraint System
INJ 2
Ignition Coil, Fuel
Injectors--Bank 2
FRT PARK
Front Parking Lamps,
Sidemarker Lamps
IGN E
Instrument Panel Cluster,
Air Conditioning Relay,
Turn Signal/Hazard Switch,
Starter Relay
DRL
Daytime Running Lamps
(Relay)
SEO IGN
Rear Defog Relay
RTD
Ride Control
TBC IGN1
Truck Body Controller Ignition
TRL B/U
Backup Lamps Trailer Wiring
HI HDLP-LT
High Beam Headlamp-Left
5-112
Fuses
Usage
Fuses
Usage
LH HID
Left Hand High Intensity
Discharge Lamps
BTSI
Brake Transmission Shift
Interlock System
DRL
Daytime Running Lamps
CRNK
Starting System
RVC
Regulated Voltage Control
LO HDLP-RT
Headlamp Low Beam-Right
FOG LP
Fog Lamp Relay
IPC/DIC
Instrument Panel
Cluster/Driver Information
Center
FOG LP
Fog Lamps
HVAC/ECAS
Climate Control Controller
HORN
Horn Relay
CIG LTR
Cigarette Lighter
W/S WASH
Windshield and Rear Window
Washer Pump Relay
HI HDLP-RT
High Beam Headlamp-Right
HDLP-LOW
Headlamp Low Beam Relay
W/S WASH
Windshield and Rear Window
Washer Pump
A/C COMP
Air Conditioning
Compressor Relay
INFO
OnStar®/Rear Seat
Entertainment
A/C COMP
Air Conditioning Compressor
RADIO AMP
Radio Amplifier
RR WPR
Rear Wiper/Washer
RH HID
RADIO
Audio System
Right Hand High Intensity
Discharge Lamp
HORN
Horn Fuse
SEO B1
Mid Bussed Electrical
Center, HomeLink,
Rear Heated Seats
EAP
Electric Adjustable Pedals
TREC
All-Wheel Drive Module
LO HDLP-LT
Headlamp Low Beam-Left
SBA
Supplemental Brake Assist
5-113
Auxiliary Electric Cooling Fan
Fuse Block
The auxiliary electric
cooling fan fuse block is
located in the engine
compartment on the
driver’s side of the vehicle
next to the underhood
fuse block.
5-114
Lift the cover for access to the fuse/relay block.
Fuses
Usage
COOL/FAN
Cooling Fan
COOL/FAN
Cooling Fan Relay Fuse
COOL/FAN
Cooling Fan Fuse
Relays
Usage
COOL/FAN 1
Cooling Fan Relay 1
COOL/FAN 3
Cooling Fan Relay 3
COOL/FAN 2
Cooling Fan Relay 2
Capacities and Specifications
The following approximate capacities are given in English and metric conversions. See Recommended Fluids and
Lubricants on page 6-12 for more information.
Capacities
Application
English
Metric
1.6 lbs
0.7 kg
Cooling System
Engine Driven Fan
Electric Engine Cooling Fan
16.0 quarts
16.7 quarts
15.1 L
15.8 L
Engine Oil with Filter
6.0 quarts
5.7 L
31.0 gallons
117.0 L
140 ft lb
190 Y
Air Conditioning Refrigerant R134a
Fuel Tank
Wheel Nut Torque
All capacities are approximate. When adding, be sure to fill to the approximate level, as recommended in this
manual. Recheck fluid level after filling.
Engine Specifications
Engine
VORTEC™ 6000 H.O. V8
VIN Code
Transmission
Spark Plug Gap
N
Automatic
0.040 inches (1.01 mm)
5-115
✍ NOTES
5-116
Section 6
Maintenance Schedule
Maintenance Schedule ......................................6-2
Introduction ...................................................6-2
Maintenance Requirements ..............................6-2
Your Vehicle and the Environment ....................6-2
Using Your Maintenance Schedule ....................6-3
Scheduled Maintenance ...................................6-4
Additional Required Services ............................6-6
Maintenance Footnotes ...................................6-7
Owner Checks and Services ............................6-9
At Each Fuel Fill ............................................6-9
At Least Once a Month ...................................6-9
At Least Once a Year ...................................6-10
Recommended Fluids and Lubricants ...............6-12
Normal Maintenance Replacement Parts ..........6-14
Maintenance Record .....................................6-15
6-1
Maintenance Schedule
Introduction
Important: Keep engine oil at the proper level and
change as recommended.
Maintenance Requirements
Notice: Maintenance intervals, checks, inspections,
replacement parts and recommended fluids and
lubricants as prescribed in this manual are
necessary to keep your vehicle in good working
condition. Any damage caused by failure to follow
scheduled maintenance may not be covered by
warranty.
Your Vehicle and the Environment
Have you purchased the GM Protection Plan?
The Plan supplements your new vehicle warranties.
See your Warranty and Owner Assistance booklet
or your dealer for details.
6-2
Proper vehicle maintenance not only helps to keep your
vehicle in good working condition, but also helps the
environment. All recommended maintenance is
important. Improper vehicle maintenance can even
affect the quality of the air we breathe. Improper fluid
levels or the wrong tire inflation can increase the level of
emissions from your vehicle. To help protect our
environment, and to keep your vehicle in good condition,
be sure to maintain your vehicle properly.
Using Your Maintenance Schedule
We at General Motors want to help you keep your
vehicle in good working condition. But we do not know
exactly how you will drive it. You may drive very
short distances only a few times a week. Or you may
drive long distances all the time in very hot, dusty
weather. You may use your vehicle in making deliveries.
Or you may drive it to work, to do errands or in many
other ways.
Because of all the different ways people use their
vehicles, maintenance needs vary. You may need more
frequent checks and replacements. So please read
the following and note how you drive. If you have any
questions on how to keep your vehicle in good condition,
see your GM Goodwrench® dealer.
This schedule is for vehicles that:
• carry passengers and cargo within recommended
limits. You will find these limits on the tire and
loading information label. See Loading Your Vehicle
on page 4-44.
• are driven on reasonable road surfaces within legal
driving limits.
• are driven off-road in the recommended manner.
See Operating Your All-Wheel-Drive Vehicle Off
Paved Roads on page 4-16.
• use the recommended fuel. See Gasoline Octane
on page 5-5.
The services in Scheduled Maintenance on page 6-4
should be performed when indicated. See Additional
Required Services on page 6-6 and Maintenance
Footnotes on page 6-7 for further information.
{CAUTION:
Performing maintenance work on a vehicle
can be dangerous. In trying to do some jobs,
you can be seriously injured. Do your own
maintenance work only if you have the
required know-how and the proper tools and
equipment for the job. If you have any doubt,
see your GM Goodwrench® dealer to have a
qualified technician do the work.
Some maintenance services can be complex. So,
unless you are technically qualified and have the
necessary equipment, you should have your GM
Goodwrench® dealer do these jobs.
When you go to your GM Goodwrench® dealer for your
service needs, you will know that GM-trained and
supported service technicians will perform the work
using genuine GM parts.
If you want to purchase service information, see Service
Publications Ordering Information on page 7-12.
6-3
Owner Checks and Services on page 6-9 tells you what
should be checked, when to check it and what you
can easily do to help keep your vehicle in good
condition.
The proper replacement parts, fluids and lubricants to
use are listed in Recommended Fluids and Lubricants
on page 6-12 and Normal Maintenance Replacement
Parts on page 6-14. When your vehicle is serviced,
make sure these are used. All parts should be replaced
and all necessary repairs done before you or anyone
else drives the vehicle. We recommend the use of
genuine GM parts.
Scheduled Maintenance
When the CHANGE ENGINE OIL message comes on,
it means that service is required for your vehicle.
Have your vehicle serviced as soon as possible within
the next 600 miles (1 000 km). It is possible that, if
you are driving under the best conditions, the engine
oil life system may not indicate that vehicle service
is necessary for over a year. However, your engine oil
and filter must be changed at least once a year and
at this time the system must be reset. Your GM
Goodwrench® dealer has GM-trained service technicians
who will perform this work using genuine GM parts
and reset the system.
6-4
If the engine oil life system is ever reset accidentally,
you must service your vehicle within 3,000 miles
(5 000 km) since your last service. Remember to reset
the oil life system whenever the oil is changed. See
Engine Oil Life System on page 5-16 for information on
the Engine Oil Life System and resetting the system.
When the CHANGE ENGINE OIL message appears,
certain services, checks and inspections are required.
Required services are described in the following for
“Maintenance I” and “Maintenance II.” Generally,
it is recommended that your first service be
Maintenance I, your second service be Maintenance II
and that you alternate Maintenance I and Maintenance II
thereafter. However, in some cases, Maintenance II
may be required more often.
Maintenance I — Use Maintenance I if the CHANGE
ENGINE OIL message comes on within 10 months since
the vehicle was purchased or Maintenance II was
performed.
Maintenance II — Use Maintenance II if the previous
service performed was Maintenance I. Always use
Maintenance II whenever the message comes on
10 months or more since the last service or if the
message has not come on at all for one year.
Scheduled Maintenance
Service
Change engine oil and filter. See Engine Oil on page 5-13. Reset oil life
system. See Engine Oil Life System on page 5-16. An Emission Control
Service.
Maintenance I
Maintenance II
•
•
Lubricate chassis components. See footnote #.
•
•
Visually check for any leaks or damage. See footnote (j).
•
•
Inspect engine air cleaner filter or change indicator (if equipped).
If necessary, replace filter. See Engine Air Cleaner/Filter on page 5-18.
An Emission Control Service. See footnotes † and (k).
•
Rotate tires and check inflation pressures and wear. See Tires on page 5-60.
•
•
Inspect brake system. See footnote (a).
•
•
Check engine coolant and windshield washer fluid levels and add fluid
as needed.
•
•
Perform any needed additional services. See “Additional Required Services”
in this section.
•
•
Inspect suspension and steering components. See footnote (b).
•
Inspect engine cooling system. See footnote (c).
•
Inspect wiper blades. See footnote (d).
•
Inspect restraint system components. See footnote (e).
•
Lubricate body components. See footnote (f).
•
Check transmission fluid level and add fluid as needed.
•
6-5
Additional Required Services
The following services should be performed at the first maintenance service (I or II) after the indicated miles (kilometers)
shown for each item.
Additional Required Services
25,000
(41 500)
50,000
(83 000)
75,000
(125 000)
100,000
(166 000)
125,000
(207 500)
150,000
(240 000)
Inspect fuel system for damage
or leaks.
•
•
•
•
•
•
Inspect exhaust system for loose
or damaged components.
•
•
•
•
•
•
Service and Miles (Kilometers)
Vehicles without a filter restriction
indicator: Replace engine air cleaner
filter. See Engine Air Cleaner/Filter
on page 5-18. An Emission
Control Service.
•
•
•
Change automatic transmission
fluid and filter (severe service).
See footnote (h).
•
•
•
Change automatic transmission
fluid and filter (normal service).
Inspect evaporative control system.
An Emission Control Service.
See footnotes † and (g).
6-6
•
•
•
•
Additional Required Services (cont’d)
Service and Miles (Kilometers)
25,000
(41 500)
Replace spark plugs and inspect
spark plug wires. An Emission
Control Service.
50,000
(83 000)
75,000
(125 000)
100,000
(166 000)
125,000
(207 500)
150,000
(240 000)
•
Engine cooling system service
(or every 5 years, whichever occurs
first). An Emission Control Service.
See footnote (i).
•
Inspect engine accessory drive belt.
An Emission Control Service.
•
Maintenance Footnotes
† The U.S. Environmental Protection Agency or the
California Air Resources Board has determined that the
failure to perform this maintenance item will not nullify
the emission warranty or limit recall liability prior to
the completion of the vehicle’s useful life. We, however,
urge that all recommended maintenance services be
performed at the indicated intervals and the
maintenance be recorded.
# Lubricate the front suspension, ball joints, steering
linkage, transmission shift linkage and parking
brake cable guides. Ball joints should not be lubricated
unless their temperature is 10°F (-12°C) or higher,
or they could be damaged.
(a) Visually inspect brake lines and hoses for proper
hook-up, binding, leaks, cracks, chafing, etc. Inspect
disc brake pads for wear and rotors for surface
condition. Inspect other brake parts, including calipers,
parking brake, etc.
6-7
(b) Visually inspect front and rear suspension and
steering system for damaged, loose or missing parts,
signs of wear or lack of lubrication. Inspect power
steering lines and hoses for proper hook-up, binding,
leaks, cracks, chafing, etc. Visually check constant
velocity joints, rubber boots and axle seals for leaks.
(c) Visually inspect hoses and have them replaced if they
are cracked, swollen or deteriorated. Inspect all pipes,
fittings and clamps; replace with genuine GM parts as
needed. To help ensure proper operation, a pressure test
of the cooling system and pressure cap and cleaning the
outside of the radiator and air conditioning condenser is
recommended at least once a year.
(d) Visually inspect wiper blades for wear or cracking.
Replace blade inserts that appear worn or damaged
or that streak or miss areas of the windshield.
(e) Make sure the safety belt reminder light and all your
belts, buckles, latch plates, retractors and anchorages
are working properly. Look for any other loose or
damaged safety belt system parts. If you see anything
that might keep a safety belt system from doing its
job, have it repaired. Have any torn or frayed safety belts
replaced. Also look for any opened or broken airbag
coverings, and have them repaired or replaced.
(The airbag system does not need regular maintenance.)
6-8
(f) Lubricate all key lock cylinders, hood latch assembly,
secondary latch, pivots, spring anchor, release pawl, rear
compartment hinges, outer tailgate handle pivot points,
latch bolt, fuel door hinge and folding seat hardware.
More frequent lubrication may be required when exposed
to a corrosive environment. Applying silicone grease on
weatherstrips with a clean cloth will make them last
longer, seal better and not stick or squeak.
(g) Inspect system. Check all fuel and vapor lines and
hoses for proper hook-up, routing and condition. Check
that the purge valve works properly (if equipped).
Replace as needed.
(h) Change automatic transmission fluid and filter if the
vehicle is mainly driven under one or more of these
conditions:
− In heavy city traffic where the outside temperature
regularly reaches 90°F (32°C) or higher.
− In hilly or mountainous terrain.
− When doing frequent trailer towing.
− Uses such as found in taxi, police or delivery
service.
(i) Drain, flush and refill cooling system. This service can
be complex; you should have your dealer perform this
service. See Engine Coolant on page 5-23 for what to
use. Inspect hoses. Clean radiator, condenser, pressure
cap and filler neck. Pressure test the cooling system and
pressure cap.
(j) A fluid loss in any vehicle system could indicate a
problem. Have the system inspected and repaired and
the fluid level checked. Add fluid if needed.
(k) If you drive regularly under dusty conditions, inspect
the filter at each engine oil change.
Owner Checks and Services
These owner checks and services should be performed
at the intervals specified to help ensure the safety,
dependability and emission control performance of your
vehicle. Your GM Goodwrench® dealer can assist
you with these checks and services.
Be sure any necessary repairs are completed at once.
Whenever any fluids or lubricants are added to your
vehicle, make sure they are the proper ones, as shown
in Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 6-12.
At Each Fuel Fill
It is important to perform these underhood checks
at each fuel fill.
Engine Oil Level Check
Notice: It is important to check your oil regularly
and keep it at the proper level. Failure to keep your
engine oil at the proper level can cause damage
to your engine not covered by your warranty.
Engine Coolant Level Check
Check the engine coolant level and add
DEX-COOL® coolant mixture if necessary.
See Engine Coolant on page 5-23 for further details.
Windshield Washer Fluid Level Check
Check the windshield washer fluid level in the windshield
washer tank and add the proper fluid if necessary.
At Least Once a Month
Tire Inflation Check
Visually inspect your tires and make sure tires are
inflated to the correct pressures. Do not forget to check
your spare tire. See Tires on page 5-60 for further
details. Check to make sure the spare tire is stored
securely. Push, pull and then try to turn the spare tire.
If it moves, tighten it. See Changing a Flat Tire
on page 5-78.
Check the engine oil level and add the proper oil if
necessary. See Engine Oil on page 5-13 for further
details.
6-9
At Least Once a Year
Starter Switch Check
{CAUTION:
When you are doing this inspection, the
vehicle could move suddenly. If the vehicle
moves, you or others could be injured.
1. Before you start, be sure you have enough room
around the vehicle.
2. Firmly apply both the parking brake and the regular
brake. See Parking Brake on page 2-34 if
necessary.
Do not use the accelerator pedal, and be ready to
turn off the engine immediately if it starts.
3. Try to start the engine in each gear. The starter
should work only in PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N).
If the starter works in any other position, contact
your GM Goodwrench® dealer for service.
6-10
Automatic Transmission Shift Lock
Control System Check
{CAUTION:
When you are doing this inspection, the
vehicle could move suddenly. If the vehicle
moves, you or others could be injured.
1. Before you start, be sure you have enough room
around the vehicle. It should be parked on a level
surface.
2. Firmly apply the parking brake. See Parking Brake
on page 2-34 if necessary.
Be ready to apply the regular brake immediately if
the vehicle begins to move.
3. With the engine off, turn the ignition to RUN, but do
not start the engine. Without applying the regular
brake, try to move the shift lever out of PARK (P)
with normal effort. If the shift lever moves out
of PARK (P), contact your GM Goodwrench® dealer
for service.
Ignition Transmission Lock Check
While parked, and with the parking brake set, try to
turn the ignition to LOCK in each shift lever position.
• The ignition should turn to LOCK only when the shift
lever is in PARK (P).
• The key should come out only in LOCK.
Contact your GM Goodwrench® dealer if service is
required.
Parking Brake and Automatic
Transmission Park (P) Mechanism Check
{CAUTION:
When you are doing this check, your vehicle
could begin to move. You or others could be
injured and property could be damaged. Make
sure there is room in front of your vehicle in
case it begins to roll. Be ready to apply the
regular brake at once should the vehicle begin
to move.
Park on a fairly steep hill, with the vehicle facing
downhill. Keeping your foot on the regular brake,
set the parking brake.
• To check the parking brake’s holding ability:
With the engine running and transmission in
NEUTRAL (N), slowly remove foot pressure from
the regular brake pedal. Do this until the vehicle
is held by the parking brake only.
• To check the PARK (P) mechanism’s holding
ability: With the engine running, shift to PARK (P).
Then release the parking brake followed by the
regular brake.
Contact your GM Goodwrench® dealer if service is
required.
Underbody Flushing Service
At least every spring, use plain water to flush any
corrosive materials from the underbody. Take care to
clean thoroughly any areas where mud and other
debris can collect.
6-11
Recommended Fluids and
Lubricants
Fluids and lubricants identified below by name, part
number or specification may be obtained from your
dealer.
Usage
Engine Oil
Engine oil which meets GM
Standard GM6094M and
displays the American Petroleum
Institute Certified for Gasoline
Engines starburst symbol.
GM Goodwrench® oil meets all
the requirements for your vehicle.
To determine the proper viscosity
for your vehicle’s engine, see
Engine Oil on page 5-13.
Hydraulic Brake Delco Supreme 11 Brake Fluid or
System
equivalent DOT-3 brake fluid.
Fluid/Lubricant
Windshield
®
Washer Solvent.
Washer Solvent GM Optikleen
Power Steering Fluid
Power Steering GM
(GM Part No. U.S. 89021184,
System
in Canada 89021186).
Fluid/Lubricant
50/50 mixture of clean,
water and use only
Engine Coolant drinkable
DEX-COOL® Coolant.
See Engine Coolant on page 5-23.
6-12
Usage
Automatic
Transmission
DEXRON®-III Automatic
Transmission Fluid. Look for
“Approved for the H-Specification”
on the label.
Key Lock
Cylinders
Multi-Purpose Lubricant, Superlube
(GM Part No. U.S. 12346241, in
Canada 10953474).
Chassis
Lubrication
Chassis Lubricant
(GM Part No. U.S. 12377985, in
Canada 88901242) or lubricant
meeting requirements of NLGI #2,
Category LB or GC-LB.
Front and
Rear Axle
SAE 75W-90 Synthetic Axle
Lubricant (GM Part No. U.S.
12378261, in Canada 10953455)
meeting GM Specification 9986115.
Usage
Fluid/Lubricant
®
Usage
Fluid/Lubricant
Transfer Case
DEXRON -III Automatic
Transmission Fluid. Look for
“Approved for the H-Specification”
on the label.
Outer Tailgate
Handle Pivot
Points
Front Axle
Propshaft
Spline
Spline Lubricant, Special Lubricant
(GM Part No. U.S. 12345879, in
Canada 10953511) or lubricant
meeting requirements of GM
9985830.
Weatherstrip
Conditioning
Dielectric Silicone Grease
(GM Part No. U.S. 12345579, in
Canada 992887).
Weatherstrip
Squeaks
Synthetic Grease with Teflon,
Superlube (GM Part No. U.S.
12371287, in Canada 10953437).
Hood Hinges
Multi-Purpose Lubricant, Superlube
(GM Part No. U.S. 12346241, in
Canada 10953474).
Multi-Purpose Lubricant, Superlube
(GM Part No. U.S. 12346241, in
Canada 10953474).
6-13
Normal Maintenance Replacement Parts
Replacement parts listed below by name, part number or specification can be obtained from your GM dealer.
GM Part Number
ACDelco® Part Number
Engine Air Cleaner/Filter
25313349
A1518C
Oil Filter
88984215
PF46
Spark Plugs
12571164
41-985
Windshield Wiper Blades
22.0 inches (56.0 cm)
15153642
—
Part
6-14
Maintenance Record
After the scheduled services are performed, record the date, odometer reading, who performed the service and the
type of services performed in the boxes provided. See Maintenance Requirements on page 6-2 in this section.
Any additional information from Owner Checks and Services on page 6-9 can be added on the following record
pages. Also, you should retain all maintenance receipts.
Maintenance Record
Date
Odometer
Reading
Serviced By
Maintenance I or
Maintenance II
Services Performed
6-15
Maintenance Record (cont’d)
Date
6-16
Odometer
Reading
Serviced By
Maintenance I or
Maintenance II
Services Performed
Maintenance Record (cont’d)
Date
Odometer
Reading
Serviced By
Maintenance I or
Maintenance II
Services Performed
6-17
Maintenance Record (cont’d)
Date
6-18
Odometer
Reading
Serviced By
Maintenance I or
Maintenance II
Services Performed
Section 7
Customer Assistance and Information
Customer Assistance and Information ...............7-2
Customer Satisfaction Procedure ......................7-2
Online Owner Center ......................................7-4
Customer Assistance for Text
Telephone (TTY) Users ................................7-4
Customer Assistance Offices ............................7-4
GM Mobility Reimbursement Program ................7-6
Roadside Service ...........................................7-6
Courtesy Transportation ...................................7-8
Vehicle Data Collection and Event
Data Recorders .........................................7-10
Reporting Safety Defects ................................7-11
Reporting Safety Defects to the
United States Government ..........................7-11
Reporting Safety Defects to the
Canadian Government ................................7-12
Reporting Safety Defects to
General Motors .........................................7-12
Service Publications Ordering Information .........7-12
7-1
Customer Assistance and
Information
Customer Satisfaction Procedure
Your satisfaction and goodwill are important to
your dealer and to Cadillac. Normally, any concerns
with the sales transaction or the operation of your
vehicle will be resolved by your dealer’s sales or service
departments. Sometimes, however, despite the best
intentions of all concerned, misunderstandings can
occur. If your concern has not been resolved to your
satisfaction, the following steps should be taken:
STEP ONE: Discuss your concern with a member of
dealership management. Normally, concerns can
be quickly resolved at that level. If the matter has
already been reviewed with the sales, service or parts
manager, contact the owner of the dealership or
the general manager.
7-2
STEP TWO: If after contacting a member of dealership
management, it appears your concern cannot be
resolved by the dealership without further help, contact
the Cadillac Customer Assistance Center, 24 hours
a day, by calling 1-800-458-8006. In Canada, contact
the Canadian Cadillac Customer Communication Centre
by calling 1-888-446–2000.
We encourage you to call the toll-free number in order
to give your inquiry prompt attention. Please have
the following information available to give the Customer
Assistance Representative:
• Vehicle Identification Number (VIN). This is
available from the vehicle registration or title, or
the plate at the top left of the instrument panel
and visible through the windshield.
• Dealership name and location.
• Vehicle delivery date and present mileage.
When contacting Cadillac, please remember that
your concern will likely be resolved at a dealer’s facility.
That is why we suggest you follow Step One first if
you have a concern.
STEP THREE: Both General Motors and your dealer
are committed to making sure you are completely
satisfied with your new vehicle. However, if you continue
to remain unsatisfied after following the procedure
outlined in Steps One and Two, you should file with the
BBB Auto Line Program to enforce any additional
rights you may have. Canadian owners refer to your
Warranty and Owner Assistance Information booklet for
information on the Canadian Motor Vehicle Arbitration
Plan (CAMVAP).
The BBB Auto Line Program is an out of court program
administered by the Council of Better Business
Bureaus to settle automotive disputes regarding vehicle
repairs or the interpretation of the New Vehicle
Limited Warranty. Although you may be required to
resort to this informal dispute resolution program prior
to filing a court action, use of the program is free of
charge and your case will generally be heard within
40 days. If you do not agree with the decision given in
your case, you may reject it and proceed with any other
venue for relief available to you.
You may contact the BBB Auto Line Program using
the toll-free telephone number or write them at the
following address:
BBB Auto Line Program
Council of Better Business Bureaus, Inc.
4200 Wilson Boulevard
Suite 800
Arlington, VA 22203-1838
Telephone: 1-800-955-5100
This program is available in all 50 states and the
District of Columbia. Eligibility is limited by vehicle age,
mileage and other factors. General Motors reserves
the right to change eligibility limitations and/or
discontinue its participation in this program.
7-3
Online Owner Center
The Owner Center is a resource for your GM ownership
needs. Specific vehicle information can be found in
one place.
The Online Owner Center allows you to:
• Get e-mail service reminders.
• Access information about your specific vehicle,
including tips and videos and an electronic
version of this owner’s manual (United States only).
• Keep track of your vehicle’s service history and
maintenance schedule.
• Find GM dealers for service nationwide.
• Receive special promotions and privileges only
available to members (United States only).
Refer to the web for updated information.
To register your vehicle, visit www.MyGMLink.com
(United States) or My GM Canada within
www.gmcanada.com (Canada).
7-4
Customer Assistance for Text
Telephone (TTY) Users
To assist customers who are deaf, hard of hearing, or
speech-impaired and who use Text Telephones (TTYs),
Cadillac has TTY equipment available at its Customer
Assistance Center. Any TTY user can communicate
with Cadillac by dialing: 1-800-833-CMCC (2622).
(TTY users in Canada can dial 1-800-263-3830.)
Customer Assistance Offices
Cadillac encourages customers to call the toll-free
number for assistance. If a U.S. customer wishes to
write to Cadillac, the letter should be addressed
to Cadillac’s Customer Assistance Center.
United States — Customer Assistance
Cadillac Customer Assistance Center
Cadillac Motor Car Division
P.O. Box 33169
Detroit, MI 48232-5169
1-800-458-8006
1-800-833-2622 (For Text Telephone devices (TTYs))
Roadside Assistance: 1-800-882-1112
Fax Number: 313-381-0022
From Puerto Rico:
1-800-496-9992 (English)
1-800-496-9993 (Spanish)
Fax Number: 313-381-0022
From U.S. Virgin Islands:
1-800-496-9994
Fax Number: 313-381-0022
Overseas — Customer Assistance
Please contact the local General Motors Business Unit.
Mexico, Central America and
Caribbean Islands/Countries
(Except Puerto Rico and U.S. Virgin
Islands) — Customer Assistance
General Motors de Mexico, S. de R.L. de C.V.
Customer Assistance Center
Paseo de la Reforma # 2740
Col. Lomas de Bezares
C.P. 11910, Mexico, D.F.
01-800-508-0000
Long Distance: 011-52-53 29 0 800
Canada — Customer Assistance
General Motors of Canada Limited
Canadian Cadillac Customer Communication
Centre, 163-005
1908 Colonel Sam Drive
Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7
1-888-446-2000
1-800-263-3830 (For Text Telephone devices (TTYs))
Roadside Assistance: 1-800-882-1112
7-5
GM Mobility Reimbursement
Program
This program, available to qualified applicants, can
reimburse you up to $1,000 toward eligible aftermarket
driver’s or passenger’s adaptive equipment you may
require for your vehicle, such as hand controls and
wheelchair/scooter lifts.
The offer is available for a limited period of time from
the date of vehicle purchase/lease. For more details,
or to determine your vehicle’s eligibility, visit
gmmobility.com or call the GM Mobility Assistance
Center at 1-800-323-9935. Text telephone (TTY)
users, call 1-800-833-9935.
GM of Canada also has a Mobility Program.
Call 1-800-GM-DRIVE (463-7483) for details.
TTY users call 1-800-263-3830.
7-6
Roadside Service
Cadillac’s exceptional Roadside Service is more than an
auto club or towing service. It provides every Cadillac
owner with the advantage of contacting a Cadillac
advisor and, where available, a Cadillac trained dealer
technician who can provide on-site service.
Each technician travels with a specially equipped
service vehicle complete with the necessary Cadillac
parts and tools required to handle most roadside repairs.
Cadillac Roadside Service® can be reached by dialing
1-800-882-1112, 24 hours a day, 365 days a year.
This service is provided at no charge for any
warranty-covered situation and for a nominal charge
if the Cadillac is no longer under warranty. Roadside
Service is available only in the United States and
Canada.
Cadillac Owner Privileges™
Roadside Service Availability
Roadside Service provides several Cadillac
Owner Privileges™ at “no charge,” throughout your
Cadillac Warranty Period — 48 months/50,000 miles
(80 000 km).
Wherever you drive in the United States or Canada,
an advisor is available to assist you over the phone.
A dealer technician, if available, can travel to your
location within a 30 mile (50 km) radius of a participating
Cadillac dealership. If beyond this radius, we will
arrange to have your car towed to the nearest Cadillac
dealership.
Emergency Road Service is performed on site for the
following situations:
•
•
•
•
•
•
Towing Service
Battery Jump Starting
Lock Out Assistance
Fuel Delivery
Flat Tire Change (Covers change only)
Trip Interruption — If your trip is interrupted due
to a warranty failure, incidental expenses may
be reimbursed during the 48 months/50,000 miles
(80 000 km) warranty period. Items covered
are hotel, meals, and rental car.
Reaching Roadside Service
Dial the toll-free Roadside Service number:
1-800-882-1112. A Roadside Service Advisor will
assist you and request the following information:
• A description of the problem
• Name, home address, home telephone number
• Location of your Cadillac and number you are
calling from
• The model year, Vehicle Identification
Number (VIN), mileage, and date of delivery
7-7
Roadside Service for the Hearing or
Speech Impaired
Roadside Service is prepared to assist owners who
have hearing difficulties or are speech impaired.
Cadillac has installed special telecommunication
devices called Text Telephone (TTY) in the Roadside
Service Center.
Any customer who has access to a (TTY) or a
conventional teletypewriter can communicate with
Cadillac by dialing from the United States or Canada
1-888-889-2438 — daily, 24 hours.
Courtesy Transportation
Cadillac has always exemplified quality and value in its
offering of motor vehicles. To enhance your ownership
experience, we and our participating dealers are
proud to offer Courtesy Transportation, a customer
support program for new vehicles.
The Courtesy Transportation program is offered to
retail purchase/lease customers in conjunction with
the Bumper-to-Bumper coverage provided by the
New Vehicle Limited Warranty. Several transportation
options are available when warranty repairs are
required. This will reduce your inconvenience during
warranty repairs.
7-8
Scheduling Service Appointments
When your vehicle requires warranty service, you
should contact your dealer and request an appointment.
By scheduling a service appointment and advising
your service consultant of your transportation needs,
your dealer can help minimize your inconvenience.
If your vehicle cannot be scheduled into the service
department immediately, keep driving it until it can be
scheduled for service, unless, of course, the problem is
safety-related. If it is, please call your dealership, let
them know this, and ask for instructions.
If the dealer requests that you simply drop the vehicle
off for service, you are urged to do so as early in
the work day as possible to allow for same day repair.
Transportation Options
Warranty service can generally be completed while
you wait. However, if you are unable to wait Cadillac
helps minimize your inconvenience by providing several
transportation options. Depending on the circumstances,
your dealer can offer you one of the following:
Shuttle Service
Participating dealers can provide you with shuttle
service to get you to your destination with minimal
interruption of your daily schedule. This includes a
one way or round trip shuttle service to a destination
up to 10 miles from the dealership.
Public Transportation or Fuel
Reimbursement
If your vehicle requires overnight warranty repairs,
reimbursement of up to a five-day maximum may be
available for the use of public transportation such as a
taxi or bus. In addition, should you arrange transportation
through a friend or relative, reimbursement for
reasonable fuel expenses of up to a five-day maximum
may be available. Claim amounts should reflect actual
costs and be supported by original receipts.
Courtesy Rental Vehicle
Your GM dealer may arrange to provide you with a
courtesy rental vehicle or reimburse you for a rental
vehicle that you obtain if your vehicle is kept for a
warranty repair. Reimbursement will be limited to a
maximum of $40 a day and must be supported by
receipts. This requires that you sign and complete a
rental agreement and meet state, local and rental vehicle
provider requirements. Requirements vary and may
include minimum age requirements, insurance coverage,
credit card, etc. You are responsible for fuel usage
charges and may also be responsible for taxes, levies,
usage fees, excessive mileage, or rental usage beyond
the completion of the repair.
Generally it is not possible to provide a like-vehicle as
a courtesy rental.
Additional Program Information
Courtesy Transportation is available during the
Bumper-to-Bumper warranty coverage period, but it is not
part of the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. A separate
booklet entitled Warranty and Owner Assistance
Information furnished with each new vehicle provides
detailed warranty coverage information.
Courtesy Transportation is available only at participating
dealers and all program options, such as shuttle
service, may not be available at every dealer. Please
contact your dealer for specific information about
availability. All Courtesy Transportation arrangements
will be administered by appropriate dealer personnel.
Canadian Vehicles: For warranty repairs during
the Complete Vehicle Coverage period of the General
Motors of Canada New Vehicle Limited Warranty,
alternative transportation may be available under the
Courtesy Transportation Program. Please consult
your dealer for details.
7-9
General Motors reserves the right to unilaterally modify,
change or discontinue Courtesy Transportation at
any time and to resolve all questions of claim eligibility
pursuant to the terms and conditions described
herein at its sole discretion.
Vehicle Data Collection and Event
Data Recorders
Your vehicle, like other modern motor vehicles,
has a number of sophisticated computer systems that
monitor and control several aspects of the vehicle’s
performance. Your vehicle uses on-board vehicle
computers to monitor emission control components
to optimize fuel economy, to monitor conditions
for airbag deployment and, if so equipped, to
provide anti-lock braking and to help the driver
control the vehicle in difficult driving situations.
Some information may be stored during regular
operations to facilitate repair of detected malfunctions;
other information is stored only in a crash event by
computer systems, such as those commonly called
event data recorders (EDR).
7-10
In a crash event, computer systems, such as the Airbag
Sensing and Diagnostic Module (SDM) in your vehicle
may record information about the condition of the vehicle
and how it was operated, such as data related to
engine speed, brake application, throttle position, vehicle
speed, safety belt usage, airbag readiness, airbag
performance, and the severity of a collision. If your
vehicle is equipped with StabiliTrak®, steering
performance, including yaw rate, steering wheel angle,
and lateral acceleration, is also recorded. This
information has been used to improve vehicle crash
performance and may be used to improve crash
performance of future vehicles and driving safety. Unlike
the data recorders on many airplanes, these on-board
systems do not record sounds, such as conversation of
vehicle occupants.
To read this information, special equipment is needed
and access to the vehicle or the device that stores
the data is required. GM will not access information
about a crash event or share it with others other than:
• with the consent of the vehicle owner or, if the
vehicle is leased, with the consent of the lessee,
• in response to an official request of police or similar
government office,
• as part of GM’s defense of litigation through the
discovery process, or
• as required by law.
In addition, once GM collects or receives data, GM may:
• use the data for GM research needs,
• make it available for research where appropriate
confidentiality is to be maintained and need is
shown, or
• share summary data which is not tied to a specific
vehicle with non-GM organizations for research
purposes.
Others, such as law enforcement, may have access to
the special equipment that can read the information
if they have access to the vehicle or the device
that stores the data.
If your vehicle is equipped with OnStar®, please
check the OnStar® subscription service agreement
or manual for information on its operations and
data collection.
Reporting Safety Defects
Reporting Safety Defects to the
United States Government
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which could
cause a crash or could cause injury or death, you
should immediately inform the National Highway Traffic
Safety Administration (NHTSA), in addition to notifying
General Motors.
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an
investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists in
a group of vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy
campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved in
individual problems between you, your dealer, or
General Motors.
To contact NHTSA, you may either call the
Auto Safety Hotline toll-free at 1-800-424-9393
(or 366-0123 in the Washington, D.C. area)
or write to:
NHTSA, U.S. Department of Transportation
Washington, D.C. 20590
You can also obtain other information about motor
vehicle safety from the hotline.
7-11
Reporting Safety Defects to the
Canadian Government
If you live in Canada, and you believe that your
vehicle has a safety defect, you should immediately
notify Transport Canada, in addition to notifying
General Motors of Canada Limited. You may write to:
Transport Canada
330 Sparks Street
Tower C
Ottawa, Ontario K1A 0N5
In Canada, please call us at 1-888- 446-2000. Or, write:
Canadian Cadillac Customer Communication
Centre, 163-005
General Motors of Canada Limited
1908 Colonel Sam Drive
Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7
Service Publications Ordering
Information
Service Manuals
Reporting Safety Defects to
General Motors
Service Manuals have the diagnosis and repair
information on engines, transmission, axle suspension,
brakes, electrical, steering, body, etc.
In addition to notifying NHTSA (or Transport Canada)
in a situation like this, we certainly hope you will
notify us. Please call us at 1-800-458-8006, or write:
Transmission, Transaxle, Transfer
Case Unit Repair Manual
Cadillac Customer Assistance Center
Cadillac Motor Car Division
P.O. Box 33169
Detroit, MI 48232-5169
7-12
This manual provides information on unit repair service
procedures, adjustments, and specifications for GM
transmissions, transaxles, and transfer cases.
Service Bulletins
Current and Past Model Order Forms
Service Bulletins give technical service information
needed to knowledgeably service General Motors cars
and trucks. Each bulletin contains instructions to
assist in the diagnosis and service of your vehicle.
Service Publications are available for current and
past model GM vehicles. To request an order form,
please specify year and model name of the vehicle.
In Canada, information pertaining to Product Service
Bulletins can be obtained by contacting your General
Motors dealer or by calling 1-800-GM-DRIVE
(1-800-463-7483).
Owner’s Information
Owner publications are written specifically for owners
and intended to provide basic operational information
about the vehicle. The owner’s manual will include
the Maintenance Schedule for all models.
In-Portfolio: Includes a Portfolio, Owner’s Manual,
and Warranty Booklet.
RETAIL SELL PRICE: $35.00
Without Portfolio: Owner’s Manual only.
RETAIL SELL PRICE: $25.00
ORDER TOLL FREE: 1-800-551-4123
Monday-Friday 8:00 AM - 6:00 PM
Eastern Time
For Credit Card Orders Only
(VISA-MasterCard-Discover), visit Helm, Inc.
on the World Wide Web at: www.helminc.com
Or you can write to:
Helm, Incorporated
P.O. Box 07130
Detroit, MI 48207
Prices are subject to change without notice and without
incurring obligation. Allow ample time for delivery.
Note to Canadian Customers: All listed prices are
quoted in U.S. funds. Canadian residents are to make
checks payable in U.S. funds.
7-13
✍ NOTES
7-14
A
Accessory Power Outlets ................................. 3-22
Adding Equipment to Your Airbag-Equipped
Vehicle ....................................................... 1-58
Additives, Fuel ................................................. 5-6
Add-On Electrical Equipment ........................... 5-105
Adjustable Throttle and Brake Pedal .................. 2-29
Air Cleaner/Filter, Engine ................................. 5-18
Air Conditioning .............................................. 3-23
Airbag
Passenger Status Indicator ........................... 3-33
Readiness Light .......................................... 3-32
Airbag Sensing and Diagnostic Module (SDM) .... 7-10
Airbag System ................................................ 1-46
Adding Equipment to Your Airbag-Equipped
Vehicle ................................................... 1-58
How Does an Airbag Restrain? ...................... 1-52
Passenger Sensing System ........................... 1-54
Servicing Your Airbag-Equipped Vehicle .......... 1-58
What Makes an Airbag Inflate? ...................... 1-52
What Will You See After an Airbag Inflates? .... 1-53
When Should an Airbag Inflate? .................... 1-51
Where Are the Airbags? ............................... 1-48
All-Wheel Drive ............................................... 5-45
All-Wheel Drive (AWD) System ......................... 2-34
Analog Clock .................................................. 3-23
Antenna, Fixed Mast ....................................... 3-99
Antenna, XM™ Satellite Radio Antenna
System ...................................................... 3-99
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) ........................... 4-6
Anti-Lock Brake, System Warning Light .............. 3-37
Appearance Care ............................................ 5-95
Aluminum Wheels ...................................... 5-101
Care of Safety Belts .................................... 5-99
Chemical Paint Spotting .............................. 5-102
Cleaning Exterior Lamps/Lenses .................. 5-100
Fabric/Carpet .............................................. 5-96
Finish Care ............................................... 5-100
Finish Damage .......................................... 5-102
Glass Surfaces ............................................ 5-98
Instrument Panel ......................................... 5-98
Interior Plastic Components ........................... 5-98
Leather ...................................................... 5-98
Sheet Metal Damage .................................. 5-102
Speaker Covers .......................................... 5-98
Tires ........................................................ 5-102
Underbody Maintenance ............................. 5-102
Vehicle Care/Appearance Materials ............... 5-103
Vinyl .......................................................... 5-97
Washing Your Vehicle ................................... 5-99
Weatherstrips .............................................. 5-99
Windshield and Wiper Blades ...................... 5-101
Wood Panels .............................................. 5-98
Ashtrays ........................................................ 3-22
Audio System(s) ............................................. 3-66
Audio Steering Wheel Controls ...................... 3-96
Care of Your Cassette Tape Player ................ 3-97
Care of Your CD and DVD Player .................. 3-99
Care of Your CD Player ............................... 3-98
1
Audio System(s) (cont.)
Care of Your CDs and DVDs ........................
CD Changer ...............................................
Chime Level Adjustment ...............................
Fixed Mast Antenna .....................................
Navigation/Radio System ..............................
Radio with Cassette and CD .........................
Rear Seat Audio (RSA) ................................
Setting the Time ..........................................
Theft-Deterrent Feature ................................
Understanding Radio Reception .....................
XM™ Satellite Radio Antenna System ............
Automatic Headlamp System ............................
Automatic Transmission
Fluid ..........................................................
Operation ...................................................
3-98
3-92
3-99
3-99
3-90
3-67
3-91
3-66
3-95
3-97
3-99
3-15
5-20
2-31
B
Battery .......................................................... 5-40
Run-Down Protection ................................... 3-19
Before Leaving on a Long Trip ......................... 4-35
Brake
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) ........................ 4-6
Emergencies ................................................ 4-8
Parking ...................................................... 2-34
System Warning Light .................................. 3-35
Brake Pedal, Throttle ....................................... 2-29
Brakes .......................................................... 5-37
2
Braking ........................................................... 4-5
Braking in Emergencies ..................................... 4-8
Break-In, New Vehicle ..................................... 2-27
Bulb Replacement ........................................... 5-52
Front Turn Signal, Sidemarker and Daytime
Running Lamps ........................................ 5-56
Halogen Bulbs ............................................ 5-52
Headlamp Aiming ........................................ 5-48
Headlamps ................................................. 5-53
High Intensity Discharge (HID) Lighting ........... 5-52
Replacement Bulbs ...................................... 5-58
Taillamps .................................................... 5-57
Buying New Tires ........................................... 5-72
C
California Fuel .................................................. 5-6
Canadian Owners ................................................ ii
Capacities and Specifications .......................... 5-115
Carbon Monoxide ........... 2-13, 2-21, 2-37, 4-38, 4-51
Care of
Safety Belts ................................................ 5-99
Your Cassette Tape Player ............................ 3-97
Your CD and DVD Player ............................. 3-99
Your CD Player ........................................... 3-98
Your CDs and DVDs .................................... 3-98
Cargo Area, All-Weather .................................. 2-63
Cargo Cover Panels ........................................ 2-52
CD Changer ................................................... 3-92
Center Console Storage Area ........................... 2-50
Chains, Tire ................................................... 5-76
Charging System Light .................................... 3-34
Check
Engine Light ............................................... 3-40
Checking Things Under the Hood ...................... 5-10
Chemical Paint Spotting ................................. 5-102
Child Restraints
Child Restraint Systems ............................... 1-31
Infants and Young Children ........................... 1-28
Lower Anchorages and Top Tethers for
Children (LATCH System) .......................... 1-38
Older Children ............................................. 1-25
Securing a Child Restraint Designed for
the LATCH System ................................... 1-40
Securing a Child Restraint in a Rear
Seat Position ........................................... 1-40
Securing a Child Restraint in the Right
Front Seat Position ................................... 1-42
Top Strap ................................................... 1-35
Top Strap Anchor Location ............................ 1-37
Where to Put the Restraint ........................... 1-34
Chime Level Adjustment .................................. 3-99
Cigarette Lighter ............................................. 3-22
Cleaning
Aluminum Wheels ...................................... 5-101
Exterior Lamps/Lenses ................................ 5-100
Fabric/Carpet .............................................. 5-96
Cleaning (cont.)
Finish Care ............................................... 5-100
Glass Surfaces ............................................ 5-98
Instrument Panel ......................................... 5-98
Interior Plastic Components ........................... 5-98
Leather ...................................................... 5-98
Speaker Covers .......................................... 5-98
Tires ........................................................ 5-102
Underbody Maintenance ............................. 5-102
Vinyl .......................................................... 5-97
Washing Your Vehicle ................................... 5-99
Weatherstrips .............................................. 5-99
Windshield and Wiper Blades ...................... 5-101
Wood Panels .............................................. 5-98
Climate Control System
Dual Automatic ............................................ 3-23
Outlet Adjustment ........................................ 3-28
Clock ............................................................ 3-23
Comfort Guides, Rear Safety Belt ..................... 1-23
Content Theft-Deterrent .................................... 2-25
Control of a Vehicle .......................................... 4-5
Coolant
Engine Temperature Gage ............................ 3-38
Heater, Engine ............................................ 2-30
Surge Tank Pressure Cap ............................. 5-26
Cooling System .............................................. 5-29
Cruise Control Lever ....................................... 3-10
Cruise Control Light ........................................ 3-44
3
Cupholder(s) .................................................. 2-50
Customer Assistance Information
Courtesy Transportation .................................. 7-8
Customer Assistance for Text
Telephone (TTY) Users ............................... 7-4
Customer Assistance Offices ........................... 7-4
Customer Satisfaction Procedure ..................... 7-2
GM Mobility Reimbursement Program ............... 7-6
Reporting Safety Defects to General Motors .... 7-12
Reporting Safety Defects to the
Canadian Government .............................. 7-12
Reporting Safety Defects to the
United States Government ......................... 7-11
Roadside Service .......................................... 7-6
Service Publications Ordering Information ........ 7-12
D
Daytime Running Lamps .................................. 3-15
Defensive Driving ............................................. 4-2
Delayed Locking ............................................... 2-9
Doing Your Own Service Work ........................... 5-4
Dome Lamps ................................................. 3-18
Door
Delayed Locking ........................................... 2-9
Locks .......................................................... 2-8
Power Door Locks ......................................... 2-9
Programmable Automatic Door Locks ............. 2-10
Rear Door Security Locks ............................. 2-12
4
Driver
Position, Safety Belt ..................................... 1-13
Driver Information Center (DIC) ......................... 3-46
DIC Operation and Displays .......................... 3-47
DIC Vehicle Customization ............................ 3-60
DIC Warnings and Messages ........................ 3-50
Driving
At Night ..................................................... 4-29
City ........................................................... 4-33
Defensive ..................................................... 4-2
Drunken ....................................................... 4-2
Freeway ..................................................... 4-34
Hill and Mountain Roads .............................. 4-36
In Rain and on Wet Roads ........................... 4-30
Recovery Hooks .......................................... 4-43
Rocking Your Vehicle to Get it Out ................. 4-42
Winter ........................................................ 4-38
Dual Automatic Climate Control System ............. 3-23
DVD
Rear Seat Entertainment System ................... 3-80
E
Electrical System
Add-On Equipment .....................................
Center Instrument Panel Fuse Block .............
Fuses and Circuit Breakers .........................
Instrument Panel Fuse Block .......................
5-105
5-108
5-105
5-106
Electrical System (cont.)
Power Windows and Other Power Options .... 5-105
Underhood Fuse Block ............................... 5-109
Windshield Wiper Fuses ............................. 5-105
Engine
Air Cleaner/Filter ......................................... 5-18
Battery ....................................................... 5-40
Check and Service Engine Soon Light ............ 3-40
Coolant ...................................................... 5-23
Coolant Heater ............................................ 2-30
Coolant Temperature Gage ........................... 3-38
Engine Compartment Overview ...................... 5-12
Exhaust ..................................................... 2-37
Fan Noise .................................................. 5-34
Oil ............................................................. 5-13
Overheated Protection Operating Mode ........... 5-28
Overheating ................................................ 5-26
Starting ...................................................... 2-28
Entry/Exit Lighting ........................................... 3-18
Event Data Recorders (EDR) ............................ 7-10
Extender, Safety Belt ....................................... 1-24
Exterior Cargo Lamps ...................................... 3-17
Exterior Lamps ............................................... 3-13
F
Filter
Engine Air Cleaner ...................................... 5-18
Finish Damage ............................................. 5-102
Fixed Mast Antenna ........................................ 3-99
Flash-to-Pass ................................................... 3-9
Flat Tire ........................................................ 5-77
Flat Tire, Changing ......................................... 5-78
Flat Tire, Storing ............................................. 5-92
Fluid
Automatic Transmission ................................ 5-20
Power Steering ........................................... 5-35
Windshield Washer ...................................... 5-36
Fog Lamps .................................................... 3-16
Front Axle ...................................................... 5-47
Fuel ............................................................... 5-5
Additives ...................................................... 5-6
California Fuel .............................................. 5-6
Filling a Portable Fuel Container ..................... 5-9
Filling Your Tank ........................................... 5-8
Fuels in Foreign Countries .............................. 5-7
Gage ......................................................... 3-45
Gasoline Octane ........................................... 5-5
Gasoline Specifications .................................. 5-5
Low Warning Light ....................................... 3-45
Fuses
Center Instrument Panel Fuse Block ............. 5-108
Fuses and Circuit Breakers ......................... 5-105
Instrument Panel Fuse Block ....................... 5-106
Underhood Fuse Block ............................... 5-109
Windshield Wiper ....................................... 5-105
5
G
Gage
Engine Coolant Temperature ......................... 3-38
Fuel .......................................................... 3-45
Oil Pressure ............................................... 3-42
Speedometer .............................................. 3-31
Tachometer ................................................. 3-31
Transmission Temperature ............................. 3-39
Voltmeter Gage ........................................... 3-35
Garage Door Opener ....................................... 2-46
Gasoline
Octane ........................................................ 5-5
Specifications ............................................... 5-5
Glove Box ..................................................... 2-50
GM Mobility Reimbursement Program .................. 7-6
H
Hazard Warning Flashers ................................... 3-6
Head Restraints ............................................... 1-5
Headlamp
Aiming ....................................................... 5-48
Horizontal Aiming ......................................... 5-49
Vertical Aiming ............................................ 5-50
Headlamps .................................................... 5-53
Automatic Headlamp System ......................... 3-15
Bulb Replacement ....................................... 5-52
Daytime Running Lamps ............................... 3-15
Flash-to-Pass ............................................... 3-9
6
Headlamps (cont.)
Front Turn Signal, Sidemarker and Daytime
Running Lamps ........................................ 5-56
Halogen Bulbs ............................................ 5-52
High Intensity Discharge (HID) Lighting ........... 5-52
High/Low Beam Changer ................................ 3-9
On Reminder .............................................. 3-14
Heated Seats ................................................... 1-3
Heater ........................................................... 3-23
Highbeam On Light ......................................... 3-44
Highway Hypnosis ........................................... 4-36
Hill and Mountain Roads .................................. 4-36
HomeLink® Transmitter .................................... 2-46
HomeLink® Transmitter, Programming ................ 2-46
Hood
Checking Things Under ................................ 5-10
Release ..................................................... 5-10
Horn ............................................................... 3-6
How to Use This Manual ...................................... ii
How to Wear Safety Belts Properly ................... 1-13
I
Ignition Positions .............................................
Infants and Young Children, Restraints ...............
Inflation -- Tire Pressure ..................................
Instrument Panel
Brightness ..................................................
Cluster .......................................................
2-27
1-28
5-66
3-17
3-30
Instrument Panel (cont.)
Overview ..................................................... 3-4
Storage Area .............................................. 2-50
J
Jump Starting ................................................. 5-41
K
Keyless Entry System ....................................... 2-4
Keys ............................................................... 2-3
L
Labelling, Tire Sidewall ....................................
Lamps
Battery Run-Down Protection .........................
Dome ........................................................
Exterior ......................................................
Exterior Cargo .............................................
Fog ...........................................................
Reading .....................................................
LATCH System
Child Restraints ...........................................
Securing a Child Restraint Designed for
the LATCH System ...................................
Light
Airbag Readiness ........................................
Anti-Lock Brake System Warning ...................
5-61
3-19
3-18
3-13
3-17
3-16
3-18
1-38
1-40
Light (cont.)
Brake System Warning ................................. 3-35
Charging System ......................................... 3-34
Cruise Control ............................................. 3-44
Highbeam On ............................................. 3-44
Low Fuel Warning ....................................... 3-45
Low Tire Pressure Warning Light ................... 3-37
Malfunction Indicator .................................... 3-40
Passenger Airbag Status Indicator .................. 3-33
Safety Belt Reminder ................................... 3-31
Security ..................................................... 3-43
Tow/Haul Mode ........................................... 3-44
Traction Off ................................................ 3-38
Lighting
Entry/Exit ................................................... 3-18
Lockout Protection .......................................... 2-12
Locks
Delayed Locking ........................................... 2-9
Door ........................................................... 2-8
Lockout Protection ....................................... 2-12
Power Door .................................................. 2-9
Programmable Automatic Door Locks ............. 2-10
Rear Door Security Locks ............................. 2-12
Loss of Control ............................................... 4-15
Low Fuel Warning Light ................................... 3-45
Luggage Carrier .............................................. 2-51
Lumbar
Power Controls ............................................. 1-3
3-32
3-37
7
M
Maintenance Schedule
Additional Required Services ........................... 6-6
At Each Fuel Fill ........................................... 6-9
At Least Once a Month .................................. 6-9
At Least Once a Year .................................. 6-10
Introduction .................................................. 6-2
Maintenance Footnotes .................................. 6-7
Maintenance Record .................................... 6-15
Maintenance Requirements ............................. 6-2
Normal Maintenance Replacement Parts ......... 6-14
Owner Checks and Services ........................... 6-9
Recommended Fluids and Lubricants ............. 6-12
Scheduled Maintenance ................................. 6-4
Using Your ................................................... 6-3
Your Vehicle and the Environment ................... 6-2
Malfunction Indicator Light ................................ 3-40
Memory Seat ................................................. 2-69
Message
DIC Warnings and Messages ........................ 3-50
Midgate ......................................................... 2-13
Mirrors
Automatic Dimming Rearview with OnStar®,
Compass and Temperature Display ............. 2-39
Outside Automatic Dimming Mirror with
Curb View Assist ...................................... 2-43
Outside Convex Mirror ................................. 2-42
8
Mirrors (cont.)
Outside Heated Mirrors ................................ 2-43
Outside Power Mirrors .................................. 2-41
MyGMLink.com ................................................ 7-4
N
Navigation/Radio System .................................. 3-90
New Vehicle Break-In ...................................... 2-27
Normal Maintenance Replacement Parts ............ 6-14
O
Odometer ...................................................... 3-31
Off-Road Recovery .......................................... 4-13
Oil
Engine ....................................................... 5-13
Pressure Gage ............................................ 3-42
Older Children, Restraints ................................ 1-25
Online Owner Center ........................................ 7-4
OnStar® System ............................................. 2-44
Operating Your All-Wheel-Drive Vehicle
Off Paved Roads ......................................... 4-16
Other Warning Devices ...................................... 3-6
Outlet Adjustment ............................................ 3-28
Outside
Automatic Dimming Mirror with Curb View
Assist ..................................................... 2-43
Convex Mirror ............................................. 2-42
Heated Mirrors ............................................ 2-43
Power Mirrors ............................................. 2-41
Overheated Engine Protection Operating Mode ..... 5-28
Owner Checks and Services .............................. 6-9
Owners, Canadian ............................................... ii
P
Park Aid ........................................................ 3-19
Park (P)
Shifting Into ................................................ 2-35
Shifting Out of ............................................ 2-36
Parking
Assist ........................................................ 3-19
Brake ........................................................ 2-34
Over Things That Burn ................................. 2-37
Passenger Airbag Status Indicator ..................... 3-33
Passenger Sensing System .............................. 1-54
Passing ......................................................... 4-14
Passlock® ...................................................... 2-26
Power
Accessory Outlets ........................................ 3-22
Door Locks .................................................. 2-9
Electrical System ....................................... 5-105
Power (cont.)
Lumbar Controls ........................................... 1-3
Retained Accessory (RAP) ............................ 2-28
Seat ............................................................ 1-2
Steering Fluid ............................................. 5-35
Windows .................................................... 2-24
Programmable Automatic Door Locks ................. 2-10
Programming the HomeLink® Transmitter ........... 2-46
Q
Questions and Answers About Safety Belts ......... 1-12
R
Radios ..........................................................
Care of Your Cassette Tape Player ................
Care of Your CD and DVD Player ..................
Care of Your CD Player ...............................
Care of Your CDs and DVDs ........................
CD Changer ...............................................
Navigation/Radio System ..............................
Radio with Cassette and CD .........................
Rear Seat Audio ..........................................
Setting the Time ..........................................
Theft-Deterrent ............................................
Understanding Reception ..............................
3-66
3-97
3-99
3-98
3-98
3-92
3-90
3-67
3-91
3-66
3-95
3-97
9
Reading Lamps .............................................. 3-18
Rear Axle ...................................................... 5-46
Rear Door Security Locks ................................ 2-12
Rear Safety Belt Comfort Guides ...................... 1-23
Rear Seat Armrest .......................................... 2-52
Rear Seat Audio (RSA) .................................... 3-91
Rear Seat Entertainment System ....................... 3-80
Rear Seat Operation ......................................... 1-6
Rear Seat Passengers, Safety Belts .................. 1-20
Rearview Mirror, Automatic Dimming with OnStar®,
Compass and Temperature Display .................. 2-39
Reclining Seatbacks .......................................... 1-4
Recommended Fluids and Lubricants ................. 6-12
Recovery Hooks ............................................. 4-43
Recreational Vehicle Towing ............................. 4-50
Remote Keyless Entry System ............................ 2-4
Remote Keyless Entry System, Operation ............ 2-5
Removing the Flat Tire and Installing the
Spare Tire .................................................. 5-83
Removing the Spare Tire and Tools ................... 5-79
Replacement Bulbs ......................................... 5-58
Reporting Safety Defects
Canadian Government .................................. 7-12
General Motors ........................................... 7-12
United States Government ............................ 7-11
Restraint System Check
Checking Your Restraint Systems ................... 1-59
Replacing Restraint System Parts
After a Crash .......................................... 1-60
10
Restraint Systems
Checking .................................................... 1-59
Replacing Parts ........................................... 1-60
Retained Accessory Power (RAP) ...................... 2-28
Right Front Passenger Position, Safety Belts ...... 1-20
Road Sensing Suspension ................................. 4-8
Roadside
Service ........................................................ 7-6
Rocking Your Vehicle to Get it Out .................... 4-42
Running Your Engine While You Are Parked ....... 2-38
S
Safety Belt
Reminder Light ............................................ 3-31
Safety Belts
Care of ...................................................... 5-99
Driver Position ............................................ 1-13
How to Wear Safety Belts Properly ................ 1-13
Questions and Answers About Safety Belts ..... 1-12
Rear Safety Belt Comfort Guides for
Children and Small Adults ......................... 1-23
Rear Seat Passengers ................................. 1-20
Right Front Passenger Position ...................... 1-20
Safety Belt Extender .................................... 1-24
Safety Belt Use During Pregnancy ................. 1-20
Safety Belts Are for Everyone ......................... 1-8
Safety Warnings and Symbols .............................. iii
Scheduled Maintenance ..................................... 6-4
Seats
Head Restraints ............................................ 1-5
Heated Seats ............................................... 1-3
Memory ..................................................... 2-69
Power Lumbar .............................................. 1-3
Power Seats ................................................. 1-2
Rear Seat Operation ...................................... 1-6
Reclining Seatbacks ...................................... 1-4
Secondary Latch System ................................. 5-88
Securing a Child Restraint
Designed for the LATCH System ................... 1-40
Rear Seat Position ...................................... 1-40
Right Front Seat Position .............................. 1-42
Security Light ................................................. 3-43
Service ........................................................... 5-3
Adding Equipment to the Outside of
Your Vehicle .............................................. 5-5
Doing Your Own Work ................................... 5-4
Engine Soon Light ....................................... 3-40
Publications Ordering Information ................... 7-12
Servicing Your Airbag-Equipped Vehicle .............. 1-58
Setting the Time ............................................. 3-66
Sheet Metal Damage ..................................... 5-102
Shifting Into Park (P) ....................................... 2-35
Shifting Out of Park (P) ................................... 2-36
Signals, Turn and Lane-Change .......................... 3-8
Spare Tire ..................................................... 5-95
Installing .................................................... 5-83
Removing ................................................... 5-79
Storing ....................................................... 5-92
Specifications, Capacities ............................... 5-115
Speedometer .................................................. 3-31
Stabilitrak® System ........................................... 4-8
Starting Your Engine ....................................... 2-28
Steering ........................................................ 4-11
Steering Wheel Controls, Audio ......................... 3-96
Steering Wheel, Tilt Wheel ................................. 3-7
Storage Areas
All-Weather Cargo Area ................................ 2-63
Center Console Storage Area ........................ 2-50
Cupholder(s) ............................................... 2-50
Glove Box .................................................. 2-50
Instrument Panel Storage Area ...................... 2-50
Luggage Carrier .......................................... 2-51
Rear Seat Armrest ....................................... 2-52
Top-Box Storage .......................................... 2-68
Stuck in Sand, Mud, Ice or Snow ...................... 4-42
Sun Visors ..................................................... 2-24
Sunroof ......................................................... 2-68
11
T
Tachometer .................................................... 3-31
Tailgate ......................................................... 2-21
Taillamps ....................................................... 5-57
Theft-Deterrent, Radio ..................................... 3-95
Theft-Deterrent Systems ................................... 2-25
Content Theft-Deterrent ................................ 2-25
Passlock® ................................................... 2-26
Throttle, Adjustable .......................................... 2-29
Tilt Wheel ........................................................ 3-7
Tires ............................................................. 5-60
Aluminum Wheels, Cleaning ........................ 5-101
Buying New Tires ........................................ 5-72
Chains ....................................................... 5-76
Changing a Flat Tire .................................... 5-78
Cleaning ................................................... 5-102
If a Tire Goes Flat ....................................... 5-77
Inflation -- Tire Pressure ............................... 5-66
Inspection and Rotation ................................ 5-70
Installing the Spare Tire ................................ 5-83
Pressure Monitor System .............................. 5-68
Removing the Flat Tire ................................. 5-83
Removing the Spare Tire and Tools ............... 5-79
Secondary Latch System .............................. 5-88
Spare Tire .................................................. 5-95
Storing a Flat or Spare Tire and Tools ............ 5-92
12
Tires (cont.)
Tire Sidewall Labelling .................................. 5-61
Tire Terminology and Definitions .................... 5-64
Uniform Tire Quality Grading ......................... 5-73
Wheel Alignment and Tire Balance ................. 5-74
Wheel Replacement ..................................... 5-75
When It Is Time for New Tires ...................... 5-72
Top Strap ...................................................... 1-35
Top Strap Anchor Location ............................... 1-37
Top-Box Storage ............................................. 2-68
Tow/Haul Mode ............................................... 2-33
Tow/Haul Mode Light ....................................... 3-44
Towing
Recreational Vehicle ..................................... 4-50
Towing a Trailer .......................................... 4-51
Your Vehicle ............................................... 4-50
Traction
Off Light ..................................................... 3-38
Road Sensing Suspension .............................. 4-8
Stabilitrak® System ........................................ 4-8
Transmission
Fluid, Automatic ........................................... 5-20
Temperature Gage ....................................... 3-39
Transmission Operation, Automatic .................... 2-31
Turn and Lane-Change Signals .......................... 3-8
Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever ........................... 3-7
U
W
Ultrasonic Rear Parking Assist (URPA) ............... 3-19
Understanding Radio Reception ........................ 3-97
Uniform Tire Quality Grading ............................ 5-73
Warning Lights, Gages and Indicators ................ 3-29
Warnings
DIC Warnings and Messages ........................ 3-50
Hazard Warning Flashers ............................... 3-6
Other Warning Devices .................................. 3-6
Safety and Symbols ......................................... iii
Vehicle Damage .............................................. iv
Wheels
Alignment and Tire Balance .......................... 5-74
Replacement ............................................... 5-75
Where to Put the Restraint ............................... 1-34
Windows ....................................................... 2-23
Power ........................................................ 2-24
Windshield
Wiper Blades, Cleaning .............................. 5-101
Windshield Washer ......................................... 3-10
Fluid .......................................................... 5-36
Windshield Wiper
Blade Replacement ...................................... 5-59
Fuses ...................................................... 5-105
Windshield Wipers ......................................... 3-9
Winter Driving ................................................ 4-38
V
Vehicle
Control ........................................................ 4-5
Damage Warnings ........................................... iv
Symbols ......................................................... iv
Vehicle Customization, DIC .............................. 3-60
Vehicle Data Collection and Event Data
Recorders .................................................. 7-10
Vehicle Identification
Number (VIN) ............................................ 5-104
Service Parts Identification Label .................. 5-104
Vehicle Personalization
Memory Seat .............................................. 2-69
Ventilation Adjustment ...................................... 3-28
Visors ........................................................... 2-24
Voltmeter Gage .............................................. 3-35
13
X
Y
XM™ Satellite Radio Antenna System ................ 3-99
Your Vehicle and the Environment ....................... 6-2
14
Download PDF